JP2019076209A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet operation is performed, each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41. Then, due to operations of stop switches 42 to 44, the corresponding reels are stopped and stop outcome symbols corresponding to a lottery result can be stopped. Further, on the basis of the lottery result, there may be performed a shift lottery or the like to an advantageous section such as an attack mode in which a pressing order notification of a pressing order bell or a pressing order replay can be made. In the advantageous section, a lottery for an addition may in some case be performed. A notification timing of the lottery for the addition is determined depending on a number of times of generations of the addition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as gaming media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and it is stopped while the reel is rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the stop result of the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is provided (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machine illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
Specific determination means capable of performing specific determination of whether or not to execute a specific event that is advantageous for the player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
An event execution unit that executes the specific event based on the determination result by the specific determination unit being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event;
A specific notification execution unit capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event or the execution of the specific event by the specific notification unit;
A number grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is
First notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
Second notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing later than the first timing;
Selection means for selecting notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number acquisition means;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 16 is a front view of the slot machine in the embodiment. It is a perspective view of a slot machine showing the state where a front door was closed. It is a perspective view of a slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal gaming states. It is a flow chart which shows reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. It is a flowchart which shows a bonus state process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory view showing a transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of a display mode. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st identification combination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd identification combination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd identification combination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for mode change information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of pushing order alerting | reporting production performed by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flow chart which shows pushing order processing processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows game number management processing. It is a flow chart which shows end judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specialization zones. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process by the display control apparatus by the side of a sub. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flow chart which shows start effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification of pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of an additional production. It is a figure which shows an example of a alerting | reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between alerting | reporting timing and an additional production. It is a flowchart which shows all the stop time production | presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific part alerting | reporting. It is a flow chart which shows continuation production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the transfer lottery probability of a display mode, and a setting difference. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of an instruction | indication monitor and a zone display. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of a zone display. It is a flowchart which shows area display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game of an advantageous area, the completion game, and the display of an area indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the kind of advantageous area, and the display mode of an area | region indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the display start aspect table of a zone display in the modification 1. FIG. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a process for specific state. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of the area indicator for specific states. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of a zone display in modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows a part of reel control processing, (b) is a flowchart which shows area display 3rd processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between the type of the advantageous section and the display start timing of the section indicator. In modification 4, it is a timing chart for explaining the relation between the kind of advantageous section, and the display start timing of a section indicator. In the modification 5, it is a timing chart for explaining the relation between the kind of advantageous section, and the display start timing of a section indicator. FIG. 55 is a front view of the slot machine in the sixth modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of a zone display. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start aspect table of a zone display in modification 7. FIG. In the modification 8, (a) is a figure which shows a part of lottery table for a normal gaming state and a 1st RT state, (b) is a flowchart which shows a start waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the display start timing of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 1st process in the modification 9. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the display end aspect table of a zone display. It is a flowchart which shows area display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a flowchart which shows a bonus state process. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 4th processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special RT state, an instruction | indication monitor, and a zone display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the prize modes of the various re-gaming results for special RT state, and the main stop point. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is a flow chart which shows pushing order processing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification of pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process for special RTs. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the alerting | reporting content at the time of special replay, and an instruction | indication monitor, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the stop appearance eyes at the time of special replay and the kind of advantageous section. It is. It is a figure in a modification 1 showing an example of a lottery table for special RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a notice at the time of a specific part combination winning, and a position where it is pushed. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process for special RTs. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a notice at the time of special replay winning, and the position where it is pushed. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific part notification in the modification 2. FIG. (A) is a flowchart which shows the process for notification cancellation | release, (b) is a figure for demonstrating an example of a cancellation | release table. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process for special RTs. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the specific part in special RT, and the alerting | reporting content at the time of special replay. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the winning combination and the RT state of the transition destination in the third modification. It is a flowchart which shows special RT state processing. FIG. 21 is a diagram for describing the relationship between a winning combination and an RT state of a transition destination in a fourth modification example. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode and a benefit given in a fifth modification. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a flowchart which shows special RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the prize modes of the various re-gaming results for special RT state, and the main stop point. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is a flowchart which shows the special RT command reception process by a display control apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating an alerting | reporting scenario table. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process for special RTs. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the special replay winning by a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific part process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows area display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number management process of remaining games. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of games of an advantageous section. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-games addition lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-additions game lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of a number-of-additions game lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the game number addition process. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special alerting | reporting lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of an additional production. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special information setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special alerting kind table. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of games of an advantageous section, and special alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the various mode lottery process in the modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize result corresponding | compatible process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special alerting | reporting lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special information setting processing. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special alerting kind table. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games addition lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the number-of-additions game lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a superimposition command. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd special alerting lottery table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd special alert type table. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a process of setting an additional command in the modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd special alerting | reporting lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process in the modification 4. FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a section display second process according to Modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 4th special notification lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of an attack mode end production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the 4th special notification lottery table in modification 6, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the 4th special notification lottery table in modification 7. [FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification type table 1 and a fourth special notification type table 2 in a modification 8; It is a flowchart which shows the area display 2nd process in the modification 9. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the various areas in RAM of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows data initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special area setting process. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a special area table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order alerting | reporting lottery table at the time of special replay winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal gaming states. (A) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games management processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pressing order processing. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process for special replays. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a precursor game number table in the modification 10; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process of adding the number of games in a modification 11; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd special information setting processing in modification 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. FIG. 33 is a diagram for describing the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display in Modification 13. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of an additional production. It is a flowchart which shows an after-sales performance setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special information setting processing. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a pseudo added game number lottery process in a modification 14; FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the number table of pseudo | simulation top games for a setting value suggestion, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of games of pseudo top, and suggestion content. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific part process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd identification combination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for specialization zone transfer lottery. It is a flow chart which shows processing for mode change information. It is a flow chart which shows pushing order processing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of an additional production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a lottery result and an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process for specialization zones. It is a figure which shows an example of a superimposition alerting | reporting timing table. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of specialization zone end production. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a post-zone in-zone post-lottery process according to Modification 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the special top notification information table. In the modification 2, (a) is a flowchart which shows the in-zone post-loading lottery process, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of various addition alerting | reporting timing tables. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a post-zone in-zone post-lottery process according to Modification 3; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the superimposition alerting | reporting table in the modification 3-the modification 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the additional production in the modification 6. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of an attack mode end production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process for portable terminal in the modification 7. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an attack mode completion presentation in the modification 8. FIG. In 6th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of an additional production. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st stop ON time production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional notification at the time of all the stops. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an after-load effect. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st stop ON time production setting processing in modification 1. In the modification 2, (a) is a flowchart showing effect setting processing at the time of normal replay, and (b) is a flowchart showing processing for a selected counter. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st stop ON time production setting processing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a process for reporting when all the vehicles are stopped according to Modification 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for correction. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part.

First Embodiment
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS An embodiment of the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the case 11.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 is provided with a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with the front open as a whole, and is attached by striking a nail or the like to a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. Then, in a state where the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the respective bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 is rotated about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by pivoting of the front door 12. In addition, the front door 12 is in a locked state that can not be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper end on the right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed in the game panel 25 horizontally, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be integrated into one and used as a common display window.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R which are respectively formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the central axis thereof is the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in a one-to-one manner. . Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surface of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is projected as if it were moving from the top to the bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

  The respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected to the stepping motor, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving the respective stepping motors. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of 504 pulses, for example, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. It is controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has made one rotation are installed on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when it is detected from the reel index sensor that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is outputted to the main control device 101 described later each time the detection is made. For this reason, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R every rotation on the basis of the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the direction of the long side (surrounding direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. For this reason, in order to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output an excitation pulse of 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols). Further, main control apparatus 101 recognizes the symbols in a visible state from display windows 26L, 26M, 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, or the display window Control can be performed to stop a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26 L, 26 M, 26 R.

  Next, the symbols drawn on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Moreover, although the number is attached | subjected to 0-20 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, these symbols become a state in which the main control apparatus 101 can be visually recognized from display window 26L, 26M, 26R. , And are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the following description will be made using the corresponding numbers.

  As a symbol, "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th of left reel 32L), "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of left reel 32L), "first replay" symbol (for example, 19 of left reel 32L) Th), "second replay" symbol (for example, sixth of left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (for example, tenth of left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (for example, eighth of left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (for example, 4th of left reel 32L), "black BAR" symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), "white BAR" symbol (for example, 17th of left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are eleven types of symbols (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L) and "youth" symbols (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). And as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement | positioning order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed such that among the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, there are three symbols that allow the entire symbol to be visible. Therefore, in the state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified using a combination of three symbols, one for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, among the symbols that can be visually identified. As described above, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized, and as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. Combination of each symbol which stops in line L1, combination of each symbol which stops in middle line L2 which tied the middle step design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, it connects the lower pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R There is a combination of each symbol which stops in the lower line L3. In addition, the upper symbol of left reel 32L, the middle step symbol of middle reel 32M, the combination of each symbol which stops on the downward right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of right reel 32R, the lower step symbol of left reel 32L, the middle step of middle reel 32M There is a combination of each symbol which stops on a line L5 rising to the upper right of the symbol and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of the symbols stopped at the bending line L6 connecting the upper stage symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle step symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle step symbol of the right reel 32R. The above-mentioned lines L1 to L5 are lines which become straight lines when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which bending occurs in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. In addition, as combination of each pattern which stops to the line which bending generate | occur | produces, although it exists in addition to bending line L6, description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  Of these lines L1 to L6, a line activated and a line not activated are set according to the bet number of medals, and when the symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line As a winning establishment, a bonus is given, in which a predetermined number of medals serving as a game medium is paid out, or a bonus in which the gaming state is shifted is given. On the other hand, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the winning is not established, and the above-mentioned benefit is not given.

  In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8A, only the lower right line L4 is regarded as an effective line, and as shown in FIG. 8B, the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are two lines. There are a case where the combination line is made effective and a case where only the bending line L6 is made effective as shown in FIG. 8 (c). More specifically, when 3 medals are bet and the game is started, only the lower right down line L4 is regarded as an effective line, and when 2 medals are bet and the game is started, The line L3 and the lower right line L4 are regarded as effective lines. In addition, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2 and the upper right line L5 are not considered as effective lines. In the following, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is started, a two-bet game, a game started with one medal bet Also known as a 1-bet game.

  FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won and the benefit given when the symbol is won.

  As a small winning combination in which medals are paid out, there are a first small winning combination to a 32nd small winning combination.

  The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R are on the effective line When it stops, it becomes the first small winning combination. When the first small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and fifteen medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 2nd to 26th small winning combinations have different winning combinations, but in a 3-bet game, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, "White BAR" symbol, "Young" symbol, "White bell" symbol, right reel 32R The "red 7" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "white BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R stops at the lower If you do, it will be the eighth small winning combination. As shown in FIG. 6, in the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol is disposed at the "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and the adjacent position (No. 12) on the upstream side, and in the right reel 32R. The "Red Bell" symbol is arranged at a position (No. 20) one symbol away from the "White BAR" symbol (No. 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the eighth small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right symbol The "red bell" symbol of the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The twenty-seventh small part is a part determined as a predetermined reel among the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R whether or not winning is determined by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L. Specifically, "cherry" of the left reel 32L The twenty-seventh small winning combination is established by the symbol stopping at the upper or lower end. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L goes up or stops, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is on the effective line The 27th small winning combination is established by stopping. When the twenty-seventh small winning combination is won, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and fifteen medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower end, and the “cherry” symbol may be aligned on the downward right line L4 and stopped. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and a right reel 32R a "cherry" symbol, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped, the twenty-eighth small winning combination is won. When the twenty-ninth small winning combination is won, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The supplementary explanation of the relationship between the twenty-seventh small part and the twenty-eighth small part, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped Although the twenty-seventh small winning combination is realized, the twenty-eighth small winning combination may be established instead of the twenty-seventh small winning combination depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode for the 27th small winning combination includes the winning mode for the 28th low winning combination, the 27th small winning combination and the 28th low winning combination are clearly distinguished and the winning determination is made. Is done.

  The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. That is, when the downward right line L4 is made an effective line, the “watermelon” symbol is aligned downward to the right and stopped, whereby the twenty-ninth small winning combination is established. When the twenty-ninth small winning combination is won, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" design of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" design of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" design of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 30th small It will be a winning combination. When the 30th small winning combination is won, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  "Black BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" of left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol of middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol of right reel 32R or "white If the “Bell” symbol is stopped on the effective line, the 31st prize will be won. When the 31st small winning combination is won, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and fifteen medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  In the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination, 3 medals are paid out when a 3-bet game is established, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2 bet game.

  In the 36th small winning combination, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L, for example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the “watermelon” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The "watermelon" symbol of the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol of the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. When the 36th small winning combination is won, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  "Rel bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of left reel 32L, "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "cherry" symbol of middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol of right reel 32R, "white bell" symbol If the “Bell” symbol and the “Youth” symbol are stopped on the effective line, the 37th prize will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol is disposed at the "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and the downstream adjacent position (No. 6), and the main "white" symbol is The "first replay" symbol is arranged at the bell "symbol (the third, the twelfth, the fifteenth and the twenty) and the downstream adjacent position (the second, the eleventh, the fourteenth and the nineteenth). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2, 5, 12, and 20) and the upstream adjacent positions (3, 6, 6, 16, and 0) The "replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is disposed, and the "first replay" symbol is disposed at the "white bell" symbol (No. 10) and the adjacent position (No. 11) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th small winning combination is established on the down-right line L4, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are mainly used for templating while the middle reel 32M It becomes the stop point of so-called double-tenpai-off that the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop. When the 37th small winning combination is won, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  "White BAR" symbol of left reel 32L, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol, "red bell" symbol of middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol of right reel 32R, When the “watermelon” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol are stopped on the effective line, the 38th small winning combination is won. If the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 4th "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper stage to the lower stage in the 3-bet game, the 38th small winning combination, the left The "red bell" symbol of the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. When the 38th small winning combination is won, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 39th small winning combination. Although the details will be described later, the 39th small winning combination is a winning manner established only in the 3-bet game. When the 39th small winning combination is won, nine medals are paid out.

  When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 40th prize winning combination. Although the details will be described later, the forty-fifth small winning combination is a winning manner established only in the 3-bet game. When the forty-fifth small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out.

  If the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol or “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small It will be a winning combination. When the 41st small winning combination is won, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The first to eighth game wins are prizes to which the benefit of the re-play that allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal is awarded. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-gaming win is established, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The first to eighth re-game winnings are winning modes established only in the 3-bet game.

  The state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

  When the "red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, it becomes the first BB prize, and the "white BAR" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line In the second BB. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol of middle reel 32M, "watermelon" symbol of right reel 32R, "first replay" symbol, "black BAR" When the symbol and stop on the effective line, it will be a CB prize. When the CB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stopping point at which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, the "white bell" symbol, and the "inner bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol, the "youth" symbol, the "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R. The game state shifts to the first RT state also when the "red 7" symbol and the "second replay" symbol are stopped on the activated line. Hereinafter, the combination of the above-mentioned respective symbols will be referred to as a transition.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The respective stop switches 42 to 44 are respectively disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

  Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected. Then, the main control device 101 recognizes that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, detection signals of LOW signals are outputted from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal switches from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 recognizes the switching of the signal and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

  That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop variable display of symbols based on rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. In addition, focusing on the point that the medal insertion slot 45 involves an operation of inserting the medal directly by the player, it can be said to constitute direct input means for directly inputting a game medium.

  A medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 provided on the back of the front door 12 as passage switching means. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited, the medal is switched Are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal led to the storage passage 47 is led to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to the medal receiver 50 and returned to the player.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals, and a payout device 53 for dispensing medals to a player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48 a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating the medal payout rotary plate (not shown) and discharges the medal to the medal receiver 50 via the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent the medals of a predetermined amount or more from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guiding plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

  Below the medal insertion slot 45, a button-shaped return switch 55 is provided. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medal jammed in the selector 46 is a medal It is returned from the discharge port 49.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as gaming media at one time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves an operation of inserting a medal directly by the player, each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 involves only an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. For example, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

  Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 operated at the time of effect generation is provided. That is, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right of the effect switch 66. There is.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing the surplus insertion medals and the payout medals at the time of winning as the predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the situation where it is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as a real medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display unit 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals and a remaining payout number for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are respectively provided. These display units 60 to 62 are constituted by 7-segment displays, but it is of course possible to substitute them by liquid crystal displays or the like.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and announcing the operation order There is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the winning ratio of the small winning combination is changed and the game can be progressed in the advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

  In the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 which lights and blinks with the progress of the game, and a pair of right and left which sound various sound effects and inform the player of the game state with the progress of the game The speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects with the progress of the game, and in the present embodiment, since the game by the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be by the main display unit It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided.

  A power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the hole manager or the like inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and performs an ON operation, whereby the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set. The reset switch 72 is operated not only to reset the error state but also to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that centrally manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagrams of FIG. 12 and FIG.

  In the main control device 101, a microcomputer having a CPU 102 as an arithmetic processing unit is mounted. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104 and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main base incorporated in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor for individually detecting that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor for detecting the operation of the start lever 41 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals paid out from the hopper device 51 The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit injection detection sensor 57a individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, the third credit Detect the operation of the on / off switch 58 individually 3) The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON when the credit insertion detection sensor 58a, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects the signal are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 through the input / output port 104.

  Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power-off state and generates a power failure signal at the time of power-off by the power switch 71 as well as at the time of power-off. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power is shut off when the drive voltage is reduced to, for example, less than 10 volts. And a power failure signal is output. A power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes a power failure process described later by recognizing this power failure signal. Further, the power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage decreases to less than 10 volts. As a time when the stabilized voltage is output, a time sufficient for the main control apparatus 101 to execute the power failure process is secured.

  The reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on the output side of the main control device 101, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit An external concentrated terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting information to the display unit 60, the remaining number display unit 61, the number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the display control device 81, a hole management device (not shown), etc. Is connected.

  The above-described CPU 102 has a ROM 105 storing various control programs to be executed by the CPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 105 is executed. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the clock, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as timer circuits and data transmission / reception circuits as well as interrupt circuits as well known, although not shown, a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. The various counters of are incorporated. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage unit, and a program for executing various processing is stored in the above-described ROM 105 as a part of a control program.

  The RAM 106 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power of the slot machine 10 is shut off and to hold (back up) data. The RAM 106 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when performing stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the state information storage area 106c for storing the gaming state such as the BB state, a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut off (including the power shut off by the operation of the power switch 71. The same applies to the following) when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71. The same applies to the following), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information of the backup area. . The writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut down by the power failure process (see FIG. 14), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  Further, a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is shut off, NMI interrupt processing as power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is mounted with a microcomputer having a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs to be executed by the CPU 181 and fixed value data, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 for securing is incorporated.

  The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main control device 101, drive control of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 which is a main base that centrally manages the game. That is, by providing sub-bases for sounds, lamps, and displays regarding indirect game play, the burden on the main base is reduced.

  On the input side of the display control device 81, a rendering switch 66 (more specifically, a rendering switch detection sensor that detects an operation of the rendering switch 66) is connected. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be drive-controlled by the display control device 81.

  Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing activated upon power-on, timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 1.49 msec), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process activated in response to the input of. Among these processes, the process related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process periodically executed by the main control apparatus 101. The CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

  First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

  Here, the outline of the power failure process will be described.

  When the power is shut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing, and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to complete the transmission of the command. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port at the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not is calculated when the power failure is eliminated, and is stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in preparation for the fact that the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. In addition, for example, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted and the power failure flag is reset to return to the timer interrupt processing. If the output of the power failure signal is continued, it enters an infinite loop as it is. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the processing shifts to the main processing.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

  That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clear processing is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, in order to rotate each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive a stepping motor which is a respective spinning drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as stop detection sensors 42a to 44a connected to the input / output port 104, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and payout detection sensor 51a are read, and the read result is normal or not. Perform a sensor monitoring process to monitor In step S108, timer operation processing is performed to reduce the values of the counters and timers. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the result of counting the bet number of medals and the payout number to the external concentrated terminal board 121.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout amount display unit 61, and the payout amount display unit 62, respectively. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62 to perform segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102, respectively. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and the series of timer interrupt processes are ended.

  Next, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S201, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in step S203 to step S215 is performed.

  As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any re-game winning is established in the previous game. If one of the re-game winnings has been established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting virtual medals the same number as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, processing is performed to automatically insert three virtual medals when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, and one virtual is played when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game Perform processing to automatically insert medals. By the way, in the present embodiment, the re-game winning is not established in the 2 bet game, but even in the 2- bet game, if it is modified so as to establish the re-playing winning, two sheets in the automatic insertion processing It is good to set the virtual medal of to be able to be inserted automatically.

  In the automatic insertion process, the virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, when any re-game winning combination is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting the medals. If any re-game winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading process performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is put in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals I do.

  After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal input or the credit input switch 56 to 58 is operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If any one of the bet numbers is determined, the medal insertion process is performed to change the bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

  After completion of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bet on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB) “1” and “3” are set as the specified numbers in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on condition that the bet number is "2", and in the other states, the bet number is "1" or "3". In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in the gaming state other than the CB state, when the medal is not bet or when the bet number is “2” even if the bet is made, the negative determination is made in step S205. When the bet number has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality check process is performed among the processes.

  If the bet number has reached the specified number, the process for notifying mode transition is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S206, the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side includes the bet command including the information of the process result of step S206 and the information of the bet number that is positively determined in step S205. Set as output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

  After the process of step S207 is performed, it is determined in step S208 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. When the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality check process is performed among the processes.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started to be started. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, an effective line setting process of setting the combination line corresponding to the bet number as an effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are set as effective lines. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excitation state to prohibit the bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

  Next, the lottery process of step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, a random number to be used when performing a pass / fail determination of the winning combination is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates a random number of 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, the random number can be acquired promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for performing a pass / fail determination of the winning combination is selected. In the slot machine 10, there are six types of gaming states, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, as gaming states. Each is set for the gaming state.

  More specifically, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the gaming state is selected. . For example, when the bet number is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state lottery table is displayed. select. Further, in the slot machine 10, there are prepared in six stages the winning probability from "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and perform a predetermined operation. Thus, it is possible to set which internal process is to be executed based on which of the winning probabilities. In step S302, the lottery table with the lowest expectation value of medal payout is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table with the highest expectation value of medal payout is selected when "setting 6".

  Here, supplementary description will be given of the process related to the setting of the winning probability.

  The setting process of the winning probability is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, in the process of setting the winning probability, when the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted in the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON, the power is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated, for example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, “setting 1” → “setting 2” → Update the setting value so that “setting 3” → “setting 4” → “setting 5” → “setting 6” → “setting 1”. Each set value is displayed, for example, by the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated each time the set value is updated. Then, based on the fact that the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF, the setting value at that time is set as the setting value of this time, and the setting processing of the winning probability is ended. The display of the credit display unit 60 is also ended based on the end of the setting process of the winning probability. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is activated. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting value.

  The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state which is selected in the normal gaming state of “setting 3”. In the lottery table, index values IV are set, and in each index value IV, a winning combination is uniquely associated and a point value PV is set.

  After the lottery table is selected, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and in the subsequent step S304, a determination value DV to be used when determining whether or not the winning combination is made is set. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1 which is the current index value IV is added to the random number value to obtain a new value. The judgment value is set to DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. It is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535 in the success or failure determination of the winning combination. If it exceeds 65,535, it is determined in step S306 whether any one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV = 32 to 48) including any of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting the corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in step S307 in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed. If the negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing of step S307, the winning flag of each small winning combination according to the index value IV affirmed determined in step S305 in step S308, the winning flag storage area Execute processing set in 106a. For example, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small winning combination flag, the 33rd small winning combination flag, the third winning combination flag in step S308 Set the 35 minor winning flag. When the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

  By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a is selected. The set winning flag is reset after the end of the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set (see S203 of the normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning is achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be validated over a plurality of games.

  In steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB, second BB, or CB is won, the corresponding win flag is set. If no winning combination other than 2nd BB, CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

  That is, for example, in a state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small winning combination flag , 33rd small winning combination flag, 35th small winning combination flag is set. Further, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33 in a state in which the first BB winning flag is carried over, the second BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small winning combination flag, the 33rd The small winning combination flag and the 35th small winning combination flag are set.

  In addition, the lottery table in the state of carrying over the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is separately prepared, and in the state of carrying over the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. May be configured to In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and the point value PV may be set so as not to win the first BB, the second BB, and the CB.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the player has deviated from the role corresponding to the index value IV. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and it is determined in step S310 whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is an object to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by one has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether the determination is yes or no, the process returns to step S304, and the determination of the combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used to determine the success or failure of the previous combination to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S305, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been made based on the determination value DV. By the way, when it is judged whether or not the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning in normal replay (probability of winning in the case of IV = 1) is about 1 / 7.3, strong cherry The probability of winning a prize (probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. is there. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218 minutes 1. The probability of winning on chance A (probability of winning at IV = 17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning on chance B (probability of winning at IV = 18) is about 252 It is a fraction. The probability of winning in the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/3200, and the probability of winning unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65,500 minutes It is 1. The probability of winning in the first push bell 1, the first push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 21 to 24) is about 1 in 43.7, and the middle push bell The probability of winning on 1, the middle pressing bell 2, the right pressing bell 1, and the right pressing bell 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 25 to 28) is about 21.8 times each. The probability of winning in strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/1770 and the probability of winning strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is About 1 in 4680, probability of winning in weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning in case of IV = 34) is about 1 in 3280, probability of winning in weak cherry overlap 2 (in case of IV = 35) The probability of winning is about 1655th. The probability of winning in strong watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/280, and the probability of winning strong watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is About 165550. The probability of winning in weak watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1 / 13,100, and the probability of winning in weak watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is About 165550. The probability of winning in the chance A duplication 1, chance A duplication 2, chance B duplication 1 and chance B duplication 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 40 to 43) is about 1/3280. The probability of winning in middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 44, 45) is about 1/260 in each case. The probability of being independently elected to the first BB and the second BB (probability of being elected at IV = 46, 47) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning a CB (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing without winning any of the roles is about 1.96.

  In the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, 49 to 52. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, these index values IV are not won.

  After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination object to be determined as a result of the determination, it means that the determination of the result of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to perform freeze effect for disabling the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

  In the subsequent step S312, a lottery result handling process is performed. In the lottery result handling processing, processing of whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the result of the lottery in step S301 to step S311, processing for notification of pushing order, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

  After the process of step S312 is executed, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the success or failure determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

  Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when the strong cherry is won (selected when IV = 13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th, 32nd and 35th small winning combinations are each reel 32L. , 32M, 32R are set so that the stop symbol information can be stopped. Also, if the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (selected when IV = 32) and the strong cherry win flag and the first BB win flag are set, the 28th, 33rd, 35th and 35th prizes Stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority order is executed. For example, in the case where a plurality of winning combinations of the small winning combination, the replay, and the bonus combination are won, the priorities shown below are set. When the small winning combination and the bonus are won, priority is set such that the bonus winning combination is established when the small winning combination can not be established such that the small winning combination is established preferentially. When the player has won the re-game and the bonus, the priority is set such that the re-game winning is established with priority.

  For example, when the winning cherry duplicate 1 is won and the setting of the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, 35th and 1st BB winnings is performed, the 28th is more than the 1st BB winning. Priorities are set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination will be established with priority. Also, for example, when the first BB win is carried over and the normal replay wins and the setting of the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB win and the first replay win is performed, the first BB win is selected. (1) Set priority so that priority is given to reappearance winnings.

  After the process of step S315 is performed, the section display first process is performed in step S316, and then the lottery process is ended. The section display first process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such process will be described in detail later.

  Next, the reel control process of step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing effects using reel control during the ineffective period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, rotation start processing for starting rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

  In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel starts rotating in the previous game, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed Wait until you do. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in stepping motor control processing (step S106) of timer interrupt processing, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotation. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start to rotate immediately. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process is ended. In addition, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. To the player etc.

  Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. When none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. Do. If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated and the stop instruction is generated. When the stop instruction command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol which has reached the base position (in the present embodiment, the lower part) is confirmed at the timing when the stop switch is operated. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the base position is confirmed by the excitation pulse number output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated To stop after sliding 1 reel of reels, stop after stopping by sliding 2 reels, stopping after sliding 3 stops, and stopping after sliding 4 reels Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, including stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, one of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined. At step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If it is equal, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed at step S410. Do. Thereafter, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

  Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop point of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the winning is made in the case of IV = 24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switch 42 to 44 that has generated the stop command A stop information second setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning pattern established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set such that the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination or the ninth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. The stop information is set so that the first small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second small winning combination, the seventh small when the right stop switch 44 is first operated. Stop information is set so that a winning combination or a ninth small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set as described above, there are cases where the corresponding winning is not achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by up to four symbols in the gaming state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal gaming mode It can be stopped, and only the lower right line L4 is set as a valid line. For this reason, when the interval between similar symbols is arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective when it becomes the winning symbol regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. It can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 or more symbols, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 by aiming the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

  An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, stop control of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination.

  The second small symbol in the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Moreover, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a seventh small symbol, and also have a function as a ninth small symbol. In the left reel 32L, the second small combination symbols (the seventh small combination symbols, the ninth small combination) are arranged so that the interval between them is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in Fig. 20A, the seventh "red bell" The symbol stops in the upper row. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4.

  The second small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, a "white BAR" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small symbol of the middle reel 32M is "red 7". On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol or the ninth small symbol may be stopped on the effective line, or the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol and None of the ninth small winning hand symbols will stop on the effective line.

  Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the 13th "first replay" symbols to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "White BAR" symbol stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward right line L4. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the "second replay" symbols of the ninth to the thirteenth "first replay" symbols reaches the lower stage. , The seventh small role symbol "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing at which any of the "white bell" symbol No. 6 to 10 "young man" symbol reaches the lower part, the "Cherry" symbol, the ninth small part symbol, is in the middle. To stop. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol and the ninth small symbol are displayed even if the middle reel 32M is slipped for four symbols and then stopped. You can not stop it in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at this timing, the second "LUCKY" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle.

  When the seventh small combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the seventh small combination winning can be established.

  The seventh small symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white bell" symbol is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small symbol stops or does not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any one of the "first replay" symbols No. 6 to 10 "white bell" symbols reaches the lower part, as shown in FIG. 20 (c). As shown in, the "small white bell" symbol, which is the seventh small part symbol, stops at the bottom. As a result, the seventh small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the third "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), the fourth "watermelon" symbol is Stop at the bottom. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol from the left is the transition eye as shown in FIG.

  When the ninth small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the ninth small winning combination can be established.

  The ninth small combination symbol of the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "youth" symbol is arranged at the 15th position. Therefore, the ninth small combination symbol stops or does not stop on the effective line depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which any one of the "first replay" symbols of No. 11 and the "youth" symbols of No. 15 has reached the lower part, the ninth small symbol symbol is dull The "Youth" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition item as shown in FIG.

  If the second small combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small combination winning can be established.

  The second small combination symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small bonus symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small combination symbol "Tall" White BAR 'symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition point as shown in FIG.

  When the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol and the ninth small symbol of the middle reel 32M did not stop in the middle, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stopped in the middle In the case of the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage.

  The "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged on the right reel 32R such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of “white bell” symbol (“red bell” symbol), “LUCKY” symbol (“white bell” symbol), “watermelon” symbol (“first replay” symbol) is shifted as shown in FIG. It is an eye.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established, and the seventh small winning combination The case where the winning is established, the case where the ninth small winning combination is established, or the case where the transition outcome is stopped, or the like.

  Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

  On the middle reel 32M, the "small red bell" symbol, which is the first small combination symbol, is arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle regardless of the operation timing.

  On the left reel 32L, the first small symbol "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol are arranged such that the distance between the first small symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the right reel 32R, the first small symbol "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol are arranged such that the distance between the first small symbols is four or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated to the third position, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

  When the push order bell is won, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined one or two operation order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination winning will be established or the transition point on the active line will be stopped by the operation timing. Incidentally, when the middle bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and the operation timing, and when the bell is won regardless of the operation order and the operation timing, 1Small character winning combination is established.

  Returning to the description of the reel control processing, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the payout determination processing is performed in step S413. The payout determination processing is processing for setting the number of medals to be paid out under the condition that a combination of winning symbols is arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stop symbols stopped at the lower part of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a winning is realized on the effective line judge. If the winning is achieved, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination is associated with the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, when the winning combination is not matched with the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  After the payout determination process, in step S414, a winning result corresponding process is performed. In the winning result corresponding processing, processing etc. to shift the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described in detail later.

  After the winning result corresponding process is performed, the section display second process is executed in step S415. The section display second process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S416, a winning result command is set to make the display control device 81 recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is ended.

  Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

  In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that the small winning combination has not been established. In such a case, it is determined based on the winning combination determined in the payout determination process whether or not one of the first to eighth replays has been established. If any re-game winning is not established, the medal payout processing is ended as it is, and if any re-playing winning is established, the re-play setting processing for changing the gaming state to the re-playing state is performed. , Finish the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. With regard to the payout of medals, specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition Display on the credit display unit 60. Also, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during addition of the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to discharge medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal receiver 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of remaining payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number-of-payouts display portion 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, the RT state process of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether the transition point has stopped on the valid line. If the transition outcome has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Thereafter, the process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay win is performed based on the winning establishment combination set in the previous payout determination process. It is determined whether or not it has been established. When the second replay winning combination is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Thereafter, the process ends. If the transition to the active line is stopped under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and the process ends.

  When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery processing, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the setting of the first RT setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the first RT state lottery table is selected. Do.

  FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. When the first RT state lottery table is compared with the normal gaming state lottery table (see FIG. 17), the point values PV of IV = 1 to 5 are different, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV Is set. For this reason, in the case of judging the winning or not of the winning combination using the lottery table, the probability of winning at IV = 6 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and it is won at IV = 1. The probability of becoming is approximately 1 / 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 32.8. The odds of not winning any of the roles is about 1.94.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22, when the player wins when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and when the player wins when IV = 2, the first promoted replay 1 wins, and the IV The first promotion Replay 2 is won if it is won in the case of = 3, and the first promotion Replay 3 is won if it is elected in the case of IV = 4 and it is won in the case of IV = 5 If so, the first promotion replay 4 is won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal gaming state is also about 7.30. That is, when the gaming state is shifted to the first RT state, the winning combination of the small winning combination, the re-playing, and the bonus is won with the same probability as the normal gaming state, while the re-playing bonus is awarded. Changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first replaying winning with no transition to the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first replaying winning, the third replaying winning to shift to the second RT state To establish.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won in addition to the case in which the above-described push order bell is won. The stop information is set to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 which has been made.

  FIG. 23A is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. Unlike the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push bell is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or The 3rd re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

  In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, none of the above-described six operation sequences is associated with the sixth replay to the eighth replay. Therefore, the sixth to eighth replays do not win regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if they have won the first promotion replays 2 to 4.

  More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first. The third replay is distributed in addition to the sixth replay, the first promotion replay 3 is the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is Although the eighth replay is distributed in addition to the first replay and the third replay, whichever first promotion replay 1 to 4 is, the replays to be won are the first replay and the third replay. It has become one of the games. This is for the purpose of making it difficult to understand the operation sequence in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is also one, and the third replay win is intentionally achieved when the first promotion replay is won. Because it is possible to In addition, this relationship is not limited to only the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for the other overlapping players.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay win is not established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning establishment combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the third replay winning combination has been established. If the third game winning combination is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the present process is ended. Do.

  When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the setting of the second RT setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. Do.

  FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When the second RT state lottery table is compared with the first RT state lottery table (refer to FIG. 22), the point values PV of IV = 1 to 10 are different, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, in the case of judging the winning or not of the winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV = 11 to 52 is equal to the probability of winning in the first RT state, and winning at IV = 1 The probability of becoming a win is approximately 13.2 and the probability of winning is not awarded when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning at IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1 of 10.5 and IV = 9 , And the probability of winning in each case is about 7.00. The odds of not winning any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the state shifts to the second RT state, the probability of coming off is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not shift the gaming state, the second re-gaming win transitioning to the first RT state, and the fourth re-play win, the fifth re-gaming winning transition to the third RT state Winning is established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the winning of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above, the fall replay 1 to the fall fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2) Even when the promotion 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 which have generated the stop command.

  FIG. 23B is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win is established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, any one of the first replay winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning always holds regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay winning or the fourth replay win is always established.

  The number given to the fourth replay in the drawing corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay prize is established. “1” corresponds to the symbol combination which is a loose eye, and “2” corresponds to a symbol combination which is red 7 · red 7 · black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination serving as the loose game is stopped and the fourth game win is achieved, or red 7・ Red 7 · Black BAR The symbol combination that is in the middle stop is stopped, and the fourth re-game winning combination is established.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay win is not established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning establishment combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth replay prize or the fifth replay win is established. If the fourth and fifth replay prizes have not been established, the present process is terminated. When the fourth replay game winning or the fifth replaying game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. And the process ends.

  When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. Do.

  FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When the third RT state lottery table is compared with the second RT state lottery table (refer to FIG. 24), the point values PV of IV = 9 to 12 are different, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when it is determined whether or not the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning at IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV = 9, 10 The probability of winning at IV = 11, 12 will be about 7.00, respectively. The odds of not winning any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the gaming state is shifted to the third RT state, the winning combination of the small winning combination, the replay, and the bonus is won with the same probability as the second RT state, while the bonus of the replay is provided Changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning with no transition to the gaming state and the second re-gaming winning with the transition to the first RT state, the sixth re-game winning with the non-transition of the gaming state The seventh replay winning, the eighth replaying win, and the third replay win transitioning to the second RT state are established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established is changed according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 which have issued the stop instruction. Set stop information.

  FIG. 23C is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning pattern established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay win, the sixth replay win, the seventh replay win, and the third replay win Always holds. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay win, the sixth replay win, the eighth replay win, and the third replay win Always holds.

  Next, the bonus state process of step S215 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

  In the bonus determination process, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB win flag, the second BB win flag, and the CB win flag is set in step S602. If one of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether the CB winning is achieved based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB winning is achieved, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout counter for counting the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  Here, the CB and CB states will be briefly described.

  The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol, the "first replay" symbol or the "black BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R , Becomes a CB prize when it stops on the effective line. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R such that the interval between CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the player wins the CB, the CB winning is established regardless of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the medal bet number has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the valid line setting processing (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4. Set as a valid line.

  In step S302 of the lottery process, the CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for CB state, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 48, and “16384” as the point value of IV = 49 to 52 Is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning in the CB small and medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 49) is approximately 4.00 and the probability of winning in the CB small and medium winning combination 2 (IV = 50) The probability of winning at the time of 1) is approximately 4.00, and the probability of winning the CB middle and small winning combination 3 (probability of winning at IV = 51) is approximately 1 / 4.00 and the CB The probability of winning to the small and medium winning combination 4 (probability of winning when IV = 52) is approximately 4.00. There is no event to go out.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. Although a detailed description is omitted, regardless of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is elected, some small winning combination winning It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2 bet game, 15 medals are obtained when the first small character combination, the 27th small character combination, the 31st small character combination, the 36th small character combination to the 38th small character combination are established If the payout is made and the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination, the 28th low winning combination to the 30th low winning combination, the 32nd low winning combination to the 35th low winning combination, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. That is, when it shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as the winning combination and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that can execute one game (JAC game) as the winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning) It is also possible to provide an SB state to be transitioned based on.

  Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning is not established, it means that a bonus winning flag other than CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established.

  Then, when any BB winning is achieved, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. Flag is set. Thereafter, at step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout number display unit 61 is caused to display 216. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or larger than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state.

  By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the setting of the BB setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

  FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table selected in the BB state in which transition is made in the first BB and the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 28, 32 to 52, and “21845” is set as the point value of IV = 29 to 31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning in BB small and medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 32) is approximately 1/30 and the probability of winning in BB small and medium winning combination 2 (IV = 33) The probability of winning in the event of 1) is approximately 1/30, and the probability of winning in the BB middle and small role 3 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 34) is approximately 1 in 3.00. The odds of winning without winning any of the roles is about 65,500.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning pattern established. As described above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, the first small winning combination, regardless of the operation sequence and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, when any of the BB small and middle winnings 1, BB small and middle winnings 2, and BB small and middle winnings 3 is won Either the 39th small winning combination or the 40th small winning combination must be established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the first small winning combination, the 39th small winning combination and the 40th small winning combination are established. Since the probability of detachment in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609 and one of the BB wins is established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry over command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to make it possible to grasp that the bonus winning is not established in the bonus winning game and the so-called carry over state is established, and the carry over command is a timer interrupt process. Is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the game performed in the carryover state, winning of other bonus is limited. More specifically, in the normal gaming state lottery table (FIG. 17), in the case of winning the winning combination with the bonus of IV = 32 to 48 (1st BB, 2nd BB, 2 CB), etc., these bonuses correspond. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning the winning combination with each small combination of IV = 32 to 45, although the winning flag of each small combination is set, the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is not set, the small combination Only winnings are valid. That is, the carry over state may be said to be a state in which the bonus lottery is limited.

  If the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout amount counter becomes 0, and when it becomes 0, processing is performed to clear the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag. In the end determination processing, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

  As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB winning is achieved, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the gaming state when the CB winning is established is restored. For example, when the CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is restored after the end of the CB state, and when the CB winning is achieved under the third RT state, the third RT state after the CB state is terminated. Return to On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state, the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state. Incidentally, when the player shifts to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (= 9 × 24−3 × 24) medals until the BB state ends.

  When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning are not established yet When the command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when the predetermined value is set to the remaining payout counter at steps S605 and S612, when the end determination process is performed at step S614, and In step S606, the status command is set. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming state at the end of the game (that is, the gaming state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area The state command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c is set. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external concentrated terminal plate 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. Thereafter, the process ends.

<Overview of transition of gaming state and display mode>
Here, transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. The illustration of the CB state is omitted.

  When the gaming state is the BB state, when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first RT state by stopping the transition outcome on the valid line, and the gaming state is shifted to the BB state by the BB winning being established. The transition outcome is stopped on the active line when a drop occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal gaming state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 that trigger transition to the second RT state and the second promoted replays 1 and 2 that trigger transition to the third RT state do not win. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

  When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state is shifted to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning combination. The third replay win is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23A). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, since the second promotion replays 1 and 2 serving as a transition trigger to the third RT state are not won, the first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

  If the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is When the corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

  When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state is shifted to the third RT state by the establishment of the fourth replay prize or the fifth replay prize. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state in the case where the second replay winning combination is established and in the case where the transition outcome is stopped on the effective line. The fourth replay prize and the fifth replay win are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (FIG. 23 (b )reference). The second replay win is achieved when one of the fall replay 1 to fall 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition outcome is stopped on the active line when a drop occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag When the corresponding BB winning is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state is shifted to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning combination. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state in the case where the second replay winning combination is established and in the case where the transition outcome is stopped on the effective line. The third replay win is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23C). The second replay win is achieved when one of the fall replay 1 to fall 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition outcome is stopped on the active line when a drop occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is When the corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of gaming states, the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. The main control device 101 manages five display modes, that is, an attack mode (including an additional specialization zone), a VB mode (including an additional specialization zone), and a BB mode.

  FIG. 30 shows the transition of each display mode.

  The BB mode is a display mode that is shifted when the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, and is ended when the BB state is finished. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when transitioning to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 medals.

  When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, in the BB mode, a transition lottery to the challenge mode and a transition lottery to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the transition to the attack mode is made after the termination of the BB mode, and when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the transition is made to the challenge mode after the termination of the BB mode. If any transition lottery is not won, the mode is shifted to the normal mode after the BB mode is ended. When transitioning from the attack mode to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the mode is shifted from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VB mode after the end of the BB mode.

  In the normal mode, when push order bell is won, the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second promotion replay 2, the BAR replay 1, the BAR replay This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “pushing order replay”) winning. In the normal mode, a transition lottery to the challenge mode and a transition lottery to the attack mode are performed. When a lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the transition from the normal mode to the challenge mode is made, and when a transition to the attack mode is won, the transition from the normal mode to the attack mode is made. It does not shift to VB mode from normal mode.

  The normal mode corresponds to the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time when the push order bell is selected and the push order replay is performed, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state, It corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that about 1.59 medals are reduced each time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the case of the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  As in the normal mode, the challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of push order bell winning and at the time of push order replay play. In the challenge mode, a transition lottery to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, in the challenge mode, although the notification of the operation order is not performed as in the normal mode, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. Transition to Attack Mode When the lottery is won, the transition from the challenge mode to the attack mode is made. When a game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times etc.) without winning the transition lottery, the transition from the challenge mode to the normal mode is made. It does not shift to VB mode from challenge mode.

  The challenge mode corresponds to the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing the order replay, transition to the second RT state and the third RT state is rare, and it corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. It will be done. In the challenge mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that about 1.59 medals decrease for each game, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the case of the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in any of the pressing order bell winning case and the pressing order replay winning case. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, that is, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. The transition probability of is getting higher. Transition to VB Mode When winning the lottery, the transition from the attack mode to the VB mode is made. When the game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times etc.) without winning the lottery to the VB mode, the mode is shifted from the attack mode to the normal mode.

  The first to fourth attack modes are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode is the highest and the first attack mode is the lowest, and the first attack mode, the second attack mode In the order of the third attack mode and the fourth attack mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be high.

  The attack mode corresponds to the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified at any of the pushing order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning, so that the stop switch 42 is operated in the operation order notified by the player. When 〜44 is operated, it corresponds approximately to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medal increases by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.90 medals are increased each time one game is played. In the attack mode, at least 50 games are continued after the gaming state is shifted to the second RT state. Therefore, when the attack mode is shifted, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals.

  Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in any of the pushing order bell winning state and the pushing order replay reproduction winning state. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that, when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation sequence for establishing the first game win is informed. In the VB mode, the operation sequence for establishing the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning is informed (see FIG. 23B).

  The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is informed in any of the pushing order bell winning state and the pushing order Replay winning state, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is elected When it becomes, the operation order for establishing the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning is informed. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medal increases by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.90 medals are increased each time one game is played. In the VB mode, at least 25 games are continued after the gaming state is shifted to the third RT state. Therefore, when the VB mode is shifted, the player can expect an increase of approximately 50 medals.

  The transition from the normal mode to the challenge mode, the transition from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and the return from the attack mode to the normal mode is generally described in the transition of the display mode when the player's possessed medals increase. . Then, since the transition drawing to the VB mode is performed in the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned when a loop is made to shift from the attack mode to the VB mode and return from the VB mode to the attack mode. it can.

  As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which the transition to the attack mode is expected.

  Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, basically the transition to the first attack mode is made. In the first attack mode, a transition lottery to the VB mode is performed, and a transition lottery to the second attack mode is performed. When the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the transition to the second attack mode is made, and the probability of winning the transition for lottery to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a transition lottery to the VB mode is performed, and a transition lottery to the third attack mode is performed. When winning in the transition lottery to the third attack mode, the transition to the third attack mode is made, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a transition lottery to the VB mode is performed, and a transition lottery to the fourth attack mode is performed. When the lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is won, the transition to the fourth attack mode is made, and the probability of winning the transition for lottery to the VB mode increases.

  Therefore, when transitioning to the attack mode, by promoting the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode, the transition probability to the VB mode becomes high, and the attack A loop between mode and VB mode is likely to occur.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player is configured to increase the possessed medals in the display modes of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state come and go by stopping the winning or transition of each re-game or the like. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 at the time of winning the push on replay and the push on the bell, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition outcome is stopped. Further, in the attack mode or the VB mode, an increase in owned medals can be expected by being notified of an operation order that enables the first small winning combination to be established at the time of winning in the push order bell.

  The configuration of the display mode will be described below.

  The configuration relating to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing relating to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result There are processes for shifting the display mode, and (4) processes related to notification effects on the sub side. The following will be described in order.

<Process on transition drawing of display mode>
<Drawing result handling process>
The processing relating to the transition lottery of the display mode of (1) is performed in the lottery result handling process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, hereinafter, the lottery result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S 701, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, chances A and B and middle bells, strong cherries duplicates 1 and 2, weak cherries duplicates 1 and 2, strong watermelons duplicates 1 and 2 as a result of this lottery. , Weak watermelon duplicates 1 and 2, chance A duplicates 1 and 2, chance B duplicates 1 and 2, middle bell duplicates 1 and 2 (see, for example, FIG. 17, IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45, and the following, these roles) Are collectively referred to as "specific combination"). If the lottery result is the specific combination, it is determined in step S702 whether or not any one of the first BB win flag and the second BB win flag has been set.

  In the process of step S702, the case where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is already set indicates that the game is in the carryover state, and does not include the game winning the first BB or the second BB. That is, when it is determined in step S702 that the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is not already set, the first BB or the second BB, as well as the specific winning combination in which the double winning with the first BB or the second BB is not It also includes the case of winning a specific combination winning the second BB. In other words, in the case where a specific winning combination with 1st BB or 2nd BB is won in the carryover state, an affirmative determination is made in step S702.

  If a negative determination is made in step S702, processing for transition of the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S703 to S709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has not been won, or if the bonus winning flag is set in step S702, processing for transition to the display mode is performed in steps S710 to S713.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has been won, and if it is determined in step S702 that the bonus winning flag is not set, the current gaming state is determined in step S703. It is determined whether or not the normal gaming state or the first RT state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the transition mode drawing of the attack mode and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the first specific winning combination process is executed in step S705.

<First specified part processing>
The first specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the first specific winning combination process is performed is a normal gaming state or a first RT state, and a state in which the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery whether or not to transition to the attack mode is performed. In addition, in the first specific combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process for adding the number of continued games in the challenge mode is performed.

  That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, in step S802, a normal-time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S801, in step S803, a challenge mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery. In the normal mode table and the challenge mode table, the transition probability to the attack mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, for strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the transition probability to the attack mode is generally different between the normal table and the challenge mode table, and the transition probability to the attack mode is higher in the challenge mode table than in the normal table. Is set as.

  After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the transition to the attack mode is performed by comparing the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803.

  In step S805, based on the processing result in step S804, it is determined whether or not a lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won. When the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the attack mode selected this time is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode which is started after passing through the additional specialization zone. For example, assuming that the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, in the super attack mode, the attack mode is started with the number of games obtained by adding the number of games added in the special specialization zone to 50 of the initial number of games. Ru. Therefore, the player has different advantages in the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. The super attack mode is set to win in a part (for example, 1%) when winning in the attack mode in the attack mode lottery process of step S804.

  Note that the probability of winning in the super attack mode may be set to be different between when the normal time table is acquired (step S802) and when the challenge mode table is acquired (step S803), in this case, If the probability of winning in the super attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal time, the superiority of the challenge mode is secured. In addition, although the probability of winning in the attack mode is lower in the normal mode than in the challenge mode, the ratio in the super attack mode at the time of winning may be set to be larger. Furthermore, the winning probability in the super attack mode or the ratio of the super attack mode at the time of winning the attack mode may be varied according to the type of the specific combination.

  If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode is won, in step S807, a process of setting a specialization zone hit flag is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the process of step S807 is performed, a process of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and the specialization zone winning flag is set (when the super attack mode is won) as a part of the attack mode winning flag.

  After performing the processing of step S808, processing for setting a precursor mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. The precursor mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests winning in the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. is easily generated, and after having played each game of the precursor mode, the player is elected in the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. The notification of winning is performed. The precursor mode continues from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of continued games in the precursor mode is set to be different depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc., and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. ing. If the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. are simultaneously won with the bonus, notification of the bonus's winning is given after the precursor mode, and after the bonus state is ended, the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. are won. Notification of what was happening will be done. Also, when the precursor game number is set as 0 game, the notification of winning will be performed without the intervention of the precursor mode.

  Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 35, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games to be selected is set to be different depending on whether the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and the bonus are simultaneously won or not. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode, and when the attack mode is won, when 1 bonus game is not won simultaneously, 1 game to 5 games are selected by 80%, and 6 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 10%, and 6 games to 10 games are 20 It is selected by%, 11 games to 20 games are selected by 50%, and 21 games to 32 games are selected by 20%. That is, in the case where the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games in the case where the bonus is simultaneously won than in the case where the bonus is not simultaneously won. In other words, when the bonus is not simultaneously won, the attack mode winning is notified with a relatively short number of games from the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 game is selected as the precursor game number regardless of the presence or absence of bonus simultaneous winning. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and in the next game of the winning game, notification of winning in the attack mode is performed.

  In addition, when winning in the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional specialization zone, when a bonus is not simultaneously won, one game to five games are selected at 70%, and six games to ten games are thirty Selected by%. On the other hand, when the attack mode is won at the same time, 1 game to 5 games are not selected, 6 games to 10 games are selected at 20%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected at 30%. And 21 games to 32 games are selected at 50%. That is, even when the super attack mode is won, it is easier to select a longer number of prediction games when the bonus is simultaneously won than when the bonus is not simultaneously won, and when the bonus is not simultaneously won. The super attack mode winning is notified in a relatively short number of games from the super attack mode winning game. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 game is selected as the precursor game number regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus simultaneous win. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the notification of winning in the super attack mode is performed in the next game to the winning game.

  In step S810, based on the precursor game number table acquired in step S809 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a process of drawing the number of games in the precursor mode of this time is performed. Then, in step S811, processing is performed to input the number of prognostic games to the prognostic counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The precursor counter is a counter which is decremented by one for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, the precursor mode is ended, and a notification of winning that the player has won the transition lottery such as the attack mode is performed.

  In step S812, processing is performed to set a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device. The precursor command includes information on a lottery result (a display mode to be shifted after the precursor mode, a BB mode and an attack mode in the case of step S812) and a precursor game number as a trigger of the precursor mode. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After the process of step S812 is performed, the first specific combination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S805 that the transition lottery to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a challenge mode lottery process is performed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set in accordance with the type of the specific combination. For example, for strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

  Although the case where the display mode is the challenge mode is included as a case where step S813 is carried out, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S813 also in this case, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It's a table of As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not in the challenge mode.

  In step S814, it is determined based on the processing result of step S813 whether or not the challenge mode has been won. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S816, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

  After performing the process of step S816, the setting process for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820, as in steps S809 to S812. That is, after acquiring the precursor game number table in step S817, performing lottery processing of the precursor game number in step S818, setting the precursor game number in step S819, and setting the precursor command in step S820, The first specific combination process ends.

  In the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, as shown in FIG. 35, when the challenge mode alone is won, one game to five games are selected at 90%, and six games to ten games are ten. Selected by%. On the other hand, when the challenge mode is simultaneously won with the bonus, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 20%, 6 games to 10 games are selected at 30%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected at 50%. Be done. That is, even when the challenge mode is won, it is easier to select a longer number of prediction games when the bonus is simultaneously won than when the bonus is not simultaneously won, and when the bonus is not simultaneously won. From the challenge mode winning game, the challenge mode winning is notified with a relatively short number of games.

  In addition to the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won, it is easier to select the number of precursor games longer in attack mode than in challenge mode, and longer in super attack mode than in attack mode. The number is easily selected, and if the player has won the display mode advantageous to the player, a long precursor game number is easily selected. In addition, when the bonus is not simultaneously won, the number of precursor games of 10 or less is selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 11 or more games, it is determined that the bonus is simultaneously won. Do. In addition, even in the case of winning simultaneously with the bonus, the number of precursor games of 20 or less is selected in the simultaneous winning of the challenge mode and the bonus, while the attack mode and the super attack mode and the bonus In the simultaneous winning, the number of prognostic games of 21 games or more is also selected, and it is determined that the bonus + attack mode or the super attack mode is established when the prognostic mode continues for 21 or more games. Thus, the fun of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there may be a transition to the pseudo precursor mode if the attack mode, the challenge mode or the like is not won at the time of winning the specific part. Although this process will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, the winning suggestion effect frequently occurs over 21 games or more, so that it is determined that the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode shifted by the specific combination timing is the precursor mode.

  If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, in steps S821 to S825, processing for adding a continuation game in the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and a lottery process of the number of added games in the challenge mode is executed.

  Here, the addition means adding the number of continuing games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, and the number of adding games corresponds to a value to be added to the number of continuing games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continued games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

  Specifically, in the lottery process of the number of added games, a table for lottery of the number of challenge mode added games is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the challenge mode added game number lottery is set to increase the number of added games according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries, the challenge mode of 30 games is added with a probability of 80%, and 50 games are added with a probability of 20%. In addition, for weak cherries, 5 games will be added with a probability of 80%, and 20 games will be added with a probability of 20%.

  In step S823, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S822 is added to the counter for managing the number of continued games in the challenge mode (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform processing to add. Then, after the process of setting the superimposition command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S824, the first specific combination process is ended. The addition command includes information on occurrence of addition, the number of games to be added, and an object to be added (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the additional command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these additional commands as notification based on the reception of the additional commands. Informing (superimposing effect) is performed.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and the first specific combination process is ended. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition of the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, the game to be notified of the addition is set to be different depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703, or if a positive determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S707 whether or not the VB mode selection flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag which is set when winning in the transition lottery of the VB mode and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S707, the second specified winning combination process is executed in step S708. In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S706, or if the positive determination is made in step S707, the third specified winning combination process is executed in step S709.

<2nd specified role process>
The second identification combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the second specific combination process is performed means the second RT state and the state in which the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second identification combination process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to shift the display mode to the VB mode. Further, in the second specific part process, while performing a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode, a process for increasing the number of continuing games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ranks of the four attack modes of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different in each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined whether the rank of the current attack mode is any one of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode.

  In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode determined in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probability to the VB mode is set in accordance with the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherry 1 and the weak cherry, the strong cherry 1 is set to have a higher transition probability to the VB mode than the weak cherry. Moreover, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is generally different, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. Thus, the fourth attack mode is switched to the VB mode rather than the third attack mode so that the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode. The transition probability of is set to be high.

  In step S903, the transfer lottery in the VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the winning of the VB mode.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S904, in step S905, a process of setting a VB mode selection flag in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the precursor game number table is acquired in step S906, the precursor game number is drawn in step S907, the precursor game number is set in step S908, and the precursor command is set in step S909, and then the second specification is made. End the role processing. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, with regard to the VB mode winning in the attack mode, it is set such that the number of precursor games is 0 in any case. Therefore, when the VB mode is won during the attack mode, the win notification will be performed in the next game.

  If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

  In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a table for promoted lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode, and specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, There are three provided (in the state of staying in the fourth attack mode, no promotion lottery is performed). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific part. For example, among the strong cherries and the weak cherries, the strong cherries have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Also, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the third table for the second attack mode The table for the attack mode is set to have a lower promotion probability, and as the rank of the attack mode is promoted, it is set to be difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

  In step S911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If it is determined that the player has been promoted, the attack mode is promoted in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to a rank flag one rank higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. In the display control device 81 that has received the promotion command, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform effects for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As the effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, effects of different background colors are set according to the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 receives the promotion command in the attack mode. While notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an effect for an attack mode is performed with a background color according to the rank of the promotion destination.

  If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, a process for adding the number of continued games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

  That is, in step S914, an addition lottery process in the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the addition lottery process, the attack mode addition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The table for the attack mode additional lottery is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery varies depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, a strong cherry will win the winning lottery with a probability of 80%, and a weak cherry will win the winning lottery with a probability of 20%. Note that the winning probability may be varied according to the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery is not won, the second specific combination process ends.

  If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S 917, and a lottery process of the number of added games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process of the additional game number, a table for lottery of the attack mode additional game number is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the attack mode added game number lottery is set so that the added game number is different according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries, the attack mode is added to 20 games with a probability of 90%, and 80 games are added with a probability of 10%. In addition, for weak cherries, 5 games will be added with a probability of 95%, and 100 games will be added with a probability of 5%.

  In step S 918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) for managing the number of continuation games in the attack mode. Perform processing to add. Then, after the process of setting the superimposition command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S919, the second specific combination process is ended.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, an attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and the second specific combination process is ended. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition of the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, similarly to the notification of the game number addition in the challenge mode, the game in which the addition notification is performed is set to be different depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

<Third designated role processing>
Next, the third specified winning combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The case where the third specific combination process is performed means the case of the third RT state or the second RT state and the state of winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuing games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S1001, the number-of-games addition lottery process in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1001 is the additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery is won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and a lottery process of the number of added games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, an attack mode game number addition process is performed, and in step S1006, an addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specified winning combination process is ended. The processes of steps S1003 to S1006 are the same as the processes of steps S916 to S919. Note that the number of added games may be different between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specified winning combination process ends. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and the third specified winning combination process is ended. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

  Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not the specific combination winning or the specific combination is won, the bonus selection flag is If it is determined that it is set, it is determined in step S710 whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a push order role). Determine If it is determined that the winning order is won, the pressing order process is executed in step S711. Such pushing order processing will be described in detail later.

  After executing any of the processes of step S705, step S708, step S709, and step S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S 712, it is determined whether the specialization zone flag corresponding to the additional specialization zone is set in the various flag storage area 106 d of the RAM 106. The specialization zone flag is a flag set based on the establishment of the seventh replay, and the special addition zone is high in the number of continued games in the attack zone over a plurality of games. Indicates the state that occurs with probability. If the specialization zone flag is set in step S712, the specialization zone process is executed in step S713. The specialization zone flag, the specialization zone, and the specialization zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S712, or after the process of step S713 is performed, the present lottery result handling process is ended.

  As described above, when it is determined that the specific combination is won in the lottery result handling process, the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode or the VB mode, the challenge mode or the attack is performed, provided that the carryover state is not in effect. Processing for adding the number of continuing games in the mode is performed. In other words, even when the specific winning combination is won, during the carryover state, the transition mode drawing in the challenge mode, the attack mode or the VB mode, the process for adding the number of continued games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, etc. are not performed. Its implementation is limited. When a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode or the VB mode is won, notification of the winning of the transition lottery is given after the precursor game. Therefore, hereinafter, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode will be described.

<Process for transferring the gaming state based on the result of the transition drawing of the display mode>
(2) Transition of the display mode In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the lottery, the process for notifying that the transition mode of the display mode has been won and a notification for shifting the gaming state And a process for performing. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning of the transition lottery will be described.

<Process for notifying mode transition>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode shift notification process is a process performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the bet number in step S205 is a specified number). In the following, the mode transition notification processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is zero. Counting of the number of prognostic games is performed in a winning result corresponding process described later, and one prognostic game is decremented each time one game is consumed. If the leading game number is not 0, the mode transition notifying process is ended.

  If the precursor game number is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not this precursor mode is the precursor mode triggered by the bonus winning. If the bonus winning flag is set, a bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S 1103, and the mode transition notifying process is ended. The display control device 81 having received the bonus winning notification command, for example, displays “Bonus confirmed !!” on the auxiliary display unit 65, thereby notifying that the bonus is won. Note that the type of the bonus being won (one of the first BB and the second BB) may be notified together.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the attack mode, the challenge mode and the like are simultaneously won, the notification of winning such an attack mode and the like is performed at the end of the bonus notified in step S1103. The processing related to such a winning notification will be described in detail later, but when performing a winning notification such as an attack mode in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as an attack mode etc. in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1103 It is good to set up a command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1105. Then, in step S1106, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1107, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the challenge mode start command notifies the start of the challenge mode by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S1108, counting of the challenge mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continued games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. After the process of step S1108 is performed, the mode transition notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the challenge mode selection flag is not set, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the attack mode selection flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time is the precursor mode triggered by the attack mode winning. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for causing the gaming state to shift to the second RT state in association with winning in the transition lottery of the attack mode. Thereafter, in step S1112, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the winning of the attack mode transition lottery by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1112, the mode transition notification process ends.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the notification of winning in the super attack mode is different from the mode of the notification of winning in the attack mode. Therefore, in step S1112, an attack mode winning notification command may be set to include information on whether or not the super attack mode is set. The mode of notification of winning in the attack mode and the mode of notification of winning in the super attack mode may be different as long as they can be identified by the player. More preferably, the notification of the super attack mode of winning notification with high degree of advantage It is preferable that the aspect is a flashy aspect than the aspect of the notification of winning in the attack mode.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which makes common the aspect of the election alerting | reporting of these attack mode and super attack mode. By doing this, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the attacking content has been promoted to the super attack mode from the attack mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the attack mode winning Spacing caused by the difference between the notification game and the start notification game can be resolved.

  If it is determined in step S1109 that the attack mode selection flag is not set, it is determined in step S1113 whether the VB mode selection flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1114. Then, in step S1115, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The notification flag for VB is a flag for causing the gaming state to shift to the third RT state in association with having won the transition lottery of the VB mode. Thereafter, in step S1116, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command performs notification of the winning of the VB mode transition lottery using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1116 is performed, the mode transition notification process ends. If it is determined in step S1113 that the VB mode selection flag is not set, the mode transition notification processing ends.

  That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode. On the other hand, in the attack mode and the VB mode, only notification of winning in the attack mode transition lottery and the VB mode transition lottery is performed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, Even if the number of games reaches zero, the attack mode or the VB mode is not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the gaming state, and more specifically, the attack mode transitions to the second RT state The VB mode is caused by the difference between being started by transitioning to the third RT state.

  As already explained, it is a case where it wins to the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 to the 2nd RT state, and it shifts when the 3rd game rebirth is established, 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 to the 3rd RT state And when the fourth and fifth replay winning combinations are established. Then, when the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay win is established, or the second promotion replay 1 and 2 is won, the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, In this case, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of promotion replay winning corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, if the player has won the attack mode or the lottery for transition to the VB mode, then, in the game in which the winning combination is to shift these gaming states, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified. It is possible to shift the game state. It should be noted that after the notification of winning in the transition mode or the VB mode transition lottery is performed, until the attack mode or the VB mode is started (until the gaming state transitions), a notification as a preparation state (for example, “ The notification "during preparation" is performed.

<Description about transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the pushing order processing (step S711) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing order processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Overview of push order notification effects>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the winning combination (pushing order notification, pressing order notification effect, order notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking an example where the operation order notified this time is middle → right → left and the winning order is won as an example. The push order notification in the instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (in FIG. The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43, and is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize that the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In the auxiliary display unit 65, the right stop switch 44 is the stop switch to be operated next, and the left stop switch 42 is the stop switch to be operated last. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with 3 added.

  When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), in the auxiliary display section 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right corresponding to the right stop switch 44. The button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

  When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 37C, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left corresponding to the left stop switch 42. The button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

  The execution timing of the push order notification will be described. The push order notification is performed during the ineffective period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation after passing through the acceleration period. Is set to run. As described above, the notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be recognized by performing the notification of the order of pressing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective. It is possible to make it desirable to the operation of the game and to advance the game with good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the pushing order processing performed in step S711 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is a case where the first replay or the third replay is won according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 36). is there.

  If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, an operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified (see FIG. 23A). After that, in step S1204, after the pressing order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 which is the control device on the sub side, the present pressing order processing is ended. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described in detail later.

  In addition, basically, in the case of performing notification of the operation order corresponding to the third replay win in step S1203, a winning lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and a notification of winning in the attack mode is made through the precursor mode. And before the transition to the attack mode is assumed. That is, in the lottery tables in the second RT state and the third RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like, and even in such a case, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing this, it is possible to return to the second RT state early.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is a case where the first replay or the second replay is won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, a process for notifying the pushing order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, an operation order corresponding to the first replay win is notified (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1208, processing for setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the main pressing order processing process is ended.

  As described above, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the transition lottery to the attack mode is won, the notification of the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is performed, and thus the gaming state is It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pressing order processing ends without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning in the attack mode, the first replay case is established, and the third replay case is established. There is.

  Further, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, notification of the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed, thereby shifting the gaming state to the first RT state It is possible to prevent it. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pressing order processing ends without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode is ended and the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second re-game winning may be established by winning of fall replays 1 to 3 and the RT state Transitions from the second RT state to the first RT state.

  Further, for example, in the first RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning in the attack mode, and by chance the operation order corresponds to the third replay win, and the third replay win is established. Even in the case where it is determined (even when the second RT state is entered), the second replay bonus can be established by the winning of the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to go to the second RT state without winning in the attack mode, it will immediately shift to the first RT state thereafter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 is a case where the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay is won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, it is determined in step S1210 whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S 1211 whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106 d of the RAM 106. As already described, the notification flag for VB is a flag that is set when the number of prognostic games in the prognostic mode becomes 0 after the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won in the processing for informing mode transition (FIG. 36). is there.

  If the notification flag for VB is set, processing for notifying the pressing order of the fourth replay or the fifth replay is executed in step S1212. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, an operation order corresponding to the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is notified (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1213, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the present push order processing process is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pressing order processing ends without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1211, the process for notifying the pushing order of the first replay is performed in step S1207, and the pushing order notification command is set in step S1208. This regular order processing ends. Therefore, when winning in the second promotion Replays 1 and 2 without winning in the VB mode, if the attack mode is in progress, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and in the attack mode For example, the order notification notification is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the current lottery result is one of BAR replay 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1214 means that one of the first replay, the third replay and the sixth replay to the eighth replay is won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, it is determined in step S1215 whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether the VB notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notifying the pressing order of the sixth to eighth replays is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the third replay and the sixth replay to the eighth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth replay to the eighth replay is notified (FIG. c) see Thereafter, in step S1218, processing for setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and the present pressing order processing is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pressing order processing ends without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the pushing order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process of setting the pushing order informing command is performed in step S1208. This regular order processing ends. Therefore, when winning in BAR replays 1 and 2 without winning in the VB mode, if the attack mode is in progress, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and if not in the attack mode, it is pressed No forward notification effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a winning order bell win. If the push bell order has been won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. When it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 19). Thereafter, in step S1222, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the present push order processing process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if a positive determination is made in step S1220, the main-pushing-order processing ends as it is without performing processing for notification of pushing order.

<Process for Shifting Display Mode Based on Winning Result>
<Paid result handling process>
Next, as a result of giving a notification to shift the gaming state as described above, the processing in the case where the combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result corresponding process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, this game number management processing counts the number of continuing games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialization zone, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode.

  In the following step S1302, it is determined whether the current stop result is that the third game winning combination has been established. As described above, when the third replay win is established, in the RT state process (FIG. 21), a process for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set means the case where the third game winning combination is established without the transition condition to the attack mode being established. In this case, the processing for the attack mode start is not performed. The winning result handling process ends as it is. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as a flag for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is a flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, Specialized zone flag)). Therefore, for example, when it is determined in step S1304 that the attack mode flag is set, the case including the case of being in the VB mode or being in the specialized zone is included in addition to the case of being in the attack mode. .

  If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the winning result corresponding processing is finished. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

  That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the attack mode start command notifies the start of the attack mode from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. The notification will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode.

  After the process of step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether the specialization zone flag is set. Affirmative determination in step S1308 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode, and in this case, after the specialization zone selection flag is cleared in step S1309, the special addition special zone start The process proceeds to step S1318 to step S1320. The process for starting the additional specialization zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the winning result corresponding process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay win has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether the fourth and fifth replay winning combinations have been established as the result of the current stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, in the RT state process (FIG. 21), a process for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, it is determined in step S1311 whether the VB notification flag is set. In the case where the notification flag for VB is not set, the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established without winning in the transition lottery of the VB mode, and in this case, the processing of the VB mode start threat is not performed. , Finish the winning result corresponding processing as it is. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1312 whether the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the winning result corresponding processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1313 to S1315.

  That is, in step S1313, the VB mode flag is set. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode in which the transition is made via the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

  Thereafter, in step S 1314, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the VB mode start command notifies the start of the VB mode from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1315, counting of the number of continuation of the VB mode is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continued games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1315, the winning result corresponding processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1310 that the fourth and fifth replay wins have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined as a result of the current stop whether or not the seventh replay win is established. In the present embodiment, when the seventh replay win is established, that is, the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "black BAR" symbol stops and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the additional specialization zone. In the special addition zone, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is added not only to the specific part but also to all of the winning combinations (pushing part, specific part and bonus). Note that the case where the seventh replay prize is established means that the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh replay win (FIG. 23). (C)) Furthermore, it is a case where it wins in the lottery that the 7th game of the 1st, 6th, 7th game is won, for example, 20 minutes in the case where it is won in BAR replay 1 Win a lottery that the seventh game will win with a probability of 1.

  If the seventh replay win is established, it is determined in step S1317 whether a VB notification flag is set. When the notification flag for VB is set, processing for starting the specialization zone is performed in steps S1318 to S1320. As already described, when the super attack mode is started, the process of step S 1318 to step S 1320 is performed also when the process of step S 1309 is performed by making an affirmative determination in step S 1308.

  Specifically, in step S 1318, processing is performed to set the specialization zone flag in the various flag storage area 106 d of the RAM 106. The specialization zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialization zone, and the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped by setting the specialization zone flag . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialization zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106 d.

  Thereafter, in step S1319, a specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the specialization zone start command notifies the start of the specialization zone from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1320, counting of the number of continuing specialization zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continued games in the specialization zone is set in the specialization zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1320, the winning result corresponding processing ends. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1316 or step S1317, the winning result corresponding process is ended as it is.

  As described above, based on the winning of the combination (third to fifth replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, a process for transitioning the display mode separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21) Do. This is to prevent the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning combination of the part corresponding to the transition of the gaming state by chance even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

  In addition, when transitioning to the display mode, among those involving the transition of the gaming state, transition to a higher mode, that is, transition from the normal mode or challenge mode to the attack mode, or transition from the attack mode to the VB mode Alternatively, when transitioning from the VB mode to the specialization zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding part. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition of the display mode is not performed when the gaming state transitions, for example, due to the stop of the second re-game win or the transition appearance as fall fall replay. When transitioning to the lower mode, the gaming state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to the lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode may be performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the above-mentioned winning result corresponding process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialization zone is counted. Processing to end the corresponding display mode.

  In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the bet number is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets of 1 to 3. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as a specific number. If it is not 3 bet, the game number management process is finished. That is, in the 1 bet or 2 bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuing games such as the challenge mode are not counted.

  If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or in a bonus state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, processing for clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and the game number management process is ended. Do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the attack mode or the like is not counted. In addition, in step S1403, when each flag is not set, the state is maintained.

  Incidentally, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared in step S1403, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after completion of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode, these flags make it possible to perform a push order notification for shifting the gaming state and to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in the challenge mode or the specialization zone, the challenge mode or the specialization zone is finished by the bonus winning.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the leading game number is zero. If it is not 0, in step S1405, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of prognostic games is performed. If the precursor game number is 0 in step S 1404 (if it is not the precursor mode), or after the processing in step S 1405 is performed, the number of continued games in each mode is counted in step S 1406 to step S 1428. .

  That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the case of the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by one to subtract the number of challenge mode continuation games. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether the challenge mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the game number management process is ended. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode is ended in the current game. After the process of step S1410, the game number management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1406 that the challenge mode is not set, the process advances to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is the attack mode. If the attack mode is selected, the process advances to step S1412, and it is determined whether the zone is a specialized zone in the attack mode. That is, when transitioning to the specialization zone at the start of the attack mode as in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1412. If it is in the specialization zone, the number-of-games management process for the specialization zone is performed in steps S1425 to S1428. These processes will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1412 that the game is not in the specialization zone, the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1413, thereby subtracting the attack mode continuation game number. Then, in step S 1414, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the game number management process is ended. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1415, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1416. Thereafter, in step S1417, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode is ended in the current game. The notification will be described in detail later. After performing the processing of step S1417, the game number management processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1418. In step S1418, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If the mode is the VB mode, the process advances to step S 1419 to determine whether it is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the additional specialization zone, the VB mode continuing counter is decremented by 1 in step S1420 to subtract the VB mode continuing game number. Then, in step S1421, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the game number management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1422, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1423. Thereafter, in step S 1424, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode is ended in the current game. The notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1424, the game number management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1419 that the zone is the additional specialization zone, the process advances to step S1425. As already described, if it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is a specialized zone in the attack mode, the process also proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by one to subtract the number of specialized zone continued games. Then, in step S1426, it is determined whether the specialization zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialization zone flag is cleared in step S1427, and a specialization zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1428. In the display control device 81 that has received the specialization zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the specialization zone is finished in the current game. As such notification, for example, notification of the number of games successfully added in total in the specialization zone this time is performed. After the process of step S1428, the game number management process ends. When negative determination is carried out in step S1418 or step S1426, a game number management process is complete | finished as it is.

<End determination processing>
Next, an end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41 as the process at the end of the bonus. As already described, the end determination process is a process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, it is determined whether a bonus end condition is satisfied, and when a bonus is ended, a process for notifying a winning such as an attack mode in which a bonus and an overlapping winning etc are performed is performed, and an attack mode in which a bonus is overlapping winning etc. Perform processing for adding the number of games, etc.

  That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether a small winning combination is established. As described above, during the bonus, the first small combination (BB small and medium combination 1) is established with high probability (FIG. 28). When the BB small and medium winning combination 2 (IV = 30) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 39th small winning combination (FIG. 27 (b)), and The 39th small winning combination is established when the small winning combination and the 39th small winning combination of the 39th small winning combination win a lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, a lottery in which the 39th small winning combination is won with a probability of 1/100 in the case where the BB middle small winning combination 2 is won is won. When the BB small and medium winning combination 3 (IV = 31) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 40th small winning combination (FIG. 27 (b)), and further, the first small winning combination The 40th small winning combination is established when the 40th small winning combination of the 40th small winning combination is won by the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, the player wins the lottery that the 40th small winning combination will be won with a probability of 1/200 in the case where the player is elected as the BAR full during BB. The probability of the 39th small winning combination or the 40th small winning combination may be adjusted by adjusting the winning probability of the BB middle small combination 2 or the BB middle small combination 3. More specifically, the point value PV is allocated so that the BB small and medium winning combination 2 is won with a probability of about 1/100 of the above configuration, and the BB small and medium winning combination 3 is won with a probability of about 1/200 of the above configuration. Allocate point value PV. Then, if a stop operation is performed aiming at a small combination (the 39th small combination and the 40th small combination) corresponding to when the BB small and medium winning combination 2 and the BB small and middle winning combination 3 are won, the corresponding small winning combination can be established. It is good also as composition.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the small winning combination is achieved, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the process of step S1502 has been executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether the number of remaining payouts has become 0 or not. If it is not 0, the end determination processing is ended as it is. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, and in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for notification of winning such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Perform processing for the addition of the number of continuing games.

  That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, lottery processing of the number of prognostic games is performed in step S1506, the number of prognostic games is set in step S1507, and the prognostic command is set in step S1508. By the way, in this embodiment, in the lottery process of the number of prognostic games in step S1506, a lottery in which the number of prognostic games is 0 is performed with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1507, the number of precursor games of 0 game is always set, and a notification of winning in the attack mode or the like is performed in the next game to the bonus end game. After the process of step S1508 is performed, the end determination process ends.

  If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the processing for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and the end determination processing is ended. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the processing for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination processing is ended. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the notification of the winning in the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed after the precursor game.

  If the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or the challenge mode winning flag is set, the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. and the bonus may be simultaneously won, or the winning notification such as the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. The bonus is won in the precursor mode of. On the other hand, when the bonus ends when the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won during the attack mode, or the VB mode winning notification precursor notification mode (in this case) Since the precursor mode of the 0 game is selected, the bonus is won in the next game in which the VB mode is won.

  If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process advances to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery processing is performed in step S1512, the attack mode game number addition processing is performed in step S1513, and the addition command is set in step S1514. . The processes of steps S1512 to S1514 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S919. After the process of step S1514 is executed, the end determination process is ended.

  If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, a challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1516, a challenge mode game number addition process is performed in step S1517, and an addition command is set in step S1518. . The processes of steps S 1516 to S 1518 are the same as the processes of steps S 822 to S 824. If a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after the process of step S1518 has been performed, the end determination process ends.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the special zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specialization zone process is a process executed in step S 713 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). As described above, transition to the specialization zone is made during the VB mode, and during the specialization zone, the number of continuing games in the attack mode is added to each game.

  That is, in the special zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the following step S1602, an attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1603, a process of adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S 1604, the superimposition command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processes of steps S1602 to S1604 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S919. However, the number-of-games selected in step S1602 for the additional game number lottery process is larger than that for the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Process on notification effect of sub side>
Next, (4) processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described as processing on notification effects on the sub side. As various notification processes, an effect setting process performed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101 or not. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands individually and being readable from the previously stored commands.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation being performed, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, processing for mode transition notification (see FIG. 36), an attack mode win notification command, a VB mode win notification command, and a bonus win notification command. If the command is a bet command, a bet effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1703 or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start time command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and in addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, There are a precursor command and an additional command set in the third specific part process (FIGS. 32 to 34), a push order notification command set in the push order process (FIG. 38), and the like. If the command is the start command, the start effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. The stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). It is a stop command command set by. When it is the stop command command as the command for each stop operation, each stop operation effect setting process is executed in step S1708.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether the newly received command is an all-stop command or not. The all stop command is a command output from main controller 101 based on the stop of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). Other than commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization command set in winning result corresponding processing (FIG. 39) There is a zone end command etc. In the case of these all-stop commands, all-stop effect setting processing is executed in step S1710.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is performed, another process is performed in step S1711, and the effect setting process is ended. In step S1711, settings are made based on commands from the main control device 101 at the time of betting, start, and stop (for example, setting of effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connection is not performed via the main control device 101. The setting of the effect based on the signal from the detected sensor (the effect switch detection sensor etc.), the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

  The bet effect setting process, the start effect setting process, the stop operation effect setting process, and the all stop effect setting process will be described below. In the description of each effect setting process, it will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of the display effects of FIG. 55 to FIG.

<Effect setting process at bet>
The bet effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether a challenge mode start command is included as the bet time command received this time. If a challenge mode start command is included, in step S1802, processing for setting up a challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the character display "Challenge mode start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the transition display mode is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating that it is the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, “grab the attack mode with a wild male voice”) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether an attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S 1804, processing is performed to set an attack mode winning notification effect. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the auxiliary display section 65 performs character display of “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, control is performed such that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" With a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether a VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the character display “VICTORYBONUS determined” is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "victory!" By male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode winning notification command is not included at step S1805, it is determined at step S1807 whether a bonus winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If a bonus winning notification command is included, in step S1808, processing is performed to set a bonus winning notification effect. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the character display of “let's do bonus confirmation” is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I'm done!" By male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  After executing any of steps S1802, S1804, S1806, and S1808, or if the result of the determination in step S1807 is negative, after setting the other betting effect in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1809. The effect setting process ends. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of a bet command, a process for notifying that the operation has been accepted by turning off the lamp around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding bet number Or, for example, processing for returning from the demonstration mode to shift to one condition that a game has not been performed for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective Perform processing etc.

<Start effect setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set by the main control apparatus 101 is the normal mode, the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, or the specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is selected. The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are set as flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, and the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S1802, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, the current display mode is specified by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

  In the following step S1902, it is determined based on the received lottery result command whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the winning combination winning. If it is determined that the winning order has been won, in step S1903, a pressing order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not a push order notification command is included as the start time command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process ends. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the third replay win is established, and then the push order notification process Finish.

  If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is not won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is fallen falls replay 1 to 3. In the case of fall down replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to perform the push order notification that the first replay game winning is established, and then ends the push order notification process. Do.

  If it is determined in step S2004 that the fall fall replay is not 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replay 1 or 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, at the time of setting of the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that the notification of VB winning has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The notified flag is cleared based on transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification completion flag. If the notification of winning in the VB mode has been made, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform pressing order notification in which the fourth and fifth replay wins are established in step S2008, and then pressing order notification End processing. If the notification of the winning of the VB mode has not been made, the process proceeds to step S2005, and after performing the notification of the pressing order for the first replay win, the processing for notifying the pressing order is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2006 that the second promotion replay 1 and 2 are not performed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1 and 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is checked to determine whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If the VB mode is in effect, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the push order notification in which the sixth to eighth replay wins are established in step S2011, and then the push order notification processing ends. Do. If the VB mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2005 above, and the push order notification for the first replay win is performed, and then the push order notification process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2009 that BAR replay 1 and 2 are not performed, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If the bell is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pushing order notification that the bell winning is established as the first small winning combination in step S2013, and then the pushing order notification process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the processing for notification of order of pressing is ended as it is.

  Returning to the description of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45), when it is determined in step S1902 that the winning combination is not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the specific winning combination is won. If the specific combination is won, processing for notification of the specific combination is performed in step S1905. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the process of step S1903 or step S1905 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether an add-on command is received as the start command of this time. If the addition command is received, in step S1907, processing is performed to set an additional effect in advance so that the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is executed at the time of stop. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games as “+10”. In addition, in the additional effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, “curly”) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  The details of the setting process of the additional effect in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S 2101, processing for grasping the number of added games is performed based on the added command received this time. In the subsequent step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. In the notification timing lottery process, it is assumed that the additional effect is performed in the current game, and the timing in the game at which the additional effect is performed is lottery.

  The additional effect is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 48, the first reel, the second reel, the third reel, and the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, the timing when the stop ON operation is performed when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of each reel, and the timing when the stop OFF operation when the pressing operation is ended are performed; Is set.

  Here, supplementary description will be given of the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are displaceable from an initial position disposed on the front side to an operation position disposed on the back side. In the situation where it is disposed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are operated by operating from the initial position to the operation position. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal, the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop ON operation has been performed, in which the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed.

  The stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pressed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are initially set by the biasing force of the spring or the like Return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a switch from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, based on the fact that the detection signal has been switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed in which the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is ended.

  The additional effect is set so as to occur as a stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 at any of the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation. That is, in the game in which the additional effect is generated, the additional effect may occur not only at the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing at which the pressing operation is ended.

  In the execution timing table of the additional effect, for example, when 5 games to 10 games are added as the number of games with a relatively small number of added games, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. The timing at which the first reel stop OFF operation is performed is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, and the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (at the time of stop of all reels) is selected at 30%. In this case, the stop OFF operation is more easily selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the rear operation is more easily selected.

  On the other hand, when the addition of 100 games or more occurs, for example, as the number of games having a relatively large number of additional games, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel Is 10%, the second reel stop ON operation is 5%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 30%, the third reel stop ON operation is 5%, the third reel stop OFF operation ( When all reels are stopped, 45% are selected. Also in this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear operation is relatively easy to select.

  That is, in the present embodiment, it is set such that the additional effect is more easily generated at the stop OFF operation than at the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when the first to third reels are compared, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most easily selected, and the stop operation of the second reel is next most easily selected, and the first reel is stopped. The operation time is set to be most easily selected.

  Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the additional effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result in step S2102 is the stop ON time of any reel. judge. If the stop is ON, in step S2104, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur at the time of the stop ON operation of the target reel. Specifically, processing is performed to set any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of generation of the additional effect. Also, in step S2104, processing of reading out effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in a predetermined effect data setting area. I do. The CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area when grasping that the additional effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, and performs the additional effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. If it is at the time of stop OFF operation of these reels, at step S2106, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, processing is performed to set either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of generation of the additional effect. Also in step S2106, effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of games to be added is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and processing for temporarily storing the data in a predetermined effect data setting area is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2105, it is set in step S2107 to generate the current additive effect when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and OFF is operated). Specifically, processing is performed to set the third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2107, temporary storage processing of effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After the process of step S2104, step S2106 or step S2107 is performed, the setting process of the additional effect is ended.

  Returning to the description of the start effect setting process, if the addition command is not received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S1908, and the process proceeds to step S1909. After setting the other start effects at step S1910, the start effect setting process is ended. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the processing of step S1910, for example, processing is performed to set an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, or to turn off a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been received.

<Equipment setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation time effect setting process performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of the respective reels.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2202, and it is determined whether an effect generated at the time of a stop ON operation of the reel is set as an effect of the current game. If the setting has not been made, this setting processing ends. If it is set, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is for the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting processing is ended as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed in step S2204, and then this setting processing is ended.

  For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop ON operation at this time, as shown in FIG. 50A, the auxiliary display unit 65 at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An extra production occurs at. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Also, for example, when the current game is a winning order and the pressing order notification effect is set, the pressing order notification effect is the next operation target by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. It changes to the effect which shows the reel which becomes. Specifically, in the situation where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display for operating the first reel shown in FIG. 37A is made. . When the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next operation target reel (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 37 (b) is shown. It changes to the production. Further, in the situation where two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display for setting the second reel shown in FIG. 37 (b) as the stop target is performed, and the second stop operation is performed by the stop ON operation. Based on the stop of the reel, the display changes to the display for stopping the third reel (FIG. 37C).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2205 to determine whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the respective reels is finished.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2206, and it is determined whether an effect generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the reel is set as the effect of the current game. If the setting has not been made, this setting processing ends. If it is set, it is determined in step S2207 whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop OFF operation. When it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting processing is ended as it is. If it is the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2208, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

  For example, when additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is ended, and from the stop switches 42 to 44 At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the present effect setting process ends.

<All stop production setting process>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S 2301, it is determined whether a challenge mode end command is included as a currently received stop command. If a challenge mode end command is included, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled such that a challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2302. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the character display “end of challenge mode” is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "more aggressiveness!" In a male wild voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If a challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether an attack mode start command is included as a currently received stop command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57A, the character display of “attack mode !! Ver. 1” is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" With a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the character display "attack mode !! Ver. 2" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a promotion effect. In addition, when the attack mode rank is promoted to the third attack mode, the character display “Attack mode !! Ver. 3” is displayed, and when promoted to the fourth attack mode, the character “Attack mode !! Ver. 4” Display is done.

  If no attack mode start command is included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether an attack mode end command is included as a currently received stop command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the character display "Attack mode END" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the attack mode (VB mode including the specialization zone this time) is included. And the total number of payouts for the current attack mode (including the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "again" with a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If no attack mode end command is included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether a VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode start command is included, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58A, the character display "777 VICTORY !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed such that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether the VB mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, processing for setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the character display "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continued games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode. The number of continued games (including the VB mode and the specialization zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of the attack mode (including the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the bonus) at the end of the VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I will continue still" in male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If it is determined in step S2311 that the VB mode end command is not included, it is determined in step S2313 whether the specialization zone start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a specialization zone start command is included, processing for setting specialization zone start effects is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a character display of “Supercharge Challenge !!” is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a special mode in which it is easy to generate an attack mode. Display a character that suggests that the In addition, in the specialization zone start effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I will go" in the voice of a boy) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the specialization zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether the specialization zone end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the specialization zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing is performed to set specialization zone end presentation. In the specialization zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the specialization zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, “curly”) is emitted from the speaker 64. Note that the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 may be made different according to the total number of games played.

  If no specialization zone end command is included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether a bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, while displaying the total number of payouts obtained during this bonus on the auxiliary display unit 65, and an attack mode, a VB mode, or a bonus transferred to a specialization zone, an attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts in VB mode, specialization zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, effects such as characters suggesting these contents are performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of added games.

  After executing any of the processes of step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316, and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2317, the process proceeds to step S2309, step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already described, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, when the generation timing of the addition effect this time is set at the time of all the stops in the setting processing of the addition effect (FIG. 47), as shown in FIG. 50 (c), all the reels 32L and 32M. , 32R, the auxiliary display unit 65 generates an additional effect. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Thereafter, in step S2310 and step S2320, after setting the other effect at the time of stop, the present effect setting process is ended. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or is controlled so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64. And control so that a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is emitted from the speaker 64.

  As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying of the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to the notification of the transition of the display modes, processing for presentation in various games is performed.

<Processing for Effects in Various Games>
In the present embodiment, continuous effects and bonus in-progress effects are provided as effects in various games. A continuous effect is an effect that expects a player to have an advantageous result (a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.) and is expected to be played multiple times (four times in the present embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued throughout the game, and is an effect for which notification of whether or not the advantageous result is obtained in the final game is performed. The bonus-in-provision effect is an effect to be performed in each game in the bonus state in which transition is made based on the first BB or second BB winning.

  The outline of continuous rendering will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), a display indicating the number of continuations of the continuous effect is performed at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set (in FIG. Showing a sluggish drop production). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, an effect of the successful drop of the first stage is shown, It indicates that continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is provided to notify that the continuous effect is ended halfway (for example, an effect such as the first step of which the sluggish drop fails ). The effects relating to the presence or absence of the continuous effect are the same in each game in the continuous effect.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the slow drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuation of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, the effect of the successful second stage drop is shown, and the continuous effect is continued) Show).

  As shown in FIG. 60 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of the slow drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuation of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, the effect of the successful third row drop is shown, and the continuous effect is continued) Show).

  As shown in FIG. 60 (d), at the start of the final game of the continuous effect (the fourth game), a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, the effect of dropping one step). Then, at the end of the final game, it is rendered whether or not it is an advantageous result for the player (in the figure, the rendering of the successful completion of the final stage is shown).

  As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is taken over and the effect of the next game is set, and the effects of each game have continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of continuous rendering (how many games are until the end of continuous rendering).

  Here, in each game of continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous effect progresses. That is, when the first game of the continuous effect ends, the possibility that the continuation of the continuous effect is notified is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of the notification of the non-continuity decreases. Therefore, in continuous rendering, the height of the player's interest is greatly different depending on the number of games in the continuous rendering that the current game is, and as the progress from the start game to the end game, high interest comes to be obtained .

  Hereinafter, as processing relating to the above continuous effects and bonus effects, the bonus effect setting process (step S1908) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 45), the specific hand notification process (step S1905), the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) Each will be described.

<In-bonus effect processing>
First, the bonus effect presentation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the bonus effect presentation setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether a bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB is won to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S2401 is the case where the first BB or second BB winning is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2402, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter of the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus internal effect counter is a counter for executing an effect set for each game in accordance with the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the bonus game of the first BB or the second BB, the combination in which nine medals are paid out for each game is won, and the bonus is ended with the medals paid out of 216. That is, the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB end in 24 games. And, the effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned in-bonus effect counter is a counter for grasping which game of 24 games should be produced. It is. Then, in step S2402, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games. After the processing of step S2402, in step S2403, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The bonus in-progress flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the bonus in-progress is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2403 is performed, the bonus effect presentation process is ended.

<Process for notification of specific combination>
Next, the specific combination notification process performed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as a start command at this time. If the precursor command is not included, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the additional command is included as the current start command. If the addition command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not a bonus is won. When the bonus is not won, that is, when the specific combination is won as the lottery result, it is not elected in the challenge mode, the attack mode, the transition to VB mode lottery, or the number of continuation games added If the bonus is not won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2504. The pseudo precursor mode is difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode in appearance, but in the precursor mode, an advantageous result (such as winning in the challenge mode) is informed based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode in which the game is ended without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the end of the number of pseudo precursor games.

  In step S2504, the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 183b, and the lottery for whether to execute the pseudo precursor mode is performed. Do. In the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery, the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is set to be different according to the type of the specific part being won, for example, strong cherries are pseudo rather than weak cherries. The probability of winning the lottery in the precursor mode is set to be high.

  In step S2505, it is determined based on the processing result of step S2504 whether or not the lottery of the pseudo precursor mode is won. If the game has been won, in step S2506, a lottery process of the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed. This processing corresponds to the step S 810 and the like on the main control apparatus 101 side, and randomly determines one false precursor game number of 1 to 32 by lottery. In the subsequent step S2507, processing is performed to set the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result notification, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are continuously rendered, continuous rendering is started in a game in which the continuous rendering counter is 4 and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous rendering counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after continuous rendering. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous effect counter in step S2507 above, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous effect (the remaining 4 games), continuous effect is started It will be.

  In step S2508, processing is performed to set a pseudo flag indicating that it is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a. In the subsequent step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the specific combination notification process is ended. When the determination in step S2501 to step S2503 is affirmative or when the determination in step S2505 is negative, the processing for notification of the specific combination is ended.

<Continuous effect setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, in step S2602, processing is performed to input the precursor game number of the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (the remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. When the number of precursor games of 1 game to 3 games is input to the continuous effect counter in step S 2602, the continuous effect is started halfway. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2602, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the effect of the third game in the continuous effect of FIG. 60 (c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the notification of winning in the attack mode or the like is performed without passing through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not performed. After the process of step S2602, the continuous effect flag is set in step S2603.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after the process of step S2603 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, in step S2605, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. If the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, in step S2607, it is determined whether the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608 to acquire a present indication effect table from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, from the main effect rendering table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding continuous rendering effect data is specified, the corresponding rendering data is acquired from the rendering data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous rendering Perform processing to set as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the actual effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, it becomes effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game, and the continuous effect counter If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

  If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo precursory effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2611, from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, specify the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect, obtain the corresponding effect data from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and perform the current continuous effect Perform processing to set as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the false precursor effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game or effect data indicating that it does not continue If the continuous effect counter is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

  The effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes one in which the continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous game continues until the next game in FIG. 60 (a). In the case where the effect data of the first effect game is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second effect game showing that the continuous effect does not continue until the next game in FIG. 60 (b) is set. By doing this, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of simulated precursor games of the simulated precursor mode is 0.

  After performing the processing of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the continuous effect counter is zero. If the continuous effect counter is 0, processing is performed to clear the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag in step S2613. If the pseudo flag is not set, the state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after the process of step S2613, the present continuous rendering setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether the bonus in-progress flag is set. If it is set, in step S2615, the bonus effect counter is decremented. Specifically, the bonus effect counter is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S2616, the bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2617, the corresponding bonus effect data is specified from the bonus effect table and the bonus effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b, and the current bonus effect is performed. Perform processing to set as. In step S2618, it is determined whether the bonus effect counter is zero or not. If the during-bonus effect counter is 0, processing is performed to clear the during-bonus effect flag in step S2619. Thereafter, the continuous effect setting process is ended.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main control device 101 side is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R The rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and when the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds In the configuration to which the benefit is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of being replayed are provided as a result of the lottery process, and the RT state shifts by the establishment of winnings of corresponding promotion replays and fall replays. Whether or not the corresponding replay is achieved is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the acceptance lottery, and the notification of the operation order is a transition of the display mode performed according to the result of the lottery process It is performed by winning the lottery. A push order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell winning and obtain a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state in which the replay probability improves, and by transitioning to the display mode in which notification of the operation order is performed, in the RT state, the push is performed with the replay probability improved. A forward bell prize can be established, and a large number of medals can be obtained.

  The transition events of the display mode transition lot number and the continuation game number such as the attack mode, etc. which trigger the acquisition of a large number of medals and the trigger event as winning in the bonus pass / fail lottery are strong cherries, weak cherries, strong This problem occurs when the player has won a specific role such as watermelon, weak watermelon, chances A and B, and middle bell. That is, a small combination (separate combination) of IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45 or a double combination is set as the specific combination, and when these specific combinations are won, a transition lottery of the display mode or the like is generated as a trigger event. An additional lottery will be conducted, or a bonus lottery will be won. The specific part is a part that is won with a relatively lower probability than the bell, the replay, etc., and is also called a rare part. Therefore, the player plays each game while expecting the occurrence of such a relatively low probability trigger event.

  Here, the transition drawing of the display mode based on the specific combination and the bonus acceptance lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the transition lottery of the display mode, and the set values.

  As described above, as the specific part, a single part such as strong cherry of IV = 13 to 19 and an overlapping part of the bonus of IV = 32 to 45 are set.

  In the first BB and the second BB, a winning flag corresponding to a bonus is won when the player wins a dual role with a bonus of IV = 32 to 45, and when the bonus single role of IV = 46, 47 is won. The 1BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set. On the other hand, when the single winning combination of IV = 13 to 19 is won, the bonus is not double winning. That is, when it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process of FIG. 16 that IV = 13-19 is won, a winning combination of a small winning combination corresponding to these IV = 13-19 is selected in step S308. Flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning flag), but in step S307 bonus winning flag (1st BB winning flag, 2BB winning flag) is not set. That is, the trigger event as the bonus winning occurs in the game winning with IV = 32 to 45, and does not occur in the game winning with IV = 13-19.

  The trigger event as the bonus winning may differ in the occurrence probability depending on the set value that causes a change in the payout rate. That is, of IV = 32 to 45, the same winning probability is obtained regardless of the setting value for the overlapping role with the first BB, and the occurrence probability is the same, while the overlapping probability with the second BB differs depending on the setting value It is a winning probability and the occurrence probability is different. More specifically, strong cherry duplication 1 (IV = 32), weak cherry duplication 1 (IV = 34), strong watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 36), weak watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 38), chance A duplication 1 (IV) The probability of winning in chance B duplication 1 (IV = 42) and middle bell duplication 1 (IV = 44) is set to be the same probability regardless of the set value, while strong cherry duplication 2 (IV = 33), weak cherry duplicate 2 (IV = 35), strong watermelon duplicate 2 (IV = 37), weak watermelon duplicate 2 (IV = 39), chance A duplicate 2 (IV = 41), chance B duplicate 2 The probability of winning in middle bell overlap 2 (IV = 45) is set to be different depending on the set value (IV = 43). Further, the probability of independently winning to the first BB and the second BB is set so as to be the same winning probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, while the first BB is set to have the same occurrence probability regardless of the set value, the second BB is set to have a different occurrence probability depending on the set value.

  The transition drawing of the display mode is performed when a single winning combination of IV = 13 to 19 single winnings and IV = 32 to 45 double winning combinations is selected to have the same probability of occurrence depending on the set value. On the other hand, it is not carried out when the winning combination of IV = 32 to 45 winning combinations is set so as to have different occurrence probabilities depending on the setting value (or, although it is implemented, the winning probability becomes 0) Is set to That is, regardless of the presence or absence of a bonus overlap, when a winning combination with different winning probability depending on the set value is won, the transition lottery of the display mode is not performed, but the winning combination of the same winning probability is set based on the set value At time, a transition lottery of the display mode is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, unlike the trigger event as the bonus winning, it can be said that the trigger event relating to the display mode is set so that the occurrence probability does not differ depending on the set value. With regard to the trigger event related to the display mode, the performance also differs depending on the set value with regard to the winning probability of the addition lottery for the number of continued games in the attack mode and the challenge mode and the number of additional games at the time of winning. It is determined not to

  That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous state as the bonus state which becomes advantageous for the player by changing the probability (lottery table) of the winning combination of the small winning combination, and the notification of the operation order of the pushing order. When comparing with the second advantageous state such as the attack mode which becomes advantageous for the player by becoming to be performed, the winning probability (transition probability) differs depending on the set value in the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state The probability of winning (transition probability) does not differ depending on the set value.

  The most interesting thing about the so-called slot machine game is that it will make a chance lottery for the part in each game and perform the stop operation of each reel according to the result, and it is a privilege by instructing the operation order of the reel stop operation There is also a thought that the second advantageous state to try to get is a secondary game. From that point of view, depending on the set value, although it is acceptable that the winning probability in the first advantageous state is different, it is not preferable that the winning probability is different up to the second advantageous state of the above-mentioned secondary game. Conceivable. If the winning probability is different depending on the setting value even for the above-mentioned secondary game, the difference in the payout rate due to the winning probability of each combination as the main game becomes smaller, and as a result, the master-slave of the game is reversed Because there is a possibility of

  Therefore, as described above, by adjusting the payout rate according to the first advantageous state, and taking the second advantageous state as a secondary game, these first advantageous effects can be achieved without destroying the original gaming characteristics of the slot machine. It is possible to realize the playability by the cooperation between the state and the second advantageous state.

  With regard to such first and second advantageous states, the two advantageous states are respectively implemented separately and are set such that the two states do not overlap. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, when the first BB or the second BB is won and it shifts to the bonus state (BB state), the bonus state is maintained until the specified number of payouts are performed. Migration does not occur. Further, the display mode is also shifted to the BB mode, and the BB mode is maintained until the bonus state ends (a shift to the attack mode or the like does not occur). Then, when the first BB or the second BB is won in the attack mode, the display mode shifts to the BB mode, and the attack mode is resumed after the BB mode ends (FIG. 40).

  On the other hand, during one advantageous state, the trigger event of the other advantageous state is generated. More specifically, although in the first advantageous state, which is the main game, a subordinate game is not triggered and a trigger event related to the second advantageous state (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.) does not occur, in the second advantageous state. A trigger event (bonus winning) relating to the first advantageous state may be generated. Specifically, in each small winning combination (IV = 29 to 31) in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the transition lottery and the additional lottery of the attack mode and the like are not performed, and the trigger event regarding the second advantageous state does not occur. . On the other hand, in the attack mode or the VB mode as the second advantageous state, a winning combination of IV = 32 to 45 can be won, so that a trigger event relating to the first advantageous state can occur. Thus, while limiting the overlapping implementation of the two advantageous states, the other trigger event can be generated, so the chain of the two advantageous states is easily generated, and the interest is improved.

  Here, in the second advantageous state, when notification of the operation order of the pushing order is performed, in addition to the pushing order notification effect (the pushing order notification effect by the display control device 81) by the auxiliary display unit 65 of FIG. The notification of the order of pressing is also performed by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 62 (b) is a view for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source formed of an LED, and it is possible to turn on only one arbitrary display segment by on / off control of the individual light sources. Any combination of display segments can be illuminated. Thereby, on the instruction monitor 68, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed. In addition, since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

  In detail about each display segment N1 to N8, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 to the seventh display The segment N7 is arranged to be able to display at least the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is disposed laterally of the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least “1” to “6”, “1.” to “6.”, and “.”.

  In addition, if it is possible to individually display symbols of a plurality of patterns in the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and not 7 segments but 7 segments. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, etc. may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changeable. In addition, the configuration for controlling lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 is not essential by controlling the light source on / off, and if display control can be individually performed on each display segment N1 to N8, The segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, a symbol may be displayed by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

  The first display segment N <b> 1 to the seventh display segment N <b> 7 are display segments used for informing of the operation sequence of the pushing order. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a winning mode which is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation sequence of each stop switch 42 to 44 In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when it becomes a winning mode advantageous to the player by performing the stop operation in the order of “right” → “left” → “medium” as the operation order of the respective stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5 and the sixth display segment N6 are displayed in a lit state, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and displayed on the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win in a manner advantageous to the player.

  The eighth display segment N8 is simultaneously selected in the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, or the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, or the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode. Lights up when winning a bonus (1st BB) to be earned. In addition, when the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, and the first BB end and transition to the normal mode is made (except when transitioning to the attack mode or the like again after passing through the precursor mode), the light is turned off.

  In other words, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high frequency mode) where the player can be made to win in an advantageous manner for the player easily by being notified of the operation order of the push order bell and push order replay A chance state (Challenge mode or 1BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win a transition lottery, or a transition lottery to a navigation state or a chance state, but a winning state that does not transition to these navigation states or a chance state A section including a state (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section, and is turned off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether it is an advantageous section.

  The eighth display segment N8 starts the game in which the game result (specific player such as strong cherry, etc.) triggered by the advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won Then, lighting is started as a notification of becoming an advantageous section at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game following the start game. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result winning which is the trigger of the advantageous section is established, that is, regardless of whether or not the dropout occurs, the game having the game result winning is The eighth display segment N8 is turned on at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as the game operation by the player in the next game. That is, lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started before the start of the next game of the game won by the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

  As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is the payout number in the game panel 25. It is disposed near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 operated by the player, in other words, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided. Is not placed on the makeup panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like operating the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and the eighth display segment N8 is arranged at a position easy for the player to visually recognize. In addition, even if the player advancing the game with the aim of acquiring the medals is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch, it can be said that the player's miss is suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a lightness higher than the lightness of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The lightness of the corresponding LED is determined so as to be twice the lightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the peripheral display portions are both controlled to emit light (when the light is turned on), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous at a glance ing. With regard to the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display portion (more specifically, the illuminance of the display portion in the surrounding 2 The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so as to be twice the illuminance). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and missing when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is suppressed.

  Hereinafter, a section display first process and a section display second process will be described as processing relating to turning on / off of the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The section display first process is a process performed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is determined based on the lottery result. It is implemented after the transition lottery of the display mode (lottery result handling process) is performed.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is on. As described above, in the case where the eighth display segment N8 is on, the attack mode, the super attack mode, the transition lottery to the challenge mode, or a state in which the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won is selected as an advantageous section, or It shows a case. If a negative determination is made in step S2701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the transition to the challenge mode lottery, the attack mode, or the attack mode is performed in the current lottery process. And the case of winning the transition lottery to the super attack mode. As described above, in the first specific part process (FIG. 32), when winning in the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the challenge mode winning flag is set, and the transition lottery to the attack mode or the super attack mode is won In the case, the attack mode winning flag is set. If no flag is set in step S2702, the current section display first process ends.

  If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2703 to execute display start mode lottery processing. In the display start mode lottery process, the display start mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lighting mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous section. In the display start mode table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set to be different depending on the content of the advantageous section.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, as the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8, when the start lever 41 is operated, when the stop ON operation of the first reel, when the stop OFF operation of the first reel, the second The stop ON operation of the reel, the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the stop ON operation of the third reel, the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and the medal payout completion based on winning are respectively set. In this case, the section display first process is one process of the lottery process performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the time of the operation of the start lever 41 in the lighting start timing is the lottery process At the time of operation of the start lever 41 which became a trigger of (1), lighting is immediately started after the section display first processing. In the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel, the first stop of the three stop switches 42 to 44 is the first reel, and the next stop is the first reel. The second reel, and the last reel that has been stopped is the third reel. The stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation are as described above, and the operation of pushing the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position disposed on the front side to the operation position disposed on the back side is the stop ON operation, and the stop The operation to return from the operation position to the initial position by releasing the hand from the switches 42 to 44 or the like is the stop OFF operation. In addition, when the medal payout is completed, if the winning is not established due to the dropout etc., the lighting is started without passing through the payout processing.

  When transitioning to the challenge mode (when the challenge mode winning flag is set), 5% is applied when the start lever 41 is operated, 10% is applied when the first reel is stopped ON, and the first reel is stopped OFF. The time is 55%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 3%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is It is selected at the rate of 6% and 1% of medal payment completion time. In addition, when transitioning to the attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set), 3% is applied when the start lever 41 is operated, 3% is applied when the first reel is stopped ON, and the first reel is stopped. 6% at the time of OFF operation, 10% at the time of stop ON of the second reel, 55% at the time of stop OFF of the second reel, 5% at the time of stop ON of the third reel, the operation of stop OFF of the third reel The time is 15%, and the medal payout completion time is selected at a rate of 3%. Then, when transitioning to the super attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set and the specialized zone flag is set), the time at which the start lever 41 is operated is 1%, and the first reel is stopped. 2% at the time of ON operation, 4% at the time of stop OFF operation of the first reel, 8% at the time of stop ON operation of the second reel, 20% at the time of stop OFF operation of the second reel, the stop ON operation of the third reel The time is 8%, the time to stop and stop the third reel 50%, and the medal payout completion time is selected at a rate of 7%.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when transitioning to the advantageous section, a section indicator selected in the transition to the challenge mode, the transition to the attack mode, and the transition to the super attack mode (eighth The display start timing of the display segment N8) is set to be different, and in the case of the challenge mode, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is most easily selected, and in the attack mode, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is most selected. In the super attack mode, it is most easy to select the stop OFF operation of the third reel. The challenge mode is a so-called chance zone that is easy to shift to the attack mode, the attack mode is a navigation state where push order notification is easy to be performed, and the super attack mode is a navigation state to shift to the attack mode through the special specialization zone. The attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the challenge mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to shift to the advantageous section, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is largely different depending on the content of the advantageous section. In this game, the eighth display segment N8 is displayed in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes has been won, since the contents and advantages of such an advantageous section and the eighth display segment plane are associated with N8. It becomes possible to draw great attention to the timing to start lighting.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is later, it is easier to shift to the advantageous section of the mode advantageous to the player. Therefore, a device is provided in which the sensation of whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lighted can be obtained gradually and in stages.

  In addition, while giving preference to display start timing in each mode, any display start timing can be selected even when any mode is selected. That is, for example, when the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the time of operation of the start lever 41, the possibility of winning the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is the highest, and it is possible The probability is not zero for the least likely super attack mode, although it is set to be the least sexual. By doing this, even if lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from the timing desired by the player, it is possible not to give up until the notification of winning the mode is performed. it can.

  Here, as already described, the notification of winning in the challenge mode (challenge mode start effect, step S1802) and the notification of winning in the attack mode (attack mode winning notification, step S1804) are the precursor modes. It is performed at the time of betting operation of the next game after the precursor game number becomes 0. On the other hand, for the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, the game in which the game result that triggered the transition lottery such as the challenge mode is established is the start game, and the bet operation of the next game is permitted. Lighting is started at a timing earlier than That is, even if the precursor mode is set to 0 game, the notification of the advantageous section by the section indicator is performed first when the winning notification effect of each mode transition is compared with the notification of the advantageous section by the section indicator. In such a relationship, when lighting of the zone indicator is started, it is not possible to completely specify which mode has been won, so that mode switching is performed after lighting of the zone indicator is started. It is also possible to provide a feeling of pounding during a period in which the informing notification effect of is performed.

  Further, when the stop operation of each reel is seen, the stop OFF operation is more easily selected than the stop ON operation. Therefore, in a situation where it is not confirmed whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is considered that the operation during the stop OFF operation is performed while holding a sense of expectation of lighting rather than the stop ON operation. . In this case, when the stop switch 42 to 44 is operated to stop ON, the corresponding reel is stopped, and when the stop switch 42 to 44 is operated to stop OFF, the possibility that the corresponding reel is stopped is high. Therefore, the stop switch 42 holds a high expectation that the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the situation where the corresponding reel is stopped than the situation before the corresponding reel is stopped. It is considered that the operation of -44 is performed.

  For example, comparing the time of weak cherry winning of the 27th small part and the strong cherry winning of the 28th small part, the reels 32 L and 32 M are selected for the 27th small part winning and the 28th small part winning. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "Cherry" symbol in 32R, the stop point of the left reel 32L is common, and the "Cherry" symbol stops in the upper or lower part of the left reel 32L. . In this case, by stopping the middle reel 32M, it is determined whether the twenty-seventh small winning combination or the twenty-eighth small winning combination has been won. And in this embodiment, it is set as the composition which has a possibility of winning in the transition lottery to an advantageous section about any of the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination. That is, if the eighth display segment N8 is not lit in a situation where the left reel 32L is stopped, (1) the game result of the current game is a weak cherry winning, and the eighth display segment N8 is still The case where the lighting timing has not been reached, (2) the game result of the current game is the weak cherry winning, and the case where the transition lottery to any advantageous section is not won, (3) the game of the current game In the case where the result is a strong cherry winning and the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 has not been reached yet, (4) the game result of the current game is a strong cherry winning, and transition to any advantageous section There may be cases where the lottery is not won. Then, by stopping the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R as the second reel, it is determined whether the case is the case (1) or (2) or the case (3) or (4). And since it is easier to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section when the strong cherry wins than when the weak cherry wins, the player is more likely than in the case of (1) or (2), It is considered that the stop operation of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is performed while expecting to be the case 3) or (4). That is, since the "cherry" symbol also stops at a predetermined position on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, it is determined that the case is (3) or (4), so the "cherry" symbol stops. It is thought that the stop operation is performed while wishing for something. And it can be said that stop OFF operation in that situation is either the case of the above (3) or the case of (4), and whether the interval indicator lights up more purely It can be entertained. In other words, since the eighth display segment N8 is hard to light up when the stop ON operation is performed while wishing that the "cherry" symbol is stopped, it is possible to more purely "cherry" at the time of the stop ON operation. You can enjoy the game of stopping the symbol. In this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's attention to be distracted and events for which the player can not enjoy the game to occur, by dividing the part where the player would be interested in making it difficult to duplicate. Is possible.

  Returning to the explanation of the section display first process, after executing the display start mode lottery process at step S2703, at step S2704, a process of setting the display start mode based on the lottery result of step S2703 is performed. In this case, processing is performed to set a flag corresponding to the timing determined by lottery. Then, in processing for display start (not shown) individually activated as processing for display start of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8), processing for respectively determining whether or not it is a timing corresponding to these flags At the same time, if it is the corresponding timing, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to that timing is set, and if it is set, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is started . For example, if it is determined in step S2703 that the time of the first stop OFF operation has been determined, a flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set. In the processing for the display start, each determination processing such as whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever 41, whether or not it is the first stop ON operation timing, and whether or not it is the first stop OFF operation timing is performed. , And the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started on the condition that the first stop OFF operation timing is determined and the flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set as described above Switch from the state to the lit state). The processing for starting display is configured as periodic processing that is activated every predetermined period (for example, 1.49 msec period), and is assumed to be activated as one processing of timer interrupt processing, for example.

  In addition, when the main control device 101 starts display with the eighth display segment N8 as a section display turned on, a predetermined sound effect (for example, mechanical sound called "gagog!") Is displayed from the speaker 64. The sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that the sound is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. The auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit may be configured to generate an effect at the start of the display of the eighth display segment N8. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed by the display control device 81.

  After the processing of step S2704 is executed, processing of starting measurement of the number of continued games of the advantageous section is executed in step S2705, and then the section display first processing is ended. The number of continuing games in the advantageous section is measured by measuring the number of advantageous section games AG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S2705, the processing is performed to set the advantageous section game number AG to 0 which is an initial value. I do. A process of adding one by one in each game in the advantageous section is executed for the advantageous section game number AG.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, processing for continuing display in the advantageous section is performed in step S2706, and then the present section display first processing is performed. Finish. Specifically, in step S2706, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the on state.

<Section display second process>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the section display second process is a process carried out in step S415 of the reel control process, and the payout of the medal (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning result when one game is over. Etc. (Paid result handling process) is performed.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is displayed as a section display. When the light is off (non-lighting, non-displaying), the section display second process is ended as it is. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, processing for counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding one to the above-described advantageous section game number AG is performed. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games executed in a state where the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured.

  After executing the processing of step S2802, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the number-of- advantageous-intervals game number AG has reached the upper limit value "1500". If “1500” is reached, the number AG of advantageous section games is cleared to 0 in step S2804, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off as the processing for ending the display of the section indicator in step S2805. Do the process of Then, after the data initialization process is performed in step S2806, the section display second process is ended.

  The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the transition to the current advantageous period, and the flags and counters set in the current advantageous region to their initial values. For example, a challenge mode winning flag or an attack mode winning flag may be set upon transition to an advantageous section, or a VB mode winning flag may be set during the attack mode, and the flag may remain set until the initialization process. For example, clear these winning flags. Further, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the precursor counter, the counter for the number of continued games such as the attack mode, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all the variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification. Processing.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S2807, and it is determined whether the advantageous section has ended. That is, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not both the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag are set, and in step S2808, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is a state. Affirmative determination in any of step S2807 and step S2808 means that the advantageous section has ended before reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous section, and in this case, in the step S2809, the advantageous section game number AG is set. While clearing to 0, at step S2810 the end processing of the display of the section indicator is carried out, and then the section display second processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S2807 or step S2808, the section display second processing is ended as it is still in the advantageous section. In this case, the lighting display of the section display (eighth display segment N8) is continued.

<Display of push order indicator and section indicator and progress of game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

  In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 66, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, the push order notification effect is not performed. That is, with respect to the advantageous section having the performance related to the indication function such as the push order notification, it can be said that the normal section is a section not having the indication function. The situation in which the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

  In a normal section, for example, when winning a transition drawing to an advantageous section such as a challenge mode or an attack mode by winning a weak watermelon part winning game, a game in which the game result which is the trigger of the win is established is set as a start game. At the timing before the bet operation by the player is permitted in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator lights up, and notification of the advantageous section is started.

  In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is a state before the transition to the advantageous section, and is a game included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator indicating an advantageous section, a timing at which notification of the advantageous section permits a bet operation of the game following the start game in which the weak watermelon role is won. That is, assuming that the game in which the advantageous section is started is performed at the timing when the game becomes possible, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon winning game (starting game). The notification can be said to be a destination notification performed prior to the notification (in-state notification, in-mode notification) of being an advantageous section. And as mentioned above, in this embodiment, it is set as the composition which suggests the contents thru / or the degree of advantage of the advantageous section concerned, when the information about being an advantageous section is performed by this prior information.

  After that, in a situation where it is notified that the section is an advantageous section, a push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, as described above, the display order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player performs the display based on the display information. You can figure out the order. In the pushing order notification, the pushing order information starts being displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display is ended when the third reel stop ON is operated in the game. When such a game is not the final game of the advantageous section, at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, only the display of the pressing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the winning combination is won again after the next game, the pressing order information corresponding to the pressing combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

  When the number of continuing games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also extinguished, and the notification of the advantageous section is ended. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is on. Specifically, the first game after the start game is set as the first game, and the eighth display segment N8 is finally turned off The number of games in the advantageous section is up to the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second processing which is the processing after the payout determination processing). If the medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

  As described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the advantageous section, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. The eighth display segment N8 is not only started to light up based on transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., but is also based on winning of the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc. Lighting starts. That is, even if the notification is not made in the game won in the transition lottery to these modes, whether or not the transition lottery has been won is confirmed by confirming the presence or absence of the lighting of the eighth display segment N8. It can be clearly understood. By doing this, it is advantageous to the player who ends the game without knowing it even though the player has won the lottery for transition to these modes, and the succeeding player who is seated after that. There is no difference in the degree.

  In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured such that there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value with regard to the game property that changes the degree of advantage by the push order notification such as the challenge mode or the attack mode. Therefore, by setting the playability according to the push order notification to a uniform degree of advantage in each game stand (set value) and each game (situation), it is possible to eliminate the advantage / disadvantage between players and to aim at the pattern and receive a bonus. It is possible to achieve a well-balanced gaming machine by fully enjoying the original gaming properties of the slot machine 10 to obtain the, and the relevance to the gaming properties by the accompanying push order notification.

  On the other hand, it is the interest of the player whether or not to win the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode or the like or to continue these modes in the playability by the push order notification, and whether or not these modes continue. The fact that it becomes obvious at a glance by lighting / non-lighting of the display segment N8 may be advantageous in terms of securing the equality between players, but it may be a demerit in terms of game play and presentation effects . Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the section display first process, the lighting start timing (display start mode) of the eighth display segment N8 is configured to be different depending on the content of the advantageous section to which the transition is made by lighting.

  FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 and the content of the advantageous section to be notified of the win (transitioned) when the weak watermelon role is won as the specific part in the normal section. ing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), it is assumed that the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel when winning in the weak watermelon combination. As a player, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light, which makes it possible to grasp that the transition lottery to the advantageous section has been won, and the lighting is started at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel. From this, it is predicted that the current advantageous section is in the challenge mode (see FIG. 64). Then, the player confirms that the advantageous section of this time is in the challenge mode by the generation of the challenge mode start effect as the notification game after the precursor mode. As already described, the measurement of the advantageous section is started after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started, that is, the advantageous section is also in the precursor mode.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows the case where the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, as a player, it is predicted that the transition lottery to the advantageous section has been won and that the currently advantageous section is in the attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after the precursor mode, an attack mode finalization effect is generated as a notification game, and it is confirmed that the currently advantageous section is in the attack mode.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows the case where the eighth display segment N8 starts to be lighted at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel when the weak watermelon role is won. In this case, as a player, it is predicted that the transition lottery to the advantageous section has been won, and that the presently advantageous section is the super attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after the precursor mode, the additional specialization zone finalization effect is generated as a notification game, and it is confirmed that the advantageous zone of this time is the super attack mode with the additional specialization zone.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 as a zone display is clearly indicated by lighting up, and the eighth display segment N8 is clearly indicated not by lighting out. By making the mode of lighting start of the display segment N8 different, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) while securing the notification function as to whether or not it is the advantageous section.

  Since the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is made different depending on the content of the advantageous section, as a player, the transition drawing to the advantageous section is started by the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 being started. As well as grasping the winning, it is possible to predict the contents thereof, and it is possible to significantly improve the attention when the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

  In particular, since the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery based on the content of the advantageous section, the lighting start mode and the content of the advantageous section do not have a one-to-one relationship, and the player is tentatively Even if the lighting is started in a manner that is not preferable to the game, it is possible to advance the game while maintaining a sense of expectation to the mode to shift to thereafter.

  Moreover, on the premise that the eighth display segment N8 is started to be lighted by the next game to the start game, notification of the challenge mode or the attack mode to be shifted after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started Since the mode start notification effect and attack mode winning notification effect etc. are configured to occur several games after passing the precursor mode, the content of the advantageous section is predicted at the lighting start, and the predicted content is correct during the precursor mode It is possible to play a game in which the contents of the eighth display segment N8 are predicted even after the final notification while making the eighth display segment N8 a so-called final notification so as to enjoy a feeling of excitement.

  Further, as described above, since the eighth display segment N8 is started to be lighted by the next game to the start game, the end of the lighting start timing is predetermined. In such an effect that the end of generation is defined, the content of the advantageous section in the case where the lighting starts is performed in the eighth display segment N8 before the end of the content, the content of the advantageous section is set. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the presentation to be notified. That is, for the player who is interested in whether or not the winning lottery for the transition to the advantageous section has been made in the first place, whether or not the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started is a great concern, and Since the end of the display start timing is defined, it can be said that the timing at which the player should be interested in the eighth display segment N8 is summarized. Under such a premise, if the content notification of the advantageous section is performed in the eighth display segment N8, the content notification of the advantageous section performed by another timing or other display means is overwhelmed. It is possible to make it a notification that raises the level of attention.

  The eighth display segment N8 is mainly configured to light up when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, in the game which may be lit up (the game when the specific combination is won), a feeling of expectation for lighting up is given While it is possible to perform the stop operation, it is possible to intensify the impression caused by the user's own operation as compared with the configuration in which the light is turned on regardless of the operation of the player.

  Moreover, by having a configuration that can be lighted based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to judge the presence or absence of lighting from the relevancy of the stopped eye to be stopped on the operated reel. Specifically, for example, when a strong cherry or a weak cherry is selected, the player may win a transition lottery to a challenge mode or an attack mode etc., while the winning probability of the transition lottery differs between the strong cherry and the weak cherry. Is more likely to win than weak cherry. Therefore, it is considered that, as a player, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be operated while expecting that the lottery result of this game is not weak cherry but strong cherry winning, and the eighth display segment N8 The stop operation can be performed while predicting which of the strong cherry and the weak cherry is in relation to the lighting timing of.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by drawing in accordance with the content of the advantageous section, and the challenge is started even in any display start mode. Although the mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode may be used, the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section may be associated on a one-to-one basis. In addition, a display start mode associated with one to one and a display start mode not associated with each other (there is a possibility for any mode) may be present.

  For example, FIG. 68A shows an example of a display start mode table in which the contents of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated on a one-to-one basis. That is, in this example, when the content of the current advantageous section is in the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light based on the fact that the stop operation of the first reel is performed, and the current advantageous section When the content is in the attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light based on the fact that the second reel is stopped, and when the content of the advantageous section this time is the super attack mode, the third reel The eighth display segment N8 starts to light on the basis of the fact that the stop operation has been performed. By doing this, it is possible to clearly grasp the content of the advantageous section of this time based on the lighting start mode. In particular, the eighth display segment N8 is smaller than the other notification units such as the auxiliary display unit 65, and is easy for only a player playing a game to recognize, and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 There is a high possibility that the content of the advantageous section can be grasped only to the player who is playing the gaming machine. Then, for example, the player who has grasped the super attack mode according to the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is immersed in a sense of superiority of knowing the information that the other player does not know, and the subsequent super It is also possible to wait for the attack mode winning notification effect.

  Also in this example, the transition is made to the advantageous section in which the stop operation of the second reel is more advantageous than the stop operation of the first reel, and the stop operation of the third reel than the stop operation of the second reel. Is set such that the display start at the time of operation on the rear side is advantageous, such as shifting to an advantageous section in which In this way, the game enjoys a balance between the feeling that the display starts early and the transition to the advantageous section is desired, and the feeling that the display starts on the rear side and the transition to the advantageous section is desired Can be realized. For example, if the first reel or the second reel is stopped, and it is predicted / understood that it is possible to have a hope in the super attack mode (for example, middle bell) from the stopped point, the first reel is predicted. Or it will be operated while wishing that it will not start display at the time of stop OFF operation of the second reel, and it is possible to stop the first reel and even in the challenge mode, it is possible to win the part with low possibility of winning (eg weak cherry role) If it is predicted / understood, it is considered that the operation is performed while wishing that the display is started at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel. That is, even in the configuration in which the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section are associated on a one-to-one basis, the ratio of the selection ratio between the stop ON operation time and the stop OFF operation time is as described above. It becomes possible to enjoy whether or not the display is started in relation to the output.

  FIG. 68 (b) is a display start mode table in which the content of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis and the display start mode is not associated. An example is shown. In this example, in addition to the association between the stop operation of each reel and the content of the advantageous section in the table of FIG. 68 (a), the eighth display segment N8 may start to be displayed at the end of the payout, At the end of the payout, it can be selected regardless of the content of the advantageous section. By doing this, it is determined that the super attack mode is won when the stop operation is completed up to the second reel, or it is either out of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section or not (FIG. 68A). Compared to the example, you can enjoy the sensation of excitement until the end.

<Modification 2>
In the present embodiment, a specific state (specific state) that affects the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is provided as the gaming state (playing state). In this modification, the specific state does not change the normal gaming state and the lottery table like each RT state or bonus state, and does not change the performance related to the push order notification like the challenge mode or the attack mode. Although there is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not it is in the specific state, the display start mode table in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section differs depending on whether or not it is the specific state.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows a part of the lottery process (FIG. 16) in the present modification. That is, in this modification, after the priority setting process is performed in step S315, the process for the specific state is performed in step S2901, and then the section display first process of step S316 is performed.

  In the specific state process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69 (b), it is first determined in step S3001 whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed (lighted). If it is displayed (lighted), the processing for specific state is ended as it is. If not being displayed (unlit), it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the game result of the current game is a specific combination winning as a result of the current lottery process. When it is not the specific combination winning, the processing for the specific state is ended as it is. If the specific combination is won, the process advances to step S3003.

  In step S3003, it is determined whether the specific state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specific state flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp whether or not it is in the specific state. If the specific state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3004, and it is determined whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery of the advantageous section in this game has been won. If it is won, the processing for the specific state is ended as it is. If the player has not won, the process advances to step S3005 to execute a specific state lottery process. The specific state lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to shift to a specific state by lottery. For example, a table for lottery is obtained from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery is made from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Get the counter for In this case, the winning probability of the transition lottery may be made different depending on the type of the specific combination, for example, as in the transition lottery to the challenge mode etc., the strong cherry is made to have a higher winning probability than the weak cherry. It is also good, or conversely, weak cherries may have a higher probability of winning than strong cherries. Relationship to the transition to the challenge mode etc. Ease of winning the lottery (The transition to the challenge mode etc. The role that is easy to win the lottery is more difficult to win the transition lottery to the specific state, wins the transition lottery to the challenge mode etc It is possible to make the player's interest even to a role that is more difficult to win in the transition lottery to the challenge mode etc. by setting the harder the role to be in the transition lottery to the specific state).

  After performing the specific state lottery process in step S3005, it is determined in step S3006 whether the result of step S3005 is a winning result. If it has not been won, the processing for the specific state is ended as it is, and if it has been won, the processing proceeds to step S3007. In step S3007, processing is performed to input "3" as a predetermined value to the state counter K provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The state counter K is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the continuation condition in the specific state, and is decremented by one each time the specific combination is won. In the subsequent step S3008, after the specific state flag is set, the present specific state process ends. By setting the specific state flag in step S3008, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S3003.

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the specific state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, similarly to step S3004, it is determined whether or not any of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag has been set, so that the game has won the transitional drawing of the advantageous section in this game. Determine if If the transition lottery has not been won, the state counter K is decremented by 1 in step S3010, and it is determined in step S3011 whether the state counter K has become 0 or not. If the state counter K is not 0, the process for this specific state is ended, and if the state counter K is 0, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012, and then the process for the specific state is ended. Do. If it is determined in step S3009 that the winning lottery of the advantageous section is won, the state counter K is cleared to 0 in step S3013, and then the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012, and the specific state is determined. End processing.

  As described above, the specific state in this modification is a part of the game when it is not a winning lottery for the transition to the advantageous section in the normal section and the game in which the specific part is won, and thereafter, the specific part The game is continued until the game which is won and does not win the transition lottery to the advantageous section is generated three times as a predetermined number of times. That is, the specific state is a state in which the transition is made based on the occurrence of an adverse event for the player in the aspect of the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

  In the section display first process in the present modification, in the display start mode lottery process (step S2703), different display start mode tables are acquired depending on whether or not they are in the specific state. That is, when not in the specific state, the display start mode table of FIG. 64 and the like is acquired to perform lottery of the display start mode, while when it is in the specific state, the display start mode table for the specific state of FIG. And perform a lottery of the display start mode. The display start mode table for the specific state is different from the display start mode table for normal use (for the state which is not the specific state).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the selection rate of the display start mode differs depending not only on the content of the advantageous section but also on the setting value that changes the increase / decrease rate of the medal.

  For example, when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the time of operation of the start lever 41, the time of stop OFF operation of the first reel, the time of stop OFF operation of the third reel, and the time of dispensing end are selected. Although it can be obtained, the selectivity of each timing differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is setting 2, setting 4 and setting 6 than setting 1, setting 3 and setting 5. Is higher, and the even setting is easier to select than the odd setting. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the time of operation of the start lever 41 and thereafter the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, the setting value of the gaming machine is more likely to be an even setting than the odd setting. In addition, when the challenge mode is selected, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the end of the payout is higher for setting 5 than setting 4 and higher for setting 6 than setting 5 and setting 3 or less It is 0. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is lighted at the end of the payout, and thereafter, when transitioning to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 4 or more. Further, at the time of winning in the challenge mode, at the setting 1, the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel is not selected. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel and thereafter, the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 2 or more.

  On the other hand, when the transition lottery to the attack mode is won, the time of operation of the start lever 41, the time of stop OFF operation of the second reel, the time of stop OFF operation of the third reel, and the time of dispensing end are selected. The selection rate of each timing differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the attack mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is setting 1, setting 3 and setting 5 than setting 2, setting 4 and setting 6. Is higher, and the odd setting is easier to select than the even setting. In other words, the setting is made to be opposite to that in the challenge mode, and when the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the start lever 41 is operated, and then the mode is shifted to the attack mode, the setting value of this gaming machine Is more likely to be an odd setting than the even setting, and when transitioning to the challenge mode, the setting value of the gaming machine is likely to be an even setting more than the odd setting. In addition, when the attack mode is won, setting 1 does not select the end time of payout. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the end of the payout, and then transition is made to the challenge mode, although it is determined that the setting is 4 or more as described above, setting 2 when transitioning to the attack mode It is decided that it is above. Therefore, on the premise that it is preferable for the player to be a high setting value, it is preferable for the player to shift to the challenge mode rather than the attack mode when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout. The advantage of the content of the advantageous section and the preference for the player are reversed. Further, at the time of winning in the challenge mode, at the setting 3 or less, the stop OFF operation time of the third reel is not selected. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and thereafter the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 4 or more. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and thereafter the mode is shifted to the challenge mode, although it is determined that the setting 2 or more is set as described above, the mode is shifted to the attack mode If it is determined that the setting is 4 or more. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, it is preferable for the player to shift to the attack mode than the challenge mode, and the advantage of the content of the advantageous section and the advantage for the player. The preferences agree.

  In the display start mode table for the specific state, when the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won, the end time of payout is selected regardless of the set value. That is, in the specific state, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won, if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the timing before the end of the payout, estimation of some set value can be performed, and the payout ends Even if it is time, although the setting value can be estimated if the advantageous section to be shifted is in the challenge mode or the attack mode, if the lighting start of the eighth display segment N8 is at the end of the payout and the super attack mode Can not guess the set value. By doing this, it is possible to create an entertaining game using the feeling that it is desired to shift to the super attack mode from the degree of advantage of the super attack mode, and the feeling that it is desirable to perform setting estimation.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8, a plurality of display start modes in which the elapsed time from the event serving as the start trigger is different are set.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the display start mode table in the present modification, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting after stop ON operation of the third reel or at the end of payout regardless of the content of the advantageous section. . And after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the elapsed time from the stop ON operation is set to be different, and 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel (that is, at the time of the stop ON operation of the third reel), The setting may be made 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 10 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel. For example, 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected when the challenge mode is won, and 10 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected when the attack mode is elected, and the super attack mode is elected. At time 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected. That is, as the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 is later from the stop ON operation of the third reel, the transition to the advantageous section advantageous to the player is made.

  In the section display first process of this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in steps S3101 to S3103, the same processes as the processes of steps S2701 to S2703 are performed. However, in the lottery process of step S3103, the lottery is performed based on the display start mode table of FIG. In step S3104, based on the processing result of step S3103, processing for storing display start timing according to the lottery result is performed. In this case, for example, a flag or the like capable of determining the determined display start timing (that is, how many seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, or at the end of the payout) is set, The timing can be determined. In step S3105, processing is performed to set a display start game flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The display start game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is to be started in the current game.

  After execution of the processing of step S3105, measurement of the number AG of advantageous section games is started in step S3106, and the section display first processing is ended. The process of step S3106 is similar to the process of step S2705. If it is determined in step S3101 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S3107, and the section display first processing is ended. The process of step S3107 is similar to the process of step S2706.

  In the reel control process (FIG. 18) in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 73A, after it is determined in step S411 that all reels have stopped, the section display third process is performed in step S3201. After the processing in step S3201, the payout determination processing is performed in step S413, the winning result correspondence processing is performed in step S414, the second section display processing is performed in step S415, and the winning result command is displayed in step S416. Is set, and then the reel control process ends. The processes of step S413 to step S416 are as described above.

  The section display third process of step S3201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73 (b).

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the display start game flag is set. As described above, the display start game flag is a flag set in the section display first process. If it is not set, the section display third process ends. If it is set, in step S3302, processing is performed to clear the display start game flag. Then, the freeze setting process is performed in step S3303. The freeze setting process is a process for generating a so-called freeze effect for temporarily limiting the process based on the operation by the player or the progress of the game when the eighth display segment N8 is lighted in this modification.

  Specifically, in step S3303, any one of 1 sec, 6 sec, 11 sec, and 16 sec is set as the freeze period. Here, the timing when the section display third processing is performed is the timing when all the reels stop, and the timing when the stop ON operation of the third reel is performed. The freeze period set in step S3303 is a period obtained by adding 1 sec as a predetermined period to each period when the eighth display segment N8 is displayed after the stop ON operation of the third reel in this modification. They are respectively 0 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 5 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 10 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 15 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel. In step S3303, the display start mode of the present eighth display segment N8 is grasped, and the freeze period is set according to the grasped start mode. That is, if the start mode is 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is 1 sec, and if 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is 6 sec, and 10 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel In this case, the freeze period is set to 11 seconds, and the freeze period is set to 16 seconds if the second reel is 15 seconds after the stop ON operation. Further, if the start mode of this time is the end time of the payout, 16 seconds, which is the longest freeze period in the case of the start mode after the stop operation of the third reel, is set as the current freeze period. For setting of the freeze period, for example, a value corresponding to the length of the freeze period is input to the timer counter which is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and the update of the timer counter is started. It is assumed that the freeze state continues until the timer counter reaches the initial value (0), and the CPU 102 refers to the value of the timer counter to determine whether to proceed to the next process (the payout determination process of step S413). That is, the interval display third process waits until the timer counter reaches the initial value.

  After the process of step S3304, the process of setting the display start timing is performed in step S3305. That is, based on the information of the display start timing that can be determined in step S3104 of the section display first process later, the process of synchronizing with the information of the freeze period set in step S3305 is performed. Specifically, when 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel is set as the display start timing, the display for the eighth display segment N8 is set to be started 0 sec after the freeze start, and as the display start timing If 5 sec after stop ON operation is set, the eighth display segment N8 is set to start to be displayed 5 sec after freeze start, and if 10 sec after stop ON operation is set as display start timing, freeze The eighth display segment N8 is set to start display 10 seconds after the start, and when 15 seconds after the stop ON operation is set as the display start timing, the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts 15 seconds after the freeze start Set to be When the payout end time is set as the display start timing, the eighth display segment N8 is set to be started to be displayed at the end of the payout after the end of the freeze period this time. In this case, for example, a flag indicating display start at the end of the payout is set, it is determined whether or not display should start during the freeze period by determining the presence or absence of the flag, and display start at the end of the payout It is good to set it as the structure which determines whether or not.

  After the process of step S3305, the section display third process is ended after the display start command is output to the display control apparatus 81 which is the control apparatus on the sub side in step S3306. The display control device 81 that receives the display start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the freeze display effect (for example, blackout effect) according to the freeze period is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the corresponding effect The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound (for example, a "push" sound as if the machine were to be broken). In this case, the freeze effect and the sound effect may be different depending on the length of the freeze period.

  In the present modification, the relationship between the timing at which the display for the eighth display segment N8 is started and the content of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a case where 6 sec is set as a freeze period in which a process based on an operation by a player is invalidated. When the third reel is stopped at the timing of ta1 and freezes over the period from there to the timing of ta3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of ta2 slightly earlier than the timing of ta3 . In this case, the period TB1 from the start of the freeze in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 5 seconds, and the period from the display start at the timing of ta2 to the release of the freeze at the timing of ta3 Is 1 sec. When the freeze is canceled at the timing of ta3, medal payout occurs, and the medal payout processing is performed over the period TA until the timing of ta4. In this case, it is likely that the advantage interval to be started is in the challenge mode. When the medal payout process is completed at timing ta4, the next game operation (bet operation) is permitted.

  FIG. 74 (b) shows the case where the freeze period is set as 11 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tb1 and freezes over the period from there to the timing of tb3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tb2 slightly earlier than the timing of tb3 . In this case, the period TB2 from the start of the freeze in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 10 sec and longer than in the case of FIG. 74 (a), but the display is started at the timing of tb2. The period until the freeze is canceled at the timing of tb3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as the case of FIG. 74 (a). When the freeze is released at the timing of tb3, the medal payout is generated and the medal payout process is performed over the period TA until the timing of tb4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIG. 74 (a), the length of the medal payout process is also the same, and the period TA from tb3 to tb4 is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74 (a) . In this case, it is highly likely that the advantageous interval to be started is the attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tb4, the operation (bet operation) of the next game is permitted. That is, in the case of FIG. 74 (b), the timing at which the operation of the next game is permitted is later than in the case of FIG. 74 (a).

  FIG. 74 (c) shows a case where the freeze period is set as 16 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tc1 and freezes over the period from there to the timing of tc3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tc2 slightly earlier than the timing of tc3 . In this case, the period TB3 from the start of the freeze in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 15 sec, which is longer than in the case of FIG. 74 (b), but the display is started at the timing tc2. The time period until the freeze is canceled at the timing of tc3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as the case of FIG. 74 (a) or 74 (b). When the freeze is canceled at the timing of tc3, medal payout occurs and the medal payout processing is performed over the period TA until the timing of tc4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the length of period TA is the same as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). It is. In this case, it is likely that the starting advantage interval is in the super attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tc4, the operation (bet operation) of the next game is permitted. That is, in the case of FIG. 74 (c), the timing at which the operation of the next game is permitted is later than in the case of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

  As described above, in the start game in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is started, the freeze state (freeze period, invalid period) for limiting the progress processing of the game is set. In the display start effect of the eighth display segment N8 for which the end period is determined, a period for performing the display start effect can be secured, and diversification of the display start effect can be achieved.

  Moreover, by associating the length of the freeze period with the content of the advantageous section, it is possible not only to merely generate the freeze state, but also to be able to be concerned with the length of the period It becomes.

  In particular, by associating the period from the start of the freeze state to the display start timing of the eighth display segment N8 with the content of the advantageous section, there is an interest in the eighth display segment N8 after entering the freeze state. It will be overwhelmingly enhanced, and it will be possible to expect a great rendering effect even though it is a simple effect of simply switching the eighth display segment N8 from the off state to the on state.

<Modification 4>
In the present modification, the freeze state occurs not only after stopping all reels but during rotation of the reels.

  That is, for example, when 6 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the period from ta5, which is the time any of the reels is rotating, to ta7, which is 6 seconds later, is frozen. For example, even if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotating reel, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing ta6 slightly earlier than ta7. That is, the display of the interval display is started after the period (5 sec) of the TA1 has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at the timing of ta8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing of ta9 to ta10, and the operation of the next game is permitted at the timing of ta10.

  When 11 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the period from tb5 at which one of the reels is rotating to tb7 which is 11 seconds after is the freeze state. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing tb6 slightly earlier than tb7. That is, the display of the interval display is started after the period (10 sec) of TA2 has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at the timing of tb8, medal payout processing is performed at the timing of tb9 to tb10, and the operation of the next game is permitted at the timing of tb10.

  When 16 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75C, the period from tc5 at which any of the reels is rotating to tc7 at 16 seconds after the time becomes a freeze state, for example, the player Even if the user operates the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotating reel, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at a timing tc6 slightly earlier than tc7. That is, the display of the interval display is started after the period TA3 (15 sec) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at the timing of tc8, medal payout processing is performed at the timing of tc9 to tc10, and operation of the next game is permitted at the timing of tc10.

  As described above, the period in which the start game is in the freeze state can be set at any timing as long as the timing at which the operation of the next game is permitted is associated with the content of the advantageous section.

  In particular, the player's operation (in the above example, the stop operation) is restricted by being in the freeze state, the player can be in the freeze state through the restriction of the operation. It can be recognized. Then, the start timing of the freeze state is difficult to understand as compared with the freeze state in which the execution of the process unilaterally performed on the gaming machine side such as the payout process is limited as in the third modification. Therefore, since the start timing becomes difficult to understand, it becomes difficult to understand the length of the freeze state, and even if the length of the set freeze state is not preferable for the player, the section is maintained while maintaining a sense of expectation. It becomes possible to enjoy the content suggestion of the advantageous section by the display start of the indicator.

  Further, by setting the freeze state in which the player's operation is limited as described above, it is also difficult to understand the end of the freeze state. That is, as described above, when the freeze state is generated during the rotation of the reel, it is necessary to stop the reel in rotation by the operation of the player after releasing the freeze state. From the viewpoint that the timing of the stop operation depends on the player, in the case where the freeze state occurs during the reel rotation, the timing at which the operation of the next game is permitted is not only the length of the freeze state but also the game The timing of the person's operation also affects it. By doing as described above, it is possible to enjoy the content notification of the advantageous section while making the sense of expectation be closer than the length of the set freeze state, and the end timing of the display start by the section indicator It is also possible to bring about the merit of delaying.

<Modification 5>
In the present modification, the display for the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from that during the freeze period. That is, in the present modification, the eighth display segment N8 is configured to start display at the end of the payout, and then the freeze state is generated in the start game, and the length of the freeze period is associated with the content of the advantageous section. It is like that.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the challenge mode is won, the freeze state occurs over the period from ta11 to ta12 (6 sec, TC1). The reel is stopped at the timing of ta13, and the medal payout process is performed in a period (TA) from ta14 to ta15. When the payout of the medal is completed at the timing of ta15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the attack mode is won, the freeze state occurs over the period from tb11 to tb12 (11 sec, TC2). The reel is stopped at the timing of tb13, and the medal payout process is performed in a period (TA) from tb14 to tb15. When the payout of the medal is completed at the timing of tb15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the super attack mode is won, the freeze state occurs over the period from tc11 to tc12 (16 sec, TC3). The reel is stopped at the timing of tc13, and the medal payout process is performed in a period (TA) from tc14 to tc15. When the payout of the medal is completed at the timing of tc15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

  Thus, even if the display of the section indicator is not started during the freeze state, the length of the period in which the freeze state is established may be associated with the content of the advantageous section, which is advantageous from the length of the freeze state. It is also possible to play a game that predicts the content of the section. By doing as described above, it is possible to overwhelmingly improve the degree of freedom of the timing of generating the freeze state.

<Modification 6>
In the present modification, the aspect of the section indicator is different. FIG. 77 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in the present modification.

  In the present modification, a ninth display N9 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a section indicator. Specifically, a ninth display portion N9 is provided next to the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R (next to the left of the display window 26L in a front view) on the game panel 25 on the front side of the game machine. The ninth display portion N9 is a light emitting portion whose front panel is formed of a light transmitting resin member, and the front panel is integrally formed with the game panel 25. In the ninth display portion N9, an LED (not shown) is disposed behind the front panel. The LED is connected to the main control device 101, and the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 controls the light emission of the LED. The LED can emit light in a plurality of colors, for example, can emit light in four colors of blue, green, red and white. Although the eighth display segment N8 is provided also in this modification, the ninth display portion N9 may be provided instead of the eighth display segment N8.

  Incidentally, when the light emission of the LED of the ninth display N9 is controlled, the lightness and the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine are the lightness of the peripheral display and the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine (for example, the back of the game panel 25 Light is emitted so as to be higher than the lightness or illuminance of the light or the lightness or illuminance of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, when the ninth display portion N9 is controlled to emit light, it becomes more noticeable than the peripheral display portions, and it is possible to prevent the player from being overlooked.

  In addition, even if each light emission color in the ninth display portion N9 is set to a color that is easily noticeable due to the relationship with other display portions (such as the game panel 25), even if light is emitted in any color. The function as an interval indicator that clearly indicates that it is an advantageous interval is secured.

  FIG. 78 shows a display start mode table in the present modification.

  In the present modification, among the display start modes of the ninth display unit N9 as the section display, the display start timing is unified at the end of the payout in the start game. On the other hand, among the display start modes, the emission color of the LED of the ninth display portion N9 is made to differ according to the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, in the case of winning in the challenge mode, blue is easily selected from blue, green and red, in the case of winning in the attack mode, green is easily selected, and in the case of winning in the super attack mode, red is selected. It is easy to be done. Therefore, when the ninth display portion N9 is started to be displayed in the start game, the content of the advantageous section in which the light emission color is won in the order of red, green and blue tends to be advantageous. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by the section indicator and to improve the degree of attention to the section indicator.

  The ninth display unit N9 as a section indicator emits light in any one color of red, green and blue according to the content of the advantageous section at the time of display start, but from the game following the start game, ie, During the advantageous section, the emission color is uniformed to white. That is, the game in which the contents of the advantageous section are predicted from the display color of the ninth display portion N9 is limited to the start game, and the timing to be watched is concentrated, so that the rendering effect is enhanced.

  Further, as described above, any of the luminescent colors to be emitted at the start of display is a color that is more noticeable than the emission by white in the advantageous section. From such a viewpoint as well, it becomes possible to make it easy for the display color at the start of display of the ninth display portion N9 to be highly interested.

  As described above, in suggesting the content of the advantageous section by making the start aspect of the section indicator different, the difference of the start aspect is not limited to the difference of the display start timing, and in the section indicator at the start of display It is good also as composition which suggests the contents of an advantageous section from the difference in the contents of production (color).

  In particular, in each luminous color, even when light is emitted in any luminous color, the light emitting state is achieved during an advantageous section by setting it to be easily noticeable (recognizable) in relation to other display parts. Even in the case of a section indicator with a relatively low effect element, which is turned off during the section, it is possible to expect an effect element while securing the function of clearly indicating the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, in the configuration in which the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is made different, the display start mode is made to differ according to the game result that is the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section. FIG. 79 shows an example of a display start mode table in the present modification.

  For example, FIG. 79 (a) shows that the game result that triggered the transition lottery to the advantageous section, that is, the game result in the game in which the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set is strong cherry. The display start aspect table in the case where it exists is shown. That is, when the challenge mode is won based on the strong cherry winning, the stop OFF operation time of the third reel is selected as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. When the attack mode is won based on the strong cherry winning, the stop OFF operation time of the second reel is selected, and when the super attack mode is won, the stop OFF operation time of the first reel is selected.

  On the other hand, when the game result that triggered the transition lottery to the advantageous section is weak cherry, as shown in FIG. When the attack mode is selected, the stop OFF operation time of the second reel is selected. When the super attack mode is selected, the stop OFF operation time of the third reel is selected.

  As for the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the display start mode is determined by the common display start mode table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79C, the stop ON operation time of the third reel is selected in the challenge mode, and the stop OFF operation time of the third reel is selected in the attack mode, and the super attack mode is selected. In the case of, the end of payment is selected.

  As for the other specific player, the display start mode is determined by the display start mode table of FIG. 79 (d). In this case, the operation time of the start lever 41 is selected in the challenge mode, the stop OFF operation time of the first reel is selected in the attack mode, and the payout end time is selected in the super attack mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to play a game in which the presence or absence of transition to an advantageous segment and the content of the advantageous segment in the case of transition are predicted from the game result and the display start mode of the segment indicator. Can. Specifically, for example, when the "cherry" symbol is stopped at the lower or upper stage of the left reel 32L, the game result at this time becomes strong cherry or weak cherry. In this case, if it is assumed that the left reel 32L is stopped first and the left reel 32L is the first reel, the left display 32L is stopped to light up the eighth display segment N8, the challenge mode or the super attack Transition to the mode It is decided that you have won the lottery. In other words, it is determined that it is not in the attack mode. It is possible to determine whether the strong cherries or weak cherries are by stopping the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, and the "cherry" pattern is aligned on the effective lines of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, and then stopped. When it becomes, it is a strong cherry, and when it does not stop altogether, it becomes a weak cherry. For example, when the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that the cherry is weak cherry, the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the first reel is stopped OFF. It is determined that the content of the advantageous section of this time is the super attack mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second reel or the third reel is stopped to be a strong cherry, in this case, it is determined that the content of the advantageous section is the challenge mode. That is, from the viewpoint of the winning probability in the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., it can be said that the strong cherries are preferable to the weak cherries than the weak cherries, while in the above situation, the weak cherries are the player rather than the strong cherries. The image of the game result is reversed.

  Also, in the case where the "Cherry" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, if the eighth display segment N8 does not light, then a strong cherry win and a challenge mode or attack mode win, a weak cherry win and an attack mode or super attack mode Winning, strong cherries or weak cherries are won, and a transition lottery to an advantageous section is not won. In this case, when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel, it is determined that the current advantageous section is in the attack mode regardless of whether the strong cherry or the weak cherry. On the other hand, if the eighth display segment N8 does not light up at the time of stop OFF operation of the second reel, strong cherry and challenge mode win, weak cherry and super attack mode win, strong cherry or weak cherry and advantageous section It will be one of the transition lottery not won. In the case where it is possible to discriminate between strong cherry and weak cherry from the stop point of the second reel, if it is determined that the cherry is strong, whether or not the transition lottery to the advantageous section is won or the challenge mode is won It will be either. However, in the case of strong cherries, there is a high possibility of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the first place, and in this case, the possibility of being in the challenge mode winning becomes high. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cherry is weak, either the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not won or the super attack mode is won, which is the most advantageous for the player. It becomes a situation. However, in the case of weak cherry, the possibility of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section is low originally, and in this case, the possibility of not having won the transition lottery to the advantageous section becomes high.

  In this manner, by associating the game result, that is, the stop point and the display start mode of the section display, it is possible to narrow down the winning combinations as the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed, etc. It becomes possible to play a game such as predicting the content of the advantageous section from the relationship with ten game characteristics.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, in a predetermined replay of the replay (replay result), a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode is performed. FIG. 80 (a) shows a part of the success or failure lottery table for the normal gaming state and the first RT state in this modification.

  In this modification, in the normal lottery state of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, as a kind of replay role, winning is achieved by the index value IV = 53 and winning by the first replay or the seventh replay is achieved The winning replay role is set. The winning replay role has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and specifically, it wins with a probability of about 1/2000. As described above, when the winning replay role winning combination is established, a replay is awarded, and the next game can be played without requiring a new medal insertion.

  In the present modification, the winning replay role is treated as a specific role in the same manner as the strong cherry role and the like. Therefore, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if the winning replay role is won, it is positively determined that the specific combination is won, and the process proceeds to the first specific combination process (step S705). Then, in the first specific combination process in the present variation, a transition lottery of a challenge mode, an attack mode, and a super attack mode based on the winning replay role is also performed.

  The winning probability of the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode and the super attack mode based on the winning replay is the same regardless of the set value. Specifically, the probability of winning in the transition lottery to the challenge mode is 0% regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning in the transition lottery to the attack mode is 50% regardless of the setting value, and the super attack mode is The probability of winning the transition lottery is 50% regardless of the set value. That is, in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, when the winning replay is won while the display mode is the normal mode, the attack mode or the super attack mode is won, and the ratio is 1: 1. In this modification, when the player is elected in the challenge mode, the super attack mode is won with a probability of 100%.

  As described above, when the winning replay role winning combination is established, replaying is awarded as in the case of other replay roles. However, compared with other replay roles, the configuration of the bet process at the time of giving a replay is different. FIG. 80 (b) is a flowchart showing start waiting processing in the present modification. The start waiting process is a process activated in step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 15), and is a process mainly for setting the number of bets (bets) of the game.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the previous game is any replay winning combination. If it is a replay winning, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 for giving a replay is performed. In this case, in this modification, it is determined in step S3402 whether the replay that has won in the previous game is a winning replay. If it is not a winning replay, an automatic bet process is performed in step S3403. In the automatic betting process, the bet number of the previous game is determined, and bets of the same number as the bet number are set. For example, if the previous game is 3 bets, in step S3403, a process of setting 3 bets is performed. If the previous game is 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3403. After the process of step S3403 is executed, the start waiting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3402 that the previous game was a winning replay winning combination, in step S3404 an operation bet flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The operation time bet flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is a game to which a re-play is given and that it is not yet a re-play. In this modification, when the operation bet flag is set, the bet number of the previous game is temporarily stored in a register or the like, but the operation bet flag is changed according to the bet number of the previous game. It may be provided.

  When negative determination is carried out in step S3401, or after performing the process of step S3404, it progresses to step S3405. In step S3405, it is determined whether a bet operation has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been operated. If it is not operated, it waits as it is, and one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated to make a positive determination in step S3405. When medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 while waiting for step S3405, a bet process is performed based on the inserted medals, but the description of the configuration will be omitted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406, in which it is determined whether the above-described operation bet flag is set. If the operation time bet flag is not set, in step S3407, the bet process is performed for the number corresponding to the operated credit insertion switch (bet switch). That is, three bets are set when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, and one bet is set when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated. In the case, set 2 bets. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3406 that the operation time bet flag is set, in step S3408, bets equal in number to the number of bets of the previous game are set as the award of replay. For example, if the previous game is 3 bets, 3 bets are set in step S3408, and if the game is 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3408. After the process of step S3408 is executed, the operation time bet flag is cleared in step S3409. Then, after the process of step S3407 or step S3409 is performed, the start waiting process is ended.

  As described above, the configuration of the bet process when a replay is awarded differs between the winning replay and the other replays. For other replays, bets equal to the number of bets for the previous game are automatically set, and for winning replays, the number of bets for the previous game and the number of bets for the previous game triggered by the operation of one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58. The same number of bets are set. If the previous game is not a replay winning, the automatic betting process is not performed, and one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated to advance this game, and if it is won by the winning replay, the credit insertion switch From the viewpoint of the presence or absence of the operations of 56 to 58, the operation for advancing the game is common to the case of the game result other than the replay.

  FIG. 81 shows a section display first process in the present modification.

  In step S3501, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S3502, and it is determined whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags is set, the section display first process is ended. If one of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S3503.

  In step S3503, it is determined whether or not a winning flag has been determined to be a positive determination in step S3502. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific combination that triggered the winning of the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is a winning replay. Note that, as described above, since the challenge mode is not won in the winning replay, the case of making an affirmative determination in step S3503 is the case where the attack mode winning flag is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503, in step S3504 and step S3505, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery, and a process for setting it is performed. The processes of steps S3504 and S3505 are similar to the processes of steps S2703 and S2704.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3503 that the winning opportunity is the winning replay, in step S3506, the display start mode of the current eighth display segment N8 is set at the time of betting operation of the next game.

  After performing the process of step S3505 or step S3506, in step S3507, the process of starting measurement of the number AG of advantageous section games is performed, and the section display first process is ended. Also, if the determination in step S3501 is affirmative, the process of continuing the interval display is performed in step S3508, and the interval display first process is ended. The processes of step S3507 and step S3508 are the same as the processes of step S2705 and step S2706.

  The difference in the final timing at which the display of the section indicator is started due to the difference in the winning opportunity of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a case where the winning opportunity of the advantageous section is a specific combination other than the winning replay. All reels stop at timing ta16, and medals are dispensed at timing ta17 to ta18. Then, when the medal payout of the current game (start game) is finished at the timing of ta18 and the bet operation of the next game becomes valid at the timing of ta19, the timing of the timing of the ta19 concerned causes the section indicator to be displayed. Among them, it is the latest timing.

  As described above, the section indicator is configured to be displayed before the operation of the next game is permitted in the start game, and it is therefore possible to determine whether to execute the next game or not. In other words, when determining whether or not to end the game at the end of the start game, the display of the section indicator has been started, and despite the fact that the advantageous section has been won, It is deterred that the game is over. As already described above, in the display start mode table of the interval display, the display start mode which becomes the latest timing among the set display start modes is the end time of payout of ta 18.

  When the bet operation becomes valid at the timing of ta19 and the bet operation is performed by the timing of ta20, for example, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts based on the start operation of the timing of ta21 (operation of the start lever 41). Be done.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is a winning replay, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the latest timing of the timing at which the section indicator is displayed is different. Specifically, when the reel is stopped at the timing of tb16, a replay is given instead of the fact that the medal is not paid out. However, since the current replay is a winning replay, the operation time bet flag is set in the start waiting process (FIG. 80 (b)) in the normal process, and the replay is provided by the bet operation instead of the automatic bet .

  In this case, when the bet operation is performed at the timing of tb18 between the time when the bet operation becomes effective at the timing of tb17 and the timing of tb19 which is the effective period, replay is given and the bet number of the previous game is awarded The same number of bets are set, and the display of the section indicator is started. Then, when the start operation is performed at the timing of tb20, the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started.

  As described above, when the display of the section indicator is started based on the winning replay, the display of the section indicator is started at the time of the bet operation after the winning replay winning. Here, the bet operation after the winning replay winning is an operation for obtaining the re-game obtained in the starting game, and can be said to be an operation accompanying the starting game. That is, even with the above configuration, the effect of displaying the interval display in the start game is secured.

  Further, if the bet operation after the winning replay is determined as the operation accompanying the starting game for which the winning replay has been won as described above, the game following the starting game is played from the operation of the start lever 41. Then, when the display of the section indicator is started based on the winning replay, the latest timing of the display start timing is the timing of tb20 which is the start operation of the next game.

  As described above, when a small combination (a specific combination, a payout combination) other than a replay is an opportunity to win the advantageous section, the section indicator is started to be displayed by the bet operation of the next game, and a predetermined replay (a winning replay) is performed. When it is a winning opportunity of the advantageous section, the section indicator is configured to be displayed by the time the start lever 41 of the next game is operated. As described above, by making the final timing for starting the display of the section indicator different, it is possible to achieve great diversification of the display start mode of the section indicator.

  Furthermore, in the case of winning replay, the bet operation is a trigger for giving a replay based on the winning replay. That is, it is possible to extend the start game by setting the situation where the game winning the replay of the win continues until the player makes a bet operation.

  Then, when the winning replay is a winning opportunity for the advantageous section, the section indicator is displayed based on the bet operation which is the trigger for giving the replay. Under normal conditions (if another small winning combination, etc. is a winning opportunity), on the premise that the display of the section indicator is started prior to the bet operation, an giving opportunity for re-playing based on the winning replay The bet operation is considered to be a situation in which the display of the section indicator has not been started already, and if the display of the section indicator is started in such a situation, the player can be surprised. It is possible to demonstrate various effects.

  The stop number of the above-mentioned winning replay may be as follows. Specifically, when a combination of symbols set as a winning mode of winning replay is stopped on the effective line, a small winning combination with another medal payout (in particular, a specific winning combination as a transition lottery trigger to an advantageous section, for example, The combination of symbols set as the winning mode of the “strong watermelon” is made to stop on a line different from the effective line. By doing this, it is possible to expect an effect that makes it seem as if a small winning combination with the other medal payout has been established in appearance, and the section indicator has not started displaying until the time of the bet operation Through the above, it is possible to increase the effect of making it possible to think that the lottery for transition to an advantageous section is not won based on the small winning combination involving the other medal payout. As a result of the above, it becomes easy to be in a state of giving up the winning of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and it is possible to expect the effect of making the player surprised.

<Modification 9>
In the present modification, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number and ends, the display end mode of the section indicator is made different. FIG. 83 shows a section display first process in the present modification.

  In step S3601, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If the display is not in progress, the same processing as step S2702 to step S2705 is performed in steps S3602 to S3605. If the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process advances to step S3606 to perform addition processing of the number AG of advantageous section games. That is, in this modification, the management of the advantageous section game number AG is not the section display second process activated at the end of the game (in the reel control process) but the area activated at the start of the game (in the lottery process) The display first process is performed. In step S3607, it is determined whether the number-of- advantageous-intervals game number AG has reached the upper limit value "1500". If the upper limit value has not been reached, processing for continuing the display of the eighth display segment N8 is performed in step S3608, and the section display first processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3607 that the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that the forcible termination condition for terminating the advantageous section in the current game is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the number of advantageous area games AG is reset to an initial value (0). Then, in step S3610, processing is performed to set a forced end flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The forced termination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the forced termination condition is satisfied.

  In step S3611, a display end mode lottery process is performed. In the lottery process, the display end mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the display end mode of the section indicator at the end of the advantageous section is determined by lottery. In the display end mode table, as shown in FIG. 84, the display end mode (display end timing) is set to be different depending on the content of the advantageous section when the forcible end condition is satisfied and the set value.

  That is, in step S3611, the content of the display mode in the game in which the forced termination condition is satisfied (the game when performing the process of step S3611) is grasped, and the section indicator is displayed when the display mode is the challenge mode or the attack mode. As the display end mode of, the end time of the payout is set. On the other hand, when the display mode of this game is the VB mode or the special-up special zone, the stop OFF operation of the first reel, the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the stop OFF operation of the third reel, From the set value, one of the end of dispensing is determined.

  Specifically, when the current game is in the VB mode, at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel, setting 2 or more is selected, and setting 1 is not selected. At the time of stop OFF operation of the third reel, it is selected in setting 4 or more, and is not selected in setting 3 or less. Further, at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the setting 2, the setting 4 and the setting 6 are more easily selected than the setting 1, the setting 3 and the setting 5.

  When the game this time is the specialization zone, at the time of stop OFF operation of the second reel, setting 4 or higher is selected, and setting 3 or lower is not selected. At the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, only the setting 6 is selected. In addition, at the time of stop OFF operation of the first reel, setting 1, setting 3, and setting 5 are easier to select than setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6.

  That is, the display end mode table is defined so that the setting value can be more easily narrowed down as the situation (display mode) at the time when the forced end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is more advantageous to the player. That is, it is an advantageous situation for the player, and if the termination condition is satisfied in a situation where further increase in the number of continuing games can be expected unless the upper limit of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section is met, it is set instead. It is possible to play a game that makes it possible to make an estimation of the value, and to compensate for the sense of loss for the end of the advantageous section in a situation where it is still from now.

  After the display end mode lottery process is performed in step S3611, the display end mode according to the lottery result is set as the end mode of the current section indicator in step S3612, and the section display first process is ended. Do. In this case, for example, if the stop OFF operation time of the first reel is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the stop OFF operation. Also, if the payout end time is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the medal payout end.

  In the section display second process in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 85, it is determined in step S3701 whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If not being displayed, the section display second processing is ended as it is, and if being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether the above-described forced termination flag is set. If it is set, the data initialization process is performed in step S3703, and the section display second process is ended. Since the display of the eighth display segment N8 is ended in the end mode set by the process of steps S3611 and S3612, the section display second process is performed when the forcible end flag is set. In, only data initialization is done.

  If it is determined in step S3702 that the forcible termination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3704. The processes of steps S3704 to S3707 are the same as the processes of steps S2807 to S2810.

  As described above, in the section indicator, the display is started when transitioning to the advantageous section in which the player is in an advantageous state by improving the performance regarding the push order notification, and the display is ended when the advantageous section ends. By making the display end mode different depending on the state at the end, it is possible to make the state at the end be grasped also from the section display, and to be immersed in the aftermath of the state at the end.

  In particular, when the forcible termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and the advantageous section ends in an advantageous situation for the player, it is possible to estimate the set value as a kind of information that may be useful for the player. . In this way, the sense of loss at the time of forced termination can be reduced, and estimation of the set value becomes easier as the forced termination condition is satisfied in a situation advantageous to the player. The sense of loss upon forced termination and the ease of obtaining useful information can be balanced.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, when the winning opportunity of the transition lottery to the advantageous section is the overlapping role with the bonus, the content of the advantageous section is suggested in the game from the game winning the overlapping position to the bonus winning. Here, the change point about the display mode of the area display in this embodiment is demonstrated previously.

  As described above, the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on the winning of the specific role such as strong cherry or strong watermelon. In addition, the transition lottery to the advantageous section is also performed based on the winning combination of the bonus and the strong cherry or the like (in particular, the combination of the first BB). In the present embodiment, the display start mode of the section indicator is made to differ depending on whether or not the winning opportunity of the transition lottery to the advantageous section is the overlapping role with the first BB. Specifically, when the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is not the overlapping role with the first BB, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning combination of the specific winning combination is the specific winning combination. The start game is set as the game in which is established, and the display of the interval display is started before the operation of the next game is permitted.

  On the other hand, if the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is a dual role with the first BB, the game in which the first BB winning is achieved among the specific roles that are the winning timing is set as the start game as the game in which the specific role is achieved, Before the next game operation is permitted, the display of the interval display is started.

  As described above, in the first BB, a so-called dropped symbol combination is set as a winning mode, and if a winning is not established in the winning game, the first BB winning flag is carried over. Therefore, in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section triggered by the winning combination with the first BB, the game winning the winning combination may be different from the game in which the first BB winning is established and is the starting game. Then, when winning the transition lottery to an advantageous section triggered by a winning combination with the first BB, the display of the section indicator is not started in the game in which the winning combination is won, and a game in which the first BB winning is established The display start of the section indicator is carried over until the end.

  In the present embodiment, the game property is realized using the presence or absence of the carryover of the display start of such a section indicator. Hereinafter, the processing configuration regarding the game characteristic will be described.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in steps S3801 to S3816, the same processes as in steps S401 to S416 are performed. Then, in step S3817, special RT state processing is performed, and thereafter, the reel control processing is ended. In this embodiment, when the player wins the first BB or the second BB, the special RT state different from the first RT state to the third RT state, which is transitioned by the promotion replay, the fall fall replay, or the like, is set. In the special RT state, the winning probability of the predetermined replay is a winning probability different from that of the normal gaming state, and specifically, is higher than that of the normal gaming state. The special RT state transitioning based on the winning of the first BB and the second BB ends when the winning of the first BB or the second BB which has triggered the transition is established. In addition, in the present embodiment, there is also provided a special RT state in which the transition is made based on neither the first BB nor the second BB. The special RT state process is a process for controlling such a special RT state.

  In the special RT state process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, it is determined in step S3901 whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S3902 whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the first BB or the second BB is won in the normal gaming state or the first RT state.

  If one of the BBs has been won, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S3904 whether the specialization zone winning flag is set. When the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the attack mode winning flag and the specialization zone winning flag are set, in step S3905, the display control device is a special RT command with a super attack mode. Set as an output target to 81. The special attack RT command with the super attack mode is for causing the display control device 81 to shift to the RT state based on the 1BB or 2BB win and to be in the super attack mode. It is a command. More specifically, the special attack status with super attack mode command is to transition to the special RT status based on the 1st BB win, and to win the lottery for transition to the super attack mode, and before transition to the super attack mode. Is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the attack mode winning flag is set but the specialized zone flag is not set, an attack mode is added in step S3906. A special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT command with attack mode is a command for causing the display control device 81 to make a transition to the RT state based on the first BB or the second BB won and that the attack mode is won. . More specifically, the special RT status command with attack mode indicates that transition to the special RT status is made based on the first BB win, and that the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won and that it is before transition to the attack mode. This is a command for causing the control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT command will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S3903 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S3908, processing is performed to set a special RT status command with a challenge mode as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT status command with challenge mode is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize transition to the RT status based on the 1BB or 2BB win and that the challenge mode is won. is there. More specifically, the special RT status command with challenge mode indicates transition to the special RT status based on the first BB win, and winning lottery for transition to the challenge mode and indicating that it is before transition to the challenge mode This is a command for causing the control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT command will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S3907 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S3909. The special RT status command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp transition to the RT status based on the first BB or the second BB won. More specifically, the special RT status command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to shift to the special RT status based on the 1st BB and to not win the transition lottery such as the attack mode. . The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT status command will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S3902 that neither the first BB win flag nor the second BB win flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won in the current game. If it is determined that the specific combination is won, it is determined in step S3911 whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If it is determined in step S3910 that the specific combination is not won, or even if the specific combination is selected, it is determined in step S3911 that one of the winning flags is set. The special RT state process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special winning combination has been won and neither the challenge mode nor the attack mode has been won, the special RT counter in the special RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is selected in step S3912. A process of inputting "5" as the number of continuing games is executed. The special RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of continued games in the special RT state to which the transition is made based on neither the first BB nor the second BB. The number of continuing games in the special RT state is arbitrary, and may be less than five or more than five. However, the number of continued games in the special RT state may be set in relation to the winning probability of the special replay described later.

  In the following step S3913, a fake special RT status command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The fake special RT status command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize transition to the RT status without being based on the first BB or the second BB. More specifically, the fake special RT status command causes the display control device 81 to shift to the special RT status not based on the first BB or the second BB and to not win the transition lottery such as the attack mode. It is a command for The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT status command will be described later.

  After the process of any one of steps S3905, S3906, S3908, S3909, and S3913 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, processing for storing the current gaming state is executed. Specifically, processing of grasping the current gaming state (normal gaming state or first RT state) and storing the RT setting flag (first RT setting flag) in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 106 in the first RT state I do. The RT setting flag stored in the storage area can be read later, for example, the RT setting flag read from the storage area after the end of the first BB or the second BB, or after the end of the special RT state. It is possible to set the RT state based on.

  Then, in step S3915, the stored RT setting flag is cleared, and in step S3916, processing for setting the fourth RT setting flag is performed, and then the special RT state processing ends. The fourth RT setting flag corresponds to the special RT state. By the processing of step S3915 and step S3916, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state as the special RT state.

  Here, the success or failure lottery table in the fourth RT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 shows a winning lottery table for the fourth RT state transitioning based on the winning of the first BB and the second BB, and FIG. 89 shows a winning lottery table for the fourth RT state transitioning based on the winning of the first BB and the second BB. Is shown.

  In any of the 4th RT status winning lottery table, the winning probability of the specific combination of index value IV = 13 to 20, 32 to 45 and the pushing order bell of IV = 21 to 28 is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state It has the same winning probability. However, in the fourth RT state in which transition is made based on the first BB and the second BB, even if the specific combination of the index value IV = 32 to 45 is won, the first BB and the second BB are not won. That is, in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, winning of the first BB or second BB (a bonus being won in duplicate) is avoided. For the same reason, in the fourth RT state based on the first BB and the second BB, various bonuses with the index value IV = 46 to 48 are not won. In that respect, in the fourth RT state which is not based on the first BB or the second BB, if the index value IV = 32 to 45 is won, the first BB or the second BB will be double winning, and the index value IV = 46 to 48. It is also possible to win various bonuses.

  In the fourth RT state, as the replay, the probability of winning normal replay with index value IV = 1 and the probability of winning special replay with index value IV = 53, 54 become higher than those in the normal gaming state and the first RT state. More specifically, the special replay with index value IV = 53, 54 is a replay that is won only in the fourth RT state, and the probability of winning in the other gaming states is zero. In addition, even if it is another gaming state, it is good also as composition which is won partially (with low probability). Further, in the fourth RT state, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV of 2 to 12, and the player does not win the push-order replay corresponding to these index values.

  If special replay 1 with index value IV = 53 is won, duplicate prizes are played for the first replay, the ninth replay, the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay. When the special replay 2 having the index value IV = 54 is won, the first replay, the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay are duplicately won.

  In the fourth RT state, the probability of winning with index value IV = 1 is about 5.3 / 1, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 53 is about 1⁄4 / 3, and index value IV is The probability of winning at = 54 is approximately 1⁄43.7. Therefore, in the fourth RT state, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and the probability of being out of the game becomes lower.

  Incidentally, the replay probability in the fourth RT state is lower than that in the second RT state and the third RT state, and the probability of the out-of-focus result is high. Therefore, even in the case of performing the reel control in which the replay winning is given priority over the BB winning, the BB winning can be achieved relatively smoothly.

  Returning to the description of the special RT state process, if it is determined in step S3901 that the normal gaming state or the first RT state is not set, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special RT state by determining whether the fourth RT setting flag is set. If it is not the special RT state, the special RT state processing is ended as it is. If in the special RT state, the process proceeds to step S3918.

  In step S3918, it is determined whether any one of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag is set. That is, when the special RT status shifts based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB win, or although it shifts without based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB win, if it wins the 1st BB or 2 BB after that, it is as it is End special RT state processing. If it is determined in step S3918 that no BB winning flag is set, in step S3919, a special RT counter subtraction process is performed. In other words, the special RT counter set in step S3912 is decremented by one when the game is finished.

  In step S3920, it is determined based on the processing result of step S3919 whether the special RT counter has become "0". If it is determined that the flag is not "0", it is determined in step S3921 whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. In the case of an affirmative determination in step S3921, although the current special RT state is a special RT state in which the current special RT state has shifted without being based on the first BB or the second BB, the first BB or the second BB in the current game in the special RT state. It means that it was elected in the challenge mode or the attack mode (super attack mode) triggered by the specific part which is not a duplicate of. As described above, when a specific combination which is not a combination of the first BB and the second BB is used as a winning opportunity, the section display starts displaying the game as a start game.

  If it is determined in step S3920 that the special RT counter is "0", or if the display of the section indicator is started with the current game as the start game in step S3921, the process proceeds to step S3922 and the process proceeds to step S3914. Read out the stored RT setting flag. In the case of the normal gaming state in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored, and in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored in the storage area of the RT setting flag, and thus the gaming state before transition is made. It is determined that the game was in the normal gaming state. Then, in step S3923, based on the result of the reading process in step S3922, a process of returning to the gaming state before transition to the special RT state is performed. After performing the process of step S3923, the special RT state process ends.

  Note that when transitioning to the special RT state, the gaming state before transition may not be stored, and transition to the uniform gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) may be performed when the special RT state ends. In particular, the special RT state does not shift during the second RT state to the third RT state, but the difference in the degree of advantage between the normal gaming state and the first RT state is not so great, and it is possible to return to any gaming state It is considered that the loss incurred by the player is small.

  Next, the bonus state process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the player is in the bonus state, and if not, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not CB winning is achieved in step S4003. If yes, the CB setting flag is set in step S4004, and the remaining in step S4005. The number of payouts is "15". Thereafter, in step S4006, a state command is set, and in step S4007, external signal setting processing is performed, and then the bonus state processing is ended. The processes of steps S4001 to S4007 are similar to the processes of steps S601 to S607.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4003, it is determined in step S4008 whether the first BB or the second BB winning is achieved. If one of the BB winning combinations is established, the process advances to step S4009 to clear the current RT setting flag. In step S4010, a process of clearing the BB winning flag is performed, and in step S401, a process of setting the BB setting flag is performed. Then, in step S4012, "216" is set as the number of remaining payouts. Thereafter, in step S4013, a section display fourth process is performed. The section display fourth process is a process related to the display of the section indicator, the details of which will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S4008 that a BB winning is not established, a carry over command is set in step S4014. If it is determined in step S4001 that the player is in the bonus state, end determination processing is performed in step S4015. After executing the process of step S4013, step S4014 or step S4015, the process proceeds to step S4006 and the state command setting process and the external signal setting process are performed in the same manner as after the process of step S4005. End the process.

  Next, RT state processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether the fourth RT setting flag is set. If the fourth RT setting flag is set, the RT state processing is ended as it is. If it is determined in step S4101 that the fourth RT setting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4102, and the same processes as the processes of steps S501 to S511 are performed in steps S4102 to S4112.

  That is, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and during the special RT state, the transition of the RT state does not occur until the number of continuing games in the BB winning or special RT state becomes zero. Specifically, even if the transition outcome stops, it does not shift to the first RT state, and does not win the other promotion replay or fall replay (second replay to fifth replay). If the transition outcome is stopped in the special RT state (the fourth RT state), processing may be performed to reset the fourth RT state. In this case, the initial value (5) may be set again for the special RT counter.

  Next, the section display first process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If the display is not in progress, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the standby period flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The standby period flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the display start of the section indicator is also carried forward with the carryover of the BB election although it has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section . If the standby period flag is set, the section display first process is ended. That is, in the situation where the waiting period flag is set, the section display first process does not perform the process for starting the display of the section indicator.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is not set, the section display first process is ended as it is. If one of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S4204, and it is determined whether the first BB winning flag is set. Affirmative determination in step S4204 means that the player has won a lottery for transition to an advantageous section in the current game, and that the winning opportunity is an overlap with the first BB.

  As described above, the second BB and the second BB alone (IV = 47) do not win the lottery for transition to an advantageous section, so in step S4204 above, only the presence or absence of the first BB win flag Determine If the second BB and the second BB alone can win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, it is preferable to determine the presence or absence of the second BB win flag in step S4204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is not a duplicate combination, in step S4205 to step S4207, as in the above step S2703 to step S2705, the display start mode of the section display is set and continuation of the advantageous section After the process of starting the measurement of the number of games is performed, the section display first process is ended.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is a double winning combination, the standby period flag is set in step S4208, and the section display first process is ended. As a result of this processing, an affirmative determination will be made in the above step S4202 after the next game.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, processing for continuing the display is performed in step S4209, and the section display first processing is ended. The process of step S4209 is the same as the process of step S2706.

  Next, the section display fourth process carried out in step S4013 of the bonus state process (FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4301, it is determined whether the above standby period flag is set. The standby period flag is not set, for example, when the first BB or the second BB is won during the display of the section indicator (during the advantageous section), or the bonus at this time is the second BB. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4301, and the section display fourth process ends. If the standby period flag is set, the process advances to step S4302 to clear the standby period flag.

  Then, the display of the section indicator is started in step S4303. That is, when the standby period flag is set, the display of the section indicator is started in the section display fourth processing performed based on the first BB prize, and the section display is performed until the first BB prize is established. The display start of the container is carried over. In step S4304, measurement start processing of AG of the number of advantageous section games is performed. Such processing is similar to that of step S4207 and the like. That is, when the waiting period flag is set, the measurement start of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section is also carried over until the first BB winning is established. After the process of step S4304, the section display fourth process ends.

  The flow of the special RT state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal section, for example, when the stop number to be a weak watermelon winning combination appears, (1) the current game is a specific part not overlapping with BB (the first BB or the second BB) and the transition to the advantageous section The case in which the lottery is won, (2) the case in which the current game is a specific combination which is not a dual role with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and is not won in the transition lottery to the advantageous section, (3) this time (4) the current game is a dual role with BB (1st BB and 2nd BB) and is a dual role with BB (1st BB) and is won by a transition lottery to an advantageous section There may be a plurality of cases in which a transition lottery to an advantageous section is not won.

  In the case of the case (1), the game in which the stopped number of eyes to be the weak watermelon winning combination appears appears as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started. On the other hand, in the above cases (2) to (4), the display of the section indicator is not started in the game in which the stop point which is the weak watermelon winning combination appears. And in the case of these (2)-(4), it transfers to a special RT state. However, in the cases of (3) and (4), it is a special RT state in which BB winning is an end condition, and in the case of (2), the digestion of the number of continuous upper limit number 5 is an end condition. Special RT state. In any case, during the special RT state, the display of the section indicator is not started, the replay winning probability becomes higher than that, and a sense of expectation for the BB or advantageous section is maintained.

  In the lottery process of each game in the special RT state, when any index value is not won and an out result is obtained, it is possible to establish the winning BB prize. In this case, when the display of the section indicator is started with the BB prize, it is determined that the case of the above (3) is made, and when the display of the section indicator is not started with the BB prize, the case of the above (4) It is determined that the On the other hand, in the case of the above (2), the special RT state is ended by the consumption of the continued upper limit number of games in the special RT state. And in this case, the display of the zone indicator is not started either.

  As described above, when the special RT state occurs, the replay probability becomes high. Most of the replays won during the special RT state are usually replays, and rarely win special replay 1 or special replay 2. As already explained, the special replay 1 is a duplicate of the first replay, the ninth replay and the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay, and the special replay 2 is the first replay and the tenth replay ~ It is a double player of the 15th replay.

  As shown in FIG. 95, although the ninth replay to the fifteenth replay are all provided with replay as a benefit, their number of stoppages differs. In the following description, the winning mode is described on the assumption that the down-right line L4 is set as the valid line in the 3-bet game.

  Specifically, the ninth replay is the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, the right reel 32R. A prize mode is established in which a prize is established by stopping the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the activated line. The tenth replay is the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M, the “red bell” symbol or the right reel 32R A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved by stopping the "white bell" symbol on the effective line. The 11th Replay is the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the right reel 32R. A prize mode is established in which a prize is established by stopping on the active line. The 12th replay is a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, a "black BAR" of the right reel 32R. A prize mode is established in which a prize is established by the symbol stopping on the effective line. In these 9th to 12th games, even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on any of the reels, or the straight line even if it stops The "Black BAR" symbol is not stopped on the line, and a replay prize is established at a stop point which does not stop, and generally, a replay is established at a stop point where a black BAR balance is removed.

  More specifically, for example, the 19th "first replay" symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped in the upper row when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the "black BAR" symbol and stopped in the ninth replay And, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. In addition, when the ninth "second replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle, the eighth "black BAR" symbol stops in the lower part. When the sixth "first replay" symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, lower, and middle tiers, and the "black BAR" symbol in the middle line L2 with the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, and a middle reel 32M. In the “temporary line”, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop.

  In addition, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and stopped in the tenth replay, when the 19th “first replay” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped in the upper stage, the 18th "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. In addition, when the seventh "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle, the eighth "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper row. When the fifth "red bell" symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower portion, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper portion. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, upper, and upper stages, and the "black BAR" symbol on the upper line L1 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L In the “temporary line”, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop at the corresponding tempai line, and it becomes the stopping point (middle / right upper temppai out).

  When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the eleventh game, the 20th "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped in the upper row, the 18th "black" "BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. In the middle reel 32M, the eighth "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. When the sixth "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the lower, middle, and middle stages, and the "black BAR" symbol in the middle line L2 is filled with the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L. In the “temporary line”, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the tempipe line, and it becomes the stopping point (outside middle and right middle stage tempering out).

  When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the twelfth replay, and the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped in the upper row, the 18th " "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. In addition, when the 9th "second replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the lower stage. Then, the seventh reel or the ninth "black BAR" symbol stops at the lower end of the right reel 32R. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, lower, lower (upper), and the "black BAR" symbol on the lower line L3 with the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R In the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop on the corresponding temper line and becomes a stop point (center / right lower lower end temper out) which becomes temper out.

  In the thirteenth replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the effective line. The prize mode in which the prize is established is set. In particular, the prize mode of the 13th replay is that when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R aim at the "black BAR" symbol and stop operation, the "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper and lower portions of the left reel 32L and Although the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol tempers on the downward right line L4 and the upward right line L5, The stopping point at which the black BAR double balance falls off is set as the winning mode.

  The 14th game is won by the “Black BAR” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Black BAR” symbol on the middle reel 32M, the “Red Bell” symbol or the “White Bell” symbol on the Right reel 32R at the effective line. The prize mode in which is established is set. In particular, the prize mode of the fourteenth game is played by stopping the "black BAR" symbol on the upper and lower portions of the left reel 32L when the reel 32L, 32M, 32R is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol and stopped. The "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol stops at the upper right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop at the lower, and "black BAR" on the upper right line L5 The symbol of the stop is aligned and stop, the stop mark which becomes the black BAR single set is set as the prize mode.

  In the 15th replay, the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line, and a winning mode is established. It is set. In particular, when the 15th replay game is stopped by aiming the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and The "Black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the reel 32M, the "Black BAR" symbol also stops at the upper and lower ends of the right reel 32R, and the "Black BAR" symbol aligns at the lower right line L4 and the upper right line L5. The stop position where the black BAR balance is lost is set as the winning mode.

  Incidentally, the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 both include the first replay as a winning combination. As already described (as shown in FIG. 11), the first replay is the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" of the middle reel 32M. A prize mode is established in which a prize is achieved by stopping the symbol, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "youth" symbol of the right reel 32R on an effective line. In this case, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and stopped in the first replay, when the 20th “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, 18 The second "Black BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. In addition, when the 9th "second replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the lower stage. Then, when the fifth "red bell" symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower part, the seventh "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper part. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the lower, lower, and upper stages, and the "black BAR" symbol in the lower line L3 with the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. In the “temporary line”, the “black BAR” symbol does not stop.

  Special Replay 1 and Special Replay 2 are push-offs that have different winning combinations depending on the stop order. However, even if any of the winning combinations, the benefit provided is replay, and the degree of advantage for the player does not differ. That is, although the order of the stop differs depending on the stop order, the profit obtained by the player does not increase or decrease.

  FIG. 96 is an explanatory drawing showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning pattern established.

  When Special Replay 1 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the first stop order of "left" → "middle" → "right", and the first game win is established. In this case, the stop point is stopped with the "Replay" symbol aligned on the downward right line L4. In addition, even if the game is stopped in the second stop order of “left” → “right” → “middle”, the first replay game winning is established, and the “replay” symbol is aligned and stopped on the downward right line L4. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R aim at the "black BAR" symbol and stop operation is performed, as described above, the winning is realized at the stop appearance at which the left, middle, and lower lower tiers are out.

  On the other hand, when stopping in the third stop order of “middle” → “left” → “right”, winning of any of the 9th, 11th, and 13th games is achieved. In this case, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped and aimed at the “black BAR” symbol, any of the ninth replay, the eleventh replay, and the thirteenth replay is out of the black BAR balance (black A prize is awarded at the stop point where the BAR double temp. More specifically, when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M which performs the stop operation for the first time, the eleventh replay or the thirteenth replay can be won, but the ninth replay can not be established. In this case, on the left reel 32L, when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the lower stage, although the eleventh game reap may be established, the thirteenth regame prize will not be established, and the right reel 32R "black BAR" symbol in the middle When the 11th game is won, the middle and right middle stage tempties will be stopped. When the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the eleventh game reaping is established for those who can establish the 13th game rebirth It will not be done, and when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle on the right reel 32R and the thirteenth game reaping is achieved, it will be the stop point of the black BAR double balance drop out of the downward right line L4 (and the upward line L5). . If the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the lower part of the middle reel 32M that is first operated for stop operation, although the ninth game rendition may be established, the 11th regame winning or The 13th game win will not be established. In this case, even if the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are stopped by aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the left and right middle step tempers become out of order. That is, even if any re-game winning is achieved, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol is aligned on the straight line and does not stop. , It becomes the stop point which becomes black BAR tempai out. That is, in this case, it is possible to make the stop part which becomes black BAR double temper out get out by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is possible to make the black BAR tempee It is possible to cause a stop number to be released, and if the press operation is accurate, a replay prize is established at a stop number at which the black BAR double balance falls out.

  When the special replay 1 is stopped in the fourth stop order of “middle” → “right” → “left”, any of the 10th, 11th, and 14th remakes is established. In this case, when the reel 32L, 32M, 32R is targeted for the "black BAR" symbol and stopped, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is aligned on the upward line L5 and stopped It will be the stop point of the black BAR single match as the 14th game remake.

  When the game is stopped in the fifth stop order of “right” → “left” → “medium”, winning of any of the ninth, twelfth, and thirteenth replays is established. Also in this case, as in the case of the third stop order, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and stopped, the black BAR balance dropout stop point is obtained. When the game is stopped in the sixth stop order of “right” → “middle” → “left”, winning of any one of the ninth replay, the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay is established. In this case, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the "black BAR" symbol and stopped, the black BAR double-arranged stop point is obtained as the fifteenth game rendition.

  In the case of the special replay 2, in the first stop order and the second stop order, the first replaying game winning is established, and similarly to the special replay 1, the symbol "replay" is aligned and stopped on the downward right line L4. Also in this case, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a winning is realized at the stop position of the black BAR blanks out. In the case of the third stop order, unlike Special Replay 1, one of the 10th, 11th, and 14th remakes is achieved, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR. When the stop operation is performed by aiming at the symbol, it becomes the stop point of the black BAR single assortment as the 14th rebirth. In the case of the fourth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, one of the tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth replays is achieved. However, in this case as well, when the reel 32L, 32M, 32R is targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and stopped, it becomes the stop point of the black BAR double balance dropout.

  In the case of the fifth stop order, unlike Special Replay 1, any of the tenth replay, the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay wins, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R "black BAR When the stop operation is performed by aiming at the symbol, it becomes the stop point of the black BAR double assortment as the 15th rebirth. In the case of the sixth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, the winnings of any of the tenth replay, the twelfth replay, and the thirteenth replay are established, and "black BAR" is displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. "If you stop the operation aiming at the design, it will be the stopping point of the black BAR double-templating gap.

  In the present embodiment, the difference in the number of stops due to the stop order of special replays 1 and 2 winning during such a special RT state is used to suggest the contents of the transition lottery to an advantageous section. FIG. 97 shows the pushing order processing in the present embodiment. As already described, the pushing order processing is processing (FIG. 37) performed in step S711 of the lottery result handling processing (FIG. 31) in the main control device 101.

  The pressing order processing in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the pressing order processing in the first embodiment, and the difference is that the current pressing order is special replay 1 and 2 wins. It is a process. That is, the processing of step S4401 to step S4422 is the same as the processing of step S1201 to step S1222 described above, and the relationship between the winning order winning combination and the display mode (presence or absence of satisfaction of the condition of pressing order notification) is given. It is determined whether or not the pressing order notification is to be performed. When the pressing order notification is performed, the pressing order notification is performed by the instruction monitor 68, and the pressing order notification command is output to the display control device 81. Note that the processing of step S4401 to step S4422 is processing that can cause the player's advantage to be changed by the push order notification.

  In the pressing order processing in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S4419 that neither the various promotion replays nor the like, nor the pressing order bell is made, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether it is special replay 1 or 2. If neither of the special replays 1 and 2 is present, the pressing order processing ends. If the special replay 1 or 2 is selected, a push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4424, and then the push order processing ends.

  That is, although the notification of pushing order when winning special replays 1 and 2 is executed regardless of the relationship with the display mode (presence or absence of satisfaction of the condition of pushing order notification), the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101 The push order notification is not performed, and only the push order notification by the display control device 81 is performed.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing push order notification processing in the present embodiment. As already described, the push order notification process is a process (FIG. 45) performed in step S1903 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) of the display control device 81 on the sub side.

  The push order notification process is also substantially the same as the push order notification process of the first embodiment, and the difference is that the process in the case where the current push order is special replay 1 and 2 is won. It is. Specifically, in step S4501 to step S4513, as in the case of step S2001 to step S2013 above, the pushing of the winning combination and the display mode (presence or absence of satisfaction of the condition of notification of pushing order notification) It is determined whether or not the order notification is to be performed, and when the order notification is performed, the order notification effect of the order display by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed.

  In the push order notification process in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S 4512 that neither the various promotion replay nor the like is performed, nor the push order bell, the process proceeds to step S 4514. In step S 4514, it is determined whether or not special replay 1 and 2 are performed. If neither of the special replays 1 and 2 is present, the processing for notification of the order of pressing is ended. If the special replay 1 or 2 is performed, the notification process for special RTs is executed in step S4515, and then the pressing order notification process is ended.

  The special RT notification process of step S4515 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether the special attack command with super attack mode has been received. As described above, when a new command is received in step S1701 of the effect setting process (FIG. 42), the display control device 81 stores the received command in the command storage area of the RAM 183 in step S1702. Do the processing. In step S4601, by checking the command storage area, it can be determined whether the special RT status command described above has been received. In the following processing, determination processing as to whether or not a predetermined command has been received similarly confirms the command storage area.

  As described above, the special attack command with super attack mode is a command to be output and set in step S3905 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating transition to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and showing that the super attack mode has been won and is in the state before transition.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the above command has been received, then in step S4602 a push order notification effect is performed in which the black BAR double alignment is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, when the current game result is the special replay 1, the sixth stop order of “right” → “middle” → “left” is notified. Further, if the current game result is the special replay 2, the fifth stop order of “right” → “left” → “medium” is notified. After performing the process of step S4602, the special RT notification process ends.

  In this case, as notification of pushing order notification, along with the notification of each stop order, notification is made that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are to be stopped for "black BAR". For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), in the auxiliary display section 65, the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is associated with the positional relationship of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and numbered. While showing it, the symbol which should aim at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. In FIG. 100 (a), the number "3" and the character "black BAR" are displayed on the left, the number "1" and the character "black BAR" are displayed in the middle, and the number "2" on the right. And the characters "Black BAR" are displayed, and the stop operation should be "Medium"-> "Right"-> "Left" as the current stop order, and "Black BAR" in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It indicates that you should aim for the design. In addition, with regard to the middle number and the character of “black BAR”, the boy lifts and highlights it, and it is possible to easily grasp that the stop operation should be performed first.

  Incidentally, in this case, although the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed, the pressing order notification by the instruction monitor 68 is not performed. This indicates that the pressing order notification effect of this time is not the pressing order notification effect for causing a change in the player's degree of advantage. In other words, in the case of the pressing order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage, the pressing order notification is always generated by the instruction monitor 68.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the special attack command with super attack mode is not received, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether a special RT status command with an attack mode is received.

  As described above, the special RT command with attack mode is a command to be output and set in step S3906 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating transition to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and showing that the attack mode has been won and is in the state before transition.

  If it is determined in step S4603 that the above command has been received, then in step S4604, an order-of-press notification effect is performed in which the black BAR singles are aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, when the current game result is the special replay 1, the fourth stop order of “middle” → “right” → “left” is notified. Further, if the current game result is the special replay 2, the third stop order of “middle” → “left” → “right” is notified. After performing the process of step S4604, the special RT notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4603 that the special RT command with attack mode is not received, the process advances to step S4605. In step S4605, it is determined whether a special RT status command with challenge mode has been received.

  As described above, the special RT command with challenge mode is a command to be output and set in step S3908 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating transition to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and showing that the challenge mode has been won and is in a state before transition.

  If it is determined in step S4605 that the command has been received, in step S4606, informing lottery process 1 is executed. The informing lottery process 1 is a lottery process in which whether or not to execute the push notification informing effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won is a lottery process, and the process in which the winning probability is set to the first probability (80%) It is. In this case, the lottery table having the first probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

  If it is determined in step S4605 that the special RT command with challenge mode is not received, the process advances to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined whether a special RT command has been received.

  As described above, the special RT command is a command to be output and set in step S3909 in the special RT state process (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating transition to the special RT state based on the first BB or second BB win, and a transition lottery to the attack mode or the like not having been won.

  If it is determined in step S4607 that the command has been received, in step S4608, informing lottery process 2 is executed. The informing lottery process 2 is a lottery process in which whether or not to execute the push notification informing effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won is selected, and the second probability (20%) is lower than the first probability. It is the process set to). In this case, the lottery table having the second probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

  The case where it is determined in step S4607 that the command has not been received means that the special RT of this time has shifted without being based on the first BB or the second BB, and a fake special RT command has been received. If a fake special command has been received, in step S4609, a notification lottery process 3 is executed. The informing lottery process 3 is a lottery process in which whether or not to execute the informing notification effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won is selected, and the third probability is lower than the first probability or the second probability. This is processing set to the probability (5%). In this case, the lottery table having the third probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

  After one of the processes in step S4606, step S4608, and step S4609 is executed, it is determined in step S4610 whether or not the notification lottery process has been won. If no win is made in the informing lottery process, the special RT informing process is ended as it is. In this case, even if the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, the depression order notification effect is not performed. For example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, the first replay win is established. Then, even in the special replay 1 or the special replay 2, the distinction from the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 can not be made.

  If it is determined in step S4610 that each notification lottery process has been won, in step S4611 a push order notification effect is performed in which the black BAR double balance is lost. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the third stop order of “middle” → “left” → “right” or “right” → “left” → Notify the "stop" fifth stop order. Also, if the game result this time is Special Replay 2, the fourth stop order of "middle" → "right" → "left" or the sixth stop order of "right" → "middle" → "left" Inform. After the process of step S4611, the special RT notification process ends.

  The relationship between the pressing order notification effect when the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are won and the content of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (b).

  As a result of performing stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in accordance with the push order notification effect, the black BAR double match will be the stop appearance that becomes the double match Replay winning combination (special replay 1 or special replay 2 When one of the winning combinations is established, it is determined that the special RT state of this time is the special RT state based on the first BB, and the transition to the super attack mode after the first BB. As shown in FIG. 61, the combination with the 2nd BB is set so as not to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and in the situation where the special attack command with super attack mode is output and set in step S3905, This is the case where the overlapping role with the first BB is the winning opportunity for the transition lottery to the advantageous section. Therefore, when the black BAR double alignment is stopped by operating in the stop order according to the push order notification effect, it is a special RT state based on the first BB win among the first BB and the second BB, and the super attack mode It shows that the transition lottery to has been won.

  As a result of aiming the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the push order notification effect and performing the stop operation, the black BAR singles will be the same stop position and the replay winning combination (special replay 1 or special replay 2 When one of the winning combinations is established, it is determined that the special RT state of this time is the special RT state based on the first BB, and the shift to the attack mode after the first BB. Similarly to the above, in the first BB and the second BB, the winning combination with the second BB does not win the lottery for transition to the attack mode. Therefore, the situation in which the special RT command with attack mode is output and set in step S3906 is a case where the winning combination with the first BB is a winning opportunity for a transition lottery to an advantageous section.

  As a result of aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in accordance with the push order notification effect, as a result of stopping operation becoming black BAR double temply out as a result of the stop operation, the replay winning combination (special replay 1 or special replay 2 (1) the special RT state based on the first BB and transition to the challenge mode after the first BB, and (2) the special RT based on the first BB. (3) a special RT condition based on the second BB, (4) a special RT condition not based on the first BB or the second BB win, It is either.

  However, from the difference in the winning probability of each notification lottery process, when a replay win is achieved by the stop occurrence of black BAR double balance off, the case where the push order notification effect is performed through notification lottery processing 1, that is, the above ( The possibility of being the case of 1) is the highest, and the possibility of being the case in which the push order notification effect has been performed after the notification lottery process 2, that is, the case of (2) or (3) becomes higher next.

  Furthermore, it is possible to predict which case it is from the stop point of the game that has triggered the transition to the special RT state. For example, when a stop point which becomes middle bell prize appears and it shifts to the special RT state, middle bell of index value IV = 19, middle bell overlap 1 of index value IV, 44, or middle bell overlap 2 It has transitioned to the special RT state based on either. In the case of middle bell duplication 1 with index value IV = 44, the challenge mode is won with a probability of 90%, the super attack mode is won with a probability of 10%, the attack mode is not won, and either mode is entered There is no event of not winning. Further, in the case of middle bell overlap 2 with index value IV = 45, no transition winning in any mode is won. Therefore, in the case where a stop roll which is a middle bell prize appears and it shifts to a special RT state, a push order notification effect which is a black BAR single set which suggests an attack mode win will not occur.

  In addition, when the stop appearance which becomes middle bell winning appears and it moves to special RT state, if index value IV = 44, it receives special RT command with challenge mode with probability 90%, special RT Do not receive commands. If the index value IV = 44, only the special RT command is received. When a transition to the special RT state is made at index value IV = 19, the fake special RT command is received.

  In this case, when a stop point which is a middle bell prize appears and it shifts to a special RT state, if it aims at a “black BAR” symbol according to the push order notification effect and it becomes a stop point of black bar balance loss, 1) A case in which the first BB and the challenge mode are won at index value IV = 44, or a case in which the second BB is won at index value IV = 45, or (3) neither has been won It is either the case based on fake special RT command. However, in these cases (1) to (3), the probability of winning in the notification lottery is 80%, 20%, and 5%, respectively, and it is predicted that the case of (1) is the most likely. it can. In the case of (3), on the premise that the transition is not won in any mode that occurs at 10% when the middle bell is won, the index value IV == even if the informing lottery is won. It becomes 0.5% when winning 19 and the possibility becomes extremely low.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  During the carryover state of the first BB and the second BB, the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous section such as the attack mode is limited to the execution of the lottery, and the game result which is the trigger to the carryover state is to the advantageous section. When the transition lottery has been won, the display start of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is delayed until the bonus winning. By doing this, in the configuration in which the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed by the overlapping combination of the bonus and the small winning combination, the transition lottery is performed even if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is not started in the winning game. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning.

  However, by doing as described above, the opportunity to limit the transition lottery to the advantageous section increases, and for example, since the transition lottery is not performed even if the specific combination is won during the carryover state, the carryover state is It is also considered that the sense of expectation to the advantageous section is lowered, and it can be said that the situation is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the above embodiment, the content of the transition lottery to the advantageous section implemented based on the game result triggered to the transition to the carryover state is notified using the stop number of the special replay in the carryover state , And suggested configuration. By doing this, it is possible to play a game while having a sense of expectation for the advantageous section even in the carryover state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Moreover, the carryover state basically refers to a state in which the transition is made based on the bonus winning, and when the specific winning combination that does not overlap with the bonus winning wins the transition drawing to the advantageous section, the section display in the game The display of the eighth display segment N8 is started. Therefore, for example, in the case where the stop number of winning a specific combination such as strong watermelon appears, if the display of the interval display is not started, it is a small combination that is not overlapping with the bonus and is not won in the transition lottery. If there is, it is a duplicate with the bonus and is not won in the transition lottery, or it is a duplicate with the bonus and if it is won in the transition lottery. As described above, with the configuration in which the bonus overlap winning combination and the bonus non-overlapping winning combination are both configured to perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section, it is determined whether the display start timing of the interval indicator is bonus overlapping as described above. If the configuration is made different depending on whether or not the pattern of the winning combination and the presence or absence of the display start of the section indicator is diversified, it is possible to significantly improve the game characteristics.

  In particular, for example, strong watermelon overlap 1 which is an overlapping part with a bonus and strong watermelon which is a small part which is not an overlapping role with a bonus have a common stop appearance, so strong watermelon overlap 1 and a strong watermelon In the winning game of, it is difficult to determine which result. As a result, it becomes possible to determine which result, including the start of display of the interval display, as well as whether or not the carry-over state will be established thereafter.

  As a transition lottery to an advantageous section, for example, when strong watermelon and weak watermelon are compared, the winning probability of the transition lottery to an advantageous section is stronger than that of the weak watermelon, regardless of presence or absence of overlapping with the first BB. High (Figure 61). Therefore, comparing the case where the stop appearance of the strong watermelon appears and the display of the interval display does not start, and the case where the stop appearance of the weak watermelon appears and the display of the interval display does not start, the former However, it can be determined that there is a high possibility of being in a carryover state.

  Further, for example, with regard to the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the ratio of overlap with the first BB is higher in the strong watermelon than in the weak watermelon (FIG. 61). Specifically, about one-fourth is the overlap with the first BB when strong watermelon stop appearance appears, and about 30 minutes when weak watermelon stop appearance appears. 1 becomes duplication with 1st BB. Therefore, even if the stop appearance of the strong watermelon appears and the display of the interval display is not started, even if the stop appearance of the weak watermelon appears and the display of the interval display does not start, the former is the former. It can be judged that the possibility of being in the carry over state is high.

  In the carryover state, special replays 1 and 2 can be won, and the special replays 1 and 2 are configured to notify / suggest the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, when the special replays 1 and 2 are won, when the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR double is aligned is performed, it is notified that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won, black When the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the BAR single is aligned is performed, it is informed that the winning lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed, and the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR balance is out is performed. , It is suggested that the transition lottery to the challenge mode has been won. In this way, in the carryover state in which the display of the section indicator is not started, it is assumed that the player has a feeling of expectation for the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery of the player's interest is If the content is performed by pressing order notification effect, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the pressing order notification effect.

  Even if these black BAR push order notification effects are generated, the corresponding stop points do not appear unless the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and the stop operation is performed. Therefore, in order to grasp and predict the content of the advantageous section from the relationship with the stopped appearance, it is necessary to challenge the "black BAR" symbol, and the game property is enhanced. In other words, since the "black BAR" symbol was stopped at the desired position by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the transition lottery to the attack mode etc. was won, It is also possible to give the impression that it is, and from such an impression (impression that it will not win the transition lottery if it does not aim), it is also possible to anticipate active participation in the game.

  Although the special replays 1 and 2 have different stopping numbers depending on the stopping order, the benefit obtained is the replay regardless of which stopping order, and it can be said that the pushing order notification effect does not contribute to the player's profit. Therefore, in a section in which execution of a transition lottery to an advantageous section in which the degree of advantage is changed by a push order notification such as a push order bell is limited, consistency with performing the push order notification effect is secured.

  Also, the special replays 1 and 2 are replays not involved in the transition of the RT state, as in other promotion replays and the like. Therefore, not only the reward of re-gaming but also the advantage of the subsequent gaming state does not change, and the consistency with the restriction of the transition lottery to the above-mentioned advantageous section is more Secured.

  Then, when the special replay 1 and 2 pressing order notification effects are performed, the pressing order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side is not performed, and only effects are displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like on the sub side. In other words, when the push order notification related to the player's benefit is performed, the push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side is always performed. By doing this, it is clarified that if, for example, the manager of the game hall or the like wants to monitor the relationship between the stop order and the provided benefit, it is sufficient to monitor the instruction monitor 68. The degree of freedom in the presentation of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 side is overwhelmingly improved.

  The special replays 1 and 2 in which the push order notification effect can be generated are game results that do not trigger a transition lottery to an advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to purely enjoy the push order notification effect without giving a negative image that the transition lottery is restricted in the carry over state.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the configuration of special replay that can be won during the special RT state is different. FIG. 101 shows a lottery table for special RT status transition based on the first BB and second BB wins in the present modification, and FIG. 102 shows availability for special RTs transition based on neither the first BB nor second BB wins. It is a lottery table.

  In this modification, as the special replay, the special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay as the index value IV = 53, and the first replay as the index value IV = 54, the first replay 9 special replays consisting of 12th replay and 14th replay and index value IV = 55, special replays consisting of 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay and 15th replay 5 and are set.

  The winning modes of the first replay and the ninth replay to the fifteenth replay are as described above, and in the first replay, a prize is established at the stop spot where the right downward replay is mainly made, and the ninth replay The game ~ the 12th re-game is a stop to black bar balance off and the winning is realized, the 13th re-play is a black BAR double break off and the stop is realized, the 14 th replay is A prize is established at the stop point where the black BAR singles are aligned, and a prize is established when the stop point where the black BAR doubles is aligned in the fifteenth replay. In addition, the winning probability of the special replays 3 to 5 is about 16.5 times each.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in special replays 3 to 5, the corresponding replay can be won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, for example, in the situation where Special Replay 5 has been won, stopping by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R regardless of the stopping order stops the black BAR double alignment. The 15th Replay is awarded. In addition, even if Special Replay 5 has been won, if you stop operation without aiming the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, many of them will be in the downward right replay regardless of the stop order. The first re-game winning combination is established.

  By the way, 14th Replay and 15th Replay are not associated with Special Replay 3, so even when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and targeted for the "Black BAR" symbol at the time of winning, the stop operation is also possible. Regardless of the stop order, the 14th and 15th replays do not win, and there is no appearance of a stop point which becomes a black BAR single match or a black BAR double match. Further, since the special replay 4 is not associated with the thirteenth replay or the fifteenth replay, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to aim for the "black BAR" symbol at the time of winning, the stop operation is also possible. Regardless of the stop order, the 13th and 15th replays do not win, and there is no appearance of stop occurrences that result in black BAR double balance falling off and black BAR double alignment. Similarly, since the special replay 5 is not associated with the thirteenth replay or the fourteenth replay, even when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targeted for the "black BAR" symbol at the time of winning, the stop operation, Regardless of the stop order, the thirteenth replay game and the fourteenth replay game do not win, and there is no appearance of the stop point which becomes the black BAR double balance dropout or the black BAR single match.

  Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode which is recommended for establishing a winning combination for each small combination including the specific combination will be described.

  Among the roles that can be won in each game, the small roles that cause so-called dropouts that can not be won by the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons . More specifically, as described above, the strong cherries and the strong cherries duplicates 1 and 2 have a role in which any of the 28th small part, the 32nd small part to the 35th small part can win a prize, but for the left reel 32L The 28th small symbol, the 32nd small symbol to the 35th small symbol are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the 20th "white bell" symbol from the seventh "red bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 28 small winning symbol, the 32nd small winning symbol to the 35th small winning symbol "cherry" symbol and "second replay" symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a drop of the strong cherry role occurs.

  In addition, weak cherry is a part that any of the 27th small part, the 32nd small part to the 35th small part can win a prize, the 27th small part design for the left reel 32L, the 32nd small part design ~ The 35 small character symbols are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. Also in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the 20th "white bell" symbol from the seventh "red bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, Any of the above-mentioned 27th small symbol, the 32nd small symbol to the 35th small symbol, a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a drop of the weak cherry role occurs.

  While the strong watermelon and strong watermelon duplicates 1 and 2 have a role in which either the 30th small role or the 41st small portion can be won, the 30th small portion symbol and the 41st small portion symbol for the left reel 32L are It is a "watermelon" pattern. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the third "white bell" symbol from the ninth "red 7" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The small water symbol and the 41st small water symbol "watermelon" can not be stopped on the effective line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a drop of the strong watermelon role occurs.

  The weak watermelon is a combination in which any of the twenty-ninth small combination and the forty-first small combination can be won, and the twenty-ninth small combination pattern and the forty-first small combination pattern for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Also in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the third "white bell" symbol from the ninth "red 7" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, It is not possible to stop the "watermelon" symbol, which is the twenty-ninth small symbol and the 41st small symbol, at the effective line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a drop of the weak watermelon role occurs.

  In this case, when the left reel 32L is operated to stop while retaining the possibility of winning for any of the roles that may cause such a drop, the sixth "second replay" symbol from the fourth "cherry" symbol is of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop operation at the timing when the upper row is reached. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a drop, and each operation mode in which the above-described drop occurs with respect to this is a nonspecific operation It is also referred to as an aspect (second operation aspect).

  Furthermore, in each game, a chance notification effect may occur as the effect in a game that is highly likely to have won the specific part. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), for example, the character display "chance !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the character with the surprise mark is displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, Make it correspond to 32R and display it respectively. In addition, in the chance notification effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "key" by electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  In the chance notification effect, although it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is any of the specific roles, it is set so that it can not be determined or it is difficult to determine which of the specific roles. That is, when the chance notification effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be any of strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc., but with either strong cherries or weak cherries. It can not be determined whether there is any, whether it is strong watermelon or weak watermelon, or whether it is strong cherry or strong watermelon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the player can use the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even when any of the specific roles are won. I will do the operation.

  Here, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect differs depending on whether or not the special RT state is underway. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), except in the special RT state, chance notification effect occurs at 80% when winning the specific part, but in the special RT state, the identification is performed. A chance notification effect occurs at 5% of the winning combination. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the present embodiment, the special RT state is provided mainly for extending the sense of expectation of winning the first BB or the second BB, whereas the first BB or the second BB win is carried over. During carryover, duplicate winnings of the first BB and the second BB do not occur, and the execution of the transition lottery of the new advantageous section is also limited. That is, even if the player is newly elected in the game performed in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, the double winning with the first BB and the second BB does not occur, and the advantageous section Since there is no chance to win the transition lottery, it is basically unpreferable for the player from the viewpoint of the timing of winning. Therefore, in the special RT state that brings anticipation to being carried over, even if the specific combination is won, the specific combination is elected by setting the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect lower than the occurrence rate other than the special RT state. In order to make it hard to notice or to generate a dignified effect, a device is made to prevent the player's feeling of being pulled down from being reversed.

  However, even if the player wins the specific part in the carryover state, even if he can not expect to win a new bonus or win the transition to the advantageous section, dropping the specific part itself is from the point of medal loss. Undesirable for the player. Therefore, it is considered that the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout, particularly in the special RT state, regardless of whether or not the player is a special player. .

  As already explained, even if special replays 3 to 5 are won in the special RT state, the 13th to 15th replays are not established unless the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, and black is achieved. There will be no appearance of the BAR double balance dropout or the black BAR single match or the black BAR double match stop appearance. In other words, when the operation of the left reel 32L will be performed in the specific operation mode, these stopping points do not appear.

  The special RT notification process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special RT notification process is a process (FIG. 99) performed in step S4515 in the pressing order notification process (FIG. 98) by the display control device 81.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S4701 whether or not special replay 5 is won. If the player has won, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not the special attack command with super attack mode has been received with reference to the command storage area. If such a command has been received, in step S4703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the black BAR touch warning effect is performed.

  In the black BAR eye-touch notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image in which the character of the hub and the character of mongoose are fighting while being intertwined. Further, together with the image of the battle of the hub and mongoose, a display image of an eye-pushing instruction for aiming at the “black BAR” on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is also displayed. In addition, in the black BAR aim depression notification effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I aim" with a male voice) is emitted from the speaker 64. In this case, for example, when the player targets the "black BAR" symbol and performs a stop operation from the left reel 32L, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the "black BAR" symbol appears on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and "white" in the middle. Because the "BAR BAR" symbol and the "BLAR BAR" symbol stop in the lower part, there is a feeling of expectation for the appearance of the stopping marks that become the black BAR double alignment and the black BAR single alignment.

  If the player performs a stop operation aiming at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the "black BAR" symbol on the basis of the black BAR push notification effect in step S4703, in this case, the black BAR double alignment is stopped. The fifteenth game winning combination is established. On the other hand, if the special attack command with super attack mode is not received at step S4702, the special RT notification process is ended without generating the black BAR eye-touch notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above in order to prevent the specific combination from being dropped. As a result, even if the Special Replay 5 is won, it is difficult for a black-on-black double-arranged stop occurrence to appear easily, and it is easy for the first replay and the ninth replay to the twelfth replay to be established.

  If it is determined in step S4701 that special replay 5 is not won, it is determined in step S4704 whether special replay 4 is won. If the special replay 4 is won, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not the special RT command with the attack mode is received. If it is received, in step S4706, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a black BAR touch warning effect. In this case, when the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the 14th re-game winning combination is established when the black BAR singles match. On the other hand, when the special RT command with the attack mode is not received in step S4705, the special RT notification process is ended without generating the black BAR eye-touch notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the Special Replay 4 is won, it is difficult for the black BAR singles to be stopped, and it is easy for the first replay and the ninth replay to the twelfth replay to be established.

  If it is determined in step S4704 that Special Replay 4 is not won, it is determined in Step S4707 whether Special Replay 3 is won. If Special Replay 3 is won, it is determined in Step S4708 whether a special RT command with a challenge mode has been received. If it is received, in step S4709, the notification lottery process 1 is executed. The notification lottery process 1 is substantially the same process as the above-described step S4608, and performs a lottery for winning the notification at the first probability (80%). If the special RT command with challenge mode is not received, it is determined in step S4710 whether the special RT command is received. If the special RT command is received, the informing lottery process 2 is executed in step S4711, and if the special RT command is not received, the informing lottery process 3 is executed in step S4712. The informing lottery process 2 and the informing lottery process 3 are substantially the same as the processes in step S4608 and step S4609, and informing informing the informing lottery process 2 with the second probability (20%) lower than the first probability, the informing lottery Process 3 is a lottery in which a notification win is made at a third probability (5%) lower than the second probability.

  After executing the processing of step S4709, step S4711, or step S4712, it is determined in step S4713 whether or not the notification lottery process has been won. If the player has won, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the black BAR touch warning effect in step S4714. In this case, when the player stops the reel 32L, 32M, 32R by aiming for the “black BAR” symbol, the black BAR double payout is removed, and the thirteenth game remake is established. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4713 that the notification lottery process has not been won, the notification process for the special RT is ended as it is without generating the black BAR push notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the Special Replay 3 is won, it is difficult for a black-out double-paid-off stop game to appear easily, and the first replay and the ninth replay to the twelfth replay are easily established.

  If it is determined in step S4707 that Special Replay 3 is not won, the special RT notification process ends. That is, at the time of normal replay winning or other small winning combination, black BAR aim notification information effect is not generated.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to make the number of stops at the time of special replay winning different, while not using the pressing order notification effect. Therefore, with regard to the advantageous section in which the degree of advantage is changed by the push order notification such as push order bell, the significance section during the carryover state, while strictly securing the significance of restricting the transition lottery to the advantageous section during carryover state. It is possible to realize the game feature in which the notification regarding the

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the specific combination is won in the special RT state, a predetermined notification cancellation lottery is performed, and when the special replay is won in the notification cancellation lottery, the push order notification for aligning the "black BAR" symbol is performed. Generate a rendition. In this modification, a special RT state capable of winning the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 in the second embodiment is set, and the number of stoppages may differ depending on the stop order.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a specific combination notification process in the present modification. As described above, the specific combination notification process is a process (FIG. 52) performed in step S1905 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81, and is a process performed when the specific combination is won. is there.

  In the specific combination notification process in the present modification, the notification release process is performed in step S4801 before the process of setting the pseudo precursor mode (step S4802 to step S4810) as in the process of steps S2501 to S2509.

  In the notification cancellation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108A, it is first determined in step S4901 whether a special RT state is in progress. When it is not in the special RT state, the process for canceling the notification is ended as it is. If it is in the special RT state, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the transition lottery to an advantageous section has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags is set, the notification cancellation process is ended. If one of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S4903.

  In step S4903, a release lottery table in which a release rate corresponding to the specific combination is set is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. In the cancellation lottery table, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), for example, in strong cherry, the cancellation is won with a probability of 40%, and in weak cherry, the cancellation is won with a 5% probability lower than that of strong cherry. Also, strong watermelons have a 80% chance of being canceled with a higher probability than strong cherries, and weak watermelons have a 20% probability of being canceled.

  In step S4904, a release lottery process is performed based on the release lottery table acquired in step S4903. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the cancellation lottery has been won. If the cancellation lottery has not been won, the notification cancellation process is ended. If the cancellation lottery has been won, the process of setting the cancellation flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is performed in step S4906, and the notification cancellation process is ended.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a notification process for special RT in the present modification.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S5001 whether the release flag is set. If the release flag is not set, in step S5002, processing is performed to acquire a notification table for the non-release state from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. If the release flag is set, in step S5003, processing is performed to acquire a notification table for the release state from the various table storage area 182a. In these notification tables, when Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2 is won, the winning probability of the notification lottery whether or not to notify the stop order in which the black BAR double alignment, the black BAR single alignment, and the black BAR double balance fall out are performed. Is a table in which the notification table for the release state is higher than the notification table for the non-release state, and the winning probability of the notification lottery is higher.

  After performing the processing of step S5002 or step S5003, it is determined in step S5004 whether or not the special attack command with super attack mode has been received. If it is received, the process advances to step S5005 to execute informing lottery process 1. The informing lottery process 1 is a lottery process whether or not to execute the pushing order informing effect in the stop order in which the black BAR double alignment is performed, and the lottery process is performed based on the informing table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. Do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 1 in the non-cancelled state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 1 in the released state, the notification lottery is performed with an 80% probability higher than that in the non-cancelled state. To win.

  In step S5006, it is determined based on the processing result of step S5005 whether or not the informing lottery has been won, and if the informing lottery has not been won, the special RT informing process is ended as it is. If the informing lottery is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate the pushing order informing effect of the stop order in which the black BAR is double aligned in step S5007, and the informing of special RT End the process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5004, it is determined in step S5008 whether or not a special RT command with an attack mode has been received. If it is received, the process proceeds to step S5009, and a notification lottery process 2 is executed. The informing lottery process 2 is a lottery process whether or not to execute the pushing order informing effect in the stop order in which the black BAR singles are aligned, and the lottery process is performed based on the informing table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. Do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 2 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 2 in the cancellation state, the notification lottery in the 80% probability higher than that in the non-cancellation state To win.

  In step S5010, it is determined based on the processing result of step S5009 whether or not the informing lottery has been won, and if the informing lottery has not been won, the special RT informing process is ended as it is. If the informing lottery is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to generate the pressing order informing effect of the stop order to become the black BAR single set in step S5011, and the informing of the special RT is performed. End the process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined in step S5012 whether a special RT command with a challenge mode has been received. If it is received, the process proceeds to step S5013 to execute informing lottery process 3. Informing lottery process 3 is a lottery process as to whether or not to execute the pushing order informing effect in the stop order in which the black BAR double balance is lost, and the drawing process based on the informing table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. I do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 3 in the non-cancelled state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 30%, and in the notification lottery process 3 in the released state, the notification lottery is performed with an 80% probability higher than that in the non-cancelled state. To win.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5012, it is determined in step S5014 whether a special RT command has been received. If it is received, the process proceeds to step S5015, and a notification lottery process 4 is executed. If not received, the process proceeds to step S5016 to execute the notification lottery process 5. The informing lottery process 4 and the informing lottery process 5 are also lottery processes as to whether or not to execute the pushing order informing effect of the stop order in which the black BAR double balance is lost, and the informing table acquired in the step S5002 or S5003. Based on the lottery process. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 4 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 4 in the cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with the same 10% probability as in the non-cancellation state. Do. Further, in the notification lottery process 5 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 5%, and in the notification lottery process 5 in the cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with the same 5% probability as in the non-cancellation state.

  After the process of step S5013, step S5015 or step S5016 is performed, the process proceeds to step S5017. In step S5017, it is determined based on the processing result of each of the informing lottery processes 3 to 5 whether or not the informing lottery is won, and if the informing lottery is not won, the informing process for the special RT is ended as it is. If the informing lottery has been won, in step S5018, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to generate the pressing order informing effect of the stop order that causes the black BAR double temper- ing to be lost, and for special RT The notification process is ended.

  A state of special replay winning in the special RT state of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, it is assumed that a stop point to be a weak watermelon winning combination appears and shifts to a special RT state. The example of FIG. 110 shows the case of transition to the special RT state with the super attack mode. As described above, in the special RT state, the player frequently wins the replay.

  For example, when a special combination such as a weak watermelon combination is won during the special RT state, the notification cancellation process (FIG. 108) is performed. Then, when cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process of the notification cancellation process, the notification table acquired when the special replays 1 and 2 are elected thereafter is different (steps S5002 and S5003), and the person who has won the cancellation lottery However, it becomes easier to win the informing lottery. Then, when the special replay 1, 2 wins in the notification lottery (step S5005), the push order notification effect of the stop order to be the black BAR double alignment is generated, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed in the stop order. When the stop operation is performed by aiming at the "BAR BAR" symbol, the fifteenth game winning combination is established at the stop position where the black BAR double alignment is achieved.

  On the other hand, if the special RT condition does not win the specific role such as the weak watermelon role, or if the specific role wins but does not win in the cancellation lottery process, a notification lottery for winning Special Replay 1, 2 is made The probability of winning is reduced. As a result, when the special replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replaying game winning is established at the stop appearance where the replay is downward to the right.

  By doing as described above, the playability when the special winning combination is won during the special RT state is improved. As described above, in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, a bonus winning does not newly occur, and a transition lottery to an advantageous section is not performed. Therefore, despite the fact that the player has won the special part, there are fewer benefits available than in the situation in which the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is not set. In this respect, as described above, when the notification cancellation lottery is performed based on the specific combination winning, there is a merit that the game of predicting the contents of the subsequent advantageous section is performed, and the bonus drawing based on the specific combination winning or the advantageous It becomes possible to provide an alternative to the section lottery.

  In particular, by allowing the appearance of the stop number indicating the content of the advantageous section based on the specific combination winning in the special RT state, it is possible to draw the transition to the advantageous interval based on the specific winning combination in the special RT state. The player can be reminded as if he or she has won. Therefore, it is possible to make it hard to notice that the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not performed in the situation where the first BB win flag and the second BB win flag are set.

  Further, in the special RT state, even if the special lottery is not won in the cancellation lottery based on the specific combination winning, it is configured to be able to win the notification lottery, so the special section that triggered the transition to the special RT state It makes it easier to ambiguous to make a judgment on whether to have won the advantageous section triggered by the specific part that has won after transitioning to the special RT state, or the game to be predicted is made more It can be entertained.

  According to the configuration that enables notification of the contents of the transition lottery to the advantageous section based on the specific combination winning in the carryover state (during the special RT state) as in the above modification, based on the specific combination winning in the carryover state It is possible to realize a new game characteristic of notifying the contents of the transition lottery to the advantageous section which has already been executed. That is, since the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous section based on the specific combination winning is limited in the carryover state, it can be said that the specific combination winning is not preferable for the player. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the transition lottery has been carried out based on the winning of the specific part by notifying the contents of the transition lottery which has been executed, and the transition is made while carrying over It also becomes possible not to realize that the lottery is restricted.

  As described above, in the winning game of the game result that is the trigger for transition to the carryover state, the result of the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not necessarily notified, and the notification may be limited. Specifically, even if the attack mode or the like is won, the notification that the event has been won is performed after the precursor mode, but depending on the number of games set in the precursor mode, the result of the transition lottery to the advantageous section Is notified in a game after the game in which the transition lottery has been performed. Therefore, as described above, when the transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed by the overlapping role with the bonus that has triggered the carryover state, in the carryover state, the content of the transition lottery remains unreported There is a high possibility. With such a configuration, in the configuration in which the content of the unannounced can be notified triggered by the specific part winning as described above, an event that there is no unannounced content is less likely to occur.

  In addition, rather than informing the content of the unannounced content in the specific combination winning game in the carryover state, the content not notified in the later game than the specific combination winning game It becomes possible to perform the notification of the content of the notification in more various games.

  Then, in the game after the specific combination winning game, the content of the unannounced content is notified in the special replay winning game, leaving room for not being notified unless the special replay winning is won. Even if the transition lottery is not won, the sense of expectation can be sustained.

  On the other hand, the above-mentioned unannounced content is notified by the presence or absence of lighting of the section indicator at the end of the carryover state, that is, when the bonus is won. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the unreported content is not notified endlessly.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a plurality of special RT states are set, and the type of special replay to be won differs depending on each special RT state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state are set as the special RT states, and the types of special replays to be won in each RT state are different. In the fifth RT state, normal replay consisting of the first replay, and special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. There is. The winning probability of each replay is usually about one-third of the replay, about one-half of 21.8 for the special replay 5, and about one-third of the overall replay probability.

  In the sixth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, and the special replay 4 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fourteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. There is. The winning probability of each replay is usually about one-third of the replay, about one-half of 21.8 for the special replay 4, and about one-third of the overall replay probability.

  In the seventh RT state, normal replay consisting of the first replay and special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. The winning probability of each replay is usually about one-third of the replay, about one-two-one-half of the special replay 3, and about one-third of the total replay probability.

  In the eighth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and the special replays 3 to 5 are not won. And, since the normal replay is about one-third, the total replay probability is also about one-third.

  In this modification, different RT states are set at the time of transition to the special RT state. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing in the present modification.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S5102 whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If one of the BB winning flags is set, it is determined in step S5103 whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5104 whether the specialization zone winning flag is set.

  If the special zone zone winning flag is set and the transition lottery to the super attack mode has been won, the process for setting the special attack command with the super attack mode as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S5105 is performed. Do. Then, in step S5106, the current RT setting flag is stored in a predetermined storage area, and in step S5107, the current RT setting flag is cleared. Thereafter, in step S5108, processing is performed to set the fifth RT setting flag, and the special RT state processing ends. The processes in steps S5106 to S5108 are basically the same as the processes in steps S3914 to S3916 although there is a difference in the type of RT setting flag to be set, and in the following description, details of each process are I omit it.

  By the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the fifth RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the current special RT state is the special RT state based on the first BB winning and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode is won, the state shifts to the fifth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state in which the special replay 5 can be established is achieved, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the replay combination of the black BAR double alignment is established.

  If it is determined in step S5104 that the super attack mode selection flag is not set, a special RT command with an attack mode is set as an output target in step S5109, and then the sixth RT state is entered in steps S5110 to S5112. After performing processing for migration, the special RT state processing is terminated.

  By the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the sixth RT state among the special RT states. That is, when the special RT state of this time is the special RT state based on the first BB winning and the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the state shifts to the sixth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state in which the special replay 4 can be established is achieved, and if the stop operation is performed by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the replay winning combination of the black BAR single assortment is established.

  If it is determined in step S5103 that the attack mode selection flag is not set, it is determined in step S5113 whether the challenge mode selection flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S5114, a special RT command with a challenge mode is set as an output target. Thereafter, in step S5115 to step S5117, processing for transitioning to the seventh RT state is performed, and the special RT state processing ends.

  By the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the seventh RT state among the special RT states. That is, when the special RT state of this time is the special RT state based on the first BB winning and the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the state shifts to the seventh RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state in which the special replay 3 can be established is achieved, and if the stop operation is performed by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the replay win of the black BAR balance loss is established.

  If it is determined in step S5113 that the challenge mode selection flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target in step S5118. Thereafter, processing for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5119 to S5121, and the special RT state processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5102 that neither the first BB win flag nor the second BB win flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5122. The process of step S5122 to step S5125 is the same as the process of step S3910 to step S3913. After the output setting of the fake special RT command is performed in step S5125, processing for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5126 to S5128, and the special RT state processing ends.

  By the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the eighth RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the special RT state of this time is a special RT state based on the 1BB or 2BB win, and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode, the attack mode, or the challenge mode is not won, or the 1BB or 2BB If the player does not win in any of the attack mode and the like, it shifts to the eighth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the normal replay is established frequently, and the special replays 3 to 5 are not in the RT state, and even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, black BAR double alignment or black No BAR single match, no black BAR double temppai replay winnings occur.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5129. The processes of step S5129 to step S5135 are the same as the processes of step S3917 to step S3923, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in the present embodiment, regardless of the content of the advantageous section, when the special replay is won, a black BAR eye-touch notification effect is generated. In other words, if the RT state is the 5th RT state, by operating according to the black BAR push notification information effect, the stop point that becomes the black BAR double alignment appears, and if the 6 RT state, the black BAR push notification effect By performing the operation according to, the black bar single assortment stop appearance appears, and in the case of the seventh RT state, the black bar double depression of the black BAR double balance appearance appears by operating according to the black bar push notification information effect Do. In the eighth RT state, no special replay win is made, so no black BAR aim depression notification effect is generated.

  By doing as described above, since the winning probability itself of the special replays 3 to 5 is different in each RT state, it is not necessary to perform a drawing etc. for notification at the time of the special replay winnings, and the advantageous section It is possible to play a game that predicts the content of.

  In the configuration in which the transition RT state is made different according to the content of the advantageous section as in the modification, the game result may be set in association with the RT state and the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, for example, although a strong cherry duplication 1 (IV = 32) may be elected in the super attack mode, it is not elected in the attack mode or the challenge mode, and a special RT is shifted based on the strong cherry duplication 1. The state is set to a fifth RT state. Also, although the weak cherry duplication 1 (IV = 34) can be won in the attack mode, it is made not to win in the super attack mode or the challenge mode, and the special RT state to shift based on the weak cherry duplication 1 is the sixth RT. It will be in the state. Although strong watermelon duplicate 1 (IV = 36) and weak watermelon duplicate 1 (IV = 38) can be won in the challenge mode, they are prevented from winning in the super attack mode or attack mode, and these strong watermelon duplicate 1 and weak watermelon duplicates The special RT state transitioning based on 1 is set to a seventh RT state. In other duplicators (IV = 40 chance A duplication 1, IV = 42 chance B duplication 1, IV = 44 middle bell duplication 1), you will not win in any of the super attack mode, attack mode and challenge mode The special RT state, which transitions based on these duplicates, is called the eighth RT state. By doing this, the game result that is the trigger for transition to each RT state is associated, and the transparency of the game is secured.

  Then, in each RT state, the notification lottery probability at the time of special replay winning is made different depending on whether or not the transition lottery to the super attack mode, the attack mode, or the challenge mode is won, so that the transition lottery to each mode is performed. It is possible to secure the pleasure of predicting whether or not a player has won.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the RT state is associated with the game result, it is also possible to vary the content of the advantageous section that can win the transition lottery even with the same stopping appearance by increasing the types of bonus. For example, in addition to the first BB and the second BB, the third BB and the fourth BB are provided. Then, in strong cherry duplication A in which the first BB and the strong cherry are double-picked, it is assumed that only the super attack mode can be won, and the transition RT state is set to the fifth RT state. On the other hand, in the strong cherry overlap B in which the 3rd BB and the strong cherry are double winning, it is assumed that only the attack mode can be won, and the transition RT state is set to the sixth RT state. Then, in the strong cherry duplication C where the 4th BB and the strong cherry are double-picked, the transition RT state is set as the seventh RT state, assuming that only the challenge mode can be won. By doing this, it is not possible to grasp the contents of the advantageous section that can be transferred from the stopped item (in the above example, the stopped item that becomes the strong cherry winning) which is the trigger for the transition to the RT state. It becomes possible to enjoy the game which predicts the content of the advantageous section from the halted appearance at the time of subsequent special replay winning.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, as in the third modification, the special RT state to be shifted is made different according to the contents of the advantageous section, and the winning probability of the predetermined special replay in each special RT state is made different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, in the fifth RT state, which is a special RT state in which the super attack mode has been won, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, the first replay, the ninth replay ~ The special replay 5 consisting of the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay is set as a replay that can be won. The winning probability of each replay is usually about one-third of the replay, about one-half of 21.8 for the special replay 5, and about one-third of the overall replay probability.

  In the sixth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, and the special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay are set as replays that can be won. The type of replay to be won is the same as in the fifth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, and the replay probability is usually about one-fifth, which is higher than that of the fifth RT state, and the special replay 5 is about one-third. And a winning probability lower than that of the fifth RT state is set.

  The seventh RT state is also set as a replay that can be won by the normal replay consisting of the first replay, and the special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay. The type of replay to be won is the same as the fifth RT state or the sixth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, and the normal replay is about 1 in 4.6, which is higher than that of the fifth RT state or the sixth RT state, and the special replay 5 is about 65. The winning probability is set to one fifth, which is lower than that of the fifth RT state or the sixth RT state.

  In the eighth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and each special replay 5 is not won. And, since the normal replay is about one-third, the total replay probability is also about one-third.

  By the way, in the special RT notification process in the present embodiment, regardless of the content of the advantageous section, a black BAR aim depression notification effect is generated when Special Replay 5 is won. That is, regardless of the type of the RT state, a stop point appears in which the black BAR double alignment is performed based on the Special Replay 5 winning.

  As described above, by changing the type of special RT state to be transitioned according to the contents of the advantageous section and changing the winning probability of the special replay 5 depending on the type of special RT state, the advantageous section is selected by the winning probability of the special replay 5 It is possible to play a game such as predicting the contents of the game. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the winning probability of the lottery process whether to generate the black BAR push-down notification effect upon winning Special Replay 5 different according to the content of the advantageous section, and the configuration can be simplified. Moreover, since it does not appear because the stop appearance point of the black BAR double alignment etc. does not appear even if you look at the "black BAR" symbol in the situation where the black BAR push notification information effect is not generated, as described above It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that a stop spot such as black BAR double alignment sometimes appears.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, a configuration example will be described in which the transition to the special RT state is performed by the re-game winning combination.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the provided benefit in the present modification.

  In this modification, the re-game is set as a privilege to be awarded when winning each of the combinations (the 27th to the 38th combinations) identified as the specific combination in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. And the fourth RT state, that is, the special RT state. That is, for example, when winning a winning combination of strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc. and a winning combination is established, re-playing is given, and the state shifts to the fourth RT state. In addition, when the winning combination is won for the double winning combination of each combination and bonus (strong cherry duplication 1 and 2 and strong watermelon duplicate 1 and 2 etc), the corresponding winning combination is established and re-playing is awarded. Move to the 4th RT state.

  In addition, regarding the re-game in which the winning is realized by the stop occurrence of the strong cherry or the like, it is preferable that no dropout occurs by, for example, taking a combined role with the first re-play. That is, when it is not possible to stop the stop order such as strong cherry, it is preferable that a winning is established at another stop order, a re-game is given, and the state is shifted to the fourth RT state.

  And in this modification, each combination that will be given these replays and the 4th RT state is designated as a specific combination (hereinafter also referred to as a specific replay), and the transition of the advantageous section based on the specific replay success is made. Make a lottery. More specifically, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), when the player is selected for the specific replay, an affirmative determination is made to perform the first to third combination processing. Do.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in the present modification.

  It is determined in step S5201 whether or not the transition outcome has stopped, and if it has stopped, it is determined in step S5202 whether any one of the first BB win flag and the second BB win flag is set. Do. That is, the process of step S5202 mainly shows the case where the state shifts to the fourth RT state based on the result of being won with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB among the respective results to be given the above-mentioned replay ing. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the RT state process is ended as it is. That is, in this case, the transition of the RT state is not performed even if the stopping point stops.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5202, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not it is a normal gaming state, and if it is a normal gaming state, processing is performed to set the first RT state in step S5204. If a negative determination is made in step S5205, it is determined in step S5205 whether or not a second game winning combination has been established, and if it is established or if a negative determination is made in step S5103, the step After the RT setting flag is cleared in S5206, processing is performed to set the first RT state in step S5204. The processes of steps S5204 to S5206 are the same as the processes of steps S503 to S505.

  Further, in step S5205, if the second game win is not established, in steps S5207 to S5212, as in the processes of steps S506 to S511, the RT state corresponding to the winning game is set. Do the process.

  If it is determined in step S5210 that the fourth and fifth replay prizes have not been established, the process proceeds to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether or not a specific re-game winning combination has been established. If the winning is not established, the RT state process is ended as it is. If winning is established, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5214, and the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S5215 to shift the gaming state to the fourth RT state, and then the real RT state processing is performed. Finish. Also in the present modification, when transitioning to the fourth RT state, the RT state before the transition may be stored.

  FIG. 116 shows special RT state processing in this modification.

  In the special RT state process of this modification, since the transition process to the fourth RT state is performed in the RT state process as described above, the transition process to the fourth RT state in the special RT state process is performed. Absent. Specifically, in steps S5301 to S5309, as in the above steps S3901 to S3909, processing is performed to set various special RT commands based on specific re-game winnings that result in double winning with the first BB or the second BB. After that, the special RT state process ends without performing the transition process to the fourth RT state in steps S3914 to S3916.

  If it is determined in step S5302 that the game is not a duplicate win with the first BB or the second BB, it is determined in step S5310 whether or not a specific replay is won, and if a specific replay is win, On the condition that the attack mode, the challenge mode and the like have not been won (step S5311: NO), processing for setting a fake special RT command is performed in step S5312, and the special RT state processing is ended.

  Further, in this modification, when it is determined in step S5301 that the player is not in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the processing for ending the fourth RT state (step S3917 to step S3923) is not performed. End RT state processing.

  With the above configuration, it is possible to match the transition condition to the special RT state with the condition in the case where various re-game winnings, which are the transition conditions to the other RT state, are established.

  Further, in the above configuration, the special RT state transitioned without passing through the first BB or second BB win is terminated on the condition that the transition outcome is stopped, so the number of continued games in the special RT state is The game is diversified, and until the drop of the bell occurs (until the transition comes to a stop), the game is performed to estimate the subsequent degree of advantage (whether BB won or not, advantageous zone won) during the special RT state Can entertain you.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the special replay in the special RT state is used to suggest that the first BB and the second BB have been won as well as the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, as in the fifth modification of the second embodiment, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, chances A, chances B, middle bells, strong cherries 1, 2, Weak cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 all play a game by winning It is assumed that the fourth RT state is given while being given.

  FIG. 117 shows a part of the success or failure lottery table in the special RT state in the present embodiment. As described above, in the special RT state, the winning probability of the replay does not change, and the winning probability of the replay changes. FIG. 117 shows the winning combination and the winning probability only for the replay in which the winning probability changes. Also in this embodiment, in the special RT state, the player normally wins the normal replay with the index value IV = 1, and in rare cases, wins the special replay 6 to the special replay 11. Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 are duplicates of any of the sixteenth replay to the twenty-fourth replay.

  As shown in FIG. 118, although the 16th to 24th replays are all provided with a replay as a benefit, their stopping power is different, and in particular, “black” in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R The number of stops of the symbol "BAR" is different. In the following description, the winning mode is described on the assumption that the downward right line L4 is set as an effective line in a 3-bet game.

  The 16th replay is "Black BAR" symbol of left reel 32L, "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol of middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of right reel 32R. A prize mode is established in which a prize is established by stopping on the active line. In the 17th replay, "Black BAR" symbol of left reel 32L, "Red bell" symbol or "White bell" symbol of middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbol or "Black BAR" symbol of right reel 32R is effective line A winning mode is established in which winning is achieved by stopping. Even if these sixteenth replay and seventeenth replays are operated by aiming the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R Is a prize mode that does not stop.

  In the eighteenth replay, the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R A prize mode is established in which a prize is established by stopping on the active line. The 19th game is won by the "Black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R stopping at the effective line. The prize mode in which is established is set. In the 20th replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The prize mode in which the prize is established is set. In any of these eighteenth to twentieth replays, when aiming at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, one of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R " It is a prize mode that one black BAR symbol stops.

  The 21st game is played by stopping the "White BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "Red Bell" symbol or the "White Bell" symbol on the Right reel 32R at the effective line The prize mode in which is established is set. In the 22nd replay, the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The prize mode in which the prize is established is set. In the 23rd Replay, the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, and the winning mode is established. It is set. In any of these 21st to 23rd replays, when aiming at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, any of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R " It is a prize mode that two black BAR symbols stop.

  In the 24th Replay, the "White BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line, and a winning mode is established. It is set. In the twenty-fourth replay mode, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R aim at the "black BAR" symbol and the stop operation is performed, the "black BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped at the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The number of stops for the middle "black BAR" symbol is three.

  Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 are push orders in which the winning combination differs depending on the stop order. However, even if any of the winning combinations, the benefit provided is replay, and the degree of advantage for the player does not differ. In other words, these special replays 6 to 11 are roles that the degree of advantage does not change although the numbers of stops for winning being awarded differ depending on the stop order.

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning pattern established.

  The special replay 6 is a duplicate of the sixteenth replay, the eighteenth replay to the twentieth replay. When the special replay 6 is won, the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the first stop order of "left" → "middle" → "right", the sixteenth replay or the eighteenth replay A prize is established, and in this case, when the stop operation is performed by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the eighteenth regame prize of the sixteenth replay and the eighteenth replay is established. , "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. When stopping in the second stop order of “left” → “right” → “medium”, the sixteenth game re-combination is established. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels even if the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at the middle of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If you stop in the third stop order of "middle" → "left" → "right", the 16th game or the 19th game winning is established, in this case, "black" in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR "symbol, the nineteenth replay prize is established among the sixteenth replay and the nineteenth replay, and the" black BAR "symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M. When the game is stopped in the fourth stop order of "middle" → "right" → "left", the sixteenth game rebirth is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle on any reel. When stopping in the fifth stop order of “right” → “left” → “middle”, the 16th game or the 20th game winning is established, and in this case, “black” in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR "symbol, the twentieth game is achieved among the sixteenth game and the twentieth game, and the" black BAR "symbol stops at the middle of the right reel 32R. When the game is stopped in the sixth stop order of "right" → "middle" → "left", the sixteenth game rebirth is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle on any reel. In the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” in the middle. If it is the timing which can not stop the symbol, the 16th re-game winning combination is established in any case.

  The special replay 7 is a duplicate of the seventeenth replay to the twentieth replay. Then, similarly to the case of the special replay 6, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order In either case, the seventeenth re-game winning combination is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle on any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Also, in the second stop order, the eighteenth re-game winning combination is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the left reel 32L. In the fourth stop order, the nineteenth re-game winning combination is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M. Then, in the sixth stop order, the twentieth game winning combination is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the right reel 32R. Regarding the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle As long as it is not possible to stop the game, the seventeenth re-game winning combination is established.

  The special replay 8 is a duplicate of the sixteenth replay and the eighteenth replay to the twenty-second replay. Then, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and stopped, if the second stop order, the fourth stop order or the sixth stop order is any one of the above-mentioned second stop order, the 16th regame winning combination The "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle on any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Also, in the first stop order or the third stop order, the twenty-first game winning combination is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Then, in the fifth stop order, the twenty-second game rendition is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle If it is the timing at which it is not possible to stop the game, the sixteenth re-game winning combination and the eighteenth re-playing winning combination to the twentieth re-playing winning combination will be established.

  The special replay 9 is a duplicate of the seventeenth replay, the eighteenth replay to the twentieth replay, the twenty-second replay, and the twenty-third replay. Then, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is targeted for the “black BAR” symbol and stopped, the seventeenth re-game winning combination is any one of the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order. The "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle on any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Also, in the second stop order, the twenty-second game rendition is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Then, in the fourth stop order or the sixth stop order, the twenty-third game re-combination is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Regarding the 12th stop order, the 4th stop order and the 6th stop order, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the “black BAR” symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is “black BAR” in the middle The 17th to the twentieth re-game winnings are established at the timing when it is not possible to stop the game.

  The special replay 10 is a duplicate of the sixteenth replay, the eighteenth replay to the twentieth replay and the twenty-fourth replay. The sixteenth game re-combination is established in any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle on any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do not do. In addition, the 24th re-game winning combination is established in any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, and the "black BAR" symbol is aligned and stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. . Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle If it is the timing at which it is not possible to stop the game, the sixteenth re-game winning combination, the eighteenth re-playing winning combination to the twenty-second re-playing winning combination will be established.

  The special replay 11 is a duplicate of the seventeenth replay, the eighteenth replay to the twentieth replay, and the twenty-second replay to the twenty-fourth replay. And, if any of the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, the seventeenth game remake is realized, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle also in any reel 32L, 32M, 32R do not do. In addition, the 24th re-game winning combination is established in any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, and the "black BAR" symbol is aligned and stopped at the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. . Regarding the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle If it is the timing at which it is not possible to stop the game, seventeenth to twenty-fifth re-game wins, twenty-second re-game wins and twenty-third re-game wins are established.

  As described above, the main control device 101 outputs various special RT commands to the display control device 81 based on the specific combination winning (BB winning or BB non-winning). Further, as described above, when the display control device 81 receives a command from the main control device 101, in the command storage processing, processing such as storing the received command in a predetermined area is performed.

  Here, the special RT command reception processing, which is activated when the various special RT commands are received in the present embodiment, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the special RT command reception process, a process for setting an effect pattern in the current special RT state is performed according to the type of the received command.

  Specifically, in step S5401, it is determined whether the command received this time is a special attack command with super attack mode. If it is the special attack command with super attack mode, at step S5402, referring to the notification scenario table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, the notification scenario A is selected as the effect pattern in the current special RT state. After performing the setting process, the special RT command reception process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 121, in the notification scenario table in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the push order notification effect drawing for stopping the black BAR according to the value of the black BAR stop counter is set to be different depending on the type of the notification scenario. ing. The black BAR stop counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the “black BAR” symbol has stopped in the middle of any one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R during the special RT state this time. It is provided in the counter area 183b. In addition, the push order notification effect drawing for stopping the black BAR is executed when any special replay is won. For example, in the notification scenario A, if the black BAR stop counter is 0, the winning order notification effect lottery is won with a probability of 80%, and if the black BAR stop counter is 5, the pressing order notification effect lottery is with a 30% probability To win.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5401, it is determined in step S5403 whether the command received this time is a special RT command with an attack mode. If it is a special RT command with an attack mode, in step S 5404, processing is performed to set a notification scenario B as an effect pattern in the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in the present effect pattern, 5 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the present effect pattern, and the special RT command reception process is ended.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 121, in each notification scenario, the upper limit value is set so that the push-to-order notification effect lottery will not be won if the black BAR stop counter becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value. For example, in the notification scenario B set when the special RT command with the attack mode is received, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0 to 4, although the push order notification effect lottery may be won, the value of the counter is 5 When it becomes, it will not win a push order notice production lottery.

  In this embodiment, in the special RT state, the game content is suggested based on the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. For example, when the number of stops of the “black BAR” symbol in the special RT state reaches three or more in total, it is determined that the bonus state of the first BB or the second BB is thereafter shifted. In addition, when the number of stops of the “black BAR” symbol in the special RT state reaches four or more in total, it is determined that the transition to the challenge mode is made after the bonus state of the first BB or the second BB. Then, when the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol reaches five or more in total, it is determined to shift to the attack mode after the bonus state of the first BB or the second BB, and when the number of stops becomes six or more in total, the bonus state It is decided to shift to the super attack mode further later.

  That is, as the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the special RT state, it is easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player after the special RT state. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to infer the subsequent state from the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol.

  In addition, in the special RT state, a state effect is performed in which the display of the auxiliary display unit 65 corresponds to the special RT state. And the said state production is set so that it may change with the number of stops of a "black BAR" symbol. Specifically, the background color of the state effect is white → blue → yellow → green → red → as the total number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol increases from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 Change from gold to rainbow. That is, by stopping the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the background color of the state effect indicating the special RT state changes, and the state shifts to the advantageous state after the special RT state. Be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it has shifted to the advantageous state only by stopping the “black BAR” symbol in the middle during the special RT state, and the game characteristic during the special RT state Improve significantly.

  Returning to the description of the special RT command reception process (FIG. 120), if a negative determination is made in step S5403, it is determined in step S5406 whether the command received this time is a special RT command with a challenge mode. If it is a special RT command with a challenge mode, in step S5407, a process of setting a notification scenario C as an effect pattern in the current special RT state is performed from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in the present effect pattern, 4 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the present effect pattern, and the special RT command reception process is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5409 whether the command received this time is a special RT command. If it is a special RT command, in step S5410, processing is performed to set a notification scenario D as an effect pattern in the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in the present effect pattern, 3 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in step S 5411, and the special RT command reception process is ended.

  A negative determination in step S5409 means that the command received this time is a fake special RT command. As described above, the fake special RT command is a case where a specific combination which is not a duplicate of the first BB or the second BB is won, and any of the challenge mode, the attack mode and the super attack mode is triggered by the specific combination. Also, when there is no transition win, the command is output from the main control device 101. And when the said fake special RT command is output / received, it transfers to the special RT state which continues until the transition output stops. It should be noted that when the transition outcome is stopped and the special RT state is ended, return to the normal gaming state or the first RT state is also as described in the second embodiment.

  And when a negative judging is carried out at Step S5409, information scenario lottery processing is performed at Step S5412. In the notification scenario lottery process, it is determined by lottery from the notification scenario table, which one of the notification scenario E to the notification scenario G is to be set as the effect pattern in the current special RT state. In the notification scenario E to the notification scenario G, the winning probability of the push notification notification effect drawing is set to be different depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. For example, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0, the winning probability of the push notification notification lottery is 80% in the notification scenario E, 60% in the notification scenario F, and 50% in the notification scenario G. . Whether any of the notification scenario E to the notification scenario G is to be set, the probability of winning varies depending on the type of the specific combination that has triggered the fake special RT command. For example, the notification scenario E has a high probability of winning when the output / reception of a fake special RT command is performed with strong cherry or strong watermelon as a specific part, and the notification scenario F has weak cherry or weak watermelon as a specific part. As a result, the winning probability is high when the output / reception of the fake special RT command is performed, and the notification probability is high when the output / reception of the fake special RT command is performed triggered by the other specific combination.

  After the lottery process of the notification scenario is performed in step S5412, a process of setting a notification scenario according to the lottery result is performed in step S5413. Then, in the present effect pattern, after setting 2 as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in step S5414, the special RT command reception process is ended.

  Next, the special RT notification process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the special RT notification process is a process performed by the display control device 81 in step S4515 of the pressing order notification process (FIG. 97) when the special replay is won.

  In step S5501, a process of grasping a notification scenario set in the special RT command reception process is performed. Then, in step S5502, processing is performed to grasp the current value of the black BAR stop counter. In the following step S5503, processing is performed to grasp the type of special replay of the current game. That is, it is determined which of the special replays 6 to 11.

  In step S5504, it is determined from the relationship between the upper limit value set in the special RT command reception process and the special replay at this time, whether the black BAR stop counter has a vacancy. That is, for example, the value of the current black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set as 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), and the middle of the special replay this time is “ More specifically, in the case of Special Replay 6 or Special Replay 7 where only one black BAR symbol can be stopped, it is assumed that "Black BAR" is temporarily placed in the middle of any reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. Even if the symbol stops, if there is no contradiction in relation to the notification content (content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that the value of the black BAR stop counter is vacant. On the other hand, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit value is set as 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), “black is displayed in the middle as the special replay this time. More specifically, in the case of the special replay 8 to the special replay 11 in which two or more "BAR" symbols can be stopped, the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of any reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the present game When there is a possibility that a contradiction may occur in relation to the notification content (content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter. Also, even when the current black BAR stop counter value is 2, when the upper limit value is set as 2 (when notification scenario E to notification scenario G are set), the special replay is performed. It is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter regardless of the type.

  If it is determined in step S5504 that the value of the black BAR stop counter is vacant, in step S5505, a notification lottery process is executed. Specifically, the winning probability of the informing lottery is grasped from the informing scenario of this time and the black BAR stop counter, and the in-order informing effect drawing is performed by using the lottery counter or the like. Then, in step S5506, the result of the lottery process in step S5505 is determined, and if it is determined to be the winning result, in step S5507, the pushing order for black bar stop is performed as the pushing order notification effect of this time. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect is performed. Specifically, for example, if the special replay of this time is special replay 6, as shown in FIG. 119, the pushing order of any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order is notified. Control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. Further, for example, if the special replay of this time is the special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 119, the auxiliary display is performed to notify the pushing order of any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order. Control the unit 65 and so on. It is preferable to randomly determine which order of pressing is to be notified by lottery or the like. Then, after the notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S5508, the special RT notification processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5504 that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter, or if it is determined in step S5506 that there is no space in the notification lottery even though there is space, the current push order is determined in step S5509. The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled such that a pushing order notification effect for black bar non-stop is performed as the notification effect. Specifically, for example, if the special replay this time is special replay 6, as shown in FIG. 119, the pushing order of any of the second stopping order, the fourth stopping order, and the sixth stopping order is notified. Control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. Further, for example, if the special replay of this time is the special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 119, the auxiliary display is performed to notify the pressing order of any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order. Control the unit 65 and so on. It is preferable to randomly determine which order of pressing is to be notified by lottery or the like. After that, the special RT notification process ends.

  Next, the special replay winning process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 when the special replay is won will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special replay winning process is performed as one of the all-stop effect setting process (step S1710) in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

  First, in step S5601, it is determined from the stop point of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R whether or not the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If it is stopped, it is determined in step S5602 whether the notification flag is set. If the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle while the notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5603, and the number of "black BAR" symbols stopping in the middle is grasped. Then, in step S5604, processing is performed to add the number determined in step S5603 to the black BAR stop counter. For example, if one "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle, the black BAR stop counter is incremented by one, and three "black BAR" symbols stop in the middle, so that the middle black bar will be the same stop. For example, the black BAR stop counter is incremented by three.

  In the subsequent step S5605, an addition notification effect is set. Specifically, processing is performed to change the background color of the state effect for the special RT state so as to correspond to the value of the black BAR stop counter after addition. Then, in the subsequent step S5606, processing for clearing the notification flag is performed, and then the special replay winning processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5601 that the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle row of any reel 32L, 32M, 32R, or if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in step S5602, the notification flag is If it is determined that the special replay is not set, the process proceeds to step S5606 to clear the notification flag, and then the special replay winning process ends. In step S5606, if the notification flag is not set, the state is maintained.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration to shift to the special RT state when winning in the first BB or the second BB, the indication of whether or not the first BB or the second BB is won at the time of the special replay in the special RT state, notification of push order It was set as the composition performed by the effect. By doing this, it is possible to make the stop number differ by using one result (special replay) won in the special RT state, and it is possible to realize the above-mentioned suggestion effect using the stop number.

  Here, by providing a plurality of stopping scores for one result and changing which of the stopping scores appear depending on the stopping order, the stopping results can be obtained without causing the complication of the lottery result. In the special RT state in the situation where the first BB or the second BB is carried over, the execution of the transfer lottery of the advantageous section is limited, while it is possible to realize the effect using the If push order notification is performed on the game result whose advantage may differ depending on the stop order, such as push order bell or push order replay, it may be against the purport of restricting the execution of the transition lottery of the advantageous section. . That is, when the push order notification is performed in the carryover state, the push order notification may be performed indefinitely by an action of intentionally delaying the bonus winning. In that respect, according to the above-described embodiment, the push order notification effect during special replay is performed as a push order notification effect that does not cause a change in the degree of advantage for the player, so that the transfer lottery is carried out in the carryover state. It is possible to realize an effect using the difference in the number of stopped eyes within the scope of not limiting the execution.

  It was configured to perform the suggestion effect using the stop number of eyes by the cumulative number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol. By doing this, it becomes difficult to judge the suggested content from the suggestion by one game, in other words, it becomes a configuration that predicts the content by the suggestion across multiple games, and it is possible to entertain the suggested effect longer It becomes.

  In this case, in the various special replays, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop at all in the middle stage by setting the stop order to be the stop appearance, the case where the above-mentioned cumulative stop number has already reached the upper limit of the suggestion content Even in the push order notification effect can be generated (zero stop push order notification effect can be generated), and it is possible to eliminate a feeling of a finished race due to no effect being performed.

  In the special RT state, the informing effect at the time of special replay winning is executed in accordance with the informing scenario set when transitioning to the special RT state, thereby suggesting effect which can be executed over a plurality of games as described above. This can be easily implemented without using a configuration that is performed while matching with the previous suggested content at the time of special replay winning.

  Even when the special replay is won and the stop order happens to coincide with the stop order corresponding to the black BAR stop by chance when the push order notification effect is not generated, the addition processing of the black BAR stop counter or the notification effect at the time of addition Was not implemented. In addition, even when the pressing order notification effect occurs at the time of special replay winning, the 16th replay and the 17th replay that the black BAR symbol does not stop when the "black BAR" symbol fails to see. The game wins. Also in this case, the addition processing of the black BAR stop counter is not performed, the notification effect at the time of addition is not performed, and the change of the background color does not occur. By doing this, in the special RT state, first, a sense of expectation is given to the occurrence of the push order notification effect, and when the push order notification effect is generated, the push corresponding to the black BAR stop is generated. Expectation can be made to be that it is a forward notification effect. Moreover, in order to change the background color, it is necessary not only to simply match the push order, but it is also necessary to aim at the "black BAR" symbol and to perform stop operation, and this is a change in presentation leading to an improvement in expectation after special RT conditions And the player's operation are closely related. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the expectation after the special RT state is changed by the skill of his own stop operation, and it is possible to further improve the fun of the game operation.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration regarding the addition of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section and the upper limit game number (1500) of the advantageous section will be described in detail.

  First, the first specific combination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the first specific combination process is a process that is performed when the lottery result of the game becomes the specific combination mainly in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode.

  As a change in this embodiment, the challenge mode lottery process (step S813) is performed regardless of whether or not the challenge mode is in each of the above embodiments, and the challenge mode is selected when the challenge mode is won again in the challenge mode. Whether the mode transition lottery or the additional lottery is different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress, the configuration in which the number of games is to be added is different.

  That is, the processing relating to the lottery for transition to the attack mode in steps S6001 to S6012 is the same as the processing in steps S801 to S812. If a negative determination is made in step S6005, and it is determined that the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S6013. In step S6013, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode is in progress. If the challenge mode is not in progress, a challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S6014. The process of step S6014 is a transition lottery whether or not to shift the display mode from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and is a transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section.

  In step S6015, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S6014 has been won. If the player has not won, the first specific part process is ended. If the game has been won, the process advances to step S6016 to set a challenge mode hit flag. The processes of steps S6016 to S6020 are the same as the processes of steps S816 to S820.

  If it is determined in step S6013 that the challenge mode is in progress, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number-of-games addition lottery process in the challenge mode is executed in step S6021. In step S6022, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S6021 is won, that is, whether or not the addition of the number of games in the challenge mode occurs, and if the addition occurs, the process proceeds to step S6023 and the current specific combination is It is determined whether or not it is an overlapping role with the bonus. The processes of steps S6023 to S6027 are the same as the processes of steps S821 to S825. If it is determined in step S6022 that the addition does not occur, the first specific winning combination process ends.

  Next, the section display second process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As a change point in this embodiment, after performing the addition process of the number AG of advantageous section games, a process of grasping and managing the number of remaining games that can be added in relation to the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section (management of the number of remaining games The process performs step S6103).

  That is, it is determined in step S6101 whether or not the section indicator is being displayed as in step S2801. If it is being displayed, in step S6102, the number AG of advantageous section games is calculated as in step S2802. Execute the addition process of Then, in step S6103, the remaining game number management process is executed. The processes of steps S6104 to S6111 are the same as the processes of steps S2803 to S2810.

  The data initialization process of step S6107 will be supplementarily described.

  As described above, by performing the initialization process, various counters and various flags used in the advantageous section are cleared. For example, even if the number of continuations of the challenge mode or the number of continuations of the attack mode remains, it is forcibly set to 0, and a flag for display mode transition such as an attack notification flag or attack mode flag (for push order notification Is also cleared, the attack mode etc. are forced to end.

  In this case, since the number of continuations of the attack mode is forcibly set to 0 as described above, in the game number management process (FIG. 40), for example, the number of continuations of the attack mode becomes zero (at step S1414). The attack mode end command is output to the display control device 81 based on the affirmative determination). When the VB mode or specialization zone is forcibly terminated, a VB mode end command is output based on the VB mode continuation number being forced to 0, or the specialization zone continuation number is forcibly Although the specialized zone end command is output based on becoming 0, the display control device 81 has received the attack mode end command when these various end commands are received in duplicate. The processing based on (the processing for performing the attack mode end effect) is performed with priority. As a result, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an attack mode end effect based on the reception of the attack mode end command (step S2306).

  As described above, even when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the display effect for the normal mode is not suddenly generated, but the end effect for the attack mode is generated as the display effect, and thus the failure or the like of the gaming machine occurs. It is possible to avoid misunderstanding. When forced termination is performed, an effect different from the attack mode termination effect for normal use may be set, and the forced termination may be more clearly grasped. In addition, when the forced termination is in the VB mode or the like, the main control apparatus 101 may not output the VB mode end command or the like, but may output only the attack mode end command.

<Remaining game number management process>
The remaining game number management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the remaining game number management process, it is possible to grasp the remaining number of continuing games in various modes scheduled to be implemented in the advantageous section, and to add from the total of the remaining continuing game numbers and the number of games of the advantageous section already executed. The number of vacant games (number of remaining games) is calculated.

  That is, in step S6201, the precursor game number G1 is grasped. The precursor game number G1 represents, for example, the number of remaining precursor mode games when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40) . In step S6202, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 indicates the number of games in the remaining challenge mode, for example, when the current state is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 40) . In step S6203, the attack mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation number G3 represents the number of games in the remaining attack mode, for example, when the current state is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by one for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 40) . In step S6204, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents, for example, the number of remaining VB mode games when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by one for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 40) . In step S6205, the number G5 of continuing specialization zones is grasped. The specialization zone continuation number G5 represents the number of games in the remaining specialization zones, for example, when the current state is the specialization zone in the advantageous area, and one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40) It is subtracted. In step S6206, the number BB of remaining games G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G6 represents, for example, the number of remaining BB mode games when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, each time the number-of-games management process (FIG. 40) is activated once. In addition, one is subtracted by one by subtraction processing (not shown) under the condition of being in the BB mode.

  Here, as the continuation numbers G1 to G6, values of 0 or more may be input even if the current state is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in a situation in which the lottery for transition to the VB mode has been won, but before the transition to the VB mode, the current mode is the attack mode and the VB mode continuation number G4 continues the VB mode It becomes a situation where "60" which is the initial value of the number of games is input. In addition, although in the challenge mode the winning lottery for transition to the super attack mode was won, in the situation before transition to the super attack mode, the current mode is the challenge mode and the number of specialization zones continued G5 "5" which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the animation zone is still input, and "50" which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the attack mode is also input in the attack mode continued number G3 It becomes.

  In step S6207, a process of calculating the number ZG of remaining games of the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S6201 to S6206. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to grasp how many subsequent games the advantageous section continues. In the subsequent step S6208, a total advantageous zone game count SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous zone (the number AG of advantageous zone games) executed so far and the number ZG of remaining games. Then, in step S6209, the number of vacant games (the number of available vacant games and the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total advantageous zone game number SG from 1500 G which is the continuing upper limit game number of the advantageous zone. Do the processing.

  After the process of step S6209, it is determined in step S6210 whether or not the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether there is a number of free games and it is possible to be added. If the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the remaining game number management process is ended. On the other hand, when the free game number FG is 0 or less, after the process of setting the excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S6211, the remaining game number management process is ended. The excess flag indicates that the CPU 102 is in a situation where it is not possible to add the number of continuing games in the advantageous section, more specifically, even if the addition is performed, the forced addition at the 1500 game is not performed the additional game. Is a flag to

  For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the advantageous section is started by setting the challenge mode winning flag in the game of ta1, the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is started from the game. After that, ta1 to ta2 are challenge modes, ta2 to ta3 are attack modes, ta3 to ta4 are VB modes, and ta4 to ta5 are attack modes. The number of games up to ta5 is grasped by the advantageous section game number AG. In addition, at the time of ta5, the number of continuations such as the remaining attack mode etc. is grasped by the number ZG of game remaining games (accumulation of G1 to G6), and it is determined that the period of interest concerned is continued to ta6 at the time of ta5. doing. In FIG. 127 (a), ta6 to ta7 which are 1500 games from ta1 to ta7 are previous games, and ta6 to ta7 correspond to the number FG of free games that can be added at time ta5. That is, in FIG. 127 (a), the excess flag is not set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the advantageous section started from tb1 passes through the challenge mode of tb1 to tb2, the attack mode of tb2 to tb3 and tb4 to tb5, and the VB mode of tb3 to tb4 and tb5 to tb6. , Attack mode continues until tb7. In this case, the advantageous section game number AG is the number of games from tb1 to tb7, and when the advantageous section remaining game number ZG at time tb7 is added to the advantageous section game number AG, it exceeds 1500. That is, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated at tb8 without completely consuming the remaining number ZG of advantageous section games at the time of tb7. In this case, the excess flag is set.

  As described above, in the situation where the excess flag is set, that is, in the game of the remaining number of remaining zones of game from tb7 to tb8, even if the special part is won and an attack mode addition trigger occurs, eventually Since the game is forcibly terminated at tb8, the game of tb7 to tb8 can be a so-called digested game, and the player's interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

  Further, FIG. 127 (c) shows an example when a large number of games are added in the specialization zone. For example, in the challenge mode started from tc1, it is assumed that the super attack mode is won, and the specialization zone is implemented from tc2 to tc3. A large number of consecutive games in the attack mode have been added in this specialization zone, and even when the attack mode started from tc3 has been digested up to tc4, a large number of remaining advantageous zone games ZG remain I assume. Assuming that the number of remaining advantageous period games ZG at time tc4 is greater than 1,500 when the number of advantageous period games AG from tc1 to tc4 is added, the number of remaining advantageous period games ZG remaining in large amounts at tc4 is Everything is a digesting game as described above. In such a case, not only does the game's interest greatly decrease, but also it causes a reduction in the degree of attention despite the fact that a large amount of extra has been generated. May also be of concern. Moreover, the more advantage segments that can become such a digested game, the higher the possibility of the occurrence of an additional opportunity in the relevant digested game, and the greater the number of occurrences of the additional opportunity, which results in nothing. There is also a high possibility that the player will be discouraged from the occurrence of a meaningful additional opportunity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a device is provided so as not to discourage the player in such a situation that even if the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less and the addition of the number of games can be meaningless. . Hereinafter, with regard to such a configuration, after the process for the case where the free game number FG is larger than 0, that is, the process for the case where the addition trigger does not become meaningless, the process for the case where the free game number FG is 0 or less explain.

<When the number of free games FG is larger than 0>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a lottery process in the number of games in the challenge mode or the attack mode. For example, the number-of-games addition lottery process in the challenge mode is performed in step S6021 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). Further, the number-of-games addition lottery process in the attack mode is performed in step S 914 (FIG. 33) in the second specified combination process and step S 1001 (FIG. 34) in the third specific combination process. Since the process configuration is basically the same as that of the number-of-games addition lottery process in any case, hereinafter, the case of being executed in the challenge mode, the case of being performed in the attack mode, and the like will be collectively described.

  In step S6301, it is determined whether the above excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set and the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the process advances to step S6302 to perform processing of grasping the type of the specific combination. Then, after the process of acquiring the additional lottery table is performed in step S6303, the additional lottery is executed in step S6304, and then the number-of-game-addition lottery process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the additional lottery table is set such that the additional winning ratio is different depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode when winning the specific combination (a mode to be added).

  In the challenge mode game number addition lottery, for example, the winning is won with a probability of 15% of strong cherry, and the winning is won with a probability of 5% of weak watermelon. It is also possible to win an additional prize in the dual role with the 1st BB, and in the strong cherry duplication 1 is won with a probability of 5%, and in the weak watermelon duplication 1 is won with a probability of 15%. That is, even if the same strong cherries and weak watermelons have different overlapping winning probability with the first BB, the winning probability is different, and the overlapping winning probability is higher and lower.

  In the attack mode and the game number added lottery of the attack mode performed in the VB mode, for example, the winning is won with a probability of 15% of strong cherry, and the winning is won with a probability of 5% of weak watermelon. On the other hand, in strong cherry overlap 1 and weak watermelon overlap 1, the winning combination is won with a probability of 100%, and if it is the overlapping role with 1st BB, the number of games in attack mode is high (with all probability 100%). It is set to generate an extra.

  In the attack mode game number addition lottery performed in the specialization zone, it is set to be elected with a high probability (with a probability of 100%) regardless of the type of the specific combination, and various kinds other than the specific combination It is set to win the addition also by pushing order Replay and various pushing order bells. Therefore, the flowchart of the special zone processing (FIG. 42) shows a processing configuration in which the number-of-games addition lottery processing is omitted.

  If the addition win is achieved by the number-of-games addition lottery process in FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in the determination process (step S6022, step S915, step S1002) performed after the number-of-games addition lottery process, and the number-of-additions game lottery process (step S6024, Steps S917 and S1004) are performed. The additional game number lottery process may be performed at the end of the bonus (FIG. 41, step S 1512, step S 1516) or in the specialization zone (FIG. 42, step S 1602). It is processing composition. Therefore, such additional game number lottery processing will be collectively described with reference to FIG. 130.

  In step S6401, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. In the present case (when the player wins the extra), the excess flag is not set, so the determination is negative and the process proceeds to step S6402. In step S6402, processing is performed to determine the type of specific combination. Then, after the process of acquiring the additional game number lottery table is performed in step S6403, the game number lottery is executed in step S6404, and the additional game number lottery process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the additional game number lottery table is set so that the number of additional games is different depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode when winning the specific combination (mode to be added).

  In the challenge mode additional game number lottery, for example, in the strong cherry, an increase in the number of games out of 2 games to 20 games occurs, and the average value thereof is 15 games. In addition, with weak watermelon, the addition of the game number of any of 5 games-15 games occurs, the average value becomes 6 games, depending on the kind of specific part, not only the average number of games to be added, The width is also set to be different.

  In the attack mode and the attack mode additional game number lottery that occurs in the VB mode, for example, in strong cherry, an increase in any of 20 games to 200 games occurs, and the average value thereof is 30 games. There may be an increase in the number of games higher than that in the challenge mode. In addition, even for weak watermelons, the addition of any of 50 games to 150 games occurs, and the average value is 60 games. With regard to the width, it is set so that the number of games can be more than that in the challenge mode.

  In the attack mode additional game number lottery that occurs in the specialization zone, for example, the addition of the game number of any of 20 games to 200 games occurs in the strong cherry, and is equivalent to that in the attack mode etc. Although the average value is 50 games, there may be an increase in the number of games more than that in the attack mode or the like. In addition, for weak watermelons, addition of any of 50 games to 150 games occurs and the width is the same as that in the attack mode etc., but the average value is 70 games. In any specific combination, it is set such that a larger number of games can be selected more easily than in the attack mode or the like.

  After executing the additional game number lottery process, the game number increasing process is performed in step S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, and the like. The processing configuration is the same for any number-of-games addition processing, and therefore, the processing is collectively described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S6501, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set this time, the determination is negative and the process proceeds to step S6502. In step S6502, based on the processing result of the additional game number lottery process, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed. Thereafter, in step S6503, after processing for adding the number of added games to the target number of continued games is performed, the processing for adding the number of games is ended.

  As a result, addition of the number of continued games in the challenge mode or the attack mode occurs. As described above, when the addition is generated, the additional effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is generated. Then, the player grasps that it has become possible to carry out the advantageous section by adding the number of games notified by the additional effect.

<When the number of free games FG is 0 or less>
Next, the process in the case where the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set will be described.

  Since the excess flag is set, in the number-of-games addition lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, and the process proceeds to step S6305 instead of the process for additional lotterys in step S6302. In other words, even if the special combination winning combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the execution of the processing for the additional lottery is limited, and the processing for the additional lottery is not executed.

  In step S6305, processing is performed to determine the type of the specific combination. Then, after executing the process of acquiring the first special notification drawing table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S6306, the first special notification drawing of whether or not to execute the first special notification in step S6307. Execute the process

  As shown in FIG. 133, the first special notification lottery table is set such that the winning probability of executing the first special notification differs depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode when the specific combination is won. That is, the first special notification lottery table corresponds to the additional lottery table, and the determination processing of the presence / absence of the excess flag at the time of winning the specific combination, the lottery table to be referred to is the additional lottery table and the first special notification lottery table It can be said that this process is different.

  In the present embodiment, the first special notification is a notification in which information that may be useful to the player is presented, and more specifically, a notification that suggests a setting value set in the slot machine 10. It is done. That is, in the situation where the excess flag is set, the lottery for determining whether to execute the first special notification as the suggestion effect of the set value instead of not performing the lottery for adding the number of games in the advantageous section when winning the specific combination. Do.

  Regarding the first special notification lottery table Specifically, in the first special notification lottery in the attack mode or the VB mode and in the first special notification lottery in the specialization zone, the first special notification lottery has a higher probability in the specialization zone. 1) The winning probability of each specific combination is set so that the special notification lottery can be won. For example, with regard to strong cherries that are not double players with the 1st BB, while winning the first special notification lottery with a probability of 15% in the attack mode or in the VB mode, the 1st special notification lottery with 100% probability in the first 1 Win a special notification lottery. In addition, for weak watermelons that do not overlap with the 1st BB, while winning the first special notification lottery with a probability of 5% in the attack mode or in the VB mode, the first special notification lottery is won with a probability of 100% in the specialization zone. 1 Win a special notification lottery.

  As described above, it is easier for the special zone to win the additional lottery in the attack mode or the VB mode than in the special mode, and more special than in the attack mode or the VB mode for the extra lottery. It is considered that the increase in the number of games can be expected if the player wins in the inside lottery. In the first special notification lottery table, the winning probability of the first special notification lottery is set corresponding to the difference in the winning probability of the additional lottery and the expected value of the number of additional games at the time of winning, and the additional lottery is won. The first special notification lottery, which is executed instead of the easy lottery, and the first special notification lottery, which is executed instead of the additional lottery, which can be expected to be added to a large number of games, is given to the player as the first special notification. Presentation of information that can be useful, that is, suggestive presentation of set values is facilitated.

  In the first special notification lottery process in the challenge mode, in specific roles such as strong cherries and weak cherries that do not overlap with the first BB, the first special notification lottery is won with high probability (with 100% probability) It is set. Therefore, in the challenge mode, when the specific combination is won in the situation where the excess flag is set, the suggestion of the set value occurs with high probability (with 100% probability). On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 1 and weak cherry overlap 1 which are overlapping roles with the first BB are set to win the first special notification lottery at a lower probability (with 30% probability) than in the non-overlap case. There is. Therefore, when the stop appearance to win a strong cherry or the like appears as a specific role in the situation where the excess flag is set in the challenge mode, it suggests the setting value with high probability unless it is a duplicate with the first BB. An effect occurs, and if it is an overlap with the first BB, a suggested effect of the setting value occurs with a lower probability than that.

  In the first special notification lottery process in the attack mode or the VB mode, in the specific role such as strong cherries and weak cherries which are not overlapping with the first BB, the first special notification lottery is performed with high probability (with 100% probability) It is set to win. Therefore, when the specific combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, the suggestion of the set value occurs with high probability (with 100% probability). On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 1 and weak cherry overlap 1 which are overlapping roles with the first BB are set to win the first special notification lottery at a lower probability (with 30% probability) than in the non-overlap case. There is. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, when the stop appearance to win a strong cherry or the like appears as a specific combination, it is highly probable that the setting value is not overlapping with the first BB. The suggestive effect occurs, and in the case of overlapping with the first BB, the suggestive effect of the setting value occurs with a lower probability than that.

  Here, in the slot machine 10, once the challenge mode is changed to the attack mode or the like, even if the attack mode is finished, the slot machine 10 does not return to the challenge mode (FIG. 30). Therefore, in the challenge mode in the situation where the excess flag is set, the challenge mode does not win the lottery for transition to the attack mode etc., and as a result of repeating the addition and the bonus win endlessly, the upper limit of the advantageous section The situation when the number of games has been reached is considered, and it can be said that it is a situation that can hardly occur in practice. However, if such a situation occurs, the transition lottery to the attack mode etc. continues to go out endlessly, so that the first special notification is generated with high probability to follow the troubles. . The reason why the incidence rate of the first special notification is lower when duplication with the 1st BB occurs is that, in the case of a duplicate role with the 1st BB, at least the benefit from the 1st BB prize can be obtained. To secure the balance with the

  When comparing with the extra lottery, if attention is paid to the presence or absence of duplication with the first BB, for example, in the extra lottery, in the attack mode or in the VB mode, 10% for weak cherries that are not double players with the first BB The player wins with a probability and wins with a probability of 100% in the weak cherry overlap 1 which is an overlapping role with the first BB, and the additional role with the first BB wins a winning lottery with a probability of 10 times. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery, in the attack mode or in the VB mode, a weak cherry that is not a duplicate player with the first BB is elected with a probability of 10%, and a weak cherry duplication 1 that is a duplicate player with the first BB The winning probability is 30%, and the winning combination with the first BB is higher in the probability of winning the first special notification lottery, but is lower than the ratio in the case of the additional lottery.

  In addition, in the special drawing in the special zone, both the weak cherries not overlapping with the first BB and the weak cherries overlapping overlapping with the first BB win with 100% probability. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery in the specialization zone, a weak cherry that is not a duplicate player with the 1st BB is elected with a probability of 100% and a 30% probability with a weak cherry duplicate 1 that is a duplicate player with the 1st BB , And the winning combination with the first BB is lower in probability of winning.

  That is, in the additional drawing, the ratio in which the person overlapping the first BB wins the additional drawing is higher, and in the first special notification drawing, the one overlapping the first BB is elected in the first special information drawing The percentage is set to be lower than the percentage for the additional lottery. In other words, in the case where an additional lottery is performed in the case where a stop number to be a specific winning combination appears, a person who can expect that the person overlapping the first BB is elected in the additional lottery In the case where the first special notification drawing is performed without the additional drawing lottery being performed, even if it is a case where it overlaps with the first BB, it can not be expected to win the informing lottery as the additional drawing lottery.

  Here, when forced termination processing (step S6105 to step S6107) of the advantageous section is performed when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number, initialization of various counters and various flags regarding display mode and push order notification is performed. On the other hand, information on the gaming state (for example, the RT setting flag and the bonus winning flag) is held without being initialized. That is, if the game for which forced termination processing is to be performed is in the bonus state or in the carryover state in which the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus state or the carryover state is held without being deleted. . As described above, in the bonus state, regardless of the presence or absence of the push order notification, the bonus small and medium winning combination 1 to bonus small and medium winning combination is won with high probability, and an increase in medals can be expected. That is, when forced termination processing is performed in the bonus state, although the game does not return to the attack mode or the like after the bonus ends, the medal acquisition expectation value in the bonus state is not affected.

  Then, if the winning combination with the 1st BB is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, although the additional drawing is not performed, it is possible to receive at least the benefit based on the 1st BB winning. This is a preferable result for the player than in the case of non-overlapping with the first BB. So, in this embodiment, if it is a dual role with 1st BB, the winning probability of the 1st special alerting lottery is set low, and the balance with the benefit by the 1st BB winning is secured.

  After executing the first special notification lottery in step S6307, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not the first special notification lottery has been won. If the informing lottery is won, the process of setting the first special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6309, and if the informing lottery is not won, the step is performed. In S6310, a process of setting a first special notification non-execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The first special notification execution command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first special notification lottery has been performed and that the notification lottery has been won, and the first special notification non-execution command is This is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first special notification lottery has been performed and that the notification lottery has not been won. After executing the process of step S6309 or step S6310, the number-of-games-addition lottery process is ended.

  Here, in the number-of-games addition lottery process, when each process for the first special notification is performed because the excess flag is set, a process of determining whether or not the subsequent addition is won (step S6022, step S915, In step S1002 and the like), a positive determination is made. More specifically, in the determination process as to whether or not the additional winning is made, the positive determination is made when the additional lottery is won and when the excess flag is set.

  If the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S6401 of the additional game number lottery process of FIG. 130, and the additional game number lottery process is ended without performing the additional game number lottery or the like. Also in the game number addition process of FIG. 132, an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, and the game number addition process is ended without performing the addition process of the game number or the like. That is, when the free game number FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, the additional game number lottery process and the number-of-games additional process are not substantially performed.

  On the other hand, additional command setting processing (steps S6026, S919, S1006, S1514, S1518, and S1604) performed after the additional game number lottery process and the game number increase process that do not perform these substantial processes. Then, regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag, processing to set the additional command is performed. By doing this, even in the situation where the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45) on the display control device 81 side, and the setting process of the additional effect is activated. It will be.

<Setting process of additional effects>
Next, processing of the display control device 81 when the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command are received will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the setting process of the additional effect is a process performed in step S1907 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45).

  In step S6601, it is determined whether any one of the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command has been received. The case where neither command has been received means that only the superimposing command is received without the excess flag being set in the main control device 101. In this case, the process advances to step S6602 to perform processing for grasping the number of added games based on the received added command. The processes of steps S6602 to S6608 are the same as the processes of steps S2101 to S2107.

  In this case, for example, when the player wins the specific part in the attack mode or the like, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), a chance notification effect is generated, and the game result is an additional opportunity for the current game. The operation is prompted to establish such a game result winning combination. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), an additional notification effect corresponding to the number of additional games this time occurs, and it becomes possible to grasp that an increase in the number of continued games such as the attack mode has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S6601 that one of the first special notification commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S6609. In step S6609, a first special notification setting process is performed. After performing the first special notification setting process, the setting process of the additional effect is ended.

  In the first special notification setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 135, it is determined whether or not the first special notification command received at this time in step S6701 is a first special notification execution command. If it is not the first special notification execution command but the first special notification non-execution command, the first special notification setting process is ended as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the command for the first special notification non-execution is grasped to the display control device 81 that the additional trigger has occurred and that neither the additional effect nor the first special notification is performed for the additional trigger. It can be said that it is a command to make it happen.

  If it is determined in step S6701 that the command is the first special notification execution command, the process advances to step S6702 to execute processing for grasping the current setting value. When the process of setting the winning probability is performed in the main process of main controller 101, a set value command including information of the corresponding set value is output from main controller 101 to display control device 81. The display control device 81 can grasp the current setting value by storing the setting value command in a predetermined area.

  In step S6703, a first special notification type lottery process is executed. The first special notification type lottery process is a process of drawing the type of the first special notification, and either of the first special notification A shown in FIG. 137 (a) and the first special notification B shown in FIG. 137 (b) The first special notification is determined by lottery. In the first special notification A, for example, an image of a military person who is a main character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and more specifically, an image in which the military person holds a weapon is displayed. Further, in the first special notification A, the image of the winning combination corresponding character corresponding to the type of the current game result is displayed. Then, when the first special notification A is performed, as the sound effect, for example, a dialog of “I win and survive !!” is emitted from the speaker 64 by a male wild voice. In the first special notification B, for example, an image in which the main character raises a cry with a weapon in one hand is displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in the first special notification B, the image of the winning combination corresponding character is displayed. Then, when the first special notification B is performed, for example, a male scream of “Uooh!” Is emitted from the speaker 64 as the sound effect. That is, the first special notification A and the first special notification B enable the player to clearly grasp the difference between the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64.

  The probability of which one of the first special notification A and the first special notification B is selected differs depending on the set value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (c), if the set value is “1”, the first special alert A is selected with a probability of 100%, and the first special alert B is not selected. If the set value is “2”, the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 75%, and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 25%. If the set value is "3", both the first special notification A and the first special notification B are selected with a 50% probability. If the set value is "4", the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 25%, and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 75%. If the set value is "5" or "6", the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 100%, and the first special notification A is not selected.

  That is, in the first special notification type table of the above example, when the first special notification A is performed, the possibility that the setting value is low is high, and when the first special notification B is performed, the possibility that the setting value is high is high. Become. More specifically, by performing the first special notification B, it is determined that the set value is "2" or more, and by performing the first special notification A, the set value is "4" or less Is finalized.

  As described above, it is possible to predict the current setting value from the type of the first special notification that can be executed when the specific winning combination is won. In addition, if the set value is "2" to "4", "2" to "4" from the ratio of the first special notification A and the first special notification B when the first special notification is generated multiple times. It is also possible to narrow down any of

  After performing the first special notification type lottery process in step S6703, it is determined in step S6704 whether the result of the lottery process is the first special notification A, and if it is the first special notification A, After the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the first special notification A in step S6705, the first special notification setting process is ended. If it is determined in step S6704 that the first special notification A is not set, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is controlled to execute the first special notification B in step S6706, and then the first special notification setting is made. End the process.

  FIG. 138 shows the difference in notification content in the case of winning the specific part during the process of digesting the remaining number of games ZG of the advantageous segment in the example of FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the number of free games FG is larger than 0, if the specific combination is won during the remaining number of games ZG, an additional lottery is executed. Then, when the additional drawing lottery is won, a drawing of the additional game number is performed, the corresponding game number is added, and the corresponding game number added notification effect is generated.

  Here, in the situation where the number of vacant games FG is greater than 0, the lottery table for the additional lottery and the lottery table for the number of additional games are configured to use a common table regardless of the value of the number of vacant games FG. . That is, in the situation where the number of vacant games FG is larger than 0, for example, when winning a strong cherry overlap 1 as a specific combination, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 129). Then, regardless of the value of the vacant game number FG, a lottery for the addition of 10 G to 200 G (30 G on average) is performed, and the addition according to the lottery result occurs (FIG. 131). Therefore, an increase in the number of games larger than the number of empty games FG can occur. For example, although the number of empty games FG is 5, an additional effect of 200 games is generated in terms of effect. obtain.

  By doing this, not only the configuration regarding the additional drawing lottery can be simplified, but also the following effects can be expected. That is, on the premise that the upper limit of the advantageous section is defined, there is a possibility that the number of added games will not be noticed even if the specific part serving as the additional drawing chance is won as the number of vacant games FG decreases. high. On the other hand, it is assumed that useful information for the player can be presented by the occurrence of the addition exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section, that is, the vacant game number FG becomes 0 or less. It can be said that FG being less than or equal to 0 is rather preferable in a situation where the number of vacant games FG is near zero. Moreover, as described above, it is advantageous that it is preferable that the player greatly adds the upper limit of the advantageous section if the impression that it is preferable for the player to exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section is greater than the case where the upper limit is exceeded. It is thought that it is easy to expect that a positive event will occur. Therefore, as described above, if the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the number of additional games is determined regardless of the value, and if advantages and disadvantages differ depending on the number of additional games when the upper limit is exceeded. It is possible to realize the playability as if it has an advantage and an adverse effect by making use of the impression that the player can feel without making the game.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), in the situation where the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the first special notification can be executed when the specific combination is won during the remaining number of games ZG. In this case, since it is possible to narrow down the set value depending on the type of the first special notification, it is preferable that the specific part winning during the digestion be preferred without giving an impression of so-called teardown. It becomes possible to determine whether to continue or not to continue the game after the end of the section.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less at an early stage of the advantageous section because a large amount of addition occurs in the specialization zone etc., the remaining game number ZG is digested for a long time Could be done over In that respect, in the first special notification type table, since it is possible to narrow down the setting value by the occurrence of the first special notification a plurality of times, the game itself to narrow down the setting value is also ended early The occurrence of the overcoming event is suppressed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored even if it takes a long time to digest the remaining game number ZG.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the special role is won as a bonus trigger in a situation where the number of vacant games FG in the advantageous section becomes 0 or less, the first special notification as the suggestion effect of the set value is executed instead of performing the addition of the number of games in the advantageous section It was possible to do. By doing this, it is possible to save the possibility of becoming meaningless even if the addition based on the specific part winning is generated, and to a game that can be considered as a digested game in a situation where the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less. It is possible to avoid the concern of

  In particular, in the situation where the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less, when the specific combination is won, it is not necessary to wait for the forced termination of the advantageous section, but each time the specific combination is won during the advantageous section. (1) By making it possible to execute the special notification, it is possible to secure the significance for becoming a specific part, especially as the lottery result of each game that can be a so-called digested game, and it is possible to suitably increase the attention to the game. Become.

  When the specific game role as an additional trigger is won in a situation where the number of vacant games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less, in the configuration for performing the suggested effect of the set value, as described above, the specific role as the additional trigger role The winning probability of is common regardless of the setting value, and the winning probability of the additional lottery at the time of winning the specific combination and the number of additional games are common regardless of the setting value. That is, the specific winning combination that triggers the generation of the suggested effect of the set value has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and the chance of the generation of the suggested effect occurs equally regardless of the set value. Therefore, for example, the occurrence probability itself of the suggestion effect of the setting value is different depending on the setting value, and compared with the configuration in which the occurrence probability becomes low in the low setting, the phenomenon that even the suggestion effect can not be enjoyed Is less likely to occur, and it is possible to equally provide the suggestion effect of the setting value, that is, the opportunity to enjoy the first special notification regardless of the setting value.

  In this case, it is easy to understand that the suggestion effect is generated as a substitute for the addition of the number of games by setting the occurrence probability of the suggestion effect of the setting value to be higher as the specific part winning probability of the additional drawing is higher. It is possible to easily predict that suggestive staging is likely to occur from the probability of the additional lottery, and by preparing mentally for the occurrence of suggestive staging, it is possible to suitably raise the degree of attention to the suggestive directing Become.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, a mode transition lottery in an advantageous section which occurs when the number of vacant games FG is 0 or less will be described. The mode transition lottery during the advantageous section includes an attack mode (super attack mode) transition lottery during the challenge mode, a VB mode transition lottery during the attack mode, a specialized zone transition lottery during the VB mode, and the like. Transition to the attack mode If you win the lottery, the transition to the attack mode in which the initial game count is 50 games, and that you win the transition lottery to the attack mode means that 50 games of the advantageous section are added. It can also be said that In addition, when winning in the transition lottery to the VB mode, the transition to the VB mode in which the initial number of games is 60 games, and winning in the transition lottery to the VB mode It can be said that Then, when winning the transition lottery to the specialization zone, the transition to the specialization zone of 5 games is made, and winning the transition lottery to the specialization zone means that 5 games of the advantageous zone are added. It can also be said that

  That is, even when winning in each mode transition lottery, the number of remaining games ZG of the advantageous section will be added, and even if the mode transition lottery is won in a situation where the number of vacant games FG is 0 or less, It can be meaningless to people. Therefore, in the present modification, the special notification can be performed even when the mode transition lottery is won.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the lottery process of the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode in the present modification. The challenge mode lottery process is a process performed in step S6014 in the first specified winning combination process (FIG. 124), and the attack mode lottery process is performed in step S6004 in the first specified winning combination process (FIG. 124). This is a process, and the VB mode lottery process is a process performed in step S903 in the second specified winning combination process (FIG. 33). Since all of these processes have the same processing configuration, they will be collectively described below.

  That is, in the mode lottery process, in step S6801, the type of the specific combination is grasped, and in step S6802, the process of acquiring the mode lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. Then, in step S6803, a mode transition lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the mode lottery table is set so that the probability of winning in each mode transition lottery is different depending on the current display mode and the type of the specific combination serving as the lottery trigger. For example, in the challenge mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode is 90% in the strong cherries, 30% in the weak cherries, and the strong cherries are better than the weak cherries. The probability of winning the transition lottery is high. On the other hand, as a probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the same challenge mode, the player is elected with a probability of 30% in the strong cherry overlap 1 which is an overlapping player with the 1st BB, but 40% in the weak cherry overlap 1. It is elected by probability, and the probability that the weak cherry duplication 1 wins the transition lottery is higher than the strong cherry duplication 1.

  The probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the attack mode differs depending on the rank of the attack mode. For example, in the transition lottery to the VB mode based on strong cherry, if the rank of the attack mode is 1, it wins with a probability of 15%, if the rank of the attack mode is 4 it wins with a probability of 60%, The higher the value, the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode. On the other hand, in the transition lottery to the VB mode, the winning probability is set such that it is difficult (not won) to win the transition lottery in each of the specific roles which are the overlapping roles with the first BB. However, the additional drawing is set so that it is easier to win in the case of duplicate than in the case of non-duplicate (Fig. 129), and when the stop score corresponding to the specific combination appears, it is said that the first BB plus extra It is possible to play the game while looking forward to whether it is possible to enjoy the benefit or the benefit of the VB mode.

  In the various mode lottery process of FIG. 139, after the mode transition lottery is performed in step S6803, it is determined in step S6804 whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the mode lottery process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6805.

  In step S6805, processing is executed to grasp the type of specific part. Then, in step S6806, processing for acquiring a second special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S6807, a second special notification lottery processing is executed.

  The second special notification lottery table, as shown in FIG. 142, in the second special notification lottery performed instead of the attack mode transition lottery in the challenge mode, the second special notification execution lottery with a high probability (100% probability) It is set to be elected. As described above, the challenge mode in a situation where the number of vacant games FG is 0 or less is a case where the challenge mode continues without being won in the attack mode etc during the challenge mode, and it is realistic Is a situation that can hardly occur. Therefore, if such a situation occurs, the second special notification is generated with high probability as compensation for the previous trouble, that is, to aspire to the trouble.

  On the other hand, in the second special notification lottery performed instead of the VB mode transition lottery in the attack mode, the winning probability of the second special notification execution lottery is set to be different depending on the type of the specific combination. As described above, when the specific combination is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the first special notification execution lottery is performed instead of the additional lottery. That is, when the specific combination is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the execution lottery of the second special notification is performed together with the execution lottery of the first special notification. The mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are performed first in the mode transition lottery, and then the additional lottery is performed, and the second special notification execution lottery is more than the first special notification execution lottery. It will be done first. And in this modification, although detailed explanation with a figure is omitted, if it wins in the execution lottery of the 2nd special information, it is considered as composition which does not win in the execution lottery of the 1st special information. In other words, the first special notification and the second special notification are not executed in duplicate in the same game.

  In the second special notification lottery executed as a substitute for the transition from the attack mode to the VB mode, it is set to win the second special notification lottery with the same probability as the winning probability in the first special notification lottery ( Figure 133). That is, in this modification, when the specific combination is won in the attack mode, the execution lottery of the second special notification is performed, and the execution lottery of the first special notification is performed, and the winning probability is determined in any execution lottery. It is common. Therefore, it is possible to share the lottery table in both execution lottery, and simplification of the configuration is achieved.

  In this case, the winning probability is set so as not to exceed 50% in any of the specific winning combinations, and in any case, the winning probability is 30% or less. Therefore, an event which is not won in the execution lottery of the second special notification and is not won in the execution lottery of the first special notification occurs in about half (49%) when the specific combination is won. Thus, by suppressing the occurrence probability of the special notification, it is possible to secure the rarity of the special notification in the configuration in which both the special notification can be performed, and it is possible to suitably increase the attention degree when the special notification occurs. It becomes.

  After executing the second special notification drawing in step S6807 in the various mode drawing process, it is determined in step S6808 whether the information drawing has been won or not. If the notification lottery has been won, the process of setting the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6809, and the mode lottery process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6808 that the notification lottery has not been won, the main mode lottery process is ended as it is. The processing of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described later.

  Next, the special zone lottery in the VB mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 shows a part of winning result correspondence processing.

  As described above, the VB mode is basically executed in the third RT state, and the lottery process of each game is performed with reference to the third RT state lottery table (FIG. 25). Then, transition to the specialization zone is made based on the seventh replay prize, which is won at a probability of 5% when winning in BAR replay 1 (IV = 11). That is, assuming that the BAR replay 1 winning is a trigger role of the transition lottery to the specialization zone, the winning probability of the specialization zone transition lottery triggered by the BAR replay 1 is 5%, and the other gaming results ( The special zone transition lottery is not won with the other specified role) as a trigger (FIG. 142).

  If it is determined in step S1310 that the answer to the winning result handling process is negative, it is determined in step S6901 whether or not the seventh replay bonus is established. If the seventh replay win is established, it is determined in step S6902 whether the VB notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current seventh replay prize is generated during the VB mode. If it is the seventh replay winning in the VB mode, the transition condition to the specialization zone is established, and the flow proceeds to step S6903. If a negative determination is made in step S6901 or step S6902, it is determined that the transition condition to the specialization zone is not satisfied, and the winning result correspondence processing is ended as it is.

  In step S6903, processing for setting a specialization zone flag is performed, processing for setting a specialization zone start command as an output target to display control device 81 is performed in step S6904, and specialization zone continuation is performed in step S6905. Start counting numbers. The processes of steps S6903 to S6905 are the same as the processes of steps S1318 to S1320.

  In the following step S6906, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the winning result corresponding processing is finished. If it is determined that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S6907. In step S6907, processing for acquiring a second special notification lottery table is executed, and in the subsequent step S6908, a second special notification lottery is executed.

  In the second special notification lottery, which is executed instead of the transition lottery to the specialization zone in the VB mode, as shown in FIG. The winning probability is determined such that the second special notification is executed. In addition, in the second special notification lottery executed instead of the special zone, the winning probability is determined such that the second special notification is not executed in another game result (other specific combination). That is, the execution condition of the second special notification is set as equivalent to the transition condition to the specialization zone.

  After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6908, it is determined in step S6909 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the informing lottery has been won, after the processing of setting the second special notification command as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S6910, the winning result corresponding processing is ended. If it is determined that the informing lottery has not been won, the winning result corresponding process is ended as it is.

  The second special notification setting process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described with reference to FIG. The second special notification setting process is executed as one of the other processes (step S1711) of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

  First, in step S7001, it is determined whether a second special notification command has been received. If not received, the second special notification setting process is ended as it is. If it is received, the process advances to step S7002 to perform processing for adding 1 to the second special notification counter TH. The second special notification counter TH is a counter for grasping the number of times the second special notification has been performed. In the subsequent step S7003, processing for grasping the set value is performed. Then, after the process of acquiring the second special notification type table is executed in step S7004, the second special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7005.

  In the second special notification type table, the type of the second special notification is set to be different depending on the value of the second special notification counter TH and the setting value. Specifically, as the second special notification, a second special notification A shown in FIG. 144 (a) and a second special notification B shown in FIG. 144 (b) are provided. In the second special notification A, for example, the character of the hub of the snake is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a sound when the snake "Sher!" . In the second special notification B, for example, a mongoose character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a loud voice of mongoose is emitted from the speaker 64 as the sound effect. That is, the second special notification A and the second special notification B enable the player to clearly grasp the difference between the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64.

  In the second special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the second special notification to be selected is set to be different between the setting values 1, 3, 5 and the setting values 2, 4, 6. There is. Specifically, if the second special notification counter TH is 1, the second special notification A is selected at 60% and the second special notification B is selected at 40% at the setting values 1, 3 and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 1, the second separate notification A is selected at 40% and the second special notification B is selected at 60% at the setting values 2, 4 and 6. If the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, the second special notification A is selected at 80% and the second special notification B is selected at 20% at the setting values 1, 3 and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, in the setting values 2, 4 and 6, the second separate notification A is selected at 20%, and the second special notification B is selected at 80%. If the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification A is selected at 100% with the setting values 1, 3 and 5, and the second special notification B is not selected. On the other hand, when the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second separate notification B is selected at 100% in the setting values 2, 4 and 6, and the second special notification A can not be selected.

  That is, depending on the type, the second special notification can be narrowed down to the even / odd number of setting values, and the larger the value of the second special notification counter TH, that is, the number of times of execution of the second special notification increases. The more it is easy to narrow down the even / odd, the better.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the execution lottery of the second special notification and the execution lottery of the first special notification can be performed in duplicate, the first special notification is obtained when the second special notification execution lottery is won. It does not win the execution lottery. That is, the second special notification is easier to be executed than the first special notification.

  This is a setting value indication that the second special notification can carry out even / odd narrowing of the setting value, while a setting value suggestion that the first special information can carry out narrowing of the setting value While the second special notification is a setting value indication that can be narrowed down by multiple executions, the first special notification is a setting value indication that may be narrowed down by one execution. , Due to the difference. That is, the second special notification can gradually narrow down the set value from the difference as described above, and it is possible to enjoy the game of narrowing down the set value for a long time. (2) If special notification is prioritized and executed, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the narrowing-down is performed.

  After executing the second special notification type lottery process in step S7005, the process advances to step S7006 to determine whether the result of the type lottery process is the second special notification A or not. If it is the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification A is performed in step S7007, and then the second special notification setting process is ended. If it is not the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification B is performed in step S7008, and then the second special notification setting process is ended.

  As described above, even if it is not the addition of the number of games, also in the mode transition lottery, if the mode transition as a result of the lottery may not affect the number of continued games in the advantageous section, If the second special notification as the setting value indication is performed, it is possible to compensate for the mode transition lottery being performed in the situation where the excess flag is set.

  When the mode transition lottery is performed, the second special notification is not performed in place of the mode transition lottery, but the second special notification is executed together with the mode transition lottery, so that, for example, the excess flag is set. In certain circumstances, a transition to VB mode may occur, and a transition to a specialized zone may also occur. In particular, although the specialization zone is a zone that is easy to win in the additional lottery, it can also be said that the first special notification is easy to be executed in a situation where the excess flag is set. That is, regarding the specialization zone, it is possible to shift to a zone in which setting value indication is easy to be made by adopting a configuration in which setting value indication is performed along with the transition drawing instead of performing the setting value indication instead of the transition drawing. However, it may be configured to perform setting value suggestion as a compensation for the addition of the number of games accompanying the transition to the specialization zone (the addition of 5 games).

  By setting the second special notification as a set value indication that the ease of narrowing down the set value is different depending on the number of times of execution, narrowing of the set value becomes easier when the excess flag is set earlier . By doing this, it is possible to provide enjoyment when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less relatively early.

<Modification 2>
In the present modification, a value corresponding to the number of games to be added is stored in a predetermined area based on the addition trigger generated in the situation where the excess flag is set. First, the change points of the number-of-games addition lottery processing and the number-of-additions game lottery processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the number-of-games addition lottery process in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7101, the added lottery table is acquired in step S7102, and step S7103. After the additional lottery is executed, the number-of-games additional lottery process is ended. That is, in the present modification, the addition lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

  Further, in the additional game number lottery process in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7111, and the additional game number lottery table is acquired in step S7112. Then, after the number-of-games lottery is executed in step S7113, the number-of-games additional lottery processing is ended. That is, in this modification, the lottery of the number of additional games is also executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

  The number-of-games addition process in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7201, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, addition processing of the number of added games is performed in step S7202 and step S7203, and then the number-of-games addition processing ends. Steps S7202 and S7203 are the same processes as steps S6502 and S6503.

  If it is determined in step S7201 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7204. In step S7204, processing for grasping the processing result of the additional game number lottery processing, that is, processing for grasping the number of additional games is performed. Then, in step S7205, the number of added games grasped in step S7204 is added to the number of erased games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e. After executing the processing of step S7205, the game number addition processing ends.

  That is, in this modification, even if the additional game opportunity occurs in a situation where the number of empty games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, the drawing whether or not to execute the additional game is made Make a lottery for the number of games when you want to carry out additional games. Then, the result of the number-of-games lottery is not added to the corresponding number of continuations of the advantageous section, but is added to the separately provided number-of-discounted games EG.

  Next, a process of setting an additional command in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The additional command setting process includes step S6026 of the first specified combination process (FIG. 124), step S919 of the second specified combination process (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specified combination process (FIG. 34), and end determination process (FIG. 41), step S1604 in the special zone processing (FIG. 42), and the like.

  In step S7301, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, processing is performed to set the target additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S7302, and the setting processing of the additional command is ended. In this case, the display control device 81 carries out an additional notification effect.

  If it is determined in step S7301 that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S7303 to execute processing for grasping the number EG of lost games. Then, the process of acquiring the third special notification lottery table is executed in step S7304, and the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7305.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the third special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery varies according to the value of the annihilation game number EG, and the value of the annihilation game number EG is set. Is set to be easier to win as the More specifically, in the case where the number of disappearing games EG is 0, that is, when the number-of-games addition lottery has not been won, the third special notification lottery is not won. If the number of disappearing games EG is 1 to 50, that is, if the number of games of 1 to 50 games is selected as the number of top games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%. If the number of disappearing games EG is 51 to 100 and the number of 51 to 100 games is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 30%. If the number of disappearing games EG is 101 to 200 and the number of games from 101 to 200 is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 50%. If the number of erased games EG is 201 or more and the number of games 201 games or more is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 80%. That is, it is set so that it becomes easier to win the third special notification lottery if the addition of a large number of games should occur.

  After executing the third special notification drawing in step S7305, it is determined in step S7306 whether or not the notification drawing has been won. If the player has won, the third special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S7307. If a negative determination is made in step S7306, or after the process of step S7307, the process of clearing the number of erased games EG to an initial value (0) is performed in step S7308, and the setting process of the superimposition command is ended. Do.

  The display control device 81 performs processing for executing the third special notification on the basis of the reception of the third special notification command. The processing configuration of this processing is substantially the same as the first special notification setting processing and the second special notification setting processing, so the illustration is omitted, but while grasping the setting value, the third special notification type table is acquired. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled such that the third special notification of the corresponding type is performed after the third special notification type lottery is performed.

  As a type of the third special notification, for example, the third special notification A, the third special notification B, the third special notification C, the third special notification D, the third special notification E, and the third special notification F are set. The display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 and / or the sound effects of the speaker 64 are set to be different from each other, and the player can grasp which type of the third special notification.

  In the third special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the types of the third special notification selected by the setting value are set to be different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 100%, and the other third special notification B to third special notification F are not selected. If the setting value is 2, the third special broadcast B is selected with a probability of 60%, the third special broadcast C is selected with a probability of 40%, and the other third special broadcasts are not selected. If the set value is 3, the third special broadcast A is selected with a probability of 55%, the third special broadcast C is selected with a 45% probability, and the other third special broadcasts are not selected. If the setting value is 4, the third special broadcast B is selected with a 50% probability, the third special broadcast C is selected with a 45% probability, and the third special broadcast D is selected with a 5% probability, The other third special notification is not selected. If the set value is 5, the third special broadcast A is selected with a 45% probability, the third special broadcast C is selected with a 45% probability, and the third special broadcast D is selected with an 8% probability, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 2%, and the other third special notification is not selected. If the set value is 6, the third special broadcast B is selected with a 40% probability, the third special broadcast C is selected with a 45% probability, and the third special broadcast D is selected with a 11% probability, The third special broadcast E is selected with a probability of 1%, the third special broadcast F is selected with a probability of 3%, and the third special broadcast A is not selected.

  That is, when the third special notification A is selected, it is determined that the set value is one of 1, 3, and 5, and when the third special notification B is selected, the set values are 2, 4, 6 It is decided that it is either. Also, when the third special notification C is selected, it is determined that the set value is 2 or more, and when the third special notification D is selected, it is determined that the set value is 4 or more. [3] It is determined that the setting value is 5 or more in the special notification E and that the setting value is 6 in the third special notification F. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the set value by the combination of the types of the third special notification.

  As described above, after temporarily storing the number of games that should have been added in the number of disappearing games EG, the third special notification execution lottery is performed according to the value of the number of disappearing games EG. It is possible to adjust the profit / loss with the benefit (the number of games) that the player should have been able to obtain by the easiness of execution of the third special notification.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, in the second modification, the third special notification lottery is performed based on the setting value together with the value of the number of lost games EG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a process of setting an additional command in the present modification.

  In the present modification, if it is determined in step S7401 that the excess flag is set, the number of erased games EG is grasped in step S7403, and then the setting value is grasped in step S7404. Then, after the process of acquiring the third special notification lottery table is executed in step S7405, the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7406.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the third special notification lottery table in the present modification uses the value of the number of erased games EG and the setting value as parameters, and is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is different. There is. For example, in the case where the number of games to be erased EG is 50 or less, if the setting value is 1, it wins with a probability of 1/256, and if the setting value is 6, it wins with 6/256. It is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is higher as the setting value is higher even in the case of the disappearing game number EG. Further, as in the second modification, the third special notification lottery winning probability is set to increase as the value of the disappearance game number EG increases even with the same setting value.

  In the additional command setting process, the processes of step S7402 and step S7407 to step S7409 are the same as the processes of step S7302 and step S7306 to step S7308, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, by using not only the value of the annihilation game number EG but also the setting value as a parameter of the third special notification lottery itself, the branch of the setting value prediction when various third special notifications are performed increases. The game which predicts a setting value from the 3rd special information can be thickened.

  More specifically, when any third special notification is performed, it means that the third special notification lottery has been won regardless of the setting value, in other words, the number of vacant games FG is 0. Even if the special combination is won in the following situations, the case where the third special notification is not performed means the case where the winning lottery is not won, or the winning game number of the winning lottery In addition to the case where there is little, the case where setting value is low is mentioned as the factor. That is, even if it is any 3rd special alerting | reporting, that the said 3rd special alerting | providing itself itself can become weighting in estimating that a setting value is high. Then, on the premise that the player desires that the setting value is high, even if the type of the third special notification may suggest a low setting which is undesirable for the player, the third special notification From the fact that it is being performed, it is judged that the setting is high rather than low, and the judgment becomes dull and the fun of the game of predicting the setting value increases.

<Modification 4>
In the second and third modifications, the third special notification is performed each time when the specific combination is won (when the additional bonus occurs). However, in the present modification, the third special notification is performed at the forced end of the advantageous section. . FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a section display second process in the present modification.

  In step S7501, it is determined whether the section indicator is being displayed. If not being displayed, the section display second process is ended as it is. If the game is being displayed, the process of adding the number of advantageous area games AG is performed in step S7502, and the remaining game management process is executed in step S7503. Then, in step S7504, it is determined whether the number AG of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit (1500). If the upper limit value has been reached, at step S7505, processing is performed to grasp the total number of annihilated games TEG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The total annihilation game number TEG corresponds to the annihilation game number EG in the third modification, and is a counter to which a value corresponding to the game number corresponding to the winning combination is added.

  That is, although the detailed description by the drawings is omitted, in this modification, the number of lost games EG is added in the process of adding the number of added games to the number of lost games EG in the number-of-games addition process (FIG. 146). Instead, the number of added games is added to the total annihilated game number TEG. Further, in this modification, when it is determined that the excess flag is set in the setting process of the additional command (steps S7301 and S7401), only the output setting of the target additional command is not performed. It is set as the structure which does not perform each process (step S7303-step S7308, step S7403-step S7409) regarding 3rd special alerting | reporting.

  After grasping the total annihilation game number TEG in step S7505, the third special notification lottery table is acquired in step S7506, and the third special notification lottery is performed in step S7507. In the third special notification lottery table, for example, the parameters to be referred to in the table of FIG. 148 (a) are replaced with the total number of lost games EG from the total number of lost games EG. That is, the larger the value of the total annihilation game number TEG, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

  After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7507, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won in step S7508, and if it has been selected, the third special notification command is selected in step S7509. Perform output setting processing. If it is determined in step S7508 that the game has not been won, or after the process of step S7509 is performed, a process of clearing the total annihilation game number TEG to an initial value (0) is performed in step S7510.

  The processes for the end of steps S7511 to S7513 are the same as the processes of steps S6105 to S6107. Further, in the present modification, even when the determination in step S7514 and step S7515 is affirmative, and the advantageous section is ended before reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S7511 to step S7513. It has composition. That is, the data initialization process (step S7513) is performed also when ending the advantageous section before the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is reached. By doing this, it is possible to further clarify the distinction between the advantageous section and the normal section.

  When the third special notification is performed when forcibly terminating the advantageous section as described above, for example, the third special notification may be performed as the end effect of the attack mode, or the end effect of the attack mode may be performed. Alternatively, the third special notification may be executed before or after, that is, separately from the end effect.

  As described above, even if the number of single-player games is small, the third special notification can be easily executed if a trigger to multiply the game occurs a plurality of times. Therefore, for example, even if the specific part winning with a small average of the number of added games such as weak cherries is won, it is possible to give meaning of winning, and the game characteristics after the vacant game number FG becomes 0 or less Can be improved.

  In addition, since the additional opportunity is more likely to occur a plurality of times as the number of games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the third special notification is easily performed. Therefore, even if the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less by the number of games quickly after shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to fully enjoy the game after the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less. it can.

  In the above configuration, although the third special notification lottery table is basically configured to use the numerical value of the table using the number of disappearing games EG, a table separately using the total number of disappearing games TEG as a parameter is provided. It is also good. The total annihilated game number TEG corresponds to the integrated value of the added game number after the vacant game number FG becomes 0 or less, and thus it can be said that the value tends to be larger than the annihilated game number EG. For example, it is assumed that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery differs depending on whether or not the value of the total annihilation game number TEG exceeds the upper limit (300 games in the above example) of the number of added games once. The significance of being an integrated value of multiple additions can be further secured.

  In addition, the third special notification is performed based on the total annihilation game number TEG at the forced end of the advantageous section, and the third special notification is also performed based on the extinct game number EG even when an additional opportunity occurs in the advantageous section. Good. In this case, the third special notification based on the total annihilation game number TEG and the third special notification based on the annihilation game number EG may have different presentation contents, different lottery tables, or different type tables.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, in the configuration that presents information that may be useful to the player by the setting value suggestion as a compensation for setting the upper limit game number in the advantageous section, the gaming situation of the day when the upper limit game number is reached is taken into consideration. To present information that may be useful. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a section display second process in the present modification.

  In step S7601, it is determined whether the section indicator is in display or not. If not, the section display second process is ended. If the display is in progress, addition processing of the number of advantageous area games AG is performed in step S7602, and management of the number of remaining games is performed in step S7603. Then, in step S7604, it is determined whether the number AG of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit (1500).

  If the upper limit value has been reached, processing to grasp the set value is executed in step S7605. Then, in step S7606, the total game number TG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is confirmed to execute processing for grasping the total game number on the current day. The total game number TG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of digested games on the day (the total number of games). Such a counter is cleared to an initial value (0) based on, for example, the process of setting the winning probability, that is, the process of clearing the RAM, and the game number management process (FIG. 40) is activated once. Every time the number of bets, the game state, etc. is increased by one in an increase process (not shown).

  In the following step S7607, the fourth special notification lottery table is acquired, and in step S7608 the fourth special notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 153, the fourth special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the fourth special notification differs depending on the value of the total game number TG and the set value. Specifically, the larger the value of the total game number TG, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the easier to win the fourth special notification lottery. For example, when the value of the total game number TG is 2000 or less, if the setting value is 1, it wins with a probability of 1/256, and if the setting value is 6, it wins with a probability of 6/256. . In addition, when the value of the total game number TG is from 4001 to 6000, if the setting value is 1, it will be elected with a probability of 4/256, and if the setting value is 6, it will be elected with a probability of 256/256. Do.

  After executing the fourth special notification drawing in step S7608, it is determined in step S7609 whether or not the notification drawing has been won. If the informing lottery has been won, a process of setting the fourth special informing command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S7610. If it is determined in step S7609 that the notification lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S7610 is performed, the process for ending the advantageous section is performed in steps S7611 to S7613, and then the second process for displaying the section is performed. Finish. If the determination in step S7604 is negative, it is determined whether the end conditions of steps S7614 and S7615 are met. If the advantageous section is ended, the processes of steps S7611 to S7613 are performed. The process of step S7611 to step S7615 is the same as the process of step S7510 to step S7514.

  Next, the process of setting an attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The attack mode end effect setting process is a process performed in step S2306 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 51), and is performed based on the attack mode end command being received. Note that the attack mode end command is output in the game number management process based on the initialization process of step S7614 and the like, and the attack mode end effect is performed as described above. .

  In step S7701, the total payout number of medals in the advantageous section is grasped. The total payout number can be grasped by referring to the total payout number counter in the various counter areas 183b. The total payout number counter is a counter that is added according to the number of medals paid out as the game result during the advantageous section, and is initialized when the advantageous section ends. It should be noted that the counter may be subjected to a subtraction process according to the bet number based on betting at the start of each game, and the number corresponding to the obtained number obtained by subtracting the insertion number from the payout number may be grasped.

  In the following step S7702, processing is performed to grasp the number of continuing games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S7703, it is determined whether the fourth special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, processing for setting an effect for normal termination is performed in step S7704, and then processing for setting an effect for ending attack mode is ended. As the effect of normal termination, as shown in FIG. 155 (a) and FIG. 57 (b), the end of the attack mode, and the number of continued games and the total number of payouts are displayed.

  If it is determined in step S7703 that the fourth special notification command is received, the process of acquiring the fourth special notification type table is executed in step S7705, and the fourth special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7706. Do. Although the detailed description of the fourth special notification type table is omitted in the figure, even if it indicates the even / odd of the set value as in the second special notification type table of FIG. 144 (c), for example, Good. As the fourth special notification, for example, a fourth special notification A illustrated in FIG. 155 (b) and a fourth special notification B illustrated in FIG. 155 (c) are provided. The fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B are configured to display the number of continued games and the total payout number instead of the winning-corresponding character in the first special notification A or the first special notification B and the display content, for example. It may be

  After the fourth special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7706, it is determined in step S7707 whether it is the fourth special notification A. If it is the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification A is selected in step S7708. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the notification A. If it is the fourth special notification B, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the fourth special notification B in step S7709. After the process of step S7708 or step S7709 is performed, the setting process of the attack mode end effect is ended.

  By doing as described above, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number and is forcibly terminated, it is possible to suggest the set value in accordance with the game situation of the day.

  Here, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the player who thinks that he should have continued even though it is supposed to continue, will be motivated to play the game by the forced termination, and the possibility of ending the game as it is increases. Is also conceivable. In that respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the number of vacant games FG is less than or equal to 0 and forced termination occurs, the setting value is suggested, for example, to predict that the setting is high, etc. As described above, even in a scene where the desire to play can be diverted, it is possible to make a decision to continue playing. In particular, when forced termination occurs, it is assumed that a large number of medals have been acquired, and a player who has seen such a large number of medals is biased toward the high setting side even if the setting value is inferred. It is thought that it is easy to make a guess. That is, by giving a trigger for performing the setting value estimation in accordance with the forced termination, it can be said that it is possible to stir the feeling of continuing the game rather than the configuration in which only the forced termination is performed.

  On the other hand, for example, when forced termination occurs at a stage soon after the opening of the game hall, etc., if the suggestion effect of suggesting a high setting or a high setting is determined for the game stand, the game stand Although it is a push for the continuation of the game for the player who plays the game, the other person who saw the suggested effect in a side view may predict that the setting value of the other game stand is low in relation to the game stand. That is, in a stage or a situation immediately after the opening of the game hall, it can be said that it is not preferable for the entire game hall if suggestion effects suggesting a high setting occur. On the other hand, it is considered preferable as a sales strategy for the game hall that suggestion effects suggesting a high setting as much as possible occur near the end of the business hours of the game hall.

  Therefore, when suggesting the setting value based on forced termination, it is a disadvantage that the suggestion of the setting value is performed by adopting the configuration to suggest the setting value in consideration of the game situation of the day. It is possible to minimize the operation rate of the other gaming machines by the suggestion of the setting, the operation rate of the game console by the suggestion of the low setting, etc.

  In particular, in the present modification, since the game situation on the day is considered by using the total game number TG, the information is reflected in the suggestion of the setting value using the conventional configuration as the configuration of the gaming machine. can do. Further, the total game number TG can be grasped not only by the gaming machine side but also by the data indicator etc. installed in the game hall, and the player can obtain it from the data indicator etc. After weighting information, it is possible to play a game in which the setting value is predicted from the indication notification of the setting value, and the fun of the game in which the setting value is predicted increases.

  Furthermore, the total game number TG is configured to be cleared to the initial value based on the process of setting the winning probability, and is not configured to be cleared to the initial value simply by the power ON / OFF of the gaming machine. And Therefore, when the game hall is opened or closed, the setting value is not changed or updated, and if the setting process of the winning probability is not performed, the total game number TG of the previous day is taken over. In this way, when predicting the setting value, it is possible to perform the prediction together with the change of the setting value, and the enjoyment of the predicted game is further enhanced.

<Modification 6>
The fourth special notification lottery table may be changed as follows.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows the fourth special notification lottery table in which not only the total game number TG at the forced end but also the time at the forced end is used as a parameter. Specifically, not only when the total game number TG is 2000 or less, but when the time is before 13 o'clock, if the setting value is 1, it is won with a probability of 1/256, and the setting value is If it is 6, it will be elected with a probability of 6/256. Moreover, not only when the total game number TG is 4001 or more and 6000 or less, but when the time is before 19:00, if the set value is 1, it is elected with a probability of 4/256 and the set value is 6 In this case, the player wins with a probability of 256/256.

  By doing as described above, for example, in the case where the forced termination condition is satisfied with a small total number of games, as in the case where the operation start of this gaming machine is not after the opening of morning 1 but after daytime or evening. Even if there is, if the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied is late, the fourth special notification as the set value suggestion becomes easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to set suggested value according to the sales form and operation situation in the hall.

  In addition, when referring to the fourth special notification lottery table, it is preferable that the time at the time of forced termination be grasped from a predetermined built-in clock or the like provided in the gaming machine.

<Modification 7>
FIG. 156 (b) shows the fourth special notification lottery table in which the fourth special notification as the set value suggestion is easy to be executed as the setting is lower as the forced termination condition is satisfied with a smaller number of games or early time. . That is, when the total game number TG is 2000 or less or the time is before 13 o'clock, if the setting value is 1, it is won with a probability of 128/256, and if the setting value is 6, 256 minutes Wins with a probability of 4. On the other hand, if the total game number TG is greater than or equal to 2001 and less than or equal to 4,000, or if the time is less than 16 o'clock, if the set value is 1, it wins with a probability of 2/256 and the set value is 6 For example, you will win with a probability of 12/256.

  By adjusting as described above, if forced termination occurs relatively early, it is easy to determine that the setting is high, and adjust the incidence rate of the low setting suggestion notification. Can. That is, as described above, even if the setting value suggestion of the low setting occurs in the situation where the high setting is likely to be determined from the number of digested games and the number of earned medals, it has already received an impression that the setting is high. As a player, it is considered that the game is likely to be continued without giving up on the setting value suggestion. Therefore, by generating a low setting value suggestion in such a situation, it is difficult to cause an event that only the occurrence probability of low setting value suggestion is low among the total setting value suggestion occurrence probabilities. be able to.

<Modification 8>
In the present modification, the fourth special notification lottery type table is made different according to the total number of games at the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied. Specifically, when acquiring the fourth special notification type table in step S7705, the total game number is grasped by grasping the counter corresponding to the total game number TG on the main control device 101 side, and the total game number The fourth special notification type table to be acquired is made different depending on whether the number is 2000 games or less and 2001 games or more.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a fourth special notification type table acquired when the total number of games is 2000 games or less, and FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where the total number of games is 2001 games or more. It shows a fourth special notification type table to be acquired. In this modification, as the fourth special notification, the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification B, the fourth special notification C, the fourth special notification D, the fourth special notification E, and the fourth special notification F are set. The effect contents that can be distinguished from each other are set. The fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification F correspond to the third special notification A to the third special notification F in FIG. 148 (b). That is, the fourth special notification A indicates an odd setting, and the fourth special notification B indicates an even setting. Also, the fourth special notification C indicates the set value 2 or more, the fourth special notification D indicates the set value 4 or more, the fourth special notification E indicates the set value 5 or more, and the fourth special notification F indicates the set value 6 It is a thing.

  In the type table of FIG. 157 (a), the fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification C are easily selected, and the fourth special notification D to the fourth special notification F are set so as not to be selected. That is, when the forced termination condition of the advantageous segment is satisfied in a situation where the total number of games is small, the even / odd set value suggestion is likely to be selected.

  On the other hand, in the type table of FIG. 157 (b), not only the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B, but also the fourth special notification C to the fourth special notification F can be selected. That is, if the total number of games is not small, the setting value can be narrowed more easily than in the case where the total number of games is small, based on the fact that the forcible termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

  By doing as described above, by advancing the game (increasing the total number of games), it becomes easier to narrow down the set value gradually, and while advancing the game and aiming for medal acquisition, estimation of the set value is carried out. Can provide fun to do.

  In particular, by making the type table different according to the game situation, it is possible to realize totally different suggestion effects according to the game situation, such as changing the type table between morning and afternoon, for example. The game can be kept from getting bored throughout the day, and the game can be motivated to continue.

<Modification 9>
In the present modification, in the case of forcibly terminating the advantageous section, the special section is set in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section using the total annihilation game number TEG. First, the section display second process in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  The processing of step S7801 to step S7807 is the same as the processing of step S6101 to step S6107, and processing of ending the display of the section indicator based on the satisfaction of the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, data initialization Do the processing.

  The data initialization process of step S7807 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

  As described above, the data initialization process executed at the forced end of the advantageous section is a process of initializing various counters, various flags, and the like related to the game characteristics for changing the degree of advantage by the push order notification. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, in the RAM 106 of the main control apparatus 101, in addition to the winning flag storage area 106a, the stop information storage area 106b, and the status information storage area 106c, various flag storage areas 106d and various counter areas 106e. Is provided. In each of the areas 106a to 106e, an area for storing various information (advantage information, specific information) used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information (normal information) also used for the normal section And are provided separately. More specifically, an area for storing various information used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information also used in the normal section are separately provided as areas not overlapping with each other.

  Specifically, in the winning flag storage area 106a, an advantageous section corresponding winning flag storage area 201 and a normal section corresponding winning flag storage area 202 are provided. In the stop information storage area 106b, an advantageous section corresponding stop information storage area 203 and a normal section corresponding stop information storage area 204 are provided. In the state information storage area 106c, an advantageous section corresponding state information storage area 205 and a normal section corresponding state information storage area 206 are provided. The various flag storage area 106 d is provided with an advantageous section corresponding various flag storage area 207 and a normal section corresponding flag storage area 208. The various counter areas 106e are provided with various counter areas 209 corresponding to the advantageous section and various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section.

  Among them, an area for storing flags for grasping various display modes, such as challenge mode flag and attack mode flag, and a flag for grasping that superposition conditions are satisfied, such as challenge mode addition flag and attack mode addition flag. An area for storing the flag and an area for storing the excess flag are provided in the various section corresponding flag storage area 207 for the advantageous section. On the other hand, an area for storing a bet number flag for grasping the bet number of each game, an area for storing a freeze effect flag for grasping that the condition for generating the freeze effect is satisfied, and a payout process are performed. An area or the like for storing an in-payout flag for grasping that it is in the middle is provided in the various section storage area 208 corresponding to the normal section.

  Also, an area for storing the prognostic game count G1, an area for storing the challenge mode continuation count G2, an area for storing the attack mode continuation count G3, an area for storing the advantageous section game count AG, and an area for storing the vacant game count FG. Etc. are provided in various counter areas 209 corresponding to the advantageous section. On the other hand, there are an area for storing the total game number TG, an area for storing the inter-BB game number counter for counting the number of games between bonus, and an area for storing the payout medal counter for counting the number of medals paid out. , And are provided in various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section.

  In the data initialization process in the present modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 160, in step S7901, a process of initializing the advantageous section corresponding winning flag storage area 201 is performed. In the subsequent step S7902, a process of initializing the advantageous section corresponding stop information storage area 203 is performed. In the following step S7903, processing for initializing the advantageous section corresponding state information storage area 205 is performed. In the following step S7904, a process of initializing the advantageous section corresponding various flag storage area 207 is performed. In the following step S7905, processing is performed to initialize various counter areas 209 corresponding to the advantageous section. Then, in step S7906, after processing for initializing information or parameters relating to other advantageous sections is performed, the present data initialization processing is ended.

  That is, in the data initialization processing executed based on the satisfaction of the termination condition of the advantageous segment, the initialization processing of the various areas 201, 203, 205, 207, and 209 related to the advantageous segment is performed, while the data is associated with the advantageous segment. The initialization processing of the various areas 202, 204, 206, 208 and 210 which are used without distinction of the normal section and the advantageous section is not performed. And as mentioned above, various areas related to these advantageous sections and various areas not related to the advantageous sections or used without distinction between the normal sections and the advantageous sections are provided as separate areas so as not to overlap. Therefore, when the above initialization process is performed, an error that the area to be initialized is not initialized or an error that the area to be initialized is not initialized is generated. Is preferably suppressed.

  Returning to the description of the section display second process, after performing the data initialization process in step S7807, the special section setting process is performed in step S7808, and the section display second process is ended. If the negative determination is made in step S7804, it is determined in step S7809 or step S7810 whether the termination condition of the advantageous segment is satisfied or not. If the termination condition is satisfied, steps S7805 to S7808 are performed. After performing the process of (2), the section display second process is ended. If the end condition is not satisfied, the section display second process is ended without performing the processes of step S7805 to step S7808. The process of step S7809 or step S7810 is the same as the process of step S6108 or step S6109.

  The special section setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S8001, a process of grasping the total annihilation game number TEG is performed. Here, the total annihilation game number TEG is stored in the normal section corresponding counter area 210 of the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the data initialization process is performed, the total annihilation game number TEG is not initialized. That is, when performing the game number addition processing in a situation where the above empty game number FG is 0 or less, the addition number is added to the various continuation number counters in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections such as attack mode continuation number G3. Instead, the value corresponding to the total annihilation game number TEG in various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section is added.

  In other words, in the present modification, when an additional opportunity is generated, a process of storing the number of additional games as information used in the advantageous section in various areas for the advantageous section is performed, and the number of additional games is There are cases where processing is stored in various areas for the normal section as the total annihilation game number TEG as information also used during the normal section, and whether the number of vacant games FG is 0 or less, that is, excess The determination processing as to whether or not the flag is set can be said to be processing to select to which area the storage processing is to be performed. As described above, in this modification, it is possible to make the area for storing the information of the event generated in the advantageous section different depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag. In this way, it is possible to take over the information of the event that occurred during the advantageous section to the normal section, on the premise that the initialization process is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

  In the subsequent step S8002, processing is performed to acquire the special segment table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. Here, the special section is provided as a section in which the suggestion effect of the set value is easily generated in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 162A, the special segment table is set so that the number of games in the special segment varies according to the value of the total annihilation game number TEG. Specifically, if the total number of annihilated games TEG is 0, no special section is set, and if the total number of annihilated games TEG is 1 to 50, a special section of 10 games is selected, and the total number of extinct games TEG is 51. For example, a special interval of 30 games is selected if it is 100, and a longer special interval is selected as the value of the total annihilation game number TEG is larger.

  After the number of games in the special zone is specified in the processes in steps S8001 and S8002, in step S8003, a process is performed to input a value corresponding to the specified number of games in the special zone game number PG. Then, in step S8004, it is determined whether or not the input special section game number PG is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, processing is performed to set the special section flag in step S8005, and the process proceeds to step S8006. The special zone command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special section game number PG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the special section, and the special section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the special section. The special segment command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that it is a special segment.

  If it is determined in step S8003 that the special segment game count PG is 0, or after the process of step S8006 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S8007. In step S8007, processing is performed to clear the total annihilation game number TEG to an initial value (0). Thereafter, the special interval setting process is ended. That is, when the total annihilation game number TEG is 0 at the end of the advantageous section, the special section flag is not set and the special section is not set.

  In the special section in the present modification, a pressing order notification effect is generated when a predetermined special replay is won. As shown in the second embodiment etc., although special replays differ in the type of replayed results to be won according to the stop order, the benefit is awarded even if any replayed result is won. It is a result that it is a re-game and transition of a gaming state, such as RT state, does not occur.

  FIG. 163 shows the lottery table for the normal gaming state in the present modification. In the present variation, special replay 1 and special replay 2 can be won as special replays in the normal gaming state. Special Replay 1 and Special Replay 2 are as described in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, and Special Replay 1 is a duplicate of the first replay, the ninth replay, the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay, and Special Replay 2 is a duplicate of the first replay, the tenth replay to the fifteenth replay. And, the re-game winnings are different depending on the stop order, and the corresponding re-game winnings are in the respective down appearances of down-down replay, black BAR temppai out, black BAR double temply out, black BAR single assortment, black BAR double assortment To establish. The total value of the winning probability of special replay 1, special replay 2 and normal replay is set to be the same as the probability of winning the normal replay in the normal gaming state lottery table in each of the above embodiments.

  Hereinafter, the processing in the special section will be described.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games management process in this modification.

  In the present modification, when it is determined in step S1401 that the bet number is 3, it is determined in step S8101 whether the above-described specific section flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S8102 whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, in step S8103, the special zone game number PG is decremented by one. Thereafter, it is determined in step S8104 whether or not the special section game number PG has become 0, and if it has become 0, processing of clearing the specific section flag is performed in step S8105. If a negative determination is made in step S8101, step S8102 or step S8104, or after the process of step S8105 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  FIG. 164 (b) is a flowchart showing the pushing order processing in the present modification.

  In the present modification, if a negative determination is made in step S4419, the process proceeds to step S8111. In step S8111, it is determined whether the game result of the current game is the special replay 1 or special replay 2 winning described above. If one of the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 has been won, the process proceeds to step S8112, and it is determined whether the specific section flag is set. If the specific section flag is set, the push order notification command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S8113, and the present push order processing ends. When a negative determination is made in step S8111 or step S8112, the pressing order processing is ended without setting and outputting the pressing order notification command.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a notification process for special replay in the present modification. The special replay notification process corresponds to the special RT notification process in the second embodiment and the like. That is, the process is performed in step S4515 when it is determined that the special replay is won in step S4514 of the push order notification process (FIG. 98).

  In step S8201, a process of grasping the setting value is executed. In the subsequent step S8202, processing is performed to acquire a push order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning from various table storage areas 182a. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the pressing order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning is set so that the occurrence rate of pressing order notification effects differs depending on the set value, and the winning mode at the pressing order notification effect occurrence differs. It is done.

  Specifically, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the push order notification effect will occur, and the higher the set value, the black BAR single set or black BAR double when the push order notification effect occurs. It is set so that the ratio in which the push order notification effect of the winning combination that is uniform is selected is high. For example, if the setting value is 1, the push order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25%, and the push order notification effect in which the black BAR double balance falls off is selected as the prize mode at the time of the generation. If the setting value is 2, as in the case where the setting value is 1, although the push order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25%, the push order notification effect is selected such that a part of them is black BAR single set. Be done. The pushing order informing effect in which the black BAR singles are aligned corresponds to the suggested effect that suggests the set value 2 or more. When the set value becomes 4 or more, when the push order notification effect occurs, the push order notification effect that black bar double alignment is also selected is selected, and the push order notification effect that black bar double alignment becomes the set value 4 or higher It corresponds to the suggestive effect suggested.

  In step S8203, based on the pressing order notification lottery table acquired in step S8202, a pressing order notification lottery is executed. In the lottery process, whether or not to generate a push order notification and the type of push order notification effect to be generated (corresponding winning mode) are drawn. Then, based on the lottery result, in step S8204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled such that the corresponding pressing order notification effect is performed.

  As described above, depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the area to be stored is made different depending on whether or not the number of games drawn based on the additional opportunity is stored as the additional game number and when stored as the total annihilated game number TEG. The number of games is the target of the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and the total annihilation game number TEG is not the target of the initialization process. As a result, as a configuration in which initialization processing is performed at the end of the advantageous section, it occurs in the advantageous section without violating the purport that the advantageous section is clearly indicated by the section indicator etc. It becomes possible to take over the information of the event after the advantageous section. Thereby, the gap between the advantageous section and the normal section, which can be generated by forcibly terminating the advantageous section, can be filled, and the interlocking between the two sections can be enhanced.

  And based on the value of the total annihilation game number TEG, after the end of the advantageous section, it is set as the structure which sets the special section in which the suggestion effect of a setting value is easy to occur. As a result, it becomes possible to estimate the set value after the undesirable event for the player occurs, that is, the occurrence of the additional trigger in the situation where the excess flag is set in the advantageous section. It is possible to compensate for the above-mentioned undesirable events.

  In particular, even if the additional flag is set in the situation where the excess flag is set, the game is forcibly terminated after the upper limit number of games. Therefore, normally, the intention to continue the game is broken as the additional trigger is generated. It is considered that the game will be ended as it is at the time of forced termination. On the other hand, the longer the special section can be set as the additional opportunity occurs, the game is not ended immediately at the time of forced termination, but the game is ended after at least the special section is digested. Be able to Then, if a setting value suggestion preferable for the player occurs during the special section, the possibility of continuing the game is high, which can lead to an improvement in the operation rate.

  In this modification, since the setting value is suggested by stopping special replay (stopping order), the player gives an impression as if the suggestion of a preferable setting is made to appear by his own operation. The degree of attention to the effect of making such setting value suggestions is suitably enhanced.

  It is recommended that the special replay is operated in the stop order different from the notified stop order if the player does not want to generate an indication of the setting value, although the stop order differs depending on the stop order. . By doing this, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the suggestion of the setting value against the player's intention. That is, for example, it may be considered undesirable for a player who has already grasped that the high setting is to be made known to the surrounding players that the own game console is in the high setting. Therefore, by making it possible for the player to select whether or not to generate the setting value suggestion by doing as described above, it becomes possible to make the presentation contents as the player desires.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, instead of or in addition to the configuration for generating the push order notification effect in the special section, the precursor game number table in the special section is made different. FIG. 166 (a) shows the bonus precursor game number table in the normal mode in a situation not in the special section, and FIG. 166 (b) shows the bonus precursor game number table in the normal mode in the special section. ing.

  FIG. 166 (a) is as described in FIG. 35, and the precursor game number is set such that any one of 1 to 32 games is selected. And, the number of prognostic games that are easy to be selected is set to be different depending on the content of the bonus section and the advantageous section which has been double-winning. Specifically, it is easier to select a prognostic game number with a longer win with the attack mode than with the win with the challenge mode, and the double with the super attack mode is even more successful than the win with the attack mode. It is easy to select a long precursor game number.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (b), during the special section, the number of precursor games is set to be selected from 0 to 4 and is shorter than in the case of FIG. 166 (a). It is easy to become a precursor game number. In addition, during the special section, the larger the value of the total annihilation game number TEG which triggered the setting of the special section, the easier the number of short predictive game numbers to be selected, and the shorter such a precursor pattern that the mode in which duplicate winning is won is advantageous. The number of games is set to be easily selected.

  More specifically, if the total number of annihilated games TEG which triggered the setting of the special section this time is 1 to 50, the number of precursor games of 4 games is selected while the total number of annihilated games is selected in the duplicate winning in the challenge mode. If TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 game is selected. In addition, in the case of double winning in the attack mode, if the total number of annihilated games TEG which triggered the setting of the special section this time is 1 to 50, while the number of precursor games of two games or four games is selected, If the number TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 game is selected.

  In this case, for example, as the special section flag, according to the value of the total annihilation game number TEG, if the total annihilation game number TEG is 1 to 50, the special section flag 1 is set, and the total annihilation game number TEG is 51 to 100. If so, the special segment flag 2 is set, if the total annihilation game number TEG is 101 to 200, the special segment flag 3 is set, and if the total annihilation game number TEG is 201 or more, the special segment flag 4 is set, etc. In addition, it is preferable that the total annihilation game number TEG in setting the special section can be determined after the fact.

  As described above, the superiority of the special section is not limited to the indication of the set value, and can be secured also by the number of precursor games of the bonus. In particular, in the case where a bonus such as the first BB is won, the player's loss is smaller if the bonus winning is made promptly because the bonus winning is not generated redundantly. From this point of view, it is possible to compensate for the invalidated gain during the advantageous section by making the number of precursor games easy to be reduced during the special section as described above.

<Modification 11>
In the present modification, the special notification is executed based on the occurrence of the addition where the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in the present modification.

  In step S8301, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the process for adding the number of games is ended. If the excess flag is not set and the number of vacant games FG is still 0 or more, the process proceeds to step S8302 and subsequent addition processing. In step S8302, a process of grasping the number of added games this time is executed. Then, in step S 8303, by grasping the vacant game number FG, it is determined whether or not the number of added games this time is equal to or greater than the number of vacant games FG, that is, the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less by the current addition. It is determined whether or not. If it does not become equal to or less than 0, processing for adding the number of added games to the target number of continuing games is performed in step S8304, and the processing for adding the number of games is ended.

  On the other hand, if the free game count FG is less than or equal to 0 due to the addition this time, in step S8305 a process is performed to add the number of additional games to the target number of continuing games, and then in step S8306 (1) After setting a special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81, the game number addition processing ends.

  In this case, when the addition occurs, the addition command may be output, or the addition command and the first special notification execution command may be output. When the addition command and the first special notification execution command are received, for example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), the number of addition games is added to the first special effect A and the first special effect B. The character may be displayed to simultaneously grasp that the addition has occurred and the setting value suggestion.

  Even in the case of the extra that triggers the setting of the excess flag, at least the excess of the upper limit game number can not receive its benefit sufficiently, but according to this modification, such loss is also obtained. It is possible to compensate by presenting information that may be useful to the player, that is, a setting value suggestion. In addition, for example, when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less at the time of the addition that occurred just before the maximum number of games, it is a situation (the situation where the number of games is small) etc. Even in this case, the special notification can be suitably generated.

  In addition, as described above, it is possible to simultaneously grasp information on the occurrence of the addition (characters corresponding to the number of added games) and information on the setting value suggestion (the first special notification A and the first special notification B). In addition, it is possible to present information that is preferable for the player, such as addition of setting value suggestion, with a close relationship to a preferable event for the player, and to strengthen the impression that the information of setting value suggestion is useful for the player. Is possible. That is, for example, it is considered that for a player who regards luck as the outcome of a game and despises the high and low of the set value, presenting information of the set value suggestion may not be useful information at all. Be In that respect, as described above, by presenting the information of the setting value suggestion in association with the strong addition effect of the elements of luck, it is understood that the elements of luck are also deeply reflected in the setting value suggestion, It is possible to make an impression that the setting value suggestion is useful.

  In addition, the information on the setting value suggestion and the information on the occurrence of the addition need not necessarily be presented completely at the same time, and the information on the occurrence of the addition first is presented, and the setting value suggestion is given later. As long as at least both of them are presented in duplicate, it may be a configuration in which at least both of the information are presented together with the information that the addition has occurred.

<Modification 12>
The value of the annihilation game number EG or the total annihilation game number TEG may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a third special notification setting process in the present modification. The third special notification setting process is a process that is executed instead of or in addition to the first special notification setting process, and is a process that is performed as one process of setting the additional effect.

  As already described, the third special notification is a special notification that is executed based on the number of disappearing games EG and the total number of disappearing games TEG. In this modification, after setting information on the number EG of disappearing games with respect to the third special notification command in the set processing of the superimposition command in FIG. 147, the information is output to the display control device 81. Therefore, in the display control device 81, by receiving the third special notification command, it is possible to grasp the number of additional games for the additional effect which should have occurred this time. Note that the information on the total annihilation game number TEG may be set in the third special notification command.

  In step S8401, based on the received third special notification command, processing is performed to grasp information corresponding to the number of lost games EG. Then, in step S8402, the number of added games which should have been generated this time is grasped. In step S8403, an additional effect is generated with the corresponding additional game number. In this case, it may be the same effect (for example, FIG. 136 (b)) as the normal time addition effect, or, for example, by differing the background etc., it is different from the normal time addition effect. The configuration may be such that the player can grasp. Then, after the special game number display part TGH is updated in step S8404, the third special notification setting process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (a), the special game number display portion TGH displays the number of normal games in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (attack mode etc.) including the upper limit 1500 games is displayed in the auxiliary display portion 65. The part GH is set to a different area, and more specifically, the special game number display part TGH is provided in the area adjacent to the normal game number display part GH. Therefore, when the normal game number display unit GH is to be visually recognized, the special game number display unit TGH is naturally easy to see, and the special game number display unit TGH is provided in a region where it is difficult for the player to overlook. In addition, any display part GH and TGH are also set to the area | region which does not overlap with pushing order alerting | reporting production | presentation.

  Further, the counter for displaying the number of games in the special game number display portion TGH is set so that the color, size, shape, etc. is different from the counter for displaying the number of games in the normal game number display portion GH. It is easy to give the impression that the contents of the counters of the sections GT and TGH are different. Moreover, the counter for displaying the number of games in the special game number display portion TGH is displayed larger than that of the normal game number display portion GH, and only the counter of the special game number display portion TGH is more noticeable Instead, it is easy for the player to give an impression of meaningful content.

  Here, the number-of-games display portion GH is updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous section. That is, every time one game is consumed, the counter of the normal game number display section GH is updated as a counter decremented by one. On the other hand, the counter of the number-of-special-games display portion TGH is updated based on the occurrence of the addition timing, and is not decremented when the game is consumed. Particularly, when the number-of-special-games display portion TGH is updated, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the counter is updated not to be decremented but to be increased based on the occurrence of the addition trigger. Be done. Therefore, in comparison with the fact that the counter of the normal game number display section GH is decremented, the counter of the special game number display section TGH is a counter that increases as the end of the advantageous section is reached. It can be easily reminded that some useful events will occur, and it can also be expected to have an effect of alleviating the sense of loss of termination of the advantageous section.

  Also in the present modification, a configuration in which the setting value is suggested according to the value of the total annihilation game number TEG at the forced end of the advantageous section (a configuration in which the setting value is suggested as end effect, and setting by setting the special section It is assumed that the configuration to perform value suggestion). That is, in fact, as the value of the special game number display part TGH becomes larger, useful information for the player can be more easily presented, and it is possible to make a game effect according to the player's expectation.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the upper limit game number is provided in the advantageous section, if an addition exceeding the upper limit game number occurs, the player usually has an insignificant increase over the upper limit game number. Because there is, it is thought that we do not want to know that the extra has occurred and the number of extra games. From that premise, it is normal idea that the player should be concealed, that is, should not be notified about the occurrence of the addition in such a situation or the number of added games, as much as possible. is there.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such addition and the number of added games are made meaningful, and from the value displayed by the number-of-special-games display portion TGH, the suggestion of the set value is It becomes possible to play the game while expecting to be performed. As described above, by daringly displaying the number of games that are not normally displayed, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the setting value is suggested based on the number of such games.

  Moreover, since such dare display is made, it is predicted that the player may be displayed with some meaning even if the configuration of the setting value is not suggested. It is thought that while playing a game. In other words, since the player intentionally displays the displayed meaning and benefit, the player himself can expect the effect of making the player predict itself and enjoying the prediction itself.

  The above-mentioned number-of-special-games display portion TGH may be displayed also at the end of the advantageous section, such as the effect of ending the attack mode. By doing this, it is possible for the player to calculate the total number of continued games and the total number of medals obtained when the advantageous section is not forcibly terminated, from the special game number display portion TGH, for example, how much more It is also possible to make a memorandum of conversation with a friend, etc., even though the medal has been won.

<Modification 13>
In this modification, notification is performed using the relationship between the actual number of remaining advantageous area games ZG and the number of remaining games on the display. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining advantageous area games ZG and the number of remaining games on the display.

  In the present modification, as the predetermined additional effect, an after-addition effect is set in which the game number of a part or all of the additional game numbers is notified in a game after the game in which the additional opportunity has occurred. That is, a part of the number of games in the advantageous zone remaining game ZG is first notified as the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, and the number of remaining games in the number of remaining advantageous zone games ZG is notified later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is the remaining number counter HG for display, and the number of games to be notified later is the additional loading counter BG, the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous section is the remaining number counter HG for display and the additional loading It becomes equal to the total value with the counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time the game is finished, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented even if the game is finished unless a post-loading effect occurs. The display remaining number counter HG and the post loading counter BG are counters managed by the various counter areas 183 b of the display control device 81, but may be counters managed by the main control device 101.

  For example, when the number of remaining games on the display reaches a predetermined number (1 in this modification) while the attack mode is being digested, that is, the display remaining number counter HG is set to a predetermined number (1). When it becomes, a post ride effect occurs. In the post-addition effect, for example, as in the case of the addition effect, it is informed that the addition of the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150) has been performed. As a result, the post-loading counter BG is decremented by 0 (in the figure, 0), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification by post-on effect to the display remaining number It becomes a value corresponding to the counter HG (150 in one game).

  A process for performing post-addition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 shows an additional effect setting process in the present modification, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an additional effect setting process. The add-on effect setting process is performed in other processes of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

  If it is determined in step S8501 that the first special notification command has not been received in the additional effect setting process, a process is performed to determine the number of additional games in step S8502. Then, in step S8503, a postloading lottery process is executed. The post-loading lottery process is a lottery process as to whether the current number of games to be added is reported in the game or whether it is reported in a later game, that is, whether or not to post-pay. For example, the post-loading ratio is set to be different depending on the type of the specific part.

  In the following step S8504, it is determined whether or not the winning is made in the post-addition lottery. If it has not been won, that is, if it is determined that the current number of added games is notified by the game, the process proceeds to step S8505, and processing for adding the number of currently added games to the display remaining number counter HG is performed. Thereafter, in steps S8506 to S8511, a lottery of execution timing of the additional notification effect, and setting of the additional notification effect are performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of the current additional game is notified in a later game, in step S8512 a process is performed to set an additional flag in the various flag storage area 183a. If the post-loading flag has already been set in step S8512, the state is maintained. Then, after the process of adding the current number of added games to the added board counter BG is performed in step S8513, the setting process of the added effect is ended.

  When the first special notification command is received in step S8501, the first special notification setting process is performed in step S8514, but the first special notification setting process in the present modification will be described later.

  In the afterload effect setting process, it is determined in step S8601 whether or not the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value. Note that, as described above, every time one game is consumed during the advantageous section, the display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 by subtraction processing not shown, and the display of the auxiliary display unit 65 is also updated according to the subtraction processing. Be done. If the display remaining number counter HG is 1, it is determined in step S8602 whether the post-loading flag is set. If the display remaining number counter HG is not 1 or the post-loading flag is not set, the post-loading effect setting process is ended as it is.

  If the display remaining number counter HG is 1 and the post-loading flag is set, processing for grasping the value of the post-loading counter BG is executed in step S8603. Then, in step S8604, the number of games for this post-addition effect is determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether to notify all of the post-loading counter BG as post-loading effects or whether to post a part of the post-loading counters BG as post-loading effects. In such a lottery, depending on the value of the value of the post-loading counter BG, it is preferable to differ whether it is all or part, and in the case of part, it is preferable to change the ratio. In addition, in this modification, it is set as the structure which alert | reports all as an aftermath effect even if it is any case.

  In the subsequent step S 8605, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled such that an additional effect of the number of games for the notification is performed. In the subsequent step S8606, processing is performed to add the value of the post-loading counter BG for the notified amount to the display remaining number counter HG. Then, in step S8607, the value added to the notification and display remaining number counter HG is processed to be subtracted from the post-loading counter BG, and in step S8608, the post-loading counter BG is 0 on condition that In step S8609, processing for clearing the post-loading flag is performed. If it is determined in step S8608 that the post-loading counter BG is not 0, or after the process of step S8609, the post-loading effect setting process is ended.

  In the configuration in which the after game effect as described above is performed, for example, when a large amount of additional is added to the after additional counter BG, the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less and the excess flag is set. Even if the number of remaining games on the display may cause a specific event that can not be grasped that the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit. In this modification, the specific event is used to eliminate the sense of loss upon winning the specific part.

  The first special notification setting process in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S8701, it is determined whether an afterload flag is set. If the post-loading flag is not set, processing for the first special notification is performed in steps S8702 to S8707. The processes of steps S8702 to S8707 are similar to the processes of steps S6701 to S6706.

  If the postloading flag is set, the process advances to step S8708 to perform processing for grasping the postloading counter BG. Then, in step S8709, the number of games to be added in a pseudo manner is determined by lottery. In this case, it is determined by lottery that the number of pseudo-added games is the upper limit of the post-loading counter BG, and, for example, if the post-loading counter BG is 100, any one of 100 or less is selected.

  Specifically, for example, a lottery table similar to the additional game number lottery table (in the case of actually causing the superimposition) in FIG. 131 is also stored in the display control device 81. Then, on the basis of the lottery table and the game result of this time, the pseudo added game number is selected by lottery. If the number of games selected by the lottery is equal to or less than the post-loading counter BG, the number of games is determined as the current number of pseudo-added games. On the other hand, if the number of games selected by the lottery is larger than the post-loading counter BG, the value of the post-loading counter BG is determined as the current number of pseudo-superimposed games. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a pseudo-super-addition exceeding the post-loading counter BG, as if actually being carried out, in relation to the specific part who has triggered the extra. .

  In the subsequent step S8710, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to perform the addition effect with the number of pseudo addition games determined in step S8709. In this case, by setting the same effect as the additional effect that occurs at the normal time, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the additional event has occurred, triggered by the current game result.

  In the subsequent step S8711, processing for adding the notification to the display remaining number counter HG is performed, and in step S8712, processing for subtracting the notification from the post-loading counter BG is performed. Then, in step S8713, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become 0, and if 0, the post-loading flag is cleared in step S8714. If it is determined in step S8713 that the post-loading counter BG is not 0, or after the process of step S8714 is executed, the first special notification setting process is ended.

  As described above, even if the number of vacant games FG is less than or equal to 0, the pseudo additional effect is performed by using the number of remaining advantageous zones remaining game ZG (the post-loading counter BG). With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the sense of loss in the case where the additional game occurs in a situation where the number of free games FG is less than or equal to 0 and the excess flag is set.

  In particular, since the configuration is such that the pseudo-addition for the unreported amount is performed within the range of the post-loading counter BG, and the configuration is performed after the actual addition lottery / additional game number lottery It is possible to intensify the impression that it is not the actual one but the actual extra on the basis of the specific part winning, and it is possible to feel purely pleasure that the pseudo-extra is performed.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, the setting value is suggested by using the pseudo overlay in the modification 13. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a pseudo added game number lottery process in the present modification. The pseudo added game number lottery process is a process performed in step S8709.

  In step S <b> 8801, processing for grasping the set value is performed. In the following step S8802, a setting value suggestion lottery process is performed. In the set value suggesting lottery process, it is a process of deciding whether or not to perform the set value suggestion at the time of this pseudo addition. Specifically, a pseudo added game number table for setting value suggestion is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and it is randomly drawn whether or not to perform pseudo addition with the number of games including the contents of the set value suggestion.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the pseudo added game number table for setting value suggestion is set so that the number of pseudo added games to be selected is different depending on the set value. For example, as the number of games for pseudo-addition, the pseudo-addition effect of the same number of games as the post-loading counter BG may be selected with all setting values, but is set to be more easily selected as the high setting. In addition, the pseudo-addition effect of the game number obtained by adding 10, for example, to the post-loading counter BG as the first number is selected in setting 1 to setting 3, and is set to be more easily selected as the low setting. The pseudo-addition effect of the number of games obtained by adding 56, for example, as the second number to the post-loading counter BG is set to be selected by setting 5 and setting 6. The pseudo-addition effect of the number of games in which, for example, 77 is added to the post-loading counter BG as the third number is set so as to be selected only by the setting 6.

  After the lottery process for suggesting the setting value is performed in step S8802, it is determined in step S8803 whether or not the pseudo additional effect of each game number including the content of the setting value suggestion is won. If the game has been won, the process of setting the number of games according to the contents of the winning as the number of pseudo added games this time is performed in step S8804, and then the pseudo added games number lottery process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (a), in the table of the pseudo added game number for setting value suggestion, the setting suggestion deviation is selected in which the number of games including the contents of the setting value suggestion is not selected, regardless of which setting value. It is set to get you. When the setting suggestion omission is selected, the number of games of the pseudo-addition effect is determined by lottery by the following process.

  That is, if the result of the lottery process in step S8802 is not the above-mentioned setting value suggestion, a negative determination will be made in step S8803, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S8805. In step S8805, a lottery process for the number of pseudo top games for normal use is performed. The pseudo addition game number lottery process for normal use is the same as that described in the above-described modification 13, and based on the same lottery table as the addition game number random selection table in the normal time in FIG. The number of simulated additional games is selected by lottery.

  In the following step S8806, it is determined whether the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the post-loading counter BG. If it exceeds the post-loading counter BG, in step S8807, the value of the post-loading counter BG is set as the number of pseudo-addition games this time, and then the pseudo-addition game number lottery processing is ended. If the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the post-loading counter BG, the process of setting the selected number of games as the number of pseudo-superimposed games in step S8808 is performed, and then the pseudo-additional game number lottery is performed. End the process.

  In this case, for example, when the upper limit is set to 1500 by adding the number of games notified in the additional effect (simulated additional effect) to the total number of games and the number of remaining games, the number of pseudo additional games for setting value suggestion There is a possibility that the same number of games as the number of post-loading counters BG has been selected in the lottery. As described above, since it is easy to select the same number of games as the number of post-loading counters BG, the higher setting can be made, it is possible to predict high setting. However, the additional effect of the number of games equal to the number of post-loading counters BG may also occur when the number of games equal to or larger than the number of post-loading counters BG is selected in the pseudo additional games number lottery process for normal use. Then, not only is it necessary to generate an additional effect of the same number of games as the post-loading counter BG, but also the degree of difficulty in predicting the set value is high, and the fun of the game is added.

  For example, in the table of the number of added games performed based on the strong cherry winning in the attack mode, the largest number of selected games is set as 200 games (FIG. 131). Therefore, for example, if 250 games additional effects are generated as the number of games exceeding 200 games when winning strong cherry, it is highly likely that they are pseudo additional effects, and if the number of games is the same as the number of after-loading counters BG ( If adding to the total number of games and the number of remaining games results in the upper limit value), the expectation that is a high setting increases.

  On the other hand, even if an additional effect of the same 250 games is generated, if it is triggered by the weak cherry winning, the number of games within the selected range at the weak cherry time will be (FIG. 131), for example Even if the number is equal to that of BG, the possibility that the number of games equal to or greater than the post-addition counter BG is selected in the normal number pseudo addition game number lottery process can not be denied.

  Also, in the above example, even if an additional effect exceeding 200 games occurs when a strong cherry is won, it is set low if it is the number of games (260) in which the first number (10) is added to the post-loading counter BG. The possibility of being increased. On the other hand, if it is an additional effect triggered by the weak cherry winning, it can not be asserted that the setting is low.

  Here, if the number of vacant games on the display determined from the total number of games and the number of remaining games on the display as described above is equal to or more than the upper limit of the number of one additional games, When an additional effect of the same number of games occurs, it is clearly understood that it includes the content of the setting value suggestion. On the other hand, when the number of vacant games on the display is less than the upper limit of the number of added games once, if the additional effects of the same number of games as the added game counter BG are generated, the contents of the set value suggestion are included. Can not be determined. That is, in a situation where the number of vacant games on the display is large, an additional effect including the content of the set value suggestion is more likely to occur, and even if the excess flag is set earlier, the set value is set accordingly. It is possible to bring about the merit that it becomes possible to enjoy the suggestion. In addition, when the number of vacant games on the display is less than the upper limit of the number of added games, the player who desires additional effects including the content of the setting value suggestion is added based on the specific part having a small number of upper limit games (for example, You will want to add up to 50 games with chance A and chance B. In other words, it is possible to expect the addition in the completely opposite sense that would expect the addition of a large number of games, and it becomes possible to realize novel game characteristics that have not been achieved in the past.

  Also, for example, when the generated additional effect is the number of games obtained by adding the second number (56) or the third number (77) to the post-loading counter BG, high setting is expected as described above It has become possible. However, this content is also different from the number of games appearing depending on the progress of the game, such as the number of remaining games on display, and the suggested content.

  For example, in FIG. 176 (b1), in the situation where the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 102, and the post-loading counter BG is 353, the number of appearing additional games and suggested contents of the setting value It shows the relationship. In this case, if the number of games to be added is 353 games, a high setting is indicated, and if the number of games to be added is 363 games, low settings are suggested. Further, if the number of games to be added is 409 games, setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and if it is 430 games, setting 6 is decided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176 (b2), even if the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 56, and the number of added games is 409 in the situation where the post-loading counter BG is 399. If it is a game, it will suggest low setting. That is, in the case of FIG. 176 (b1), the number of games suggesting setting 5 or setting 6 suggests low setting in the situation of FIG. 176 (b2), and even if the same number of games is added , The suggested content will be completely different.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176 (b3), even if the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 35, and the number of added games is 430 in the situation where the post-loading counter BG is 420. If it is a game, it will suggest low setting. That is, in the case of FIG. 176 (b1), the number of games determined by the setting 6 indicates a low setting in the situation of FIG. 176 (b3), and the suggested content is Will be totally different.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the specialized zone is different from each of the above embodiments. In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the specialization zone is made based on the pattern of transitioning to the specialization zone based on the occurrence of the seventh game win in the VB mode and the winning lottery for transition to the super attack mode. Although the pattern has been described, in the present embodiment, a transition pattern is described based on the winning combination in the attack mode or the VB mode.

  FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing a second specific combination process in the present embodiment. As described above, the second specific combination process is a process performed when the specific combination is won, and is a process performed mainly when the display mode is the attack mode.

  The second specific combination process in the present embodiment is different from the process in the case where the game number added lottery process in the attack mode is not won. That is, the processing of step S10001 to step S10020 is the same as the processing of step S901 to step S920, and based on the winning combination, the lottery for transition to the VB mode according to the rank of the attack mode, the rank of the attack mode Promotion lottery and game number addition lottery of attack mode is carried out, and processing for giving the corresponding benefit (transition to VB mode and rank promotion, game number addition) is performed when winning each of these lottery To be done.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S10015 that the attack number game added lottery process performed in the immediately preceding step S10014 is not winning, the process proceeds to step S10021. In step S10021, a transition lottery to a specialized zone is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the specific combination is won in the attack mode, the transition lottery to the specialization zone is performed when the lottery for transition to the VB mode or the number-of-games addition lottery for the attack mode is not won. To be done. In the special zone lottery process, a table for special zone transition lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for determining whether to shift the display mode to the special zone by a lottery counter or the like. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 179, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery is set so that the winning probability of the transition lottery varies depending on the type of the specific combination.

  Here, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the specific part in the lottery process (FIG. 16) is different from that in each of the above embodiments, and in particular, strong cherries (IV = 13), weak cherries (IV = 14), strong The winning probabilities of watermelon (IV = 15) and weak watermelon (IV = 16) are different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a strong cherry is won with a probability of about 1/600, and a weak cherry is won with a probability of about 200: 1. In addition, a strong watermelon is won with a probability of about 300/000, and a weak watermelon is won with a probability of about 60/60. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning strong cherry or weak cherry (these are collectively referred to simply as "cherry") is about 1/150 in total, and strong watermelon or weak watermelon (these are Collectively, the probability of winning also simply as "watermelon" is about one-fifth in total, and watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than cherry. With regard to these cherries and watermelons, it is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability regardless of the setting value. For example, the cherry winning probability of setting 1 and the cherry winning probability of setting 6 are common. The winning probability and the watermelon winning probability of setting 5 are common. About the winning probability of other specific part, it is the same as that of each above-mentioned embodiment. Further, the probability of the game results other than the specific part (normal replay, push replay, push bell, first BB, second BB, CB, disengagement, etc.) is the same as in the above embodiments.

  For example, in the special zone transition lottery based on the strong cherries, in the special zone transition lottery table, the player is elected with a probability of 5%, and in the specialized zone transition lottery based on the weak cherries, it is elected with a 0.5% probability. On the other hand, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%. That is, not only watermelon has a higher probability of winning as a game result than cherry, but also the probability of winning is set to be high even in the special zone transition lottery.

  The winning probability for each specific combination in the special zone transition drawing is set as a winning probability common to any setting value, and is set so as not to differ depending on the setting value.

  In step S10022, it is determined based on the processing result of step S10021 whether or not the transition lottery to the specialization zone has been won. If the player has not won the game, the second specified winning combination process ends. If it has been won, in step S10023, processing is performed to set the specialization zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S10024, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S10025, a lottery process for the number of prognostic games is performed, in step S10026 a process for setting the number of prognostic games is performed, Is set, and then the second specific part process is ended. The processes of steps S1024 to S10027 are similar to the processes of steps S906 to S909, for example, and are processes for setting a precursor mode.

  Next, the third specific part process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the third specific combination process is a process performed when the specific combination is won, and is a process performed when the display mode is mainly the VB mode.

  In the third specified winning combination process in the present embodiment, similarly to the change point in the second specific winning combination process, the process in the case where the game number added lottery process in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processing in step S10101 to step S10107 is the same as the above step S1001 to step S1007, and a lottery for game number increase in attack mode based on winning a specific combination is performed, and the game number for the additional lottery is won. An addition process is performed.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10102 that the attack mode game number-added lottery process performed in the immediately preceding step S10101 is not won, the process proceeds to step S10108. In step S10108, a transition lottery to a specialization zone is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the case where the specific combination is won in the VB mode, the transition lottery to the specialization zone is performed also when the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S10021 described above, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transition lottery.

  As in the table for the special zone transition lottery in the attack mode, the table for the special zone transition lottery in the VB mode also differs in the winning probability of the transition lottery depending on the type of the specific part as shown in FIG. 179. Is set as. For example, the special zone transition drawing based on strong cherry is won with a probability of 10%, and the special zone transition drawing based on weak cherry is elected with a probability of 1%. On the other hand, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 30%, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 10%. That is, also in the VB mode, the winning probability of the special zone transition lottery is set so that the watermelon is higher than the cherry. Further, the winning probability of the special zone transition lottery, including other specific roles, is set to be higher in the VB mode than in the attack mode.

  The probability of winning by a specific combination in the special zone transition drawing in the VB mode is also set as a common winning probability regardless of the setting value in the same manner as the selection probability in the attack mode and does not differ depending on the setting value. Is set as.

  In step S10109, it is determined based on the processing result of step S10108 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. The processes of steps S10109 to S10114 are substantially the same as the processes of steps S10022 to S10027 described above, and are processes for setting a precursor mode in the case where a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is won. However, in step S10113, the number of games obtained by adding the number of remaining games in the VB mode to the number of precursor games determined by the lottery process of the number of precursor games is set as the number of precursor games of this time. That is, although the precautionary effect indicating the specialization zone winning is performed from during the VB mode, it is configured to shift to the specialization zone after the VB mode ends. Note that the number of remaining games in the VB mode may be set as the precursor game number, and in this case, it is possible to omit the lottery process or the like of the precursor game number.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition lottery to the specialization zone is performed based on the fact that the player has not won the special part in the attack mode or the VB mode. With such a configuration, the benefits that can be obtained when winning a specific part in the attack mode or the VB mode are not limited to the direct addition of the number of games, and the expectation is higher. Be In addition, the transition route to the specialization zone is diversified, and it is possible to significantly improve the gameplay.

  As processing for causing the display mode to shift to the specialization zone, mode transition notification processing and push order processing in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The specialization zone in the present embodiment is shifted based on the establishment of the seventh replay prize similarly to the above-described embodiments. However, in the present embodiment, the transition lottery to the specialization zone is not performed by the lottery at the BAR replay winning (lottery whether or not to win the seventh replay game), and the specific winning combination is won as described above. A transitional draw is sometimes made. Then, when winning the transition lottery at the time of the specific combination winning, the special zone winning flag is set to be shiftable, and thereafter, when the BAR replay 1 is won, the pushing order for establishing the seventh game win is The notification is carried out to shift to the specialized zone.

  That is, in the process of informing mode transition in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180, the number of precursor games is 0 in steps S10201 to S10216 as in the processes in steps S1101 to S1116. Based on this, processing for shifting to the corresponding display mode and processing for generating pressing order notification at the time of winning the winning combination to be the shifting combination to the corresponding gaming state are performed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S10213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S10217. In step S10217, it is determined whether the specialization zone hit flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notifying process is finished. If it is set, in step S10218, processing is performed to clear the specialization zone hit flag. Then, in step S10219, processing is performed to set a specialization zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialization zone notification flag is a flag for executing a push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay win. After the process of step S10219 is performed, the special zone selection notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S10220, and the mode transition notification process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the specialization zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialization zone has been won. The processing may be executed, for example, on the condition that the special zone winning notification command has been received in the other betting effect setting processing (step S1809) of the betting effect setting processing (FIG. 44). .

  In the pushing order processing in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, the pushing for promoting to the second RT state or the third RT state in steps S10301 to S10313 as in the process of steps S1201 to S1213. The order notification (the third to fifth replay game push notification) and the push order notification for not falling to the first RT state (the push notification of the first replay) are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10309, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S10314 whether the current game result is BAR replay 1 among BAR replays. If it is BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S10315 whether the attack notification flag is set or not, and in step S10316, it is determined whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S10315, in the present BAR replay 1 winning game, the pressing order processing is ended without executing the pressing order notification. If a negative determination is made in step S10316, the process advances to step S10307 to perform processing for notification of pushing order for establishing the first replay win.

  If both the attack notification flag and the special zone notification flag are set, the push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay win is executed in step S10317, and the seventh replay win is performed in step S10318. After the pressing order notification command including the stopping order corresponding to is set as an output target to the display control device 81, the pressing order processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship between the stop order at the time of BAR replay 1 winning and the prize mode is such that the seventh replay, the first replay and the sixth replay have different stop orders. You may set it (FIG.23 (c)). As a result, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay win as described above, it is possible to more reliably establish the seventh replay win. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S1316 of the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 39) that the seventh replay game winning is established, instead of determining the presence or absence of the VB notification flag in step S1317, It is configured to confirm the presence or absence of the notification flag for the specialized zone. That is, when the seventh replay win is established and the special zone notification flag is set, the special zone start process (step S 1318-18) is performed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid transitioning to the specialization zone when the stop order happens to coincide with the stop order corresponding to the seventh replay win.

  In addition, also in the pressing order processing of the present embodiment, when the negative determination is made in step S10314, the processing for pressing order bell is performed in steps S10319 to S10322 as in the processing of steps S1219 to S1222. It is.

  Next, setting processing of additional effects in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the setting process of the additional effect is a process performed by the display control device 81 based on the reception of the additional command from the main control device 101.

  In step S10401, it is determined whether it is in a specialized zone. If it is not in the specialization zone, it is determined in step S10402 to step S10413 whether or not the current addition is to be added as in the case of the step S8502 to step S8513, or in the case where the addition is not to be performed. Then, it is determined at which timing of the game whether or not the additional effect is to be generated.

  In the following description, as contrast with the post-addition effect, the additional effect (additional effect generated at a timing earlier than the post-addition effect) generated in the additional winning game is also referred to as an immediate effect.

  If it is the additional command received in the specialization zone in step S10401, the specialization zone additional processing is executed in step S10414, and the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

  Here, before performing the special zone additional processing, the effects in the special additional zone according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), when the transition to the additional specialization zone is made, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a character display of "increasing the additional probability" is performed. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the winning probability of the lottery with the number of games is high. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the total number of games added in the specialization zone is displayed by the number of added games TUG in the specialization zone. The number of additional games TUG in the specialization zone is, for example, disposed at the upper center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and in particular, at a position where it is easy for the player to catch the eye.

  Also in this embodiment, in the specialization zone, not only the specific combination but also the push order bell and push order replay are won (FIG. 129). Therefore, the addition of the number of games occurs for each game, and the corresponding addition effect is performed, and the display of the number of added games TUG in the specialized zone is updated every game.

  In the present embodiment, among the specific roles in the specialization zone, in particular, for the watermelon and cherries, the case where the immediate effect is selected in which the additional effect is performed in the won game, and the time of termination of the specialization zone There are cases where a post-loading effect is selected in which the notification of the number of added games is carried over.

  In the following description, as a contrast with the immediate effect and the late effect other than in the specialized zone, the additional effect to be generated in the winning game in the specialized zone is also referred to as an immediate effect in the zone, and at the end of the specialized zone The additional effect to be generated (additional effect generated at a timing later than the immediate effect in the zone) is also referred to as an additional effect in the zone.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), for example, when the immediate effect in the zone is selected when the watermelon is won, the additional effect already described occurs. The additional effect is an effect in which a notification of winning of the additional winning and a notification of the content of the number of additional games are simultaneously performed. On the other hand, when the after game effect is selected in the zone when the watermelon is won, the first after game character BUP1 is selected as a character imitating a green treasure box corresponding to watermelon, for example, as a notification of winning that the extra event was won by the watermelon trigger. While being displayed, it is indicated by the character display of "Get !!" that the first post-embedded character BUP1 (the right to be added based on the watermelon trigger) is acquired. Also, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), when the immediate effect in the zone is selected at the cherry winning, the additional effect already described occurs as in the case where the immediate effect is selected at the watermelon winning. . On the other hand, when the after game effect in the zone is selected at the time of cherry winning, the second after game character BUP2 serves as a character imitating a red treasure box corresponding to cherry, for example, as a notification of winning that the extra winning is triggered by cherry. While being displayed, the character display of "get !!" indicates that the second add-on character BUP2 (the add-on right based on the cherry opportunity) has been acquired. The first after game character BUP1 and the second after game character BUP2 have different display contents so that the player can distinguish them, and specifically, the character colors are different as described above (BUP 1 Is green, BUP2 is red, and the figure shows dot hatches differently).

  The acquired first after game character BUP1 and the second after game character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the specialization zone middle game number TUG, as shown in FIG. 183 (b). In FIG. 183 (b), three first after-loading characters BUP1 are displayed, and one second after-loading character BUP2 is displayed, which indicates that after-water effect is generated three times in the watermelon-triggered zone. In addition, it has shown that an add-on effect occurs once in the zone of cherry opportunity. Note that FIG. 183 (b) shows a situation in which the number TUG of added games in the specialization zone is updated to "150", and such a situation indicates that the game is immediately loaded in the zone in each game in the specialization zone. Indicates that a total of 150 games have occurred. More specifically, the situation where the display in FIG. 183 (b) is made means that 150 games are added in the specialization zone, and furthermore, an additional effect in the zone is generated four times (three times plus one). In the specialization zone, it means that there are potentially more game numbers than the 150 games displayed in the game number TUG.

  When the number of continuing games in the specialization zone becomes 0 and the specialization zone ends, an afterloading effect corresponding to the first additional character BUP1 and the second additional character BUP2 occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), when the final game of the specialization zone is finished (after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and more specifically, after the medal payout is completed), The character display of “placement Judge” is performed, and it is indicated that a postage effect during the zone is generated as the content notification notified of winning by the first afterward character BUP1 or the second afterward character BUP2. In addition, the first additional game number BUG1 indicating the total number of additional games generated by the watermelon trigger (add-on) and the second additional game number BUG2 indicating the total number of additional games (additional) generated by the cherry trigger Is displayed. FIG. 185 (a) shows the situation before the occurrence of the post-addition effect in the zone, and the number BUG1 and BUG2 of post-addition games are also zero.

  In the post-in-zone effects during zone, the post-in-zone effects during in-zone as content notification are generated sequentially (for example, each time the effect switch 66 is operated) for each of the additional characters BUP1 and BUP2 displayed in plurality. For example, one of the plurality of first after-loading characters BUP1 displayed is moved to substantially the center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and enlarged and displayed, and the content corresponding to the winning notification indicated by the first after-loading characters BUP1. Notification is performed. As the content notification, for example, a treasure box shown as the first post-loading character BUP1 is opened, and a display is made as if the content jumps out. The contents correspond to the number of added games, and FIG. 185 (b) shows that 10 games have been added (added after). In this case, the first additional game number BUG1 is incremented by 10 and the display is updated, and the display of the additional game number TUG in the specialization zone is also incremented and updated. Thereafter, the content notification is sequentially performed also for the remaining first add-on character BUP1.

  When the content notification for the first aftermath character BUP1 ends, the content notification for the second afterpass character BUP2 is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the second back riding character BUP2 moves to the approximate center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and is enlarged and displayed, and the notification of winning indicated by the second back riding character BUP3 The content notification corresponding to is performed. For example, the treasure box shown as the second postloading character BUP2 is opened, and a display is made as if the contents jumped out. As in the case of the first post-loading character BUP1, the contents correspond to the number of added games, and FIG. 186 (a) indicates that 90 games have been added (post-added). In this case, the second post-loaded game number BUG2 is added by 90 games and the display is updated, and the display of the additional game number TUG in the specialized zone is also added and updated by 90 games.

  When all content notification (in-zone post addition effect) for the addition generated in the specialization zone is completed, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), regarding the addition of watermelon and cherries generated in the specialization zone, A ratio notification indicating the selection ratio (selection ratio) between immediate loading and afterloading is performed.

  More specifically, the number of times the content notification of the number of added games has been made in the watermelon winning game (immediate loading number) with regard to the addition generated at the watermelon trigger and the addition triggered by the watermelon winning at the end of the specialization zone The number of times the content number of the game has been notified (the number of additions) is displayed as a first ratio display HP1. In addition, the number of added games triggered by cherry winning is the number of times the content notification of the number of added games was performed (immediate loading number) in the game in which the cherry was won and the number of added games triggered by cherry winning at the end of the specialization zone. The number of times the content notification has been performed (the number of post-loadings) is displayed as the second ratio display HP2.

  In FIG. 186 (b), in the specialization zone of this time, the number of promptings triggered by watermelon win is one, and the number of afterpasses triggered by watermelon winning is three, as a first ratio display It is shown by a stacked bar graph as HP1. In addition, in the specialization zone this time, the number of immediate loading triggered by cherry winning is two, and the number of additional loading triggered by cherry winning is one. Shown. In these stacked bar graphs, the area showing the number of times of immediate loading and the area showing the number of after-loading times are indicated by different colors, and it is possible for the player to clearly grasp the difference in those areas. (The dot hatch is displayed differently in the figure). More specifically, in the specialization zone of this time, it is selected that immediate addition is selected in 1/4 (25%) of the addition generated at the watermelon trigger, and that in 3/4 (75%) In the specialization zone of this time, 2/3 (approx. 66%) of the extras generated at the cherry opportunity were selected for immediate loading and one third (approx. 33%) were chosen for afterloading, It is shown to be easily grasped visually.

  In the present embodiment, with regard to the addition in the specialization zone, the ratio in which the immediate loading is selected and the ratio in which the additional loading is selected (the probability of winning in the additional loading lottery) are set to differ depending on the set value. ing. That is, the player can predict and grasp the set value by performing the notification of the ratio between the immediate loading and the postloading as described above for the specialization zone. Hereinafter, the process for performing the addition notification in the specialization zone, including the process for performing the ratio notification, will be described in detail.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the special zone additional processing.

  In step S10501, a process is performed to determine the number of added games this time. In the following step S10502, a post-lottery drawing process is executed during the zone. In the zone post-addition lottery process, the additional effect timing table for the specialization zone is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined whether the current additional effect is to be immediate or to be added by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 188, in the special effects zone for special zone, the execution timing of the additional effects is set to be different depending on the game result (winning combination) which is the opportunity for the additional winning event and the setting value. . Specifically, as a game result that became an additional winning event, the execution timing of the additional effect is different for watermelon (strong watermelon, weak watermelon common), cherry (strong cherry, weak cherry common), and others. It is set to.

  In the setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 40%, and the additional loading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 45% and the additional loading is selected at 55%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 55% and the postloading is selected at 45%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the postloading is selected at 40%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 65% and the postloading is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for post-loading, and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading.

  In setting 1, cherries are selected at 10% for immediate loading and 90% for postloading. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 30% and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the postloading is selected at 20%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 90% and the additional loading is selected at 10%. That is, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for post-loading, and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading, which is common to watermelon.

  On the other hand, in the case of cherries, the difference due to the setting value of the ratio between the immediate loading and the post loading is set to be larger than in the case where the additional timing is the watermelon. That is, for example, in predicting the set value when immediate loading is selected, cherry has a higher contribution as a prediction material than watermelon. In other words, it is easier to predict the setting value by predicting the setting value from the immediate loading / adding ratio of cherry rather than predicting the setting value from the watermelon immediate loading / adding ratio. It has become possible.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability is set so that the watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than the cherry (FIG. 179). The winning probability is the same winning probability in the specialization zone, and the watermelon is more likely to be won in the specialization zone than the cherry. Then, in a game in which the setting value is predicted from the immediate load / add-on ratio in the specialization zone, it is easy to win a watermelon with low prediction accuracy, and it is difficult to win a cherry with high prediction accuracy. By doing this, it is said that the benefit of winning a cherry with a low probability of winning is not only the benefit related to the degree of advantage such as the number of added games but also the presentation of information that can be beneficial to the player of predicted material of the set value. It is possible to add benefits and not to increase the proportion of benefits related to the degree of advantage.

  After executing the in-zone post-loading lottery process in step S10502, it is determined in step S10503 whether or not the in-zone post-loading lottery process is won. If the player has not won, that is, if the immediate loading is selected, it is determined in step S10504 whether the current additional opportunity is watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10505 to execute a process of adding 1 to the watermelon immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The watermelon immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the watermelon is triggered in the specialization zone this time and the prompt loading is selected.

  If it is determined in step S10504 that it is not a watermelon trigger, the process proceeds to step S10506. In step S10506, it is determined whether the current additional opportunity is cherry. If it is a cherry, the process advances to step S10507 to execute processing for adding 1 to the cherry immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The immediate loading counter for cherries is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the superimposition occurs in the specialization zone this time due to the cherry opportunity and the immediate loading is selected.

  After the process of step S10505 or step S10507 is performed, or if the negative determination is made in step S10506, the additional effect is performed so that the additional effect (immediate effect during zone) can be generated in the present game in step S10508. Set In this case, the additional effect generation timing in this case is at the time of stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this embodiment, but other timings such as at the time of the first reel stop ON or at the time of the second reel stop OFF In the zone, an immediate effect may be generated.

  Thereafter, at step S10509, the special game zone TUG is the number of added games this time in the special zone at the instant game production timing in the above zone (or at a timing slightly later than the instant production time in the zone). After the update effect is set so that the display is updated to the display in which is added, the special zone additional processing is ended.

  As already described, the data for the additional effect in step S10508 or step S10509 is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. The CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area at the generation timing of the additional effect (in-zone immediate effect) and causes the additional effect to be performed. The same is true for the following additional effects.

  If it is determined in step S10503 that a post-lottery lottery has been won in the zone, that is, if post-loading is selected as the current add-on, the process proceeds to step S10510. In step S10510, it is determined whether the current additional opportunity is watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10511 to execute a process of adding 1 to the watermelon post-loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The watermelon post-loading counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the addition occurs in the current specialization zone due to the watermelon trigger and the post-loading is selected.

  In the subsequent step S10512, processing for storing the current number of games to be added is executed in the watermelon additional area provided in the RAM 106. In the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided as the after-slide individual area for watermelon, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set so as to be able to store the number of games of 0 to 999, and it is possible to read out the number of games added on the basis of a watermelon trigger. For example, when 10 games are stored in the first area and 50 games are stored in the second area, the addition occurs as a watermelon trigger in the specialization zone, and the first addition is selected among those for which the addition is selected. The number of top games added is about 10, and it can be grasped after the fact that the number of top games added next is about 50. In step S10512, processing is performed to store the number of games to be added as the current watermelon trigger in the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the watermelon additional substrate individual area.

  After that, at step S10513, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the first add-on character BUP1 is displayed when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped as an add-on character for watermelon. Finish the special zone additional processing. Preferably, the display timing of the first afterboard character BUP1 is the same as or slightly later than the generation timing of the immediate effect in the zone.

  If it is determined in step S10510 that it is not a watermelon trigger, the process proceeds to step S10514. In step S10514, it is determined whether the current additional opportunity is cherry. If it is a cherry, the process advances to step S10515 to execute processing for adding 1 to the cherry add-on counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The cherry post-loading counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the super-charge occurs in the specialization zone this time due to the cherry trigger and the post-loading is selected.

  In the subsequent step S10516, processing for storing the current number of games to be added is executed in the cherry afterload individual area provided in the RAM 106. The cherry post-loading separate area corresponds to the watermelon post-loading separate area. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided also for the after-loading individual area for cherries, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set so as to be able to store the number of games of 0 to 999, and it is possible to read out the number of games added on the basis of the cherry opportunity after the fact. In step S10516, processing is performed to store the number of games to be added as a cherry trigger in the area having the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the cherry subsequent addition individual area.

  Thereafter, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the second add-on character BUP2 is displayed when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped as an add-on character for cherry in step S10517. Finish the special zone additional processing. In addition, it is preferable that the display timing of the second add-on character BUP2 is also the same as or slightly later than the generation timing of the prompt effect in the zone. If a negative determination is made in step S10514, the special zone additional processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the specialization zone, the immediate loading is selected regardless of the setting value for the additional timing other than watermelon and cherry (FIG. 188), so the determination in step S10514 is negative. There is nothing to do. That is, it can be said that the determination process of step S10514 is provided for extension in the case of generating an afterload even at other overtaking timings.

  In step S10513 or step S10515, when there is already displayed first back riding character BUP1 or second back riding character BUP2, the displayed first back riding character BUP1 or second back riding character BUP2 is displayed. The arrangement may be such that the effect data is set so that the present post-loading characters are displayed as arranged. By unifying the arrangement rule (for example, by arranging in order of left in the upper row → right in the upper row → left in the lower row → right in the lower row), the post-loading effect at the end of the specialization zone described later In the case where it is determined, it is possible to clearly understand the number of additional winnings corresponding to the second winning. Although the first trailing character BUP1 and the second trailing character BUP2 are displayed in separate areas (in FIG. 185, the first trailing character BUP1 is at the upper left of the screen, and the second trailing character BUP2 is displayed. In the upper right corner of the screen), and the arrangement rules may be unified. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp, in the game characteristics of the specialization zone where the after-loading occurs with the watermelon and the cherry, when the after-loading corresponds to the over winning.

  In addition, when the total of the number of displayed post-loading characters and the current post-loading characters reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), the current post-loading characters and the displayed post-loading characters are combined. The integrated display character may be displayed. For example, in a situation where four first afterpass characters BUP1 are displayed, when a display opportunity for the first afterpass character BUP1 is newly generated, a total of five aftertime takeovers as a watermelon opportunity are occurring. The first integrated display character (for example, a treasure box of different color or shape) is displayed to indicate the situation. In this way, when displaying characters corresponding to a plurality of addition triggers using a limited display area, the upper limit (limiter) of the addition trigger by having no or few display areas that can be displayed. Can give the impression of being there.

  Next, setting processing of specialization zone end effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special zone end effect setting process is a process performed based on the reception of the special zone end command from the main control device 101 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) (step S2316). .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the specialization zone, an afterload effect is performed, and a ratio notification of an immediate load / afterload ratio is performed. Specifically, first, in step S10601, processing for grasping the watermelon immediate loading counter and the cherry immediate loading counter is performed. In the subsequent step S10602, processing for grasping the watermelon post-loading counter and the cherry post-loading counter is performed. Then, in step S10603, the immediate addition / post-loading ratio of watermelon triggered by watermelon, and the instantaneous addition / post-loading ratio of overlay triggered by cherry are respectively based on the grasped result of step S10601 and step S10602 Execute processing to calculate. Then, in step S10604, the calculated result is temporarily stored in a register or the like.

  Thereafter, in steps S10605 to S10620, a process for generating a post effect performed by being triggered by watermelon and cherry is executed. That is, in step S10605, it is determined whether the watermelon post-loading counter is greater than 0, that is, whether it is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process advances to step S10606 to execute processing for grasping the number of games to be added from the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the watermelon afterloading individual area. Then, in step S10607, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled such that the pre-effect in the after-sale effect for watermelon is performed. In this case, the first post-to-back character BUP1 displayed first among the first back-to-back characters BUP1 is selected, and the first back-to-back character BUP1 is moved to the approximate center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect for urging the operation of the effect switch 66 is generated together.

  After the process of step S10607 is performed, it is determined in step S10608 whether or not the operation of the effect switch 66 has been performed, and the process waits until the operation of the effect switch 66 is performed. The configuration may be such that the positive determination is made in step S10608 regardless of the presence or absence of the operation when the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds).

  After making an affirmative determination in step S10608, in step S10609, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the additional effect is performed. In this case, the character of the treasure box as the first add-on character BUP1 disposed substantially at the center of the screen is released, and a display effect is performed as if the number of additional games jumps out as a treasure of contents (FIG. 185 (b) ).

  In the subsequent step S10610, display of the first additional game number BUG1 is controlled so as to be updated by adding the additional game number of the additional effect performed in step S10609 as the watermelon additional game number display. In step S10611, the display control is performed so that the display of the number TUG of added games in the specialization zone is updated by adding the number of added games performed in step S10609. Then, in step S10612, the watermelon after-loading counter is decremented by one, and the process returns to step S10605.

  When the watermelon after-loading counter becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10605, and the process proceeds to step S10613. The processing of step S10613 to step S10620 is processing for performing post-loading based on cherry, and is substantially the same as the processing of step S10605 to step S10612.

  That is, in step S10613, it is determined whether the cherry afterload counter is greater than 0, that is, whether it is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S10614, and processing for grasping the number of games to be added is executed from the area having the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the cherry afterloading individual area. Then, in step S10615, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled such that the pre-effect for the after-loading effect for cherry is performed. In this case, the second post-to-back character BUP2 displayed first among the second back-to-back characters BUP2 is selected, and the second back-to-back character BUP2 is moved to the approximate center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect for urging the operation of the effect switch 66 is generated together.

  After the process of step S10615 is executed, it is determined in step S10616 whether or not the operation of the effect switch 66 has been performed, and the process waits until the operation of the effect switch 66 is performed. It is also the same as step S10608 that the configuration may be such that an affirmative determination is made in step S10616 regardless of the presence or absence of an operation based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

  After making an affirmative determination in step S10616, in step S10617, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the additional effect is performed. In this case, the character of the treasure box as the second add-on character BUP2 disposed substantially at the center of the screen is released, and a display effect is performed as if the number of added games jumps out as a treasure of contents (FIG. 186 (a) ).

  In the subsequent step S10618, the second additional game number BUG2 is displayed and updated so as to be updated by adding the additional game number for the additional effect performed in step S10617 as the cherry additional game number display. In step S10619, the display control is performed so that the display of the number TUG of added games in the specialization zone is updated by adding the number of added games played in step S10617. Then, in step S10620, after adding 1 to the after-loading counter for cherry, the process returns to step S10613.

  When the cherry afterloading counter becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10613, and the process proceeds to step S10621. In step S10621, based on the information stored in step S10604, a first ratio display HP1 of immediate loading / latching based on watermelon winning and a second ratio display HP2 of immediate loading / latching based on cherry winning, Control is performed so as to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 186 (b)).

  Thereafter, in step S10622, initialization processing of various counters for specialization zones, such as each immediate loading counter and each additional loading counter, is performed, and then the setting processing of specialization zone termination effect is ended.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The execution timing of the superimposition notification is configured to be different depending on the set value. More specifically, the content notification of the result regarding the additional drawing, which is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability and the number of added games at the time of winning by the set value, is performed at different timings depending on the set value. By doing this, it is possible to cause a difference due to the set value, particularly for the game in the attack mode in which a difference in the playability due to the set value hardly occurs.

  As the effect that the execution timing of the superimposition notification is different, there are provided an immediate effect to perform an effect on the game with an additional opportunity, and an additional effect to perform an additional effect in a game later than the game with an additional event. In addition, in any of the effects, the notification that the additional winning is made is configured to be executed in the game where the additional opportunity has occurred. More specifically, even in the case of performing an afterload effect, the first afterload character BUP1 and the second afterload character BUP2 are displayed in the game. As a result, when the after game effect is selected, the player can be made to grasp that the over event effect is generated before the over game effect in the after event effect is generated, and the player who grasped it can It is possible to play the game while waiting for the extra production to be performed in the extra ride production. Therefore, it becomes possible to extend the period which can enjoy one additional production more.

  As described above, even when the after-sale effect is selected, the notification of winning the additional lottery is performed in advance, and the higher the setting value, the easier the immediate effect is selected. did. As described above, by notifying in advance that the addition lottery has been won even if the after-sale effect is selected, the addition effect is given in a state that the player is well enjoyed by the notification. Even if it is predicted and understood that the setting is low by the additional effect in the after-sale effect, it is possible to compensate the player's discouragement degree by having predicted / understood (the setting is low). It becomes possible.

  The selection ratio of immediate loading / afterloading based on cherry timing and the selection ratio of quick loading / afterloading based on watermelon timing are made different. By doing this, in order to predict and grasp the set value based on the selection ratio, not only the setting of the generation rate on effect but also the result of the lottery process (whether it is cherry or watermelon) is It will be reflected. Therefore, as a player who wants to predict and grasp the set value, it is desired to play the game while wishing that the lottery result in each game has a desired selection ratio (in the above embodiment, a cherry with a setting difference in the selection ratio). It will be possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game.

  It is configured that the setting difference becomes larger in the selection ratio of immediate loading / afterloading based on the cherry opportunity having a low winning probability than the selection ratio of immediate loading / afterloading based on a watermelon winning with a high probability of winning. By doing this, it is possible to secure the superiority of winning a cherry by a factor other than the factor directly linked to the player's profit such as the number of medals paid out based on a cherry winning or the additional performance based on a cherry winning. it can. Therefore, the privilege of each lottery result can be set in the range which does not affect a ball withdrawal rate.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the additional effect timing table for the specialization zone is made different depending on the transition trigger to the specialization zone. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing a zone additional lottery process. As already described, the zone-in-zone addition lottery process is a process performed in step S10502 in the special zone addition process (FIG. 187).

  In step S1071, it is determined whether the transition trigger of the specialization zone this time is cherry (one of strong cherry and weak cherry). If the transition opportunity is not cherry, in step S10702, processing is executed to acquire a normal use notification timing table from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10701 that the transition trigger to the specialization zone this time is cherry, in step S10703, processing is executed to acquire the special use notification timing table from the various table storage areas 182a. . After obtaining one of the notification timing tables, after the post-loading lottery is executed based on the notification timing table in step S10704, the post-loading lottery process in the present zone is ended.

  The difference between the normal addition notification timing table and the special addition notification timing table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal-use addition notification timing table is as shown in FIG. 188, and in FIG. 191, in the normal-use addition notification timing table, a parameter (instant addition / add-on selection) at the time of occurrence of addition triggered by watermelon win Rate is shown as a reference value.

  That is, in the special addition notification timing table, the parameter (immediate addition / additional selection ratio) at the time of occurrence of addition triggered by watermelon winning is different from that of the above-mentioned normal addition notification timing table. More specifically, in setting 1 for the special-purpose additional notification timing table, the immediate loading is selected at 10% and the additional loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 30% and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the postloading is selected at 20%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 90% and the additional loading is selected at 10%. That is, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for post-loading, and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading, which is the same as the parameter when winning watermelon in the normal addition notification timing table.

  On the other hand, in the case of the special addition notification timing table, the difference between the setting value of the ratio between the immediate loading and the addition is larger than that of the normal addition notification timing table. That is, for example, in predicting the setting value when immediate loading is selected, the specialization zone transferred by cherry-child trigger is more as a prediction material than the specialization zone transferred by other special-purpose trigger. The degree of contribution is high. In other words, predicting the setting value from the immediate loading / afterloading ratio in the specialization zone transitioned by the cherry opportunity predicts the setting value from the instantaneous loading / afterloading ratio in the specializing zone transitioning by the other specific role. The prediction accuracy is higher than that, and it is possible to predict the setting value more easily. That is, it can be said that the specialization zone, which is transitioned by the cherry opportunity, is a zone where prediction of the set value is easier.

  Moreover, in the special-use superimposition notification timing table in the present modification, the instant loading / postloading ratio based on watermelon and the quick loading / postloading ratio based on cherry are common to all set values. By doing this, it is possible to handle each additional trigger as common data when predicting or grasping the setting value based on these ratios, and it is possible to increase the number of parameters.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to set a specialization zone in which the game characteristics for predicting and grasping the setting value are completely different without changing the additional performance in the specialization zone. As a result, it is possible to create a new game feature that is desired for a specialized zone that is easy to predict set values, which deviates from the conventional game feature in which a specialized zone having only a large number of additional games is desired.

  In particular, by setting the specialization zone, which is transitioned by cherry with a low probability of winning, to the specializing zone where it is easy to predict and grasp the set value, the merit of having won the result of having a low probability of winning It becomes possible to add in the range which does not have influence.

  Moreover, in the specialization zone transitioning with cherry opportunity and the specialization zone transitioning with other special role, only the additional notification timing table used in the selection of immediate loading / afterloading is different, and the small winning combination is won It is possible to realize the above-mentioned excellent playability with a very simple configuration which does not require any change in the probability or the additional winning probability.

<Modification 2>
In the present modification, when the zone immediate rendering effect is selected, the additional rendering timing table is changed. FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing a post-zone in-zone post-lottery process in the present modification.

  In step S10801, the table counter ATK is acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The table counter ATK is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the additional effect timing table to be acquired in the current additional insertion lottery. That is, in step S10802, processing is performed to acquire, from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, an additional notification timing table according to the value of the table counter ATK acquired in step S10801.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of additional timing tables are provided as the additional notification timing table, as shown in FIG. 193, and four additional notification timing tables, ie, first additional notification timing table to fourth additional notification timing table, are provided. It is provided. In this modification, there is no difference between cherries, watermelons, and other specific roles in the selection rates for immediate loading and post loading, and the same selection rates for both specific roles are immediate loading and post loading. And the choice is made. Therefore, even for the character displayed when the afterload effect is selected in the zone, even in the case where the afterload is associated with the combination such as the first afterload character BUP1 and the second afterload character BUP2, Instead, a common character is displayed. Further, in this modification, ratio notification at the end of the specialization zone is not performed.

  The first additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is one. In this table, regardless of the set value, the selection rates for immediate loading and post loading are both set as 50%.

  The second additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is two. In this table, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 40% and the postloading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 45% and the additional loading is selected at 55%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 55% and the postloading is selected at 45%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the postloading is selected at 40%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 65% and the postloading is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for post-loading, and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading.

  The third additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is three. In this table, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 30%, and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 40% and postloading is selected at 60%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the additional loading is selected at 40%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the additional loading is selected at 20%. That is, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for post-loading, and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading, which is common to the second additional notification timing table, but the setting value for the ratio between immediate loading and post-loading Of the third additional notification timing table is larger than the second additional notification timing table.

  The fourth addition notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 4 or more. In this table, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 10% and the additional loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 30% and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 90% and the postloading is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and postloading is selected at 0% (not selected). That is, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for post-loading, and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading, which is common to the second additional notification timing table and the third additional notification timing table The difference of the setting value of the ratio with the loading is larger in the fourth addition notification timing table than in the second addition notification timing table and the third addition notification timing table.

  Returning to the explanation of the in-zone post-loading lottery process, after the one additional notification timing table is acquired from the respective above-mentioned additional notification timing tables in step S10802, the post-loading lottery process is executed in step S10803. Then, in step S10804, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S10803 is immediate loading. In the case of immediate loading, in step S10805, a process of adding one to the table counter ATK is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10804 that it is not the immediate loading but the post-loading, in step S10806, a process of setting the table counter ATK to 1 which is an initial value is executed.

  That is, in the present modification, the table counter ATK is incremented by one when the immediate loading is selected in the post loading lottery, and the table counter ATK returns to the initial value of 1 when the post loading is selected. As described above, the value of the table counter ATK is associated with the type of the additional notification timing table used in the post-loading lottery, and the notification timing table acquired in the situation where the value of the table counter ATK is large is more immediate It is set so that the difference by the setting value of the loading / post loading ratio becomes large.

  More specifically, in any notification timing table (except for the first additional notification timing table), the immediate setting is more likely to be selected as the high setting is selected, and the immediate setting is more difficult to be selected as the low setting is selected. It is done. Then, as the notification timing table acquired in a situation where the value of the table counter ATK is larger, the difference between the ease of selection of immediate loading in high setting and the ease of selection of immediate loading in low setting becomes larger. For example, in the second additional notification timing table acquired in the situation where the table counter ATK is 2, in setting 6, the immediate loading is selected with a probability of 65%, and in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected with a probability of 40%. , The difference is about 1.6 times the probability. On the other hand, in the fourth additional notification timing table acquired in the situation where the table counter ATK is 4, in the setting 6, the immediate loading is selected with a probability of 100%, and in the setting 1, it is selected with the probability of 10%. Is 10 times the probability. Therefore, as the value of the table counter ATK increases, that is, as the immediate loading is continuously selected, the set value can be easily estimated from the selection ratio of the immediate loading and the post loading.

  Moreover, since the configuration is switched to the notification timing table in which the immediate setting is easy to be selected on the high setting side as the immediate setting is continuously selected, the fact that the immediate setting is continuously selected is the high setting. It can be a material to support (predict) things. For example, as shown in FIG. 193, when switching between the first additional notification timing table to the fourth additional notification timing table is used, the probability that immediate transfer is selected four consecutive times is 0.6% in setting 1. While setting 2 is 2.7%, setting 3 is 6.2%, setting 4 is 11.6%, setting 5 is 18.9%, setting 6 is 26%, setting 1 and setting 2 The difference from 6 is about 43 times the probability difference. Then, as described above, the configuration is switched to the superimposition notification timing table in which the immediate setting is more easily selected as the high setting is set. Therefore, in predicting the setting value by the continuity of such immediate setting, setting of continuous probability The difference spreads at an acceleration.

  That is, for example, in the case of a configuration using only the second additional notification timing table (a configuration in which switching to the third and fourth additional notification timing tables is not generated), the probability that immediate loading is selected four consecutive times is set 1 Is about 2.7% in setting 6 and about 17.9% in setting 6, and the difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is about 7 times the probability, and the notification timing table is switched as in this modification. Less than the difference in configuration. On the other hand, if it is intended to generate a setting difference without switching the notification timing table, it is necessary to increase the difference between the immediate loading / adding ratio according to the setting value, as in the fourth addition reporting timing table. It is possible to judge to some extent whether it is high setting or low setting by adding it.

  Therefore, as in the above configuration, by using switching of the notification timing table, it is possible to gradually narrow down the set value, and to improve the interest of the game for predicting the set value.

  After the processing of step S10805 or step S10806 is performed in the zone post-loading lottery process (FIG. 192 (a)), the display background changing process is performed in step S10807, and then the zone post-loading lottery process is ended. Do. In the display background change process, the display background color in the specialization zone of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed in association with the value of the table counter ATK. For example, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), when the table counter ATK is 1, the background color is displayed in white, and when the table counter ATK is 2, the background color is displayed in yellow. When the table counter ATK is 3, the background color is displayed in green. When the table counter ATK is 4 or more, the background color is displayed in red. By doing this, the player can easily grasp the current value of the table counter ATK, that is, the number of times that the immediate loading has been selected continuously, and piles the immediate loading to help predict the setting value. It becomes possible to enliven the game by the change of presentation (change of background color).

<Modification 3>
In the present modification, switching of the additional notification timing table is performed based on the number of games in the advantageous section in which the specialization zone is executed. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the after-lot lottery process in a zone in the present modification.

  In step S10901, processing is performed to grasp the current number of advantageous section games. As described above, the main control apparatus 101 manages the number AG of advantageous section games, but in the present modification, the display control apparatus 81 is configured to have a similar counter, or the main control apparatus 101. By outputting a command from the above, etc., the display control device 81 is also configured to be able to grasp the current number of digested games in the advantageous section.

  In step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the current number of advantageous section games is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. After the post-loading lottery is executed in step S10903, the post-loading lottery process in this zone is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the superimposition notification timing table in the present modification is such that the quick-loading / post-loading ratio differs depending on the number of digested games in the advantageous segment (the number of advantageous segment games AG) and the set value. It is set. Specifically, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, regardless of the set value, both immediate loading and additional loading are selected with a probability of 50%. When the number of digested games reaches 100 to 499, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 40% and the additional loading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 45% and the additional loading is selected at 55%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 55% and the postloading is selected at 45%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the postloading is selected at 40%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 65% and the postloading is selected at 35%. That is, in the case where the number of digested games is 100 to 499, as the setting value becomes higher, immediate loading becomes easier to select.

  When the number of digested games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 30%, and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 40% and postloading is selected at 60%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the additional loading is selected at 40%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the additional loading is selected at 20%. In addition, when the number of digested games reaches 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 10%, and the additional loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 30% and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 90% and the postloading is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and postloading is selected at 0% (not selected). Then, when the number of digested games reaches 1400 to 1500, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 0% (not selected), and the additional loading is selected at 100%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 10% and the additional loading is selected at 90%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 80%, and the second loading is selected at 20%. In setting 5 and setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 100%, and the second loading is selected (not selected).

  That is, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section increases, the quick setting is more likely to be selected as the setting value becomes higher, and the difference between the setting values in the selection rate of the quick setting and the after setting increases. In this way, it is possible to more easily predict the set value at the time of addition in the specialization zone as the advantageous interval is digested, and it is obtained as a benefit for the longer duration of the advantageous interval It becomes possible to grant a benefit other than the benefit such as the number of medals.

  As described above, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly ended. Therefore, when the number of digested games approaches 1500, there is a possibility that the transition to the specialized zone can not sufficiently obtain the benefit (addition). In that respect, even if the number of digested games is near the upper limit and the expectation for the addition in the specialization zone may decrease by adopting the configuration as described above, there is a merit to transition to the specialization zone. Can be generated.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the parameters of the additional notification timing table in the third modification are different. FIG. 195 (b) shows an additional notification timing table in the present modification.

  In the additional notification timing table in the present modification, the relationship between the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the setting value is reverse to that in the third modification. More specifically, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 100%, and the second loading is selected (not selected). In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the additional loading is selected at 20%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 50%, and the additional loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 10% and the postloading is selected at 90%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 0% (not selected), and the postloading is selected at 100%. That is, in the early stage of the advantageous section, the lower setting is more likely to be selected immediately, and the higher setting is more likely to be selected later.

  When the number of digested games reaches 100 to 499, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 100%, and the additional loading is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 90% and the postloading is selected at 10%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 50%, and the additional loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 30%, and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 10%, and postloading is selected at 90%. That is, comparing the case where the number of digested games is 1 to 99 and the case of 100 to 499, it is easy to select the immediate loading as the setting value becomes higher, although it is common to the third modification example above In the situation where the number of games is small, the difference between the selection rate for immediate loading and the additional loading by the set value is overwhelmingly large. That is, it is easy to predict and grasp the set value in the early stage of the advantageous section.

  When the number of digested games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the additional loading is selected at 20%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the postloading is selected at 40%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 50%, and the additional loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 40% and the postloading is selected at 60%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 30% and the postloading is selected at 70%. In addition, when the number of digested games is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 65%, and the additional loading is selected at 35%. In setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the additional loading is selected at 40%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 55% and the postloading is selected at 45%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 50%, and the additional loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 45% and the postloading is selected at 55%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 40% and the postloading is selected at 60%. Then, when the number of digested games reaches 1400 to 1500, both immediate loading and additional loading are selected with a probability of 50% regardless of the setting value.

  That is, as the advantageous section progresses, the setting difference of the instantaneous loading / afterloading selectivity decreases. By doing this, it is possible to increase the frequency of predicting and grasping the set value. That is, for example, in the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the attack mode is 50 games, and it is possible to predict and grasp at least the set value if an additional opportunity occurs among the 50 games. By doing this, it becomes easy to play a game in which the prediction and grasp of the set value are performed, and it is possible to fully enjoy the game.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, as a parameter of the additional notification timing table in the third modification or the fourth modification, a display remaining number counter HG is used instead of the number of digested games in the advantageous section. As already described, the display remaining number counter HG indicates the number of remaining games in the attack mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  In the above-described step S10901 in the present modification, processing for grasping the display remaining number counter HG is performed instead of grasping the number of advantageous zone games. Then, in step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG is acquired, and in step S10903, a post-loading lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (c), the superimposition notification timing table in the present modification is set so that the immediate loading / after loading ratio differs depending on the display remaining number counter HG and the set value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 80%, and the additional loading is selected at 20%. In setting 3 and setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 85%, and the additional loading is selected at 15%. In setting 5 and setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 90%, and the second loading is selected at 10%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 to 299, in setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 30% and the additional loading is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 40% and postloading is selected at 60%. In setting 3, the immediate loading is selected at 50% and the postloading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 60% and the additional loading is selected at 40%. In setting 5, the immediate loading is selected at 70% and the postloading is selected at 30%. In setting 6, the immediate loading is selected at 80% and the additional loading is selected at 20%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate loading is selected at 20%, and the additional loading is selected at 80%. In setting 3 and setting 4, the immediate loading is selected at 15%, and the second loading is selected at 85%. In settings 5 and 6, the immediate loading is selected at 10%, and the second loading is selected at 90%.

  That is, in the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, and in the case of 300 or more, the setting and setting of setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, setting 5 and setting 6 are common doing. Therefore, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 or 300 or more, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4 and setting 5 are used to narrow down the setting values from the immediate setting / after setting ratio. And setting 6, can not be distinguished. On the other hand, in the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299, the immediate loading / after loading ratio is set to be different for any of the settings 1 to 6. Therefore, from the viewpoint of narrowing down the setting value, the case of 200 to 299 is more preferable than the case of the display remaining number counter HG of 300 or more. That is, it is informed that the number of remaining games in the attack mode is large, and the notification of the number of remaining games in the attack mode is notified with a smaller number of games than the situation where it is expected to obtain a large number of medals. A situation arises in which there is a better situation, and it becomes possible to create new playability that has left the conventional game of aiming to obtain medals.

  Further, comparing the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and the case where it is 300 or more, the immediate loading / after loading ratio is reversed at any setting value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, immediate setting is easier to be selected than after setting for any setting value, and when the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, either of them Post-loading is easier to select than immediate loading at the set value. That is, in a situation where notification is made that there is a situation where the number of remaining games in the attack mode is small, it is easy to select an immediate ride in which the number of remaining games is increased immediately In a situation where there is a notification that there is a certain event, it is easy to select an after game in which the number of remaining games is increased after the fact. In this way, the former provides a sense of security by increasing the number of remaining games while the latter provides a sense of superiority by saving the right to increase the number of remaining games. This becomes possible, and it is possible to make an effect according to the situation and the player's emotion.

<Modification 6>
The configuration related to the quick load / after load ratio is not limited only to the specialization zone in the attack mode, and may be applied to other than the specialization zone. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing setting processing of an additional effect in the present modification.

  In step S11001, it is determined whether it is a specialization zone, and if it is a specialization zone, special-purpose zone addition processing is executed in step S11026. Such additional processing is as described above. If it is determined in step S11001 that the game is not a specialization zone, the number of games to be added this time is grasped in step S11002, and an add-on lottery is performed in step S11003. In the post-loading lottery, although the superimposition notification timing table uses a table in which the quick-loading / post-loading ratio differs between watermelon and cherry as shown in FIG. 188 in this modification, another table may be used. . In step S11004, it is determined whether or not an after-sales lottery has been won, and if it is determined that an immediate post has been selected because it has not been won, the process proceeds to step S11005.

  In step S11005, it is determined whether the current addition is a watermelon trigger. If it is the watermelon trigger, in step S11006, processing is performed to add one to the total watermelon immediate-on counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The total watermelon immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the immediate loading effect has been generated by the watermelon trigger in the current attack mode. If it is determined in step S11005 that the watermelon trigger is not present, it is determined in step S11007 whether it is a cherry trigger. If it is a cherry trigger, in step S11008, a process is performed to add one to the total cherry immediate loading counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The total cherry immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the immediate loading effect has been generated by the cherry opportunity in the current attack mode. The process of steps S1105 to S11008 corresponds to the process of steps S10504 to S10507.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S11006 and S11008, or when the determination in step S11007 is negative, the process proceeds to step S11009. The processes of steps S11009 to S11015 are the same as the processes of steps S10405 to S10411.

  If it is determined in step S11004 that the post-assignment has been won, the process proceeds to step S11016. In step S11016, processing is performed to set an afterloading flag in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The post-loading flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that there is at least one additional serving as a post-loading effect. After the process of step S11016 is performed, a process for post-addition effect is performed in steps S11017 to S11024. The process of step S11017 to step S11024 corresponds to the process of step S10510 to step S10517.

  That is, in step S11017, it is determined whether the current addition is a watermelon trigger. If it is the watermelon trigger, in step S11018, processing is performed to add one to the watermelon post-loading counter. In the subsequent step S11019, processing is performed to store the number of the current added game in the watermelon additional area. Then, in step S11020, the display setting of the first add-on character BUP1 is performed as the add-on character for watermelon.

  If it is determined in step S11017 that the watermelon trigger is not present, it is determined in step S11021 whether it is a cherry trigger or not. If it is a cherry trigger, in step S11022, processing is performed to add 1 to the cherry add-on counter. In the subsequent step S11023, processing is performed to store the current number of added games in the cherry add-on individual area. Then, in step S11024, display setting of the second add-on character BUP2 is performed as the add-on character for cherry.

  After the process in any one of steps S11020 and S11024 is performed, or when the determination in step S11021 is negative, the process proceeds to step S11025. In step S11025, after the process of subtracting the current number of added games from the added board counter BG is executed, the setting process of the additional effect is ended. The process of step S11023 corresponds to the process of step S8607.

  Although the detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, as described above, when the number of remaining games on the display of the attack mode becomes a predetermined game by setting the additional flag, the additional effect is generated. In this case, as in the processing of step S10605 to step S10620 in FIG. 189, when there is a plurality of pieces of information to be added, the information is stored in each individual area based on, for example, the operation of the rendering switch 66. While performing the information acquisition and deletion processing, an additional effect is generated for each additional opportunity.

  In this case, when the post-loading effect is executed, processing is performed to add the value of the watermelon post-loading counter to the total watermelon post-loading counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and the value of the cherry post-loading counter Is added to the total cherry add-on counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and then the processing corresponding to the above-mentioned steps S10605 to S10620 in the post-addition effect is performed. In this case, as described above, the watermelon afterload counter and cherry afterload counter are decremented by 1 each time the additional effect is generated, while the values of the total watermelon afterload counter and the total cherry afterload counter are It does not change even if it performs an additional production. By doing this, it is possible to calculate the immediate loading / post loading ratio later, as described below.

  The setting processing of the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the attack mode end game.

  First, in step S11101, a repair is performed to grasp the total number of medals acquired. In the subsequent step S11102, a process of grasping the number of continued games is executed. As described above, the total number of medals acquired and the number of continuing games are to be displayed in the attack mode end effect, and the processing of step S11101 and step S11102 is processing for the display.

  In step S11103, a process is executed to grasp the instant attachment counter for total watermelon and the instant loading counter for total cherry. In the subsequent step S11104, processing is executed to grasp a total watermelon add-on counter and a total cherry add-on counter. As described above, the total watermelon add-on counter and the total cherry add-on counter are counters to which the values of the watermelon add-on counter and the cherry add-on counter are added when performing the add-on effect.

  Then, in step S11105, processing is performed to calculate the quick-loading / adding ratio for total watermelon and the quick-loading / adding ratio for total cherry, and in step S11106, the calculated ratios are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Process to display the Thereafter, in step S11107, processing for ending on the display side at the end of the attack mode, such as initialization processing of various counters, is executed, and then setting processing of the attack mode ending effect is ended.

  An example of the attack mode end effect is shown in FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), display of the number of continued games and display of the number of medals acquired are performed as a notification that the attack mode has ended. Then, for example, as an operation instruction character for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66, together with the character imitating the button, the display of the character of the arrow indicating the operation direction of the button or "PUSH" of pressing the button Display letters. When the effect switch 66 is operated, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the third ratio display HP3 is displayed as a graph corresponding to the instantaneously-on / after-on ratio for total watermelon in the current attack mode, As the 4 ratio display HP4, a graph is displayed corresponding to the instant loading / post loading ratio for total cherries in the current attack mode. In the example of FIG. 198 (b), the third ratio display HP3 and the fourth ratio display HP4 are displayed as a pie chart, but the first ratio display HP1 and the second ratio display HP2 in FIG. 196 (b) are displayed. As such, it may be a stacked bar graph.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to enjoy the gameplay based on the prompt addition / add-on ratio of the additional effect through the entire attack mode as well as the specialization zone. In particular, in view of the fact that the winning probability of cherry is about 1/150 and the winning probability of watermelon is about 1/50, the number of limited games as the specialization zone (5 games in the above embodiments) The chance to win these cherries and watermelons is extremely rare. Then, even if a game of predicting and grasping the set value is performed in the specialization zone with cherry and watermelon timing prepared carefully, the opportunity may not occur easily. On the other hand, if it is configured to increase the winning probability of cherries and watermelons or lengthen the number of continuing games in the specialized zone in an attempt to eliminate it, there is a concern that the payout rate will rise. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting cherry and watermelon in the attack mode as a target of game characteristics based on the quick load / after load ratio, it is possible to preferably prevent such a game property while avoiding a surge in the payout rate. It can be realized.

<Modification 7>
The configuration related to the information on the execution timing of the additional notification such as the immediate loading / after loading ratio is not limited to the configuration displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65. In this modification, a configuration will be described in which the information regarding the execution timing can be read by a portable terminal or the like possessed by the player. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing processing for portable terminal executed by the display control device 81. The mobile terminal process is, for example, a process performed by a process that is periodically activated in the display control device 81. In the present modification, among the processing for mobile terminals, a processing for information related to the above-mentioned immediate loading / after loading ratio in the particularly advantageous section will be described.

  In step S11201, it is determined whether an advantageous section has been started. When the advantageous section is started, in step S11202, measurement of each counter of total watermelon quick-loading counter, total watermelon after-loading counter, total cherry quick-loading counter, and total cherry after-loading counter is started. More specifically, for example, processing is performed to set a flag that makes it possible to determine whether measurement is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step S11201, or after the process of step S11202 is performed, it is determined in step S11203 whether or not the user is logged out. In this modification, user information etc. is input on the management screen of the gaming machine, and information can be output only in the logged-in state, in particular, regarding the information related to the immediate loading / adding ratio. In S11203, while the affirmation determination is made because the logged-in user has logged out, the affirmation determination is not made in the situation where the login is not originally performed, and the negation determination is made. When an affirmative determination is made in step S11203 and the logged-in user logs out, in step S11204, a total watermelon quick-loading counter, a total watermelon quick-loading counter, a total cherry quick-loading counter, a total cherry slow-loading counter Etc., and the initialization process of each counter is executed. That is, each counter is initialized by logging out. On the other hand, when the advantageous section is started, measurement of each counter is started regardless of the presence or absence of login. As a result, while avoiding the event that the counter is not measured due to a forgotten login, it is suppressed that the player's own game data can be read by the succeeding user.

  When a negative judging is carried out at Step S11203, or after processing of Step S11204 is performed, it progresses to Step S11205. In step S11205, it is determined whether a ratio display request operation has been performed. The request operation is, for example, an operation corresponding to the operation instructing character (FIG. 198 (a)) during the attack mode end effect shown in the above-described modified example 6, and the operation of the effect switch 66 or the like can be mentioned. When an affirmative determination is made in step S11205, the process proceeds to step S11206, and it is determined whether or not an advantageous section is in progress. If it is not in the advantageous section, in step S11207, processing is performed to display the quick-loading / adding ratio for total watermelon and the quick-loading / after-loading ratio for total cherry. By the way, in the end game of the advantageous section (game in which the attack mode end effect is executed), it is determined that the advantageous section is not within the advantageous section.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the ratio display is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and as shown in FIG. 200 (a), code display (two-dimensional) readable by a portable terminal etc. Display codes, barcodes, etc. By reading the code display, the player can perform data analysis etc. on his own portable terminal etc. later. Also, this can reduce the possibility of the display content being read by another player, and secure the superiority over having such information.

  When an affirmative determination is made in Step S11206, and it is determined that an advantageous section is in progress, in Step S11208, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display in progress is performed. In the in-limit display, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), the character display of "under restriction" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, but the display of the immediate loading / lapping ratio is not performed. That is, when the request operation of the ratio display is in the advantageous section, the output of the information on the ratio display for the request operation is limited. In this way, by making it possible to infer the set value from the ratio display during the advantageous interval, and by making it possible to recognize it after the advantageous interval ends, it is possible to pay attention to the ratio display so much that it is advantageous Can avoid the event that you can not enjoy

  After the process of step S11207 or step S11208 is performed, another process is performed in step S11209, and the process for portable terminals is ended. Note that the other processing corresponds to processing for managing other information (totally played game, number of big wins, number of winning combinations of children, etc.) that can be read by the mobile terminal. Also, when the negative determination is made in step S11205, the mobile terminal processing ends.

  By doing as described above, the player can easily grasp the execution timing of the superimposition notification after the fact. In particular, although it is easy to keep in memory of the player who desires an advantageous event such as the number of occurrences and contents of advantageous events such as the winning of the additional event and the number of additional games, the notification timing of the advantageous event is advantageous. It is considered that it is easy to delete from the player's memory when a certain event occurs, and it is difficult to remember the notification timing afterward. In that respect, as in the above-described configuration, by making the notification timing readable to the portable terminal, it is possible to greatly contribute to data analysis of the notification timing.

<Modification 8>
In the configuration that displays (outputs) the immediate loading / adding ratio at the end of the attack mode, this display (output) may be performed at part of the end of the attack mode. In this modification, when the attack mode is forcibly terminated by the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, the display (output) of the ratio is performed. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing setting processing of an attack mode end effect in the present modification.

  The setting process of this modification is substantially the same process as the flowchart of FIG. As a difference, after performing the same processing as step S11101 and step S11102 in step S11301 and step S11302, it is determined in step S11303 whether or not it is forced termination. In the case of forced termination, processing for displaying (outputting) a ratio is performed in steps S11304 to S11307 as in steps S11103 to S11106. Thereafter, initialization processing of each counter is executed in step S11308, and the setting processing of the attack mode end effect is ended. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games is 0 before reaching the upper limit instead of forced termination, the processing in step S11308 is performed without executing steps S11304 to S11307, and then the attack mode end effect is set. End the setting process.

  As described above, it is possible to compensate for the forcible termination of the attack mode by outputting the information regarding the immediate load / afterload ratio based on the forcible termination of the attack mode.

Sixth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the player can select the execution timing of the additional effect. FIG. 202 is a diagram for describing a state in which the execution timing of the additional effect is selected in the present embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the additional effect is executed, each is configured to be executed as an effect at the time of all the stops. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection of the execution timing of the additional effect is described as meaning the selection of the game on which the additional effect is to be performed.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to select the execution timing of the additional effect when the additional combination is won as the specific combination opportunity in the game in which the specific combination is elected as the additional opportunity in the attack mode. In the present embodiment, the selection of the execution timing is performed by selecting which of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is rotating first. Then, as the additional effects at different execution timings, they are the immediate effects that the additional effects are generated in the game for which the additional winning has been performed and the games after the games for which the additional winning is shown in the fifth embodiment and the like. In the game where the number of remaining games on the display such as the attack mode etc. becomes the predetermined number (1), the post-precedence effect in which the super-effect is generated, and the precursor mode are implemented over the predetermined number of games from the super winning game After that, an overdraft effect that an overdue effect occurs is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), when the specific combination is won in the attack mode, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, as the notification mode selection effect, a character indication "Select the fate by stopping the reel !!" Thus, it is informed that it is possible to select an aspect of the additional effect at the time of the winning by the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the immediate placing effect is selected when the left reel 32L is stopped first, and the after-loading effect is selected when the middle reel 32M is stopped first, and the right reel 32R is initially It is assumed that the prognostic rendition is selected when the stop operation is performed. Therefore, in the notification mode selection effect, a corresponding character correlating the character imitating the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R with the effect to be selected when the respective stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. And display. Specifically, the first corresponding character TP1 (for example, the character of "immediate") showing the immediate effect is displayed in correspondence with the character of the stop switch 42, and the afterload effect is made corresponding to the character of the stop switch 43. The second corresponding character TP2 (for example, the character "after") is displayed, and the third corresponding character TP3 (for example, the character "fore") indicating the precursory effect corresponding to the character of the stop switch 44 is displayed. . In addition, a chance notification effect (excluded mark) indicating that the game is a specific combination winning is also generated together, and the chance notification effect and each display for selecting the execution timing of the additional effect, Displayed so as not to overlap each other.

  When the player first performs a stop operation on the left reel 32L in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b1), the left reel 32L is stopped based on the stop operation, and then the other reels are also stopped, and then added. An effect occurs.

  When the player first performs a stop operation on the middle reel 32M in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b2), the middle reel 32M is stopped based on the stop operation, and then the other reels are also stopped, and later. A post ride effect corresponding to the selection of the take effect is generated. As an effect for after-loading, in this example, it is shown that a first after-loading character BUP1 indicating that the over-the-back right based on the watermelon trigger has been acquired is displayed. The afterload effect based on the first afterload character BUP1 and the like is as described in the fifth embodiment and the like.

  When the player first performs stop operation on the right reel 32R in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b3), the right reel 32R is stopped based on the stop operation, and then the other reels are also stopped. An indication for the precursor via occurs corresponding to the selection of the via effect. In this example, the word "chance" is displayed substantially at the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and a band display "during a chance" is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 in this example, and the precursor mode is entered. It is shown that it did. Although the additional effect via the precursor mode will be described later, the precursor mode continues over the set number of games, and when the set number of games becomes 0, the additional effect occurs.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for realizing the above-mentioned effect will be described.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing setting processing of additional effect in the present embodiment. As described above, the setting process of the additional effect is a process executed when the display control device 81 starts the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the specific combination winning game.

  In step S12001, a process is performed to determine the number of games added this time. Then, in step S12002, it is determined whether the precursor passing flag is set. The precursor passing flag is a flag that is set when the player selects the precursor passing effect based on the additional opportunity. If the precursor via flag is set in step S12002, an additional opportunity occurs in a game before the game, a precursor via effect is selected, and the precursor mode based on this selection is in effect, that is, , It means that it is a situation where the additional production has not occurred yet. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12002, then in step S12003, the number of added games in the precursor mode, ie, the number of added games for which the precursor effect has not been generated is selected, and the number of added games determined Is added to the number of games added this time. Then, in step S12004, processing for clearing the precursor passage flag is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S12002, or after the process of step S12004 is executed, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is selected so that a notification mode selection effect (FIG. 202 (a)) is performed in step S12005. Control. Then, after the process of setting the notification mode selection flag is executed in step S12006, the setting process of the additional effect is ended. The notification mode selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the stop operation of the first reel in the current game is the stop operation targeted for the notification mode selection effect.

  Next, in the game in which the notification mode selection effect is executed, processing (first stop ON effect presentation processing) when the stop operation of the first reel is performed will be described with reference to FIG. This process is a process carried out in step S2204 in each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 49). More specifically, the process is performed in step S2204 when it is determined in step S2203 that the first stop ON operation is set as the target reel.

  In step S12101, it is determined whether the notification mode selection flag is set. If it is not set, in step S12102, the other first stop-on effect that has been set is executed, and then the first stop-on effect setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S12101 that the notification mode selection flag is set, in step S12103, processing for clearing the notification mode selection flag is executed. Then, in step S12104, whether the immediate effect was selected in the notification mode selection effect of this time, that is, whether the current first stop ON operation was the stop ON operation of the left reel 32L (left stop switch 42) or not Determine When an affirmative determination is made in step S12104, the processing for setting the immediate loading selection flag is performed in step S12105, and then the processing for setting the effect when the first stop is on is ended. The immediate loading selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the immediate loading effect has been selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S12104, then in step S12106, whether the post-addition effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is the middle reel 32M (middle stop switch 43) It is determined whether the stop ON operation has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12106, a process of setting an add-on selection flag is performed in step S12107, and then the processing for setting the effect when the first stop is on is ended. The post-loading selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the post-loading effect has been selected.

  If the negative determination is made in step S12106, that the precursor via effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is the stop ON of the right reel 32R (right stop switch 44). It means that it was an operation. In this case, after the process of setting the precursor selection flag is executed in step S12108, the present first stop ON effect setting process is ended. The precursor selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the precursor via effect has been selected.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a process for adding a notification effect for all stoppages in the present embodiment. The all stop addition notification effect process is a process performed in steps S2309 and S2319 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 51). Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, any of the additional effects is performed as the all stop effect, and is not performed during the first stop ON operation or the second stop OFF operation.

  In step S12201, it is determined whether the immediate loading selection flag is set. If the immediate loading selection flag is set, processing for clearing the immediate loading selection flag is executed in step S12202. Thereafter, in step S12203, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute an additional effect triggered by the current game (see FIG. 202 (b1)).

  If a negative determination is made in step S12201, it is determined in step S12204 whether an add-on selection flag is set. If the add-on selection flag is set, processing to clear the add-on selection flag is executed in step S12205. After that, in step S12206, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the effect for post-loading (see FIG. 202 (b2)). Then, in step S12207, processing for storing the number of added games this time in the individual area is executed, and in step S12208, processing for setting the post-loading flag is executed. The processes of step S12207 and step S12208 correspond to the processes of step S11016, step S11019, step S11023, and the like, and are storage processes for causing the extra effect to be generated later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S12204, it is determined in step S12209 whether a precursor selection flag is set. If the precursor selection flag is set, processing for clearing the precursor selection flag is executed in step S12210. Thereafter, in step S12211, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the effect for passing on a sign (see FIG. 202 (b3)). Then, in step S12212, processing for storing the current number of added games in the individual area is performed, and in step S12213, lottery processing for the number of leading games is performed. Then, in step S12214, a process of inputting the number of prognostic games drawn in step S12213 to the continuous effect counter is executed, and in step S12215, a process of setting a continuous effect flag and a precursor passing flag is performed. The process of setting the continuous effect flag in step S12213, step S12214 and step S12215 corresponds to the process of step S2506, step S2507 and step S2509, and the process in the case where the display control device 81 sets the precursor mode and It is a process in the case of performing a continuous rendition based on it. Also, in the case where setting processing of additional effects is performed in the subsequent games (games until the number of precursor games set in step S12212 is consumed) by setting the precursor passage flag in step S12216, An affirmative determination will be made in step S12002.

  After executing any of the processes of step S12203, step S12208 and step S12215 or after making a negative determination in step S12209, the process proceeds to step S12216. The processing of step S12216 to step S12220 is processing when it is selected not to be an add-on winning game but to generate an add-on effect in a subsequent game, that is, a process when an add-on effect or an overtaking effect is selected. .

  That is, in step S12216, it is determined whether the post-loading flag is set and the current game is a game for generating post-play effects. More specifically, if the post-loading flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as the predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S12216. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12216, a setting process of post-addition effect is executed in step S12217.

  Here, the setting process of the post-addition effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In addition, in the post-loading effect in the present embodiment, basically, substantially the same effects as the after-loading effect (content notification) in the zone shown in the fifth embodiment occur.

  That is, in step S 12301, the individual area in which the oldest data is stored is referred to among a plurality of individual areas provided, and processing for acquiring data (the number of added games) of the individual area is executed. In this case, the corresponding post-loading characters BUP1, BUP2 and the like are enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the subsequent step S12302, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated as the effect operation unit, and the operation waits until the operation is performed. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step S12303 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the number of added games is displayed together with the effect that the treasure box is released as the content notification (FIG. 185 (b) ). In the following step S12304, the number corresponding to the number of games for the additional effect executed in step S12303 is added to the remaining number counter HG for display, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding display is updated. Do. Then, after the process of deleting the data of the current individual area is performed in step S12305, it is determined in step S12306 whether or not the data of the unreported individual area remains.

  In step S12306, when the data of the unreported individual area remains, the process returns to step S12301, and the processing of step S12301 to step S12305 is repeated. That is, the post-addition effect is configured to sequentially perform the post-addition effect in the order in which the additional opportunity occurred, and the player can enjoy the additional effect while remembering at which timing the additional opportunity occurred. Become.

  If it is determined in step S12306 that the data of the unreported individual area does not remain, the process proceeds to step S12307, and a process of clearing the post-loading flag is executed. After that, in step S12308, for example, after notifying the total number of games added in the post-addition effect this time as an end processing of the post-addition effect, the setting process of the post-addition effect is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the all-stop overlay notification process, if a negative determination is made in step S12216, or after the process of step S12217 is performed, the process proceeds to step S12218. In step S12218, it is determined whether the precursor passing flag is set and the continuous effect counter is zero. As described above, the continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the precursor mode, and is a counter which is decremented by one for each game. That is, the game in which the continuous effect counter is 0 is the final game of the precursor mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S12219, and a process of reading the number of added games from the individual area is executed. Then, in step S12220, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the additional effect of the corresponding number of games is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S12218, or after the process of step S12220 is performed, the stop time addition notification process ends.

  Here, the relationship between the winning modes of various specific winning combinations and the first reel, which is the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, will be additionally described.

  When the specific combination is a strong cherry, as described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the twenty-eighth small combination, the thirty-second small combination to the thirty-fifth small combination stops on the effective line, and a strong cherry winning combination is established (see FIG. 17). The corresponding symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol for any of the twenty-eighth small combination and the thirty-second small combination to the thirty-fifth small combination (Fig. 10). In this case, the "cherry" symbol is attached fourth on the left reel 32L, and the "second replay" symbol is attached sixth on the left reel 32L. That is, in the 3-bet game, the left stop switch 42 from the timing when the 18th "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage to the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage. Is operated (ON operation), the corresponding pattern of strong cherry can be stopped at the effective line. In other words, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is the timing when the 17th "white BAR" symbol from the fifth "LUCKY" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the corresponding symbol of strong cherry is an effective line It can not be stopped, and it becomes so-called dropout.

  On the other hand, in strong cherries, the corresponding symbols of the middle reel 32M are, for example, the “red bell” symbol, the “white bell” symbol or the “cherry” symbol in the twenty-eighth small part (FIG. 10). The middle reel 32M is not separated by 5 symbols or more, and any symbol can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in strong cherry, for the corresponding symbol of the right reel 32R, for example, in the twenty-eighth small part, "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol (Fig. 10) Also for these symbols, regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44, any symbol can be stopped on the effective line.

  That is, when the additional winning is a strong cherry, when trying to stop the left reel 32L first and try to select the immediate effect in the notification mode selection effect, the strong cherry winning due to the stop operation. Can not be established and there is a possibility of being dropped. On the other hand, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first and it is attempted to select the after-sales effect or the arbitrage effect in the notification mode selection effect based on the strong cherry, it is a drop due to the stop operation. There is no case. As described above, when selecting the execution timing of the additional effect based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the presence or absence of the possibility of being dropped is different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The presence or absence of the drop can be added to the selection game of the execution timing of the additional effect.

  For example, as a player who is concerned that the possibility of being dropped is increased due to competition between the selection operation and the stop operation, in the notification mode selection effect triggered by the strong cherry winning, the middle reel 32M or the right reel It is conceivable to stop the 32R first. In this case, as the additional effect, the after-sale effect or the aura-based effect is selected, and an effect such as the occurrence of the additional effect in the game after the game is performed to carry the sense of expectation. On the other hand, upon knowing that the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time on the basis of the possibility of a drop, the immediate placing effect is selected, and an additional event occurs in the game. As a result, even if a dropout occurs, it is possible to clearly grasp the small part non-winning event and the dropout by generating an additional effect in the game. In this way, when the selection operation and the stop operation compete with each other, it is possible to create an effect that takes into consideration the risk of a drop, and the game characteristics of these selection operations are enhanced.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the game in which the specific combination winning in the attack mode is won, the execution timing (execution game) of the additional effect triggered by the specific combination winning is changed based on the stop operation mode of the game. More specifically, in the specific part winning game, when the left reel 32L is stopped first, an immediate effect is generated, and when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, an after effect is generated, and the right reel is generated. When the 32R is stopped for the first time, precursory effects occur. As described above, by determining the effect execution timing at the time of the addition by the stop operation mode of the addition winning game, it is possible to realize the addition effect according to the preference of the player.

  In particular, since the selection of the execution timing of the additional effect is performed in the additional winning game, the execution timing is selected, for example, in comparison with the configuration selected at the start of the attack mode or before the transition to the attack mode. The timing is likely to be close to the timing at which the additional opportunity has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible to select the execution timing according to the status of the attack mode which changes every moment, and it is possible to more reflect the desire on the player.

  In the attack mode, the push order notification frequently occurs, but the push order notification does not occur in the specific combination winning game which is triggered by the addition. That is, the notification mode selection effect and the pressing order notification effect are set so as not to compete with each other. As a result, in the notification mode selection effect, there is not generated an event that there is not much room for selection of the additional effect, for which the pushing order for winning the desired result is set. Therefore, the game nature by information mode selection production can be realized suitably.

  As described above, the push order notification frequently occurs in the attack mode, while the push order notification does not occur when the specific combination is won, so the player can aim for medal acquisition by the push order notification, It is considered that the game progresses while giving expectation to the occurrence of the game in which the push order notification does not occur. That is, since the notification mode selection effect is generated in the game in which the push order notification is not generated, the notification mode selection effect is performed in a situation in which the attention degree is already increased, and the game characteristic by such effect is suitable. Can be realized.

  As described above, although the attack mode is mainly executed in the second RT state, in the second RT, the probability of winning in any of the replays is high, and the replay winning is frequently established. As replays that can be won during the second RT state, there are replays not subject to push order notification such as normal replay, in addition to push order replays such as fall fall replays 1 to 3 and second promotion replays 1 and 2. That is, in the second RT state in which the replay wins frequently, not only the game in which a desired replay win is established by the push notification, but also the game in which the replay win is achieved regardless of the push notification. Based on this premise, since the notification mode selection effect is generated when the specific combination is won, whether the notification mode selection effect is generated is whether the specific combination is won or the normal replay is won It will function as a branch effect. As a result, the degree of interest in the notification mode selection effect is utilized, and the degree of attention in the normal replay winning game is also enhanced, and the degree of attention can be improved throughout the entire attack mode.

<Modification 1>
In the present modification, in a situation close to the upper limit game number of the advantageous period, it is made impossible to select a precursor via effect. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing a process of setting effects upon first stop in the present modification.

  The processes of steps S12401 to S12407 are the same as the processes of steps S12101 to S12107, and the immediate loading selection flag is set when the left reel 32L is made the first stop, and the middle reel 32M is made the first stop. Set an afterload selection flag. If it is determined in step S12406 that the middle reel 32M is not the first stop, it is determined in step S12408 whether or not the number of executed games in the current advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number of games (1450 games). . That is, assuming that the predetermined number of games is 1450 games, the case of making an affirmative determination in step S12408 is a case where the upper limit of the advantageous section is less than 50 games. In this case, even if the right reel 32R has been selected as the first stop and the indication via the passage is selected, the process proceeds to step S12405, and the processing for setting the immediate loading selection flag is executed. That is, when the additional opportunity occurs in a situation close to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the additional effect is generated assuming that the immediate effect is forcibly selected even if the precursor via effect is selected. By doing this, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the advantageous section is forcibly ended in the precursor mode. If it is determined in step S12408 that the number of executed games in the current advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, the precursor selection flag is set in step S12409 in the same manner as step S12108. 1 stop ON effect setting processing ends.

  As described above, it is possible to limit the execution of the effect selected in the notification mode selection effect in relation to the forced termination game of the advantageous period, thereby preventing the selected effect from being executed (attack mode (attack mode) ) Can be avoided.

  Although the above configuration is described on the premise that the third corresponding character TP3 is displayed such that the precursor effect is selected when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop, in the situation close to the forced termination game of the advantageous section The three corresponding characters TP3 may not be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to display the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate effect, instead of the third corresponding character TP3. However, since the above configuration does not require a change in the notification mode selection effect itself, there is an advantage that the effect configuration can be simplified. In addition, when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop in the notification mode selection effect, it may be configured to be forced to be an afterload effect.

  Further, when the middle reel 32M is set to the first stop and the after-sales effect is selected, according to the number of digested games in the advantageous section (if the number of executed games is 1450 or more) It may be configured to Also in this case, the second corresponding character TP2 corresponding to the additional effect may not be displayed, or the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate effect may be displayed instead of the second corresponding character TP2. Good.

  The correspondence relationship between the selection operation performed in the notification mode selection effect and the execution timing of the selected additional notification may be made different according to the number of additional games at the time of the additional winning. Specifically, for example, when the number of added games is equal to or more than a predetermined number of games (100 games), the additional effect is executed at an execution timing different from the execution timing selected by the selection operation with a predetermined probability (50%). It may be configured as More specifically, even when the precursor game effect is selected when the number of games to be added is equal to or more than the predetermined game number, even if the predetermined effect is selected, not the selected precursor signal but also the effect game effect is executed. Good. By doing this, it is possible to add an astonishing surprise to the number of added games, as well as the surprise of being executed at a timing different from the intention of the player.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the notification mode selection effect is executed in the game in which the normal replay is won (a game different from the additional winning game). FIG. 208 (a) is a flowchart showing effect setting processing at the time of normal replay. This process is performed in the start effect setting process as the start effect of the normal replay winning game in the attack mode in the display control device 81.

  In step S12501, it is determined whether or not the selected counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 1 or more. The selected counter indicates the number of games for which the execution timing of the additional effect selected in the notification mode selection effect is effective, and a predetermined value (20) is input by the selection operation, and one each time one game is consumed It is a counter to be subtracted.

  When the selected counter is 1 or more, the effect setting process at the time of normal replay is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the selected counter is 0, the process of setting the notification mode selection flag is performed in step S12502, and the effect setting process is ended. That is, in the normal replay winning game, the notification mode selection effect can be executed as the effect at the time of the first stop ON.

  In the first stop-on-time effect setting process according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 209, in steps S12601 to S12608, the same processes as in steps S12101 to S12108 are executed. After executing any of steps S12605, S12607, and S12608, the process proceeds to step S12609, and for example, the process of inputting "20" as a predetermined value to the selected counter is performed, and then the first stop is turned on. The hour effect setting process ends. As a result, affirmation determination is made in step S12501 for 20 games thereafter. More specifically, by performing the selection operation when the normal replay is won, the notification mode selection effect is not generated even if the normal replay is won again for twenty games thereafter.

  As described above, the processing for setting various types of additional effects is executed in the processing for additional notification at the time of all stop (FIG. 205). More specifically, the notification mode selection effect at the time of normal replay winning is generated, and by performing the selection operation, any one of the immediate loading selection flag, the additional loading selection flag, and the precursor selection flag is set, and thereafter, among 20 games. In the case of winning the addition, all stoppage is made based on the selection operation performed on the game prior to the game on which the addition is won (based on the flag for immediate loading selection flag, additional loading selection flag, precursor selection flag) In the time-of-time notification process, the execution timing of the additional effect is set.

  That is, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of the normal replay winning, when the left reel 32L is made the first stop and the immediate placing effect is selected, the immediate placing selection flag is set, and when the extra win is selected in the subsequent game An additional effect is generated in the selected game (an immediate effect is generated). In addition, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of the normal replay winning, when the middle reel 32M is made the first stop and the afterload effect is selected, the afterload selection flag is set, and when the after game is won, the attack is attacked. An additional effect is generated when the number of remaining games on the display of the mode reaches a predetermined number of games (an additional effect is generated). Then, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of the normal replay winning, when the right reel 32R is made the first stop and the indication over the indication is selected, the indication selection flag is set, and the addition mode is selected in the subsequent game, the indication mode After that, additional effects occur (precursor effects occur).

  As described above, by making the informing mode selection effect execution game and the additional winning game different from each other, there is no competition between the selection operation in the informing mode selection effect and the eye-pushing operation in the specific combination winning. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to minimize occurrence of events such as not being concentrated on the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, occurrence of failure due to failure of the eye pressing operation and occurrence of dropout.

  In the present modification, the process for the selected counter for managing the selected counter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 208 (b). The process for the selected counter is performed as one process in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) in the display control device 81.

  In step S12511, it is determined whether the selected counter is 1 or more. If it is not 1 or more, that is, it is 0, the processing for the selected counter ends. If it is 1 or more, a process of subtracting 1 from the selected counter is executed in step S12512. Then, in step S12513, it is determined whether or not the selected counter has become 0, and if it is not 0, the processing for the selected counter ends. If the flag becomes 0, it is determined in step S12514 whether an add-on selection flag or a precursor selection flag is set. If one of these flags is set, the corresponding flag is cleared in step S12515, and the immediate loading selection flag is set in step S12516, and the processing for the selected counter is ended. In addition, when the determination in step S12514 is negative and the immediate loading selection flag is set, the selection flag is not erased even when the selected counter becomes 0, and is maintained as it is, and the processing for the selected counter is performed. finish.

  As described above, after the notification mode selection effect is generated in the normal replay winning game in the attack mode, and the selection operation in the game is regarded as effective over the predetermined number of games, after the predetermined game has elapsed, If an additional opportunity occurs before the replay is won, an immediate effect is generated. In other words, the immediate ride effect is the default, and the addition during the predetermined number of games after the notification mode selection effect of the normal replay winning game is the afterload effect or precursor via staging effect as the execution timing different from the default immediate effect. It is configured to be selected to be performed. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the selection operation at the time of normal replay winning is regarded as effective until the end of the attack mode. However, with such a configuration, after the selection operation is performed, even if the execution timing desired by the player changes due to a change in the game situation (increase or decrease in the number of remaining games in the attack mode, increase in earned medals, etc.). , It becomes difficult to cope with the change. On the other hand, by doing as described above, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player himself selects the execution timing of the additional effect according to the state of the attack mode which can change momentarily.

  Moreover, by setting the predetermined game number to the game number (20 games) shorter than the initial game number (50 games) in the attack mode, for example, when the notification mode selection effect occurs immediately after the start of the attack mode, At least once more, there remains room for the notification mode selection effect to occur. Thus, even if the addition does not occur, the player who wants to change the execution timing of the addition effect in the first half and the second half of the attack mode in preparation for the occurrence of the change in the attack mode. It is possible to meet the needs. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game effect according to the various needs of the player.

  Furthermore, since the notification mode selection effect is generated as triggered by an event that occurs randomly, such as a normal replay win, an element of luck is also added as to whether or not the notification mode can be selected as described above, It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the execution timing of the additional notification selected by the selection operation is configured to be changeable afterward. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing a process for reporting when all the vehicles are stopped in the present modification.

  The difference between the all-stop overduration notification process of this modification and the flowchart of FIG. 205 is the process when the immediate-loading selection flag is set. That is, when it is determined in step S 12701 that the immediate loading selection flag is set, processing for clearing the immediate loading selection flag is executed in step S 12702. Then, in step S12703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the addition effect of the current game. The processes of steps S12701 to S12703 are the same as the processes of steps S12201 to S12203.

  In step S12704, it is determined whether the post-loading flag is set. When it is determined in step S12704 that the post-loading flag is set, although the post-over effect is selected in the additional event that occurs before the current additional event, the immediate event is performed in the current additional event. Means selected. In this case, correction processing is executed in step S12705. If the post-loading flag is not set in step S12704, or after the correction process is performed in step S12705, the process proceeds to step S12718. The processes of step S12706 to step S12722 are the same as the processes of step S12204 to step S12220.

  The correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S12801, an effect capable of moving forward is set. The forwardable effect is an effect for notifying that it is possible to execute in the current game the additional effect which should have been generated just before the end of the attack mode, with the additional effect being selected. . In more detail, based on the first add-on character BUP1 and the second add-on character BUP2 acquired as the add-on right, etc., to notify of a situation where it is possible to generate an add-on effect in the current game. In the auxiliary display section 65, for example, the character display "Do you want to open the stored treasure box?" Is displayed. Further, in the forwardable effect effect, the characters “YES” and “NO” are displayed, and the player can select whether or not the additional effect is to be generated by forward operation by operation of the effect switch 66 or the like.

  After generating an effect capable of moving forward in step S12801, it is determined in step S12802 whether or not an instruction to move forward is made to generate an effect on top to move forward. In the above-mentioned example, it is good to be referred to as an advance instruction operation that the selection operation of the character display of “YES” is performed in the forward movable effect.

  If no forward moving instruction operation has been performed in step S12802, it is determined in step S12803 whether or not an afterload keeping operation has been performed, in which no additional effect is to be generated. In the above-mentioned example, it is good to consider that selection operation of the character display of "NO" is made in post-play possible maintenance operation. Further, for example, the operation of any one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be set as the post-loading maintenance operation. Such an operation can be considered as an indication of the intention of the start of the next game, and can also be regarded as an indication of the intention not to generate an additional effect in the current game.

  If it is determined in step S12803 that the post-loading maintenance operation has been performed, the correction processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S12803, the process returns to step S12802 and loops until either an advancing instruction operation or an after-loading maintenance operation is performed.

  If it is determined in step S12802 that a forward moving instruction operation has been performed, the number of individual areas stored is displayed in step S12804. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the first back riding character BUP1 and the second back riding character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the order in which the back riding effect should have been performed. In this way, the player can grasp how many post-loading rights exist. In FIG. 212 (a), three first post-loading characters BUP1 are displayed side by side, and it is shown that there are three post-loading rights triggered by winning a watermelon.

  In the following step S12805, it is determined whether the selection operation of the individual area has been performed. For example, in FIG. 212 (a), a cursor such as an arrow is displayed on the side-by-side put-on right (treasure box), and one post-on put right (treasure box) can be selected by moving and determining the cursor. . It is preferable to use the effect switch 66 for selecting the post-loading right. For example, the cursor is automatically moved in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 sec cycle), and a desired post-loading right is indicated. When the rendering switch 66 is operated in the state, it is assumed that the selection of one after-loading right is performed and the selection operation of the individual area is performed. If the selection operation of the individual area is not performed, the process returns to step S12805, and waits until the selection operation is performed.

  If the selection operation has been performed, in step S12806, processing is performed to read out data on the number of additional games of the selected individual area. Then, in step S12807, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the effect of adding the corresponding individual area is performed (FIG. 212 (b)). In step S12808, processing for adding the current number of added games to the display remaining number counter HG is performed, and in step S12809, data deletion processing for the individual area corresponding to the additional effect generated in step S12807 is performed.

  In step S12810, it is determined whether there is an unreported individual area. If it exists, the process returns to step S12802 and repeats steps S12802 to S12809. If there is no unreported individual area, a negative determination is made in step S12810, and the process advances to step S12811 to execute processing for clearing the post-loading flag. Thereafter, in step S12812, an end process of an afterload effect is executed, and then the present correction process is ended. The processes of steps S12811 and S12812 are the same as the processes of steps S12307 and S12308.

  In the modification process in this modification, the characters corresponding to the acquired post-loading right are arranged and displayed in order as shown in FIG. 212 (a), and the respective characters can be selected regardless of the acquisition order. That is, regardless of the order of occurrence of the additional opportunity that triggered the additional effect, it is possible to generate the additional effect, for example, the first additional right that occurred earlier and the second that occurred later. If there is an aftersale right, it is possible to select to perform the over rendering based on the second after-sale right before the over rendering based on the first after-sale right.

  More specifically, in FIG. 212 (a), the left treasure box shows the after placement right based on the first opportunity to occur as the three after placement rights, from left to right, and the treasure box in the middle is the second occurrence. The right-hand treasure box shows the right to get on the third occasion, which is the extra-charge right. The cursor shown in FIG. 212 (a) indicates a treasure box corresponding to the second additional right. In this situation, when it is determined that the selection operation of the individual area has been performed (step S12805: YES), the number of games to be added is acquired from the individual area corresponding to the second additional right in step S12806, and the number is added in step S12806. An additional effect based on the second afterward right is generated (FIG. 212 (b)). In this case, no additional effect of the after-sales right based on the additional event that has first occurred has not yet occurred. That is, it is possible to make the generation | occurrence | production order of the addition timing, and the generation | occurrence | production order of the addition production | presentation in a post-addition effect different.

  As described above, even if the post-addition effect is selected by the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, the post-addition effect should be performed after the post effect corresponding to the post-addition effect. By making the execution possible at a timing earlier than the above timing, it is possible to cope with a change in the mind of the player according to the gaming situation which changes from moment to moment. For example, if an additional opportunity occurs in the early stage of the attack mode, then, even if the additional effect based on the additional opportunity is selected as the additional effect, the anticipation is that there is an expectation that the additional event will occur. There is also a possibility that the user may want to generate the extra selected as the above-mentioned after-sale effect before the execution timing of the after-sale effect, for example, when he / she wants to occur. In that respect, as described above, it is possible to respond flexibly to the change in the mind of the player by making it possible to change the selected after game effect to the immediate effect after the fact.

  The opportunity to make the above change was determined to be that the immediate effect at the time of the additional event was selected. If the opportunity to make the change possible, that is, the execution trigger of the correction process, can be changed indefinitely, such as a configuration that generates each game, for example, the effect (promotion possible effect) of whether to make the change is frequent. It may cause annoyance, and it may be a configuration that does not respect the will of having selected the after-sales effect. In that respect, there is a high possibility that a change in mind has occurred when an immediate effect is selected after the post effect is selected, and in the above configuration, the correction process can be executed triggered by a change in the player's mind. It has composition. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of the processing for the periphery and to realize the rendering according to the needs of the player within the range where the troublesomeness in rendering is not felt.

<Other Embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment or each modification mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the embodiments and the modifications, or a part or all of the configurations may be combined and applied to the embodiments and the modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to combine arbitrarily all or one part of the various structure shown to said each embodiment or each modification. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each configuration to be a combination be secured. The following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration including a combination of the embodiment and the modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

  (1) As an advantageous section, there is an attack mode in which the frequency at which push order notification is performed is higher than that in the normal mode, a challenge mode in which the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode is higher than that in the normal mode, and a super Although the attack mode, the VB mode, and the modes which are winning in each of these modes and the mode before the transition are included, at least the modes relating to the notification of the order of pressing include the modes which are improved than the normal mode. It is not limited to. For example, the challenge mode may not be set.

  (2) Although the VB mode as the pseudo bonus is configured to be shiftable only in the attack mode, it may be configured to be shiftable even in the normal mode. In this case, when the winning lottery for transition to the VB mode is won, the selected game is set as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. And it is sufficient. Further, in this case, when the first BB and the second BB are simultaneously won in the VB mode, it is preferable to set a game in which winning in the first BB and the second BB is established as the start game.

  (3) Transition to an advantageous section As a specific role that triggers lottery and additional lottery, etc., a combination of medals such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc., and winnings with these strong cherries etc. Although the specific replaying in the same manner and the combination of the small winning combination and the specific replaying and the bonus have been described as an example, the above-mentioned result of the lottery trigger is not limited to these results. For example, it may be configured to perform a single role of a predetermined bonus, or a lottery for transition to an advantageous section even in normal replay. Further, the configuration may be such that the transfer lottery or the like is performed based on the number of digested games, the accumulated number of points separately provided based on each result, or the like. In any case, it is sufficient that the trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section does not make a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence based on the set value.

  (4) Transition to an advantageous section The prize mode of the game result for performing the lottery and the like is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a winning combination is established in a common winning combination in any of the specific combinations, or a combination of winning combinations may be made among some of the specific combinations. In addition, the winning combination of the game result (for example, normal replay) in which the transition lottery is not performed may be partially or totally common to the winning combination of the specific combination.

  (5) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 have been described as an example of the section indicator, the configuration of the section indicator is not limited to the above. The section display may be configured to explicitly display whether or not it is an advantageous section by at least switching of the display mode, for example, the arrangement position of the eighth display segment N8 or the ninth display portion N9 or the size thereof The display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from that described above. For example, the operation unit of the start lever 41 or a part or all of the predetermined credit insertion switches 56 to 58 can be controlled to emit light, and the operation unit or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are lighted based on the advantageous section. Alternatively, the function as a section display may be secured by a predetermined operation unit. As described above, while the display of the section indicator is started before the operation of the next game of the start game is permitted, the predetermined operation unit is operated at the end of the start timing. By setting the display of the advantageous section on the predetermined operation unit or in the vicinity thereof as described above, it is easier to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

  Further, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 may include a display unit having a function of a section display. In this case, the main control unit 101 is preferably controlled by at least the display unit having the function of the section display, and the main control unit 101 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 itself to control the function of the section display. The configuration may be such that the main control device 101 controls the display unit together with the display unit.

  Further, as a section indicator, a character (for example, a front face of a gaming machine) which can be visually recognized from the player is provided with a property which can be displaced to a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position. It is informed whether it is an advantageous section by the display mode including the said bonus by arranging the bonus at the first position and the display mode including the bonus by arranging the bonus at the second position It is good also as composition.

  (6) The section display may have a plurality of sections other than the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display N9. That is, one interval indicator may be provided, or two or more interval indicators may be provided. In the case where a plurality of segments are provided, they may be combined with the segment indicator according to the other configuration as described in the above (5).

  (7) About a zone indicator, it is good also as composition which changes the information mode of the predetermined alerting means attached to the zone indicator concerned or adjacent to a zone indicator according to the display mode of a zone indicator. The predetermined notification means attached to the section indicator is, for example, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 attached to the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the instruction monitor 68 as an example. It can be mentioned. Further, as the predetermined notification means adjacent to the section indicator, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65, the number-of-payouts display unit 62 and the like can be mentioned as an example.

  For example, the section indicator may be configured to start display at a predetermined timing, and the predetermined notification means may be the first notification mode at the predetermined timing, and the specific timing may be different from the predetermined timing. The predetermined notification means is set as a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. In this case, it is assumed that the visibility of the display of the section indicator and the display content may be different depending on whether the predetermined notification means is the first notification mode or the second notification mode, It is possible to change the appearance of the section indicator without changing the display mode of the section indicator.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to make the appearance of the section indicator more diverse by combining the configuration for changing the display mode of the section indicator and the configuration for changing the notification mode of the predetermined notification means.

  For example, a predetermined notification unit is configured by light emitting units including a plurality of LEDs or the like, and the light emitting units are arranged in a matrix (for example, a grid of x columns x y rows). Then, one element in the matrix (for example, the element in the a-th column and the b-th row) is replaced with the interval display. Then, when the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row is lit and displayed, the a + n-th to a-n-th columns and the b-th row and the a-th column and the b + n-th to b-n rows are displayed. The light emitting unit of (1) is turned on and displayed, and the light emitting unit of the outer periphery is turned off and displayed. In addition, when the section indicator in the a-th row and the b-th row is turned off and displayed, the a + n-th to an-n th column and the b-th row and the a-th column and the b + n th row to the b-n th column are displayed. The light emitting unit is turned off and displayed, and the light emitting unit on the outer periphery thereof is turned on (x, y, a, b and n are all natural numbers). By doing this, it is possible to easily recognize the section display which is one element in the matrix in relation to the light emitting unit of the other element. When the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row is lit and displayed, the light emitting units in the a + 1st column and the b-th row adjacent thereto are turned off and displayed, and the other light emitting units are lit and displayed. When the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row is turned off, the light emitting units in the a-th column and the b + 1st row adjacent thereto are turned on and the other light-emitting units are turned off. By doing this, turning on / off of the section indicator in the a-th row and the b-th row corresponds to turning on / off the light emitting unit in the a + 1st column and the b-th row and the light emitting portion in the a column and the b + 1th row It becomes difficult to distinguish, and the section display which is one element in the matrix can be made difficult to recognize in relation to the light emitting parts of the other elements. In this case, the light emitting units to be lit / not turned on instead of the section indicator are not limited to the light emitting sections adjacent to the section indicator, and for example, which light emitting sections are to be turned on / off displayed It is good also as composition determined at random by lottery etc.

  Furthermore, the other predetermined notification means may be configured to be different between the notification mode in the start game and the notification mode in the advantageous section.

  (8) Increase the brightness of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator and the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine, and display the section rather than the other display sections (the surrounding display section, other predetermined notification means) Although it is configured to improve the visibility of the display unit, when displaying the section display, the display can be viewed by lowering the brightness and the illuminance of the other display units (the surrounding display unit and the other predetermined notification means). You may improve the sex. Further, the difference in lightness and illuminance with other display units is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, 10 times the lightness and illuminance.

  Further, the visibility may be improved in relation to the display color of another display portion. That is, by setting the light emission color of the interval display and the display color (emission color) of the other display to, for example, a complementary color (opposite color), the visibility of the interval display and the other display can be improved. It may be configured to make it easy to distinguish.

  On the contrary, it is good also as composition which makes the brightness and illumination intensity the opposite relationship of the above-mentioned relationship, and reduces the visibility of a section indicator. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the section indicator, to make it difficult to notice that the display is being performed, to improve the rendering effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like, and other than the section indicator. Since the visibility of the display unit is increased, attention to another display unit can be improved. Further, with regard to the display color, by setting the light emission color of the interval display and the display color (emission color) of the other display unit to, for example, a similar color, it is possible to distinguish the interval display and the other display unit. It becomes difficult to attach, and it is possible to intensify the impression that it is an integral rendering device in which these interval indicators and the other indicator are mutually associated.

  (9) The display start mode table of the zone display is not limited to the above. For example, in addition to the game result that triggered the start of display, it may be a table including the number of bonus wins on the day or over a plurality of days, the number of transitions of advantageous sections or the number of wins, etc. as parameters. The display start mode may be different. In this case, for example, the display start mode table in which the content or setting value of the advantageous section becomes easier to predict as the bonus or the number of times of winning on the advantageous section increases on the day or on multiple days The game contents and setting values can be predicted more gradually, and the game can be realized as if the player nurtured the contents of the game machine.

  (10) In the configuration in which the display start mode of the zone display is set according to the contents of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., without passing through the drawing of the display start mode It is good also as a display start mode matched.

  (11) The display end mode table of the zone display is not limited to the above. For example, not only the contents of the advantageous section at the end but also the number of digested games at the end (value of the advantageous section game number AG) may be included as a parameter, or the time at the end may be included as a parameter. The time at the start of the advantageous section may be included as a parameter, or the length of time taken to digest the advantageous section may be included as a parameter, and the display end mode differs based on these parameters. You should do it. For example, in the case of a configuration that includes the number of digested games at the end as a parameter, it is possible that the more valuable the number of digested games (the more benefits obtained during the advantageous section would be) the more useful information for the player can be provided. It may be a display end mode table, or a display end mode table in which useful information can be provided to the player as the number of digested games is smaller (the benefit obtained during the advantageous section would be smaller). It is also good.

  (12) In the display end mode table of the section indicator, information useful for the player can be presented. However, a structure related to the display start mode table may be applied. That is, according to the display start mode of the interval display, the setting value or the like may be presented as information useful to the player.

  (13) Although information relating to the setting value has been described as an example of information useful to the player presented at the end of the display of the section indicator, for example, as a configuration in which an advertisement or advertisement of a game hall or another store is presented. Alternatively, a discount ticket or coupon of a product may be presented. In addition, in a configuration in which the display start mode table is changed in the specific state, when an advantageous display start mode table is selected according to the cumulative winning number and the cumulative non-winning number of bonus and advantageous sections, the cumulative number is It may be a configuration suggested or suggested.

  (14) The freeze state is set in the start game to restrict the start of the game following the start game, but the freeze state restricts the operation itself of the game following the start game. It may be configured to limit the start of the next game.

  (15) A predetermined effect may be generated during the freeze state in the start game. For example, specific rotation control to reversely rotate or rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the freeze state or low speed rotation is performed, or a predetermined pattern combination (for example, “red 7 ′ ′ symbol arrangement may be configured to generate an effect that a predetermined line (for example, the middle line L2) is stopped or temporarily stopped. In this case, according to the length of the freeze state period, that is, according to the content or advantage of the advantageous section when the display of the section indicator is started, the rotation direction or rotational speed is made different, etc. The rotation control mode may be configured differently, or the type of predetermined pattern combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (for example, "red 7" pattern matching and "black BAR" pattern matching), or predetermined to be stopped or temporarily stopped The type of line (for example, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2) may be different.

  (16) In the configuration in which the length of the freeze period is set according to the content of the advantageous section or the degree of advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator, a plurality of freeze states are generated. The sum of the lengths of the freeze states may be associated with the contents of the advantageous section or the degree of advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator, and the number of occurrences of multiple freeze states may be It may be associated with the content or the degree of advantage or the display start mode of the interval display.

  (17) In the configuration in which the section indicator can be lit to a plurality of colors as in the ninth display portion N9, although it is configured to differ in which color to turn on as the display start aspect, as the display end aspect It may be configured to differ in which color the light is turned off. In this case, it is preferable that the white lighted state in the advantageous section in the end game is switched to the lighted state of the corresponding color, and then turned off.

  (18) In the case of winning the transition lottery to an advantageous section based on the bonus and the specific role combination (for example, strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, etc.), the freeze state in the game won for the overlapping role While generating, set the length of the freeze period according to the content of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., and carry over the area, and display the section before accepting the next game operation with the bonus winning game as the start game The display of the device may be started. Furthermore, when winning the selection lottery for transition to the advantageous section triggered by the combination of the bonus and the specific combination, it is a game after the game winning the combination and the game prior to the bonus winning game The period indicator is used to set the length of the freeze period according to the content and the degree of advantage etc. of the advantageous section, and to allow the operation of the next game with the bonus winning game as the start game. It may be configured to start the display of. Furthermore, when the winning combination drawing to the advantageous section is triggered by the combination of the bonus and the specific combination, it is a game after the game winning the combination, and generates a freeze state in the bonus winning game At the same time, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the content, the degree of advantage, etc. of the advantageous section, and the display of the section indicator is started until the bonus game is started and the next game operation is permitted. It is good also as composition. In the configuration in which the freeze state is generated during the carry over state, the freeze state may be generated multiple times in a plurality of games, and in this case, the total length of the plurality of freeze states is the content of the advantageous section It may be associated with the display start mode of the degree or zone display, or the number of occurrences of multiple freeze states is associated with the contents of the advantageous section or the degree of advantage of the freeze zone or the display start mode of the zone display It is also good.

  (19) When the winning lottery is transferred to the advantageous section based on the winning replay, the winning game of the winning replay is regarded as the starting game, and the starting operation of the start lever 41 is not the betting operation in the next game of the starting game Although the end of the start timing of the display is used, it may be configured to determine whether the end of the start timing is a bet operation or a start operation at the time of winning replay. Further, a plurality of winning replays may be provided, and depending on the type of winning replays, whether the bet operation is ended or the start operation is ended may be different. In this case, it is preferable that the stop numbers be different in each winning replay, and the stop numbers (for example, all the bells) corresponding to other small payouts are stopped in a line different from the effective line on the end of the start operation. With this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the surprise on the display of the interval display being started based on the start operation. Even in this case, it is more preferable that the start operation is permitted based on the bet operation.

  (20) Although the first BB and the second BB are used as the transition role to the bonus state, the first BB and the second BB may be changed to the bonus state and a replay may be awarded. In this case, when the first BB prize is set as the start game because a replay is given, the start operation of the start lever 41 instead of the bet operation of the next game is the end of the display start timing of the section indicator. It is also possible.

  (21) In the configuration where the display start mode of the interval display is determined based on the display start mode table for the specific state when the gaming state is in the specific state, the transition condition to the specific state or the continuation condition of the specific state The parameters of (end condition) are not limited to those described above. For example, as a parameter of the transition condition to the specific state, the transition setting to the specific state or the transition lottery is performed according to the number of games from the RAM clear or the power on, or the normal period from the end of the previous advantageous period A configuration for performing transition setting or transition drawing according to the number of games, a configuration for performing transition setting or transition drawing to a specific state according to the number of games between bonus, specific part, replay, small part, out, bonus, advantage A configuration may be considered in which the transition setting or the transition lottery is performed according to the number of times of winning in a section or the like, the number of times of winning or transition, or the like. Further, when determining whether the transition conditions are satisfied or not, the number of continuing games may be determined by lottery or the like, and the length of the determined number of continuing games may also be changed depending on each of the parameters. As a parameter of the continuation condition (end condition) of the specific state, a configuration for performing the continuous setting to the specific state or the continuous lottery according to the number of games after transition to the specific state, the specific part during the specific state, the replay, A configuration may be considered in which the continuous setting or the continuous lottery is performed according to the small winning combination, the number of winnings such as a bonus, the number of winnings or the number of transitions, etc. Further, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the continuous lottery may be different depending on the number of transitions to the specific state and the number of occurrences of the transition trigger.

  (22) In the case of starting the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator at the start of the advantageous section, depending on the type of the advantageous section that has been won (either the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the super attack mode) Although the display modes such as the display start timing and the light emission color of the display start are different, the display modes may be different according to the number of continuing games in the selected advantageous section. For example, the number of initial games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the specialization zone may be variable, and the number of initial games may be determined by lottery or the like at the transition lottery of these modes (when winning). Then, the display start mode of the section display may be determined according to the determined initial number of games. When the display end mode at the end of the advantageous section is made different, the display end mode may be made different depending on the length of the continued advantageous section. In addition to the initial game number, the display start / end mode may be different according to a parameter (for example, ease of transition to the VB mode in the attack mode, etc.) for changing the degree of advantage. The display start / end mode may be made different depending on the combination of these parameters and the type of advantage section.

  (23) The transition trigger to the special RT state and the termination condition are not limited to the above. For example, a specific combination with medal payout (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), an overlapping combination of the specific combination and the bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, etc.), a specific combination replaced with a specific replay , Or any of these combinations. In addition, the special RT state is ended based on the bonus winning at the bonus overlap time as the ending condition, but the special RT state is also stopped by stopping a predetermined number of games or stopping transition occurrence even at the bonus overlap time. It may be configured to end.

  (24) In the configuration that wins the transition lottery to the advantageous section based on the bonus double winning combination and shifts to the special RT state, the special replay in the special RT status is performed by stopping the eyes of the game that became the bonus double winning combination. It is good also as composition which makes stop number differ. For example, in the case of strong watermelon duplication 1 as the overlapping role, in the game won by the strong watermelon duplication 1, the case where the strong watermelon winning (30th small winning combination winning) is reached and the strong watermelon is achieved, In the case of missing the 30th (when the 30th non-winning combination is awarded), it is configured to make the stop number of special replay different, and for example, the advantageous section in which the stronger watermelon prize is won In order to make it easier to predict the content and the degree of advantage of the content of the special replay, the stop number of the special replay may be made different.

  (25) In the configuration for transitioning to the special RT state, as the effect by the display control device 81, the pseudo precursor mode may not be set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not generate a continuous rendition.

  (26) With regard to the push notification informing the special replay in the special RT state, not only the black bars but also black bars and double bars are stopped as well as black bars and single bars. It is good also as composition performed when it wins through execution lottery of pushing order information also about pushing order information of eyes.

  (27) An upper limit may be set on the number of occurrences of the push order notification effect regarding the push order notification effect at the time of the special replay in the special RT state. For example, if the upper limit is set to one in one special RT state, and a push stop notification effect such as black BAR double alignment or black BAR single alignment is performed and the corresponding stop appearance appears one time, It is good also as composition which does not perform the same push order notice production at the time of special replay winning. In this case, when a stop number different from the executed pressing order notification effect appears due to a failure in the pressing operation, an erroneous operation of the stopping order, or the like, the pressing order notification effect may be generated again.

  (28) A predetermined stopping result (black BAR double alignment or black BAR single alignment, etc.) is made to appear by pushing order notification effect at the time of special replay in the special RT state, suggesting the content and advantage of the advantageous section In the configuration, the content and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section may be suggested based on the number of appearances of the predetermined number of stops. For example, when the black BAR single set appears as the first number (one time) as a predetermined stopping outcome, it is determined that the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, and the black BAR as a predetermined stopping outcome. If a single match appears in the second number (twice) more than the first number, it may be determined that the winning lottery for transition to the attack mode more advantageous than the challenge mode is confirmed. In this case, it is preferable that the pressing order notification effects at the time of special replay winning be made different so as to obtain the corresponding number of appearances.

  (29) In the configuration in which the notification cancellation lottery is triggered by the specific combination in the special RT state, the cancellation lottery is performed when the transition lottery to the advantageous section has already been won, but the transition lottery is elected Even if it is not, it is good also as composition which performs cancellation lottery. In this case, when the cancellation lottery is won in a state where the transition lottery has not been won, although the push order notification effect is generated, the stop occurrence is such that the advantageous section such as the stop appearance becomes black BAR double alignment. It is good to make it the structure which generates pushing order alerting | rendering effect which does not make.

  (30) In the configuration in which the notification cancellation lottery is performed with the specific combination in the special RT state as a trigger, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, the winning probability may be uniform regardless of the type of the specific combination. Further, the number of winnings of the specific combination in the special RT state may be stored, and the winning probability may be different according to the number of winnings. In this case, as the number of times of winning increases, it is preferable that the cancellation winning probability increases. Furthermore, the winning probability of the notification cancellation lottery may be different depending on the relationship between the specific combination that triggered the transition to the special RT state and the specific combination that was won during the special RT state, for example If the specific part and the specific part elected in the special RT state have the same specific part (the same index value IV), it may be easier to win the notification cancellation lottery than otherwise.

  (31) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed triggered by the specific combination in the special RT state, the content notified after the release may be different from that described above. Specifically, it is sufficient if it is the contents of the transition lottery to the executed advantageous section, for example, the transition to the advantageous section performed based on the game result before the result that becomes the transition trigger to the special RT state It may be the contents of the lottery, or may be a notification that the transition lottery is not won or a notification that the transition lottery has been performed, as a result of the transition to the special RT state.

  (32) In the configuration in which the notification cancellation lottery is triggered by the specific combination in the special RT state, to the advantageous section implemented based on the game result (the overlapping combination with the bonus) which became the transition trigger to the special RT state. Although the setting of the precursor mode has been described by way of example as a configuration to make it difficult to be notified of the contents of the transitional lottery in the game that resulted in the game result, the notification of the game result that is the game result is limited Any configuration may be used, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which notification is not performed in the game. In this case, the precursor mode may not be set.

  (33) In the configuration in which there are a plurality of special RT states and different types of special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the winning probability of special replay may be set higher than the winning probability of normal replay. Also, it may be configured that only the special replay is won so that the normal replay is not won. By doing this, it is possible to increase the frequency (potentiality) of establishing special replay, and it is possible to make the desired stop appearance appear relatively smoothly if aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in each game It becomes. Therefore, in each game, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming for the “black BAR” symbol from getting bored.

  (34) In the configuration in which there are a plurality of special RT states and the winning probability of special replay that can be won in each special RT state is different, the type of special replay is not limited to the above. For example, the winning probability of the special replay 3 may be made different. In addition, the number of special replays that can be won may be not one but a plurality, and in this case, the type of RT state is predicted (by the balance of the win probability) by the difference in the win probability of each special replay. Therefore, the game may be played to predict the content of the advantageous section. More specifically, for example, in the sixth RT state, the special replay 3 is easy to win, and the special replay 4 is difficult to win, and in the seventh RT state, the special replay 3 is difficult to win, and the special replay 4 is easy to win. It may be like that. In addition, a configuration may be made such that a predetermined special replay can be won only in a predetermined RT state. For example, the special replay 5 may be able to win only in the fifth RT state.

  (35) "Black BAR" symbol when bonus is won during special RT state not based on bonus winning in a configuration that indicates the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the number of stops of the black BAR symbol in the special RT state. The black count may be reset (black BAR stop counter), the notification scenario, and the upper limit value.

  (36) In the configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the stop appearance in the special RT state, the symbol to be stopped is not limited to the “black BAR” symbol, and the stop position is not limited to the middle. When the stop position is, for example, the upper stage, the middle stage, or the lower stage, a plurality of corresponding symbols may be stopped on one reel.

  (37) In the configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the configuration is such that the notification scenario is set according to the indication content. It is not limited to things. For example, a plurality of types of notification scenarios may be set for one suggestion content, and one of the plurality of types may be selected by lottery or the like. In this case, for example, there may be a notification scenario in which the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 although there is an indication that a bonus is won, but a plurality of types of notification scenarios may include notification scenarios that do not match the suggested content. .

  (38) A configuration in which the count (black BAR stop counter) of the corresponding symbol is subtracted by a predetermined trigger in the configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus and the content of the advantageous section depending on the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state. It may be For example, although the notification of the stopping order for stopping the corresponding symbol is given, if the corresponding symbol does not stop (if the eye pressing operation fails), the count of the corresponding symbol is subtracted. It is good also as composition. In addition, when notification of the stop order in which the corresponding symbol can not be stopped is given, the count of the corresponding symbol may be subtracted.

  (39) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus and the content of an advantage section by stopping the appearance of a special RT state, the type of bonus may be suggested. For example, the content of the suggestion may be different (for example, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter or the notification scenario may be different) depending on whether the special RT state is based on which of the first BB and the second BB.

  (40) After shifting the gaming state to the special RT state, it is configured to indicate the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the stopping eye in the special RT state, but the gaming state is the normal gaming state or In the first RT state, it may be configured to indicate the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the content of an advantageous section by stopping appearance. In this case, the special replay can be won not only in the carryover state but also in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and then the state corresponding to the carryover state and the fake special RT state (BB non-election and advantage zone non-election In the game after the specific winning combination is made, a configuration may be made such that a push order notification effect of the corresponding stop order is generated based on the special replay winning. In other words, when the game result (such as a specific combination or an overlapping combination) becomes a trigger to shift to the special RT state, the content of the push order notification effect at the time of special replay winning is different (a predetermined stop appearance and It is good also as composition which shifts to the mode which makes it easy to generate the pushing order notice production which becomes.

  (41) In the configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the cumulative number of stops of the corresponding symbol across multiple games and the stop of the corresponding symbol pertaining to the single game Depending on the number, there may be a configuration in which the presence or absence of bonus winning and the suggestion of the content of the advantageous section are different, and the weighting of the suggestion may be different in the cumulative number of stops and the number of stops in the single game. Specifically, for example, in the configuration in which the bonus winning is determined when the cumulative number of stops is 3 or more, when the number of stops relating to the single game is 3, that is, the cumulative number of stops corresponding to the bonus winning in one game is cleared. In this case, the bonus winning and the attack mode winning may be determined, or the bonus winning may be determined when the number of stops related to the single game is two or more.

  (42) In the configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbol is made different by making the stop number of the special replay in the special RT state different by pressing the order notification effect, in the configuration of changing the number of stops of the corresponding symbol The stop order may not be included.

  (43) In the configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbol is made different by pressing the stop point of special replay in the special RT state and changing the number depending on the order notification effect, one corresponding symbol is used as the stop order of one special replay. The configuration may include a first number (one) which is the above, and a stop order which results in a second number (two) having one or more corresponding symbols and different from the first number.

  (44) The background color when the suggested content is determined by the cumulative number of stops or the number of stops in a single game in a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus and the content of an advantageous section by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state. In addition to the change of, it is good also as composition which performs decision production of the contents which correspond. For example, in the configuration in which the bonus winning is determined when the cumulative number of stops of the “black BAR” symbol is 3 or more, the bonus winning notification effect is generated in the game in which the cumulative number of stops (black BAR stopping counter) is three. It may be

  (45) In the special RT state, the total replay probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, but in any special RT state or in any special RT state, the total replay probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It may be configured to be low.

  (46) In the configuration having a plurality of special RT states, although the total replay probability in each special RT state is set to be the same probability in all cases, the player's It may be the same probability to the extent that it can be recognized as the same thing by bodily sensation. More specifically, for example, if the difference in the replay probability between the special RT states is smaller than one tenth of the replay probability, it is considered that the same probability is recognized. Further, the relationship with the total replay probability with other RT states (the second RT state and the third RT state) is the same, and the same probability may be obtained even if the probability is not completely the same.

  (47) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section where push order notification corresponding to a winning according to the maximum payout number is generated at least once. More specifically, in the pushing order bell in which 9, 3 or 0 medals can be paid out depending on the stop order, at least one push order notification that 9 medals will be paid out will be generated. The section that becomes

  (48) Even when the advantageous section ends without reaching the continuation upper limit, the initialization processing may be performed.

  (49) At the time of single winning of 1st BB and 2nd BB, it is good also as composition which performs a transition lottery of an advantageous section, an additional lottery, etc. In each of the above-described embodiments, the single winning of the first BB and the second BB does not cause a difference in the winning probability due to the set value, and even if the lottery concerning the advantageous section is performed at the single winning, It is considered that no inconvenience occurs.

  (50) With respect to the bonus of the first BB and the second BB, although the winning probability is different depending on the setting value including the winning probability of the overlapping winning combination, a bonus may be provided in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the setting value. In this case, it may be possible to have a configuration in which the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like is possible during the bonus carryover state in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. In other words, it is possible to provide a case where the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like is performed and a case where it is not performed by winning the specific part being carried over. Further, although the single winning of the first BB and the second BB is configured to have the same winning probability depending on the set value, it may be configured differently.

  (51) In addition to 1st BB and 2nd BB, CB (1st CB-4th CB) was provided as a transition combination in which the small combination probability may change by transition of gaming state, but in addition to or instead of these transition combinations Other transition roles may be provided. Other transition roles are MB (middle bonus) that does not have a limit on the number of slips, REG (regular bonus) that has a lower limit on the number obtained with the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and that it is possible to execute a 1-game JAC game. SB (single bonus) etc. are considered. Also, the number of upper limit earned in each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number in the CB state may be three, which is less than 15, or may be zero.

  (52) The medal payout is not performed at the time of winning of the transition combination (the first BB, the second BB, and the CB). However, the medal payout may be performed.

  (53) It is good also as composition which performs transition lottery to attack mode etc., an additional lottery, etc. during a bonus. In this case, the probability of winning or the number of wins, the transition to attack mode during bonus, etc. The probability of the lottery or the additional lottery and the bonus degree and the degree of advantage do not have a setting difference. It is preferable that the lottery is not performed when a certain bonus is won.

  (54) The configuration is such that the lottery is performed based on the lottery result having no particular difference in setting, so that there is no difference in the probability or the advantage of the transition lottery to the attack mode etc. and the additional lottery by the setting value. Although a lottery is performed based on a certain lottery result, a setting difference may not be generated by adjusting a benefit (a benefit, a winning probability such as a transitional lottery or the number of added games) at the time of winning. For example, there is provided a specific combination which is won with a probability of 1/100 in setting 1 and is elected with a probability of 1/10 in setting 6, and the winning probability of the attack mode added lottery at the time of winning the specific combination is set 1 Then, in the setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing this, the total added winning probability is 1/200 at any setting value, and there is no setting difference.

  (55) Although the effect content by the auxiliary display unit 65 has been mainly described as the effect by the other informing means of the section display unit, another display unit is provided as the other informing means, and the other display unit performs the effect It may be configured to be generated.

  (56) Transition to Attack Mode etc. By winning the lottery or the additional lottery, basically an event advantageous to the player is generated, but for example, it may be configured to perform the end lottery such as the attack mode etc. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of continuation games is subtracted and drawn.

  (57) Although the game in a situation where the bet number is 3 has been mainly described, the invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the bet number is 1 and a 2-bet game in which the bet number is 2. For example, the display start mode table of the section indicator is selected in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the 1 bet game or the 2 bet game and in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the 3 bet game. By making them different, the display start aspect of the section display may be different.

  (58) Although the set value suggestion is performed when an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, for example, as a zone that can shift during the attack mode, the set value suggests rather than during the normal attack mode It is also possible to provide a specific zone where it is easy to be performed, and to make it easy to shift to the specific zone when an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

  (59) Although the set value is suggested when an additional opportunity such as specific part winning is generated in a situation where the excess flag is set, the additional opportunity is not limited to the above. For example, the additional opportunity may occur depending on the number of digested games in the advantageous section, or the additional opportunity may occur according to the number of wins, the number of prizes, the number of medals, etc. of the minors in the advantageous section. It is preferable that the setting value indication be performed when these additional timings occur in a situation where the excess flag is set.

  (60) Although the setting value suggestion is performed as an alternative to the addition of the number of games when a trigger for the addition is generated, the setting value may be suggested after adding the number of games.

  (61) In the situation where the excess flag is set, if the game mode lottery is won from the challenge mode to the attack mode or from the attack mode to the specialization zone, etc., the set value is suggested after the mode transition. The mode transition may not be performed.

  (62) Although the set value is suggested when the overtaking trigger occurs in a situation where the overrun flag is set, the overtaking is triggered even if the overtaking trigger occurs in a situation where the overrun flag is not set. If a lottery has not been won, it may be configured to indicate a set value. In addition, when the winning lottery is not won, it is also possible to assume that the winning lottery is tentatively added, and the number of games to be added is added to the total annihilation game number TEG or the like.

  (63) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested by referring to the total annihilation game number TEG at the forced termination, the display mode at the forced termination may be added. For example, set value suggestion tables (a third special notification lottery table, a third special notification type table, etc.) are prepared depending on the display mode at the time of forced termination. When forced termination is performed in the specialization zone, the setting value indication may be easily generated with the total annihilation game number TEG smaller than the forced termination in the attack mode.

  (64) When a game to be forcibly terminated is generated during the bonus, processing such as setting value suggestion may be different from the case where the game is not generated during the bonus. For example, in the case of forced termination in a situation where the bonus is not in progress, the setting value suggestion is performed in the game forcedly terminated, while in the case of forced termination during the bonus, the setting value suggestion is performed after the end of the bonus. It may be Also, processing such as setting value suggestion may be made different depending on the type of bonus. For example, when a forced termination game occurs in the first BB where the winning probability is common regardless of the setting value, while the setting value is suggested, the forced termination is performed during the second BB in which the winning probability is different depending on the setting value. When a game is generated, the setting value may not be suggested, or vice versa. In addition, the configuration may be configured such that the setting value is suggested in the forced termination game if in the first BB, and the setting value is suggested after waiting for the bonus termination in the second BB, or vice versa. In the case where processing such as setting value suggestion is made different, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which which processing is selected by lottery, and the winning probability may be different.

  (65) The forced termination game of the advantageous section is not limited to the above-mentioned number (1500), and may be more or less.

  (66) The additional lottery table and the additional game number lottery table are not limited to those described above, and the additional lottery may be performed by another opportunity (small part or replay), or the winning probability or the additional game at the time of winning Ranges of numbers, averages, etc. are also optional. For example, as the additional game number, the number of games (2000 games or the like) exceeding the upper limit number of the advantageous section may be selected.

  (67) In the situation where the extra flag is set in the situation where the excess flag is set, it is configured to present useful information for the player by performing the setting value suggestion as the price, but useful information for the player As long as it is good, it is not limited to a setting value suggestion. For example, the above-described advertisement, coupon, or the like may be used, or a benefit such as a rare image may be provided.

  In addition, when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, information useful to the player is presented by the manner of notification of the push order when the push order bell or the push order replay is selected being different. Alternatively, a special benefit may be given. For example, a pushing order bell is a first combination in which 1 or 0 medals are paid out, a second combination in which nine medals are paid out more than the first combination, and 15 sheets more than the second combination It is assumed that the role of medal payout is played. Then, in the normal section other than the advantageous section, if the push order notification is not performed, the first winning combination is easily established, and by the push order notification being performed in the advantageous section, the second combination and the third winning combination are It is set as the composition which becomes easy to be established. Then, it is easy to notify the pressing order of the second combination until the excess flag is set, and after the excess flag is set, the pressing order notification of the third combination is performed based on the occurrence of the addition trigger. The configuration will be easier. By doing this, it is also possible to set it as a benefit when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

  In this case, at the time of 3 bets, an increase of six medals can be expected by the second winning combination, and an increase of twelve medals can be expected by the third winning combination. The third winning combination is twice for the second winning combination. It can be said that an increase in medals can be expected. Therefore, when the push order notification for establishing the third winning combination is generated as described above, the game number equivalent to 2 times of the push order bell win is subtracted from the upper limit game number, and the subtraction is performed. The forced termination may be generated at the upper limit game number. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the merit of ending the advantageous section early without substantially changing the total number of medals obtained.

  (68) The forced termination condition may be defined not by the number of games but by the total number of medals paid out or the total number of medals obtained (total number of medals paid out minus total bet number). In this case, the attack mode etc. may be managed not by the number of games but by the total number of medals paid out or the total number of medals obtained (a configuration in which the attack mode etc. ends when the number becomes a specified number). Even in the case where a problem occurs, it is preferable to perform the increase process of the specified number instead of the number of games. For example, the advantageous section is configured to be forcibly terminated when the total medal acquisition number reaches 3000. Then, as a result of the addition of the specified number in the attack mode or the like, the excess flag is set when the specified number reaches 3000 sheets. With such a configuration, the player can obtain the total number of medals obtained even if the player is notified of the pressing order in which the winning combination with a large number of payouts is made in the situation where the excess flag is set as described in (67). As a result, it is possible to enjoy the merit that the advantageous section can be ended with a small number of games while keeping the advantageous degree unchanged.

  (69) The number of times may be stored for each type of additional trigger that occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set, and the lottery table or type table in the setting value suggestion may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the excess flag is set and then the strong cherry is elected once and the weak cherry is elected four times, the set value suggestion when the weak cherry is won and the excess flag is set after the strong is set In the setting value suggestion in the case of winning the weak cherry in the situation where the cherry has been won 4 times and the weak cherry has been won once, narrowing down the setting value when the winning probability and the setting value suggestion are performed The configuration may be different in ease, and in view of the difficulty of winning strong cherries, the latter may be a set value suggestion that is advantageous for the player (a set value suggestion that makes it easy to narrow down the set values). Good.

  (70) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation on the day, the total game number TG is initialized by performing the change processing of the winning probability, that is, by performing the RAM clear. However, it may be configured to be initialized by power ON / OFF.

  (71) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation on the current day, information other than the total game number TG and time may be added as the game situation on the current day. For example, instead of or in addition to the time, an elapsed time from the power ON may be added. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus, the number of times of winning a predetermined small combination, the number of times of winning, etc. are added. The number of medals inserted and the number of payouts may be taken into consideration. The number of forced terminations may be taken into consideration.

  (72) In the configuration which performs setting value suggestion in consideration of the game situation of the day, when forced termination is performed at a relatively early stage, a configuration where setting value suggestion is hard to occur is likely to occur. Although the configuration is adopted, when forced termination is performed at a relatively early stage, the configuration may be configured such that the high setting can easily occur, or the configuration where the low setting is not likely to occur or the high setting It is good also as composition which an indication does not generate easily.

  In addition, on the premise that the availability rate in the morning and the evening is high, if the configuration in which the setting value suggestion is likely to occur if forced termination occurs in other daytime etc., the operation rate by the player in anticipation of the setting value suggestion Can be expected to increase. In this case, for example, it is possible to grasp the operation rate of the previous day or over multiple days from the previous day from the built-in clock or the game number counter etc. Based on the operation rate, a table for setting value indication (special notification lottery table The special notification type table or the like may be changed.

  (73) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day, the data referred to as the total game number TG is data which can be managed over a plurality of days, and a plurality of days when forced termination occurs It is good also as composition which considers the game situation over. For example, the total game number TG is not initialized even if the process of changing the winning probability is performed, etc., and the setting value is suggested taking into consideration the total number of games since the game console was installed in the game hall. It may be a configuration to be performed. In this case, at the beginning of introduction (at the beginning of installation), a configuration may be adopted in which the setting value indication is unlikely to occur / is likely to occur.

  (74) Although the present invention is configured to perform setting value suggestion in consideration of the game situation of the day when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the setting taking into account the game situation of the day when the other advantageous states are forcibly terminated. It may be configured to perform value indication. As another advantageous state, for example, when the bonus state is not only the number of payouts but also another forced termination condition is established (for example, when a particular ending combination is won or the particular ending combination is established, In the case where a so-called punk occurs) and the bonus state is terminated based on the forced termination condition establishment before the bonus state reaches the upper limit of the number of payouts, the set value suggestion is performed in consideration of the game situation of the day It is good also as composition.

  (75) Although the storage area for the advantageous section and the storage area for the normal section are provided in different areas so as not to overlap with each other, it is preferable that the CPU 102 can distinguish between each other. It may be duplicated.

  As a configuration provided in different regions, it is possible not to have a configuration in which one RAM is a separate region, and to provide a RAM for the advantageous section and a RAM for the normal section, respectively. In this case, although the CPU can access both RAMs, it is preferable that the information in both RAMs are not directly communicated with each other (without passing through the CPU).

  (76) Although the configuration is such that the information in the event of an additional trigger is stored in the storage area for the advantageous section and the storage area for the normal section differently depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the excess flag And a configuration is performed to store information (the number of games to be added) based on the additional opportunity in a predetermined area provided in the storage area for the advantageous section when the additional opportunity occurs in a situation where is set. And the information stored in the predetermined area is re-stored in the storage area for the normal section (total number of disappearing games TEG and number of disappearing games EG) at least before the initialization processing is performed. It may be

  (77) According to the presence or absence of the excess flag, it is configured to differ in which of the storage area for the advantageous section and the storage area for the normal section, the information when the additional trigger is generated is different. If any of the storage areas occurs, information corresponding to any storage area may be stored. Specifically, for example, when an additional opportunity is generated in a situation where the excess flag is set, processing is performed to add the number of additional games to the number of continuations in the attack mode etc., and the number of additional games is the total number of extinct games A configuration may also be adopted in which processing is added to TEG and the number of lost games EG. Even in this case, the number of added games in the attack mode etc. added after the excess flag is set is initialized by the initialization processing at the time of forced termination, while the total number of annihilated games TEG and the number of annihilated games are eliminated. Since the EG is not initialized, it is possible to use the total annihilation game number TEG and the like in the normal section.

  (78) The information corresponding to the event occurring in the advantageous section is stored in the storage area for the normal section, and the special section is set in the normal section after the forcibly ended advantageous section based on the stored information. Although it was set as a structure, the scene which utilizes the information corresponding to the event which arose in the said advantageous area is not limited to the normal area after forced termination. For example, after forced termination, it may be configured to be used again when transitioning to an advantageous segment (for example, a configuration in which a set value suggestion is likely to occur in the advantageous segment that has been shifted again). It may be a configuration to be used when it is performed (for example, the configuration on the next day's morning is a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is likely to occur), or a configuration used in the bonus when the bonus is won after forced termination. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting value suggestion is likely to occur during a bonus.

  (79) During the special section, as the special notification, the pressing order notification effect of the special replays 1 and 2 is generated, or the short precursor game number is selected when the bonus is won, but these special replays 1 and 2 The informing order of pushing order and the special informing as a short precursor game number may be generated not only in the special section but also in other normal sections and advantageous sections. In this case, a configuration in which the occurrence probability of the special notification is higher in the special section than in the other normal sections or the advantageous section, a notification useful for the player (a push order notification in which the setting value is easy to narrow down, the number of short precursor games It is good that it is the composition which becomes easy to become.

  (80) Although the annihilation game number EG and the total annihilation game number TEG are displayed as the special game number display portion TGH in the auxiliary display portion 65, they may be displayed in other display portions.

  (81) The special game number display portion TGH is configured to be displayed by the number of times corresponding to the additional game number as the total annihilation game number TEG. However, for example, the setting value suggestion is generated by the value of the total annihilation game number TEG In this case, the total annihilation game number TEG, which is the threshold of the occurrence, may be 100%, and the percentage up to the total annihilation game number TEG may be displayed on the special game number display portion TGH. In this case, whenever the total annihilated game number TEG is added, the percentage of the special game number display part TGH approaches 100% and becomes 100%, giving a strong impression that some kind of benefit can be obtained. Is possible.

  Further, the special game number display portion TGH may be a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and the light emitting color may be configured to suggest that some benefit is obtained (it is expected that setting value suggestion is generated). In this case, as the light emission of a plurality of colors, light is emitted in a color having a relationship corresponding to the expectation of the light emission color of another general expected effect such as white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow By doing so, it is possible to strongly give the impression that some benefit can be obtained by the change of the luminescent color.

  (82) In the configuration in which the number of disappearing games EG and the total number of disappearing games TEG are displayed in the special game number display portion TGH, the configuration is such that the setting value is not suggested based on the total disappearing game number TEG or the like. It may be

  (83) The special game number display section TGH displays the annihilation game number EG and the total annihilation game number TEG, and the configuration for expecting the compensation for the invalidation of the extra accompanying the forced termination is limited to the forced termination of the advantageous section. And may apply to the termination of other advantageous conditions. For example, a high probability state and a low probability state in which the bonus (the first BB, the second BB, etc.) and the winning probability in the VB mode become relatively high and low are set, and the number of winnings in the bonus and the VB mode in the high probability state is limited. Provide Then, for example, if it is configured that a bonus or VB mode can be won multiple times by one winning, or if a bonus or VB mode can be won even during the bonus or VB mode, the number of wins becomes an upper limit. You will also be able to win a bonus or VB mode. In such a configuration, by displaying the bonus after reaching the upper limit and the number of times of winning in the VB mode, when ending at the upper limit, that is, when the bonus or VB mode after reaching the upper limit is invalidated. Even if the number of wins after reaching the upper limit is displayed with a large number of wins, it is possible to expect that some benefit can be obtained.

  (84) Assuming that the extra flag is set on the premise of the extra ride effect, if there is an unannounced part (if the extra load flag is set), the range for the unannounced part Although the configuration is such that the addition notification is made in the inside, and in this case, the number of games of pseudo addition is determined with reference to the addition game number lottery table in the normal time, but the addition number table for number addition games for pseudo addition is used. It may be configured to determine the number of games of the pseudo top. In this case, if the unannounced part is large, the pseudo-addition of a large number of games is likely to occur, and if the unannounced part is small, the pseudo-addition of a small number of games may easily occur.

  (85) Assuming that an extra flag is set in a situation where an excess flag is set on the premise of the extra ride effect, if there is an unannounced part, the case where the pseudo-addition is performed within the unannounced part, and the unannounced part In the configuration where the case of performing the pseudo-addition above is performed and the configuration in which the pseudo-addition is performed beyond the unannounced part is set as the setting value indication, the configuration performing the setting value indication in the range not exceeding the unannounced part It may be

  For example, settings 1 to 3 are suggested when the pseudo addition of the number of subtraction of 10 as the first number occurs from the post loading counter BG, and pseudo addition of the number of subtraction of 56 as the second number from the post loading counter BG Setting 5 or setting 6 may be suggested, and setting 6 may be suggested if the pseudo-addition of the number of times 77 is subtracted from the post-loading counter BG as the third number occurs. In this case, the pseudo-addition of the number of times each of the first to third numbers is subtracted from the post-loading counter BG can be selected not only as a setting value suggestion but also based on the normal addition game number lottery table. It becomes a thing. Therefore, when the number of times of pseudo-addition occurs, it becomes possible to predict the setting value in consideration of whether it occurs as the setting value suggestion, and the fun of the game to be predicted is improved. .

  Furthermore, with the above configuration, it is necessary that the post-loading counter BG be greater than or equal to the first number to the third number in a situation where setting value suggestion occurs, and even from such a viewpoint, setting value suggestion is It will be difficult to judge whether it is done or not, and the enjoyment of predicting the set value will be improved.

  Needless to say, the values of the first to third numbers are not limited to the above values.

  (86) If an extra opportunity is generated in a situation where the excess flag is set on the premise of the extra ride effect, the target section is limited to the advantageous section even in the configuration that generates the pseudo extra if there is an unreported part. However, it may be applied to other advantageous states or sections. For example, a high probability state and a low probability state in which the bonus (the first BB, the second BB, etc.) and the winning probability in the VB mode become relatively high and low are set, and the number of winnings in the bonus and the VB mode in the high probability state is limited. Provide Then, for example, if it is configured that a bonus or VB mode can be won multiple times by one winning, or if a bonus or VB mode can be won even during the bonus or VB mode, the number of wins becomes an upper limit. You will also be able to win a bonus or VB mode. In such a configuration, it may be further notified that the upper limit has been reached later, and even if the upper limit is reached, there is an unannounced part, and if the bonus or the VB mode is won, the pseudo It is good also as composition which performs a good election notice.

  (87) In the additional game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the game number additional process (FIG. 132), it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set, and whether or not to execute the subsequent process is different However, if the excess flag is set at least in the previous game count addition lottery process (FIG. 128), the game number addition lottery is not performed, and the additional prize is won in the subsequent determination process. It is judged that it has not done. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set, the fact that the additional game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the number-of-games additional process (FIG. 132) are not practically performed occurs, and for this reason, The determination process of the excess flag may be omitted in these processes.

  (88) Although the set value is suggested as compensation for forced termination based on the upper limit game number of the advantageous section, the set value is set as compensation in the case where the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by another comprehensible factor. It is good also as composition which performs a suggestion etc. For example, the setting value may be suggested when forced termination is made due to the closing time of the game hall (when the number of remaining games ZG of the advantageous section can not be completely consumed within business hours).

  (89) In the above description, it has been described on the premise that the game number may be increased when the specific combination is won during the advantageous section, but subtraction and addition of the number of games based on a predetermined opportunity such as specific combination winning Any of the above may be playable, or only the subtraction may be playable. Assuming that subtraction of the number of games can occur, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the upper limit number of games is not necessarily reached, and it is possible to make the subsequent games more enjoyable. In this case, after transitioning to the advantageous section, the number of remaining games exceeding the upper limit game number is displayed in appearance, and the upper limit game number is reached when the upper limit game number is reached or the game has progressed close to the upper limit game number. The number of remaining games on the display may be subtracted.

  (90) At the time of pushing order bell or pushing order Replay, the winning combination differs depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the notification of the stop order is performed after the award provided is different. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage for the player is made different depending on whether or not the player is used, but it is sufficient to use a role that causes the degree of advantage for the player to be different by notifying the stop operation.

  For example, in the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, "black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (for example, "red 7" symbol) can not be simultaneously aimed at positions (five symbols or more apart) )Deploy. Then, the first symbol of the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol), the predetermined symbol of the right reel 32R (for example, the "first replay" symbol or When the "second replay" symbol) stops at the effective line, the first result prize is established, and the second symbol of the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol or " "Second Replay" symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, "First Replay" symbol or "Second Replay" symbol) stop at the effective line so that the second result winning will be established, The winning mode of the first result and the second result is set. In this case, although the first result prize may be established by aiming at the first symbol at the time of winning the first result, the first result prize is achieved if the stop operation is aimed at the second symbol instead of the first symbol. It does not hold, and the corresponding benefit is not given. Similarly, the second result winning may be established by aiming at the second symbol at the time of winning the second result, but if the stopping operation is aimed at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is It does not hold, and the corresponding benefit is not given. In addition, a specific combination that either the first result or the second result will be elected is provided, and when the specific combination is elected, which of the first result and the second result is elected (the first symbol and the second result) It is possible to notify of which of the two designs the left reel 32L should be stopped and aimed at). Also in such a configuration, it is possible to win a result (one of the first result and the second result) winning by the notification, and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of the mode in which the notification is easily performed, the mode in which the transition probability to the mode in which the notification is easily performed is high, and the one before winning the transition lottery to these modes. The situation including the mode may be an advantage section, and the situation including at least any one of the modes described above may be an advantage section including the modes and the modes based on the pushing order.

  Also, by performing a black BAR push notification (FIG. 106) at the time of special replay winning, a configuration for establishing the fifteenth game rebirth etc. instead of the first replaying is performed by performing pressing order notification at each special replay winning. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which the number of stops is different.

  That is, even if it is the same winning combination, the stopping operation for making the stopping numbers different is not limited to the stopping order, as long as it is the stopping operation mode including the stopping operation timing, the notification for performing the stopping operation mode Is not limited to the pressing order notification, and may be a mode notification regarding the operation mode.

  (91) Transition to an advantageous section In the configuration where the display start mode of the section indicator is made different depending on the result of the lottery trigger at the time of winning the lottery, association between the stop point and the display start mode of the section indicator The display start mode of the section display may be made different depending on the winning mode as a result of the lottery trigger or the presence or absence of winning. For example, while the strong cherry of IV = 13 is set as a double role of the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role, depending on which combination of these double roles a strong cherry winning combination is established The display start mode of the section display may be made different. More specifically, the "Cherry" symbol is aligned and stopped on the active line, and the twenty-eighth small part is established, and a strong cherry winning combination is achieved, and the "Cherry" symbol is not aligned on the active line. The display start mode of the interval display may be different depending on whether any of the 32nd to 35th small winnings is established and the strong cherry winning is achieved. Also, in a specific combination that may cause a dropout, a section indicator in the case where the specific combination winning is established when the specific combination is won, and in the case where the specific combination winning can not be established due to the omission. The display start aspect of may be configured differently.

  In these cases, the section indicator is not started to light up until the stop of the orbiting body where the winning mode, the stopping appearance, and the presence or absence of the drop are branched, and the timing after the timing when the orbiting body becoming the branch stops In addition to the configuration in which the section indicator is started to be lit at the timing, the timing and the mode (color, etc.) for starting the lighting may be different depending on the branch. Specifically, for example, it is premised that the stop operation is performed in the order of left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped, the prize mode etc. are branched (in the case of strong cherry) If the 28th small part winning and the 32nd to 35th small part winnings are branched, the section indicator starts to light after the middle reel 32M stops, at the timing after the second stop OFF time A certain third stop ON time is set as a predetermined lighting start timing. Then, when the winning mode etc. is branched to the first mode (in the case of strong cherry, the 28th small winning combination side) by performing the stop operation, lighting is started at the time of the third stop of the above-mentioned, while the winning is When the mode etc. branches to the second mode (the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination winning side in the strong cherry), the lighting for change is not the above-mentioned lighting start timing (at the time of the third stop ON). As a start timing, lighting is started at the time of the third stop OFF. In this way, it is possible to provide enjoyment utilizing the relationship between the success or failure of the push operation and the timing when the advantageous section win can be recognized by the start of lighting of the section indicator.

  (92) With regard to the advantageous section, regardless of the setting value, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefit (winning mode, number of added games, etc.) at the time of winning are common, but the winning probability etc. differs depending on the setting value It is also good. In this case, there is a difference between the probability based on the set value and the benefit at the time of winning depending on the type of the result to be a lottery such as a transition lottery, and a difference between the probability based on the set value and the benefit at the time of winning It may be configured to

  (93) In the instruction monitor 68, the display mode of the pressing order information ("1" to "6") using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, the winning combination is different depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 which are operated to stop first, and the stopping order of the second reel and the third reel includes three selection pressing combinations not involved in the winning combination. In the case, pressing order information (display of “7”) displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7, and the first display segment N1 to (7) push order information (display of "8") displayed by lighting the display segment N7, and the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display It is good also as composition which performs pushing order information of pushing order of these 3 choices according to pushing order information (display of "9") displayed by lighting segment N7.

  (94) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing at which the pressing order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is turned off is not limited to the time of the third reel stop ON operation, but at least the operation by the pressing order notification The notification of the pressing order may be performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be determined are grasped (the pressing order information may be displayed). For example, the second reel stop ON operation may be performed, or the second reel stop OFF operation may be performed. Further, when the push order notification of the push option of 3 options is performed, the first reel stop ON operation may be performed, or the first reel stop OFF operation may be performed. Furthermore, it may be configured to turn off after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time of these operations.

  Furthermore, the timing may be later than at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, or may be at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) from the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. It may be configured to turn off after the passage of time, or may be at the end of medal payout.

  (95) The instruction monitor 68 may be used also as the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62. In these cases, at the timing when the pressing order notification is performed, the pressing order notification is performed in each of the display units 60 to 62, and at the timing when the pressing order notification is not performed, the respective display units 60 to 62 are originally displayed. It is good to carry out.

  When the credit display unit 60 is also used, it is preferable that the credit display unit 60 performs the credit display at least until the bet operation is performed, and then the pressing order notification is performed (based on the operation of the start lever 41). The push order notification ends at least before the timing at which the number of medals acquired (delivered) in the game is increased and updated (the timing at which medal payout is started) (the push order information is extinguished) It is preferable that, for example, it is configured to end by the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and when medal payout is started, it may be configured to be switched to the credit display.

  The remaining payout amount display portion 61 is a display portion that displays the number of remaining payouts during a bonus. For example, the bonus state is a playability that increases the probability of winning a small winning combination and increases medals, and then the pushing order A game in which the number of remaining payouts is displayed by the remaining payout amount display unit 61 and a game in which the notification of push order is performed are assumed to have a configuration in which notification is not performed (a game characteristic different from the game characteristic of increasing medals by push notification). You may make it not overlap. In this case, the depression order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 may be generated during the bonus.

  When used in combination with the payout number display portion 62, it is preferable that at least the payout number display portion 62 ends the push order notification at a timing before the display of the payout medal number of the game is started. For example, at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, the push order notification is ended (the push order information is turned off), and the payout number is displayed at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. It is good to do. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout amount display unit 61.

  Furthermore, it is good also as composition which performs pushing order information using these indicator parts 60-62. In the game panel 25, the credit display unit 60 is on the left, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is in the middle, and the payout number display unit 62 is located on the right (FIG. 1), in association with the respective stop switches 42-44. When the left stop switch 42 is to be operated, the credit display unit 60 is displayed. When the middle stop switch 43 is to be operated, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is displayed. When the right stop switch 44 is to be operated, the payout is performed. The number display unit 62 may be displayed to notify the pressing order. In this case, as described above, after the bet operation is performed until the third reel stop ON operation, the display order of the display units 60 to 62 is notified of the pressing order for any of the display units 60 to 62. Also, while the original display function is secured, the period from when the bet operation is performed to the third reel stop ON operation is set as a period during which the display order of the display units 60 to 62 is notified, otherwise In the period of (1), the display of each of the display units 60 to 62 may be performed.

  (96) Although the number of continuing games in the advantageous section is managed by the advantageous section game number AG or the like, for example, until the predetermined number of games is consumed (for example, 50 games) or a predetermined ending condition is established (for example, It is also possible to set one) until three consecutive replays are won, and manage the number of sets. Specifically, the attack mode is set to a predetermined number of games (50 games) as one set, and the number of sets is randomly determined at the start of the attack mode or at the time of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, the attack mode is ended by digesting the determined number of sets. In this case, when the specific combination is won in the attack mode, etc., and the measurement condition is satisfied, the addition lottery for the attack mode is configured to perform the addition lottery for the number of sets. It is preferable that the number of sets be increased.

  In this configuration, in relation to the upper limit game number (1500 games) of the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined game number (for example, 50 games) determined in advance is set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay When one set whether to digest 3 consecutive wins or a specific game number (for example, 50 games), the upper limit game number is divided by a predetermined game number or a specific game number (30 sets) The advantageous interval may be forcibly terminated by setting the upper limit set number and digesting the upper limit set number. In this case, it is preferable that the number of sets of the advantageous section be grasped by a predetermined counter, and the forcible termination is performed when the counter reaches the upper limit (30). If the challenge mode or precursor mode is added, the configuration in which the challenge mode or precursor mode is added to the number of sets (for example, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games for the precursor mode and the challenge mode is one set) If the counter reaches the upper limit value including the modes, the upper limit game number of the advantageous section will be reached. Note that in a configuration in which the number of games per set may vary (a configuration in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied or the number of specific games is considered as one set), the number of games smaller than the upper limit game number of the advantageous section The counter of the set number may become the upper limit value.

  In relation to the excess flag, it is preferable to set the excess flag when the sum of the number of digested sets and the number of undigested sets reaches the upper limit of the number of sets in the set number of counters. .

  (97) The push order notification may be performed also in the challenge mode or the precursor mode. More specifically, when transitioning to a specific gaming state as an advantageous section, including an attack mode, a challenge mode, a precursor mode, etc., the advantageous section continues until at least a predetermined number (one) of push order notifications occur. It is good also as composition which does not end.

  (98) As the lottery result during the advantageous section, the timing of notifying the result of the additional lottery is different depending on the set value between the immediate effect and the post effect. However, the lottery for changing the notification timing of the lottery result by the set value Is not limited to the additional lottery, and may be another lottery if it is a lottery during an advantageous section. For example, the notification timing of the additional game number lottery may be different depending on the setting value. In this case, the notification timing of immediate loading / afterloading may be different depending on the setting value according to the number of additional games. The setting difference of the loading / post-loading ratio may be different. Further, the present invention is not limited to the drawing for the instruction function, and for example, the timing of notifying the result of the BB drawing in the advantageous section may be different depending on the set value. It may be configured to Furthermore, the notification timing of the winning result of the small winning combination such as cherry may be made different depending on the setting value. In this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be made different depending on the setting value.

  (99) In the case of performing after-sales effects, the first after-sales character BUP1 and the second after-sale character BUP2 etc. are configured to perform notification of the winning result, but these characters BUP1 and BUP2 etc. may not be displayed. . In this case, on the premise that there is a result notification (winning notification) and a content notification (winning game number notification) in the additional effect, in the after-sale effect, the result notification is added at the same timing as the additional information effect or slightly It is preferable that the configuration be performed at an early timing, and the configuration may be such that the result notification is not performed in the game in which the additional lottery is performed.

  In addition, although it is configured to display the first after game character BUP1 and the second after game character BUP2 and the like when winning in the additional lottery in the after game effect, these characters BUP1 and BUP2 are also displayed when not winning It is good also as composition. In this case, the characters BUP1, BUP2 and the like become characters indicating that the additional drawing has been performed. When these characters BUP1 and BUP2 and the like are displayed with no additional winnings, the contents are notified when the contents are notified by, for example, performing an effect that the treasure box is empty or an effect that the number of added games is zero. The configuration may be such that notification is performed.

  (100) Although the notification timing of the additional lottery is different between the immediate effect and the late effect depending on the setting value as the lottery without the setting difference, the lottery with no setting difference is not limited to the additional lottery, It may be another lottery. For example, the additional game number lottery may be met, or the notification timing of the additional game number lottery may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the immediate / after-notification notification timing according to the additional game number May be different depending on the set value, or may be different from the setting difference of the immediate load / after load ratio. Further, the present invention is not limited to the drawing relating to the instruction function. For example, the timing of notifying the result of the BB drawing in the normal section and the advantageous section may be different depending on the set value. It may be configured to be different depending on the value. Furthermore, the notification timing of the winning result of the small winning combination such as cherry may be made different depending on the setting value. In this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be made different depending on the setting value.

  (101) The table counter ATK is added based on the fact that the immediate effect is continued as the additional effect in the specialization zone, and the additional notification timing table is switched, but based on the fact that the additional effect is continued The additional notification timing table may be switched. In this case, the table counter ATK may be initialized (1) based on the occurrence of the immediate effect.

  In addition, the continuity of the immediate rendering and the additional rendering is not limited only to the specialization zone, and as the additional rendering occurring in the attack mode, the continuous rendering and the additional rendering are continuous and the additional rendering is continuous. The notification timing table may be switched.

  In addition, the switching timing of the additional notification timing table is not limited to the continuity of the selected effect, and the additional notification timing table is generated when the addition by the same type of small part is continued (for example, when the cherry trigger is continuously added). , And may be configured to initialize the table counter ATK when successive additions by small characters of other types continue.

  (102) Although the switching of the additional notification timing table is performed by the fact that the immediate effect is continuous, the switching of the additional notification timing table is simply performed by the number of times of the immediate effect, even if it is not continuous. It may be In this case, for example, the first additional notification timing table is selected when the number of times of selection of the immediate effect (table counter ATK) is 1 to 3 and the number of times of selection of the immediate effect (table counter ATK) is 4 or 5 times The fourth additional notification timing table is selected, and the first additional notification timing table is selected if the number of selections of the immediate addition effect (table counter ATK) is six or more, etc. Settings based on the selected additional notification timing table The difficulty level of the value estimation does not change uniformly depending on the number of times (the degree of difficulty increases as the number of times increases, or the degree of difficulty decreases as the number of times increases). .

  (103) Although the configuration is such that the degree of difficulty in estimating the setting value based on the additional notification timing selected by increasing the number of consecutive effects of immediate mounting effects is reduced, the selection is performed by increasing the number of consecutive positions of immediate mounting effects The configuration may be configured such that the difficulty in estimating the setting value based on the additional notification timing is increased.

  (104) In the configuration for switching the additional notification timing table, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be different depending on the transition trigger to the specialization zone. Specifically, for example, if the transition trigger to the specialization zone is watermelon, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1, while if the transition trigger to the specialization zone is cherry, the initial value of the table counter ATK is The value may be 3, for example. By doing this, it is possible to make the difficulty of inferring the setting value different based on the transition opportunity to the specialization zone.

  (105) Although the specialization zone to be transitioned by cherries is the specialization zone in which the special addition notification timing table having a large setting difference of the immediate loading / postloading ratio is used, the transition to the specializing zone is made by the watermelon timing. It is good also as composition which shifts to the specialization zone concerned by another specific service opportunity.

  (106) Although the configuration is such that the additional notification timing table is made different between the specialization zone that is transitioned by the cherry opportunity and the specialization zone that is transitioned by the other special combination, the specialization in which the additional notification timing table to be used is different The number of zones is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

  (107) In the game property in which the setting value is predicted based on the immediate loading / after-loading ratio, the additional rendering may be generated at a timing different from that of the immediate rendering and the additional rendering. For example, the game characteristic may be such that prediction of the set value is performed by the selection rate including the indication via the sign.

  (108) Although the information regarding the immediate loading / afterloading ratio is output at the end of the specialization zone or at the end of the attack mode, an addition as a target of the ratio occurs in the specialization zone or the attack mode. If not, that is, if the watermelon or cherry has not been won, it may be configured not to output information on the immediate loading / after loading ratio.

  (109) It is good also as composition which makes it possible to output information about information timings, such as immediate loading / after-loading ratio, by lottery. For example, the output lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability at the end of the attack mode, and information on the notification timing may be output when the output lottery is won. Although the winning probability of the output lottery is arbitrary, the winning probability may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the winning probability may be higher as the set value is higher, or vice versa. Further, the winning probability may be different depending on the number of digested games in the attack mode (advantage zone). In this case, the winning probability may be higher as the number of digested games is larger, or vice versa.

  (110) The output timing of the information related to the notification timing, such as the immediate loading / after loading ratio, is not limited to the end of the specialized zone or the end of the attack mode, and may be output at other timing. For example, it may be configured to be output based on the number of executed games in the advantageous section reaching a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) before the upper limit. Further, it may be configured to be output during the bonus state at the start or end of the bonus state won in the attack mode. Furthermore, it may be configured to be able to be output when triggered by the specific combination winning (for example, cherry winning) in the attack mode.

  (111) In the configuration for outputting information related to notification timing such as immediate loading / afterloading ratio, it may be configured to output information including non-winning in additional lottery for which additional lottery has been performed. In addition, when outputting information related to the notification timing of the additional effect triggered by the winning combination in which a drop occurs such as Cherry, information including the presence or absence of a drop may be output.

  (112) In the configuration in which information regarding the immediate loading / afterloading ratio is output, only the ratio may be output, and information regarding the number of times of each immediate rendering effect or the postloading effect may not be output. By doing this, it is possible to avoid, for example, suppressing the deterioration of the impression given to the player due to the small number of winnings on the top.

  (113) In the notification mode selection effect, the instant placement effect is selected when a reel causing dropout is selected. However, the postloading effect may be selected when a reel where dropout occurs is selected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a omen passing effect is selected. Moreover, although the selection operation and the execution timing of the additional notification to be selected are associated in the relationship between the reel where the drop occurs and the reel that does not occur, the reel with different possibility of drop is set, and then the drop is missed. The selection operation may be associated with the execution timing of the additional notification to be selected according to the height of the possibility of the above. More specifically, for example, when a reel with the highest possibility of being dropped (a reel with a small number of winning-design-applicable symbols) is selected and operated, it may be configured that an immediate placement effect is selected.

  (114) Although in the notification mode selection effect, the execution timing of the additional effect is selected by the stop operation of the first reel, the execution timing is selected by the stop operation of the second reel and the stop operation of the third reel. It is also good. In addition, in the predetermined reel, the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol and the third specific symbol that can not be stopped simultaneously are provided, and the execution timing is selected depending on which specific symbol is to be stopped. It is also good.

  (115) Although the processing for correction changes the data of each after game effect into an immediate effect individually in a situation where the after game effect is selected, it is possible to change each data uniformly into an immediate effect It is good also as composition. Further, it may be possible to select whether or not to change to the immediate effect according to the type of the additional event of the data to be added. Further, it may be configured to be able to select whether or not to change to an immediate effect according to the number of games to be added.

  (116) Although the data for which post-addition effects are selected is changed to immediate effects by the correction processing, the data may be changed to pre-post effects, or data for which pre-event effects are selected It may be configured to be changed to an immediate ride effect or a post ride effect.

  (117) The configuration of the individual area to be stored when the after-sales effect or the aura-based effect is selected and determined is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of games that can be stored may be smaller or larger than those described above. In addition, the number of individual data can also be changed.

  (118) In the case where a memory opportunity (selection of an add-on effect, etc.) more than the number of individual areas provided for an individual area storing additional data occurs, data of any one or plural areas of each individual area On the other hand, the number of added games may be added. In the case of the configuration in which data is added to data of a plurality of areas, the number of added games this time may be equally divided and added, or may be divided and weighted.

  (119) In the case where the after game effect is selected, the first after game character BUP1 and the second after game character BUP2 are displayed according to the additional game winning opportunity, but these after game characters are the above-mentioned ones. It is not limited to. For example, different characters may be displayed according to the number of added games.

  (120) The configuration for varying the execution timing of the additional effect is not limited to the effect when the additional lottery is won, and may be applied when the additional lottery is not won.

  (121) In the configuration in which the execution timing of the additional effect is determined based on the selection operation of the player, the execution timing different from the execution timing selected by the player by the selection operation in the relationship between the number of additional games and the upper limit game number of the advantageous section The superimposing effect may be executed at timing. More specifically, for example, in a situation where there are 50 games up to the upper limit game number of the advantageous section (a situation in which the number of running games is 1450 games), when 100 games additional to 50 games occur, the immediate game effect Even if is selected, an additional effect is generated as an additional effect. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp that the addition of the upper limit game number or more occurs and the advantageous section is forced to end by being added to the timing different from the own selection operation.

  Note that this configuration may be used to indicate a set value. More specifically, the additional effect is generated at a predetermined probability and at a timing different from the execution timing by the selection operation of the player. Then, when the setting value is a first setting value (for example, setting 1), the additional effect is executed at a timing different from the selection operation with the first probability (for example, 10%) as the predetermined probability. If it is a second set value (for example, setting 6) different from one set value, the additional effect is generated at a timing different from the selection operation at a second probability (for example, 80%) different from the first probability as the predetermined probability. Configured to be executed. By doing this, it is possible to realize new game characteristics such as predicting the set value through the generation of the additional effect at an execution timing different from the selection operation of oneself.

  Furthermore, when an increase in the number of games more than the number of vacant games up to the upper limit game number in the advantageous section occurs, the effect is different from that in the selection operation, although the additional effect can be generated. The probability that the additional effect is generated at the execution timing may be different depending on the set value. In this way, when the addition exceeding the upper limit occurs, it is possible to generate the merit that it becomes possible to predict the set value, and it becomes possible to secure the excess of the upper limit due to the addition.

  (122) Although the composition is such that the payout rate changes with each setting value, setting 1 has the lowest payout rate and setting 6 has the highest payout rate, but the setting value causes the payout (game media) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of change or the rate of change of For example, the setting rate may be the same as the setting rate of the setting 2 and the setting rate of the setting 2, and the setting rate may have the same setting, and the setting rate of the other setting may be different. Further, the setting 1, 3 and 5 may have a high rate of change in popping balls, and the setting 2, 4 and 6 may have a low rate of change in popping balls. In Settings 1 and 5, the amount of popped out increases by a predetermined amount in a short time, and the amount of popped out decreases by a predetermined amount in a long time. The reduction of the predetermined amount may be performed in a shorter time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that little increase or decrease in the number of balls is generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

  (123) Although the slot machine including the reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the stop operation of the reel, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and the corresponding stop switches. Although the slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one in the case where the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the number of active lines may be five.

  (124) Although an example embodied for the slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a game machine of a type in which the slot machine and the pachinko machine are integrated. That is, among the slot machines, in place of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine (so-called ball-use game machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  For example, in a pachinko machine or ball-used rotary-type game machine, the set values for changing the payout rate etc. have a plurality of stages, and each of the above inventions may be applied as a suggestion or teaching effect of these set values. Good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and entering a predetermined ball entry section In a pachinko machine having a high entering state and a low entering state in which the ball rate is high and low, the above-mentioned inventions may be applied with the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 as the high entering state.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

  The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups are “A pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. is known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, the start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet, for example, the player is given a benefit according to the result of the internal lottery. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. In the case where the result corresponds to the result of (1), a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In the gaming machine illustrated above and the like must increase player's interest in the game, in this regard, in which the invention that there. "Is still room for improvement has been made with the problems to be solved.

<Feature AA group>
Feature AA1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit. Privilege awarding means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function to execute payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
It is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result, and the transition lottery means (performing the first specific part process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state) Function),
The notification is started by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the identification is performed based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by setting the notification means to the off state;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
A first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, main controller 101 executes processing to start display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation in a first mode defined in advance) Function),
Second means for starting or ending notification by the specific notification means in a second mode different from the first mode (for example, processing for starting display of a section indicator at the time of third stop OFF operation in the main control device 101 And the ability to perform
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when transitioning to the specific gaming state where the mode notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first mode or may be performed in the second mode. In this way, the notification effect is simply started upon transitioning to the specific gaming state, and the notification is ended upon termination of the specific gaming state, and the expectation effect of the game is fully expected using the specific notification means. Is also possible. Moreover, if the above configuration is used, for example, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won and the notification by the specific notification means is started or the notification by the specific notification means is ended by playing the specific gaming state It is possible to give information such as the contents of the game and the contents of the specific gaming state to the player who played the game in the start / end mode of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is also possible to secure the superiority to the player who played the game as the trigger of the notification while securing the equality between the players by the presence or absence of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

  In addition, about "the specific gaming state notification means", the notification is started by setting the specific notification means to the lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state is ended. According to the configuration, the notification is terminated by setting the specific notification unit to the off state, but the notification is simply started by the specific notification unit based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state. The notification by the specific notification unit may be terminated based on the end of the gaming state. The same applies to the "specified game state notification means" in the following other features.

  Feature AA2. The specific gaming state notification means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means by the second means when starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means by the first means, according to the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state It is possible to make it different from the case where it ends, The gaming machine according to the feature AA1.

  According to the above configuration, the start and the end of the notification by the specific notification means are different depending on the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state between the case where it is performed in the first mode and the case where it is performed in the second mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise the interest to the specific notification means when the notification by the specific notification means starts / ends.

Feature AA3. The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific gaming state is a predetermined first predetermined state, the notification by the specific notification means is started or ended by the first means,
In the case where the specific gaming state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the notification by the specific notification means is started or ended by the second means in the feature AA1 or the feature AA2 The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the first mode and the second mode are different depending on the type of the specific gaming state as the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state. Because it is important to shift to any state in the game characteristics by the stop operation mode and mode notification of the first result and the second result, by doing as described above, notification of the specific notification means It is possible to suitably increase the interest in initiation. In addition, even when the notification is ended, if the notification of the specific notification means is ended in the mode associated with the information indicating which state it is, after the termination mode of the notification of the specific notification means, the aftermath of these states It is possible to entertain

Feature AA4. The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, the first means starts notification by the specific notification means,
When the specific gaming state is the second predetermined state, the second means starts notification by the specific notification means, the gaming machine according to the feature AA3.

  According to the above configuration, of the feature AA3, the effect at the start of the notification can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature AA5. The specific game state notification means performs the notification during the specific game state in the same manner in the case where the notification is started or ended by the first means and when the notification is started or ended by the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA4 characterized in that.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification mode is the same during the specific gaming state, the function of securing the equality between the players can be achieved by the notification of the specific notification means, and when the notification modes of the specific notification means start different points By aggregating at the end time, it is possible to easily understand the timing to be focused, and it is also possible to suitably increase the level of attention to the specific notification means.

  Feature AA6. The specific gaming state notification means starts the notification by the specific notification means in any of the first aspect and the second aspect according to the content of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA5, comprising start time setting means (a function of executing a section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting the setting.

  According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the notification is started in the second mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in which aspect or not, and thereby to preferably achieve the attention level improvement effect.

  Note that the above-mentioned "according to the content of the specific gaming state" is, for example, "a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode) having different degrees of advantage for the player as the specific gaming state. Etc.), depending on whether the specific gaming state is a first predetermined state or a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, etc., etc., during the specific gaming state It may be expressed using the type of state. In addition, it may be made to correspond to the number of continued games and the like as “according to the length of the specific gaming state”.

  Feature AA7. The specific gaming state notification means, according to the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state when starting the notification by the specific notification means, the notification by the specific notification means in any of the first aspect and the second aspect A game machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA6, comprising start time setting means (a function of executing a section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether to start.

  According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first aspect or the notification is started in the second aspect. This makes it possible to increase the interest in which aspect or not, and thereby to preferably achieve the attention level improvement effect.

  Further, when the present configuration is applied to the feature AA6, the "start setting means" of the feature AA6 may be read as the "start setting means" of the present configuration, or the "start setting means" of the feature AA6 Alternatively, the “starting time setting means” of the present configuration may be read as the “second starting time setting means”. That is, when the "start setting means" overlap in applying each feature, one "start time setting means" may be limited by the configuration of the other "start time setting means" or both The configuration may be such that "start time setting means" coexist. In addition, the relationship of limitation or duplication of each means is the same for each of the following features.

  Feature AA8. When the notification of the identification notification unit is started or ended by the first means, the notification is started or ended at a first timing as the first aspect, and the identification notification is performed by the second means. When the notification of the means is started or ended, the features AA1 to AA7 are characterized in that, as the second aspect, the notification is started or ended at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  As the mode of starting / terminating the notification of the specific notification means, in addition to the difference in timing, the difference in display contents (color difference, image difference, etc.), the difference in sound, etc. are included. In the second mode, the notification start / end timing of the specific notification means is different. Therefore, it is also possible to make other differences (differences in display contents and sounds, etc.) the same, and the first means and the second means share effect data at the start / end of notification of the specific notification means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects of the respective features with a simple configuration.

  Feature AA9. The second timing is a timing after the first timing, and when the notification of the specific notification means is started at the second timing, the specific notification means at the first timing. The gaming machine according to Feature AA8, wherein the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the notification of is started.

  According to the above configuration, if the notification start timing on the rear side is more advantageous to the player, it is preferable that the notification start be made later, so that it is possible to enjoy the sensation of pounding as long as the notification is started or not. It becomes.

Feature AA10. In the situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the selection lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the specific result combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position is stopped by the specific result A game in which a bonus corresponding to the game can be given by the bonus giving means is a start game,
The specific gaming state notification means is to start notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the next game of the start game at least,
The gaming machine according to Feature AA9, wherein the first timing and the second timing are included in the start game.

  According to the above configuration, since the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started is more restrictive, it is difficult for the game to be extended in the game as to whether or not the notification is performed. Further, by setting the end of the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started, the points to be focused on whether the notification by the specific notification means is performed (whether or not the transition lottery has been won) are collected If the back timing is more advantageous for the player as in the feature AA9, the notification is started at the front timing and a sense of security is obtained. It becomes possible to realize the playability of being able to enjoy the feeling of pounding without starting the notification until the timing on the rear side.

Feature AA11. The first means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means based on the fact that the first stop operation means of the plurality of stop operation means is operated.
The second means starts notification by the specific notification means based on the fact that the second stop operation means operated later than the first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means is operated or The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA10, which is characterized by ending.

  According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification unit is started or ended according to the operation of the plurality of stop operation units. In this way, for example, the stop operation means is operated with expectation while wishing that the notification by the specific notification means is started or not ended, that is, the specific gaming state or the specific gaming state continues. It is possible to Therefore, when each game progresses, the fun of the operation of the stop operation means can be increased.

  In addition, if the said structure is applied to feature AA6, the following effects are show | played especially.

  Since the content of the specific gaming state to be notified of by the specific notification means may differ depending on the destination of the stop operation means operated, in the game where the notification by the specific notification means can be started, the degree of expectation is gradually changed Each stop operation means can be operated. In addition, the stop operation means on the rear side is stopped by stopping the corresponding circulating members based on the operation of each stop operation means, and stopping the pattern combination corresponding to the game result by stopping all the circulation members. In the case of the operation of, there is a high possibility that the pattern combination corresponding to the above game result is approaching completion. Then, the completion degree of the symbol combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started can be linked with the content of the specific gaming state to be notified of by the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, notification can be made by the specific notification means using the relationship with the pattern stopped at each revolving member, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the attention to the notification. .

  In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the feature AA7, the following effects can be obtained.

  Depending on the destination of the stop operation means operated, the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ, so in the game where the notification by the specific notification means may be started, the degree of expectation is changed stepwise The respective stop operation means can be operated. In addition, the stop operation means on the rear side is stopped by stopping the corresponding circulating members based on the operation of each stop operation means, and stopping the pattern combination corresponding to the game result by stopping all the circulation members. In the case of the operation of, there is a high possibility that the pattern combination corresponding to the above game result is approaching completion. Then, the completion degree of the symbol combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started can be linked with the advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified of the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, notification can be made by the specific notification means using the relationship with the pattern stopped at each revolving member, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the attention to the notification. .

Feature AA12. The stop operating means is displaceable from an initial position to an operating position;
The drive control means drives and controls the corresponding orbiting body to stop based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position,
According to the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started, based on the fact that the predetermined stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position as the first aspect It is set whether to start notification by the specific notification unit or to start notification by the specific notification unit based on the predetermined stop operation unit returning from the operation position to the initial position as the second mode A game machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA11, comprising start time setting means (a function of executing a section display first process by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, when the notification by the specific notifying means is started based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position to stop the circulating body, the stop operation means is operated to the operation position There is a case where the notification by the specific notification means is started based on returning to the initial position after stopping the orbiter, and the advantages of the specific gaming state to be notified of the specific notification means are different from each other. ing. By doing this, it becomes possible to start the notification by the specific notification means in the relation between the action of stopping each orbiter and the afterglow after the stop, and the notification of the specific notification means is started The degree of attention to things is more preferably enhanced.

  Feature AA13. The specific game state notification means may be in any one of the first aspect and the second aspect according to the content of the specific game state which has been the notification target when the notification by the specific notification means is ended. It is characterized by having an end time setting means (a function for executing the process of ending the advantageous section display in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether or not the notification by the specific informing means is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA12.

  According to the above configuration, whether the notification is ended in the first mode or the notification is ended in the second mode differs depending on the contents of the specific gaming state which has been carried out. By doing this, for example, when the content of the specific gaming state would not be what the player desires (when ending with a short number of games, etc.), the content of the specific gaming state is the player It is possible to expect a rendering effect at the end by making the notification end mode by the specific notification means different and the like (if it continues for a long number of games, etc.) It becomes.

Feature AA14. Content notification means for executing content notification (superimposed notification effect) relating to the specified gaming condition being executed that is an effect to be executed during the specified gaming condition (function to execute the added notification effect in the display control device 81) Equipped with
The content notification by the content notification means tends to be more advantageous to the player as the period from when the notification execution timing occurs to when the notification is performed is longer.
The specific gaming state notification means is such that the content of the specific gaming state being notified of by the specific notification means is more advantageous to the player, to the rear of the first means and the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA13, wherein it is easy to start or end the notification by the specific notification unit by means of starting or ending the notification.

  According to the above configuration, the content notification of the specific gaming state which is the target of the notification becomes advantageous for the player as the start / end of the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is late, the content notification during the specific gaming state This is associated with the relation of the execution timing of the event, and the notification becomes familiar or easy to understand for the player. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the start and end of notification by the specific game state notification means are associated with the content to be enjoyed.

Feature AA15. The specific game state notification means is
Either the notification by the identification notification unit is started by the first unit or the notification by the identification notification unit is started by the second unit according to the game situation when the transition lottery by the transition lottery unit is won The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA14, which can be different.

  According to the above configuration, not only the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not only won but also the start mode of the notification by the specific notification means differs depending on the game situation depending on the transition lottery. By doing this, diversification of notification modes can be achieved.

Feature AA16. The situation setting means (in the main control device 101) sets the gaming situation as a specific situation, where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transition lottery means does not win the transition lottery Function to execute processing for specific state)
The specific gaming state informing means is more likely to be suggested by the start mode of the informing by the specific informing means that information which may be useful to the player is more likely in the specific situation than in the non-specific situation. It is possible to differ in which of the one means and the second means the notification by the specific notification means is to be started.

  According to the above configuration, the game situation may be set as the specific situation even if the lottery result is the specific result or the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not won. If the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won during the specific situation, information that may be useful to the player is suggested by the start mode of the notification by the specific gaming state notification means. In this way, not only whether to win the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, but also whether it is set to the specific situation will be the heart of the game, and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not won You can try not to be too discouraged.

  The "information that may be useful to the player" may be, for example, "information of the setting value set by the setting means".

Feature AA17. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA16, which is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

Feature AA18. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA17, wherein the winning probability of the shifting lottery by the shifting lottery means is the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. .

  According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the probability of winning due to the setting value in relation to the specific gaming state, so even if any of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is selected, the equality for the game regarding the specific gaming state is Secured. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification unit, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

  Feature AA19. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA18, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by means of the specific notification means, and to expect the effects and effects of the attraction described in the feature AA1.

Characteristics AA 20. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit. Privilege awarding means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function to execute payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
It is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result, and the transition lottery means (performing the first specific part process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state) Function),
The notification is started by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the identification is performed based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by setting the notification means to the off state;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
A first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a predetermined first timing (for example, the main control device 101 executes a process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation) Function),
Second means for starting or ending notification by the specific notification means at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, main controller 101 starts displaying a section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation) Function to execute the processing
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when transitioning to the specific gaming state where the mode notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed at the first timing or may be performed at the second timing. In this way, the notification effect is simply started upon transitioning to the specific gaming state, and the notification is ended upon termination of the specific gaming state, and the expectation effect of the game is fully expected using the specific notification means. Is also possible. In addition, if the above configuration is used, a game in which the notification by the specific notification unit is ended by causing the specific notification unit to start notification or by causing the specific notification unit to play a game is selected. It becomes possible to provide information such as the contents of the game and the contents of the specific gaming state to the player who has made the game at the start / end timing of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the superiority to the player who played the game as the trigger of the notification while securing the equality between the players by the presence or absence of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

Characteristics AA 21. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit. Privilege awarding means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function to execute payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
It is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result, and the transition lottery means (performing the first specific part process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state) Function),
The notification is started by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the identification is performed based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by setting the notification means to the off state;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
First means for starting or ending notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighted state or the extinguished state in a predetermined first color (for example, a section indicator in red in the main control device 101 Function to execute processing to start display),
Second means (for example, a green section in the main control device 101) for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighting state or the extinguishing state in the second color different from the first color A function of executing processing to start display of the display),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when transitioning to the specific gaming state where the mode notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first color or in the second color. In this way, the notification effect is simply started upon transitioning to the specific gaming state, and the notification is ended upon termination of the specific gaming state, and the expectation effect of the game is fully expected using the specific notification means. Is also possible. In addition, if the above configuration is used, a game in which the notification by the specific notification unit is ended by causing the specific notification unit to start notification or by causing the specific notification unit to play a game is selected. It becomes possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific gaming state to the player who has made the game, by the difference in color at the start / end of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the superiority to the player who played the game as the trigger of the notification while securing the equality between the players by the presence or absence of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

  Each configuration of the features AA1 to AA19 may be individually applied to the feature AA20 or the feature AA21, or may be applied by combining each configuration.

<Feature AB group>
Characteristics AB1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
Notification is started during the state by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and based on the termination of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function for executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification during the state by setting the specific notification means to the off state;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state notification means is a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won. A game in which a benefit corresponding to the specified result can be given by the benefit giving means by stopping the game is regarded as a start game, and at least before the operation of the next game of the start game is permitted. Informing the state during the state by the specific informing means is started,
At a timing prior to the start of the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means, the special notification corresponding to the content of the specific gaming state targeted for the notification during the state is specified in advance. Special notification means (section display first processing by the main control device 101 and special RT status processing) that can be executed by the notification means (eighth display segment N8, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, auxiliary display unit 65, etc.) A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a function to execute notification means for a special RT state by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is easily performed, in-state notification by the specific informing means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, in-state informing by the specific informing means is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the start of the in-state notification is time-limited, whether the in-state notification is finally started (until the operation of the next game is permitted) Only the player's interest may be poured, and in this case, it may be determined as the player whether the notification during the state is started when the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. As a result, the attention of the starting game itself may be reduced. Therefore, in the present gaming machine, in addition to the notification during the state, the middle of the start game which is the timing before the notification during the state is started, the timing when the transition lottery is won, etc. (mainly the start timing of the start game ), The special notification corresponding to the contents of the specific gaming state can be executed by the specific notification means. By doing this, it pays attention to whether or not the notification during state is started by the specific notification means, and for the player who is interested in the game following the start game Can be transferred to

  Features AB2. In the case where the special notification is performed at the first timing by the special notification means, and in the case where the special notification is performed at the second timing that is later than the first timing, The gaming machine according to the feature AB1 characterized in that an advantage of the specific gaming state, which is a target for which the notification during the state is started by the specific notifying means, is different.

  According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified of during the state to be started thereafter differs depending on the timing at which the special notification is performed by the special notification means. By doing this, the interest in the special notification to the special notification means can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

  Feature AB3. As the content of the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player, the special notification means is easier to perform the special notification at the second timing than at the first timing, as described in the feature AB2. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, as the execution timing of the special notification is later, the specific game state of the advantageous content is more likely to be given to the player. Therefore, in the start game, it is expected that the special notification is not executed earlier. The progress operation of the start game can be performed while expecting the in-state notification to be started before the operation of the next game is permitted. Therefore, the game progress in the start game and the degree of expectation can be associated to realize the game characteristics having different degrees of expectation in stages.

  In addition, since it is premised that the notification during the state is started before the operation of the game next to the start game is permitted, the special notification performed before the notification during the state If the construction is more advantageous as the execution timing of S is later, the closer the execution / start timing of the special notification and the in-state notification is, the more advantageous it is for the player. In this way, awareness of the start of in-state notification can be performed using the advantage of the specific gaming state and the difference in the execution timing of the special notification, and the degrees of freedom of the notification modes are compared. Even in the case of a notification during a state that is extremely small, it is possible to greatly change the impression on the notification.

Characteristics AB4. The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The special notification means can easily perform the special notification at the first timing when the specific gaming state targeted for the notification during the state to be started is the first predetermined state defined in advance, In the case where the specific gaming state targeted for the notification during the state to be started is the second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the second timing different from the first timing is the second predetermined state. It is a structure which is easy to perform special alerting | reporting, The game machine in any one of the features AB1 to AB3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above configuration, if the notification timing at which the special notification is easy to be executed is made different depending on the type of the specific gaming state, the type of the specific gaming state is shifted from the notification timing (the notification during the state is started) The game of, is added, and diversification of a game is achieved.

  Features AB5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB1 to AB4, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification based on an operation of a predetermined stop operation means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the operation of each stop operation means until the notification during the state is performed and the special notification, and in the situation where the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the special notification is It is possible to operate the stop operating means with the expectation of being performed.

  In particular, in the gaming machine to which the game property utilizing the result that benefits given depending on the stop order among the stop operation modes are different is attached, the eyes of the player tend to go only to the operation order of each stop operation means There is a possibility that the playability inherent in the slot machine, such as operating each stop operation means to stop the pattern, may be neglected. In that respect, as described above, if the special notification is performed based on the operation of the stop operation means, the passive game in which the stop operation means is operated to stop the revolving unit in the order indicated. In addition to the nature, it is possible to realize an active game property such as generating a special notification by operating the stop operation means, and by increasing the degree of attention to the operation of each stop operation means, each stop operation It becomes possible to rekindle or secure the original gameplay of the slot machine such as stopping the pattern by operating the means.

Features AB6. The stop operating means is displaceable from an initial position to an operating position;
The drive control means drives and controls the corresponding orbiting body to stop based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position,
The predetermined stop operation means is operated from the operation position than when the special notification is performed based on the fact that the predetermined stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position by the special notification means. The gaming machine according to Feature AB5, wherein the contents of the specific gaming state are more advantageous to the player when the special notification is given based on returning to the initial position.

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the stop operation means is displaced to the operation position and the corresponding circulating body is stopped, the special notification is performed while the circulating body is stopped, but after the circulating body is stopped. It is advantageous for the player that the special notification is given by. In other words, stopping by the stopping operation is more effective when stopping the circling body and seeing the number of stops with a special notification and a set is more advantageous than when only a special notification is given before stopping ) Can enhance the impression that has become advantageous.

  Feature AB7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB1 to AB6, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification by the specific notification means as the specific notification means.

  According to the above configuration, not only the concentration of the configuration is achieved, but also the degree of attention to the special notification is enhanced using the height of interest to the notification during the state, and the height of interest to the special notification is used. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the notification during the state, and the degree of attention to both the notification can be suitably increased.

Feature AB8. The specific notification means is configured to be able to switch between an off state and a lit state,
The specific gaming state notification means starts the notification during the state by switching the specific notification means from the extinguished state to the lighted state, and switches the specific informing device from the lighted state to the extinguished state. During the notification is to end
The special notification means performs the special notification using the timing at which the specific notification means is switched from the light-off state to the light-on state, when the notification during the state is started. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification means can be realized with a simple configuration of switching between the light off state and the lighting state, and the special notification by the special notification means such as the difference in switching timing to the lighting state It is possible to enhance the rendering effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to make compatible the contradictory effects, such as simplification of a structure and improvement of a rendering effect.

Features AB9. In the situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB) including the identification result, and is won in the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, for the transition corresponding to the transition result to the effective position When the combination of symbols does not stop and a benefit corresponding to the transition result is not given by the benefit awarding means, the game for which the transition result is won may be a winning game, and the transition result may be reserved. Reserve means (function of executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101);
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the benefit corresponding to the transition result is provided by the stopping means by stopping the symbol combination for the transition at the effective position. The game machine according to any one of the features AB1 to AB8, wherein the game is a start game.

  According to the above configuration, by retaining the transition result winning, the number of games for which the special notification can be executed is increased, and the execution timing of the special notification is diversified. As a result, the fun of the game can be improved such as predicting / determining the content of the specific gaming state to be notified of during the state by the special notification.

  With regard to the "transition result", "It is advantageous for the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. By limiting the configuration of “transition to an advantageous state (bonus state)”, it is made more clear that it is a so-called jackpot result (bonus) that can be reserved by the retention means.

  Feature AB10. The special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game between the winning game and the start game in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means. Feature AB9 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, since the special notification is performed in the game from the winning game to the starting game, the extension of the game while the specific result winning is reserved is suppressed. That is, by retaining the transition result winning, it is possible to extend the game for determining whether or not to be the transition result and realize the game property of sustaining a sense of expectation, while the game to be reserved is long While the effect of sustaining the sense of expectation can be expected, the longer the game to be reserved, the more likely it is for a pause to occur and the degree of attention may be reduced. In that respect, if the special notification is performed during the reservation as in the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the feeling of extension to be generated, and to achieve the effect of sustaining the expectation by the reservation.

  Characteristics AB11. The special notification means can execute the special notification based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined notification response result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means. The gaming machine according to feature AB10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the lottery results of each game being reserved. That is, if special notification is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery means in reserve instead of performing special notification as an effect simply during reservation, each game in reserve is waiting for a special notification or transition result prize. It is possible to make the lottery of each game have a meaning, instead of making it a digest game.

Features AB12. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a first identification result (for example, a single role of strong watermelon) not including the transition result among the identification results, the game in which the lottery result is the first identification result is the It is considered the start game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second identification result (for example, strong watermelon + first BB overlapping combination) including the transition result among the identification results, the game in which the transition result winning is established is the start game The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB9 to AB11, which is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, whether or not to reserve is different depending on the type of the specific result. In this way, there are cases where the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are reserved, and the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are not reserved, and the execution and the status of the special notification The mode of starting the middle notification is greatly diversified.

  Feature AB13. In the game according to the feature AB12, it is possible to stop the combination of symbols common to the effective positions in the game in which the first identification result is won and in the game in which the second identification result is won. .

  According to the above configuration, it can not be judged from the stopping appearance whether the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are also reserved. Thereby, even if the special notification or the notification during the state is not performed when the common pattern combination is stopped, the sense of expectation can be maintained in the subsequent games.

  Feature AB14. The gaming machine according to Feature AB13, wherein the common symbol combination can be stopped even when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and the transition lottery is not won.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific result is won, the common symbol combination is stopped regardless of the presence or absence of the win in the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and the number of stops is common. Therefore, even if it is the same stopping result, a pattern in which special notification and in-state notification are performed without being reserved by the retaining means, and a pattern in which special notification and in-state notification are performed after being reserved by the retaining means, In addition to this, there will be added a pattern in which neither special notification nor in-state notification is performed from the beginning. In this way, it is possible not only to play a game in which a common combination of symbols has stopped, but also to play a game while giving expectation that special announcements and in-state announcements will be made in subsequent games.

Characteristics AB15. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB1 to AB14, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Characteristics AB16. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB1 to AB15, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by means of the specific notification means, and to expect the stage effect and the interest improvement described in the feature AB1.

<Feature AC group>
Characteristics AC1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
Notification is started during the state by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and based on the termination of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function for executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification during the state by setting the specific notification means to the off state;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state notification means is a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won. A game in which a benefit corresponding to the specified result can be given by the benefit giving means by stopping the game is regarded as a start game, and at least before the operation of the next game of the start game is permitted. Informing the state during the state by the specific informing means is started,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising restriction means (function of executing a section display third process by the main control device 101) capable of restricting that an operation of a game following the start game is permitted.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is easily performed, in-state notification by the specific informing means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, in-state informing by the specific informing means is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  On the other hand, if it is carried out as mentioned above, the timing which can start a notice in state becomes short, and it becomes a monotonous start production which can not anticipate the presentation effect at the time, or it is started by the timing becoming short. It can also be a concern that things themselves are missed. In that respect, in the present gaming machine, since it is provided with a limiting means capable of restricting that the operation of the next game of the starting game is permitted, in the state through the restriction that the operation of the next game is permitted. It is possible to notice that the notification is performed, and if the operation of the next game is allowed to be restricted in this way, the period in which the notification can be started during the condition will be extended. Diversification of the start mode of the middle notification can be achieved.

Characteristics AC2. It is equipped with progress processing execution means (function which performs normal processing by main control device 101) which performs progress processing of a game,
In the feature AC1, the execution of the specific process (the function of executing the payout control process by the main control device 101) in the progress process in the start game is restricted by the restriction by the restriction means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the progress of the start game is restricted by restricting the execution of the specific process in the progress processing of the start game, thereby restricting that the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. It can be done. By doing this, it is possible to reflect the event of transition to the specific gaming state generated in the start game to the next game of the start game while securing the independence of each game.

  Characteristics AC3. During the restriction period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed, the operation in the start game is also restricted, and the gaming machine according to the feature AC1 or the feature AC2.

  According to the above configuration, by restricting the operation of the start game, it is possible to restrict the progress of the start game, thereby restricting the permission of the operation of the next game to the start game. . By doing this, it is possible to reflect the event of transition to the specific gaming state generated in the start game to the next game of the start game while securing the independence of each game.

  Characteristics AC4. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC3, wherein the specific gaming state notification means can start the notification during the state during the restriction period by the restriction means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notice that the in-state notification is started through the restriction of the operation, and to preferably confirm the start of the in-state notification.

Features AC5. It has a limit period setting means (function to execute freeze setting processing in the section display third processing by the main control device 101) for setting the length of the limit period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed,
The restriction period setting unit is configured such that a period from the start of restriction by the restriction means to the start of the in-state notification corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state to be notified of the in-state notification. The gaming machine according to feature AC4, wherein the length of the limited period can be set.

  According to the above configuration, since the period from when the operation of the next game of the start game is permitted to when the notification during state is started is associated with the content of the specific gaming state, the period is restricted. By increasing the degree of attention to the length of the period, the degree of attention to the start of in-state notification can be suitably enhanced.

  Feature AC6. The gaming machine according to Feature AC5, wherein control corresponding to a predetermined operation performed by a player is restricted by performing restriction by the restriction means.

  According to the above configuration, the player performs the operation in comparison with the configuration in which the progress of the unilateral processing on the gaming machine side is restricted by restricting the control corresponding to the operation performed by the player. You will notice that it is limited by, which makes it difficult to know when the restriction starts. Therefore, in a configuration in which the length of the limited period is important as in the feature AC5, it is difficult to clearly grasp the length, and provisionally, the start timing (period length) of the in-state notification is Even if it is not desirable for the player, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation until shifting to the specific gaming state.

Feature AC7. It has a limit period setting means (function to execute freeze setting processing in the section display third processing by the main control device 101) for setting the length of the limit period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed,
The restriction period setting means is a period from the start of the notification during the state to the end of the restriction by the restriction means a content of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC4 to AC6, wherein the length of the limited period can be set to correspond.

  According to the above configuration, since the period from when the notification during the state is started until the operation of the next game is permitted corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state, the player first starts the notification during the state If attention is paid to the notification during the state, attention will be paid to the timing at which the operation is permitted, and effects can be made over time or in stages.

  Characteristics AC8. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC7, wherein the specific gaming state notification means can start the notification during the state in a period different from the restriction period by the restriction means.

  According to the above configuration, it is considered that the period in which the operation is restricted is originally a period in which the attention level is enhanced in a presentation, and the notification to the state can be started outside the period, it is possible to the game It will be possible to improve the degree of attention evenly.

Feature AC9. It has a limit period setting means (function to execute freeze setting processing in the section display third processing by the main control device 101) for setting the length of the limit period in which the restriction by the restriction means is performed,
The feature AC1 characterized in that the limit period setting means can set the length of the limit period according to the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of AC8.

  According to the above configuration, the operation of the next game is restricted, and a period during which notification can be started during the state is secured, and the length of the secured period (limit period) is the specific gaming state It corresponds to the degree of advantage. In this way, it is possible to further enhance the pounding feeling by the length of the period in which the pounding feeling increases, such as whether the notification during the state is started or not. For example, if the specific gaming state is more advantageous as the period in which state notification can be started is longer, not only the enjoyment as to whether state informing notification is started, but also the period continues for a long time without being started. It can be expected that a synergetic attention level improvement effect can be expected, such as the longer the period that has not been started, the more expectations will be given that in-state notification will be started. In addition, if the specific gaming state is more advantageous as the period in which the in-state notification can be started is shorter, the period in which you enjoy whether or not the in-state notification is started is condensed and it is possible to provide a strong pounding feeling. Become.

  Characteristics AC10. The restriction period setting unit is configured to easily set the restriction period longer as the content of the specific game condition corresponding to the notification during the condition by the specific game condition notification unit is more advantageous. Gaming machine.

  Generally, the content of the specific gaming state is more advantageous for the player as the restriction period is longer, as in the above configuration, on the premise that the longer the presentation time is, the easier it becomes for the player to be advantageous. The configuration that makes it easy to obtain the player's comprehension and may be balanced with other effects.

Characteristics AC11. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Characteristics AC12. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC11, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by means of the specific notification means, and to expect the effects and effects of the attraction described in the feature AC1.

<Feature AD group>
Characteristics AD1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
Notification is started during the state by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and based on the termination of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification during the state by setting the specific notification means to the off state;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
In the situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the selection lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the specific result combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position is stopped by the specific result A game in which a bonus corresponding to the bonus game can be given by the bonus giving means is a start game, and the notification during the state by the specific notification means is performed at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game at least. To start,
First means for starting notification in the first mode by the specific notification means when the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position in the start game (for example, main control in super attack mode winning) A function of executing a process of starting display of the interval display at the time of the first stop-off operation of the game of the stop point corresponding to the strong cherry in the device 101);
When the second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position in the start game, the in-state notification by the identification notification means is in the second aspect different from the first aspect To start the second means (for example, when the super attack mode is selected, the main controller 101 executes processing to start display of the interval display at the time of the third stop-off operation of the game corresponding to weak cherry) )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is easily performed, in-state notification by the specific informing means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, in-state informing by the specific informing means is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  On the other hand, if the start of the in-state notification is limited as described above, there is a possibility that the in-state notification start mode may be simplified. However, there is a limit to diversify the start mode of in-state notification. In this respect, in the present gaming machine, the start mode of the in-state notification is made different depending on the number of stop in the start game, that is, the type of the specified result and the winning mode when the specified result is won. As a result, it becomes possible to start notification during the state in relation to the stopping point of each orbiting body, and it is possible to greatly enhance the rendering effect by the notification during the state without changing the configuration of the specific notification means.

Feature AD2. The first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and the second identification result (for example, weak cherry) are included as the identification results,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second identification result, a benefit corresponding to the second identification result is provided by stopping the second symbol combination (single cherry) at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature AD1, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, since the number of stops is different depending on the type of the specific result, in the gaming machine of the feature AD1, the start aspect of the notification during state varies depending on the type of the specific result. By doing this, while grasping what wins the transition lottery to the specific gaming state as a trigger, the pleasure of predicting the subsequent development is added, and the interest is improved.

Characteristics AD3. The third identification result (for example, strong cherry) is included as the identification result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third identification result, a benefit corresponding to the third identification result is given by stopping the first identification symbol combination at the effective position, and the effective position The gaming machine according to the feature AD1 or the feature AD2, wherein a bonus corresponding to the third specified result is given by stopping the second specified pattern combination.

  According to the above configuration, even when the third specific result is the same, the first specific symbol combination is stopped and winning is achieved, and the second specific symbol combination is stopped and winning is established. The start mode of notification during the state is different. By doing this, it is possible to particularly intensify the interest in stopping eyes.

Characteristics AD4. The fourth identification result (for example, strong watermelon) is included as the identification result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth identification result, a benefit corresponding to the fourth identification result is provided by stopping the first specific symbol combination at the effective position, and the effective position The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD3, wherein a bonus corresponding to the fourth specified result is not given by stopping the second specified pattern combination.

  According to the above configuration, in the case of the fourth specified result, when the first specific symbol combination is stopped and a winning is realized, and when the second specific symbol combination is stopped and a winning is not realized, it becomes a so-called dropout. Depending on the case, the start mode of in-state notification differs. By doing this, it is possible to particularly intensify the interest in stopping eyes.

Characteristics AD5. The first means is, for example, the first when the super attack mode is won with a strong cherry before the stop of the specific circulating body which stops at a specific number (second for strong cherries and weak cherries) of the respective circulants Notification can be started during the state according to the first mode at the time of stop-off operation),
The second means is capable of starting the notification during the state according to the second mode after the stop of the specific orbiting body (for example, at the time of 3 stop OFF operation when the super attack mode is won with weak cherry) The gaming machine according to any one of features AD2 to AD4.

  According to the above configuration, the game result serving as the trigger for the notification during the state will differ depending on whether the start timing of the notification during the state is before or after the stop of the predetermined circulating body. That is, in the game in which each stop operation means is operated to stop the orbiter, when the notification during the state is started based on the first identification result, the notification during the state is started before the specific operation, and the first (2) In the case where the in-state notification is started based on the identification result, the in-state notification is started after the specific operation. By doing this, for example, if it is not determined whether the result of the current game is the first specified result win or the second specified result win before the specific operation. Even if the notification during the state is not started at that time, it is possible to provide the pleasure of connecting hope to the winning of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state. In addition, if it is determined that the result of the current game is that the first specified result is won, the game will proceed while wishing that the notification during the state is started by the specific operation. If it is considered that the result of the current game can be determined that the second specified result is won, the game is advanced while wishing that the notification during the state is started by the operation shift of the specific number It is thought that it will be. Furthermore, even if it is determined that the third specified result win or the fourth specified result win, whether the notification during the state is started or later than the specified operation Is different depending on the stopping appearance, and the game is progressed while predicting the start timing of the in-state notification from the relationship (commonality, difference) of the stopping appearance of the first specific design combination and the second specific design combination. In any case, it is possible to centralize the period in which attention is given as to whether or not the in-state notification is started, and to make it possible to have the game intonation.

  Feature AD6. The first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination may be such that the patterns stopped at the effective position may be common up to the specific number (for example, the left reel of strong cherry and weak cherry). The gaming machine according to the feature AD5.

  According to the above configuration, it is impossible to determine whether the first specified result is won or the second specified result is from the stop point to the specified number, and in the fourth specified result, the specified number is not missed. Therefore, even if the notification during the state has not been started by the time the specific orbiting body is stopped, it is possible to win the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state when performing the stop operation of the specific orbiting body after that. You can play games while connecting your wishes.

  Feature AD7. The gaming machine according to the feature AD5 or the feature AD6, wherein the symbols to be stopped at the effective position in the specific circulating member are different between the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether the first specified result win or the second specified result win by stopping the specific circulating body, or the winning mode of the third specified result is determined, or the fourth specified result It can be determined whether or not it is a prize. Therefore, in particular, in a situation where the notification during state has not been started before that, it is possible to stop the specific circulating member, for example, transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the first specific result or the fourth specific result winning. It becomes a turning point whether there is no possibility of winning the lottery. Therefore, the stop operation of the specific orbiting body will be more interesting, and the interest can be improved.

Characteristics AD8. The first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and the second identification result (for example, weak cherry) are included as the identification results,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second identification result, a benefit corresponding to the second identification result is given by stopping the second symbol combination (single cherry) at the effective position,
In the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won with a first probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first [2] The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD7, characterized in that, in the case of a specified result, the transition lottery to the specified gaming state is won with a second probability.

  According to the above configuration, since the winning probability of the transition lottery varies depending on the type of the specific result, the stop which is easy to win the transition lottery is stopped and the stop winning which is hard to be won in the transition lottery is stopped. The possibility that the in-state notification is started in the start game differs depending on when the outcome is stopped. In this way, when the in-state notification is started in the first mode and when the in-state notification is started in the second mode, it is judged from the stop appearance including the ease of being started It is possible to make it possible to raise the attention to the stopping eye.

Feature AD9. The first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and the second identification result (for example, weak cherry) are included as the identification results,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second identification result, a benefit corresponding to the second identification result is given by stopping the second symbol combination (single cherry) at the effective position,
The content of the specific gaming state may be different between the transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the first identification result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the second identification result. The gaming machine according to any one of AD8.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific symbol combination is stopped and the in-state notification is started in the first mode, the second specific symbol combination is stopped and the in-state notification is in the second embodiment. The content of the specific gaming state when started is different depending on when it is started. Therefore, the joy differs when the first specific symbol combination is stopped and when the second specific symbol combination is stopped, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the stopping eye.

Characteristics AD10. The identification result includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without requiring a new gaming medium.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the predetermined number of gaming media is paid out as a benefit corresponding to the first identification result by stopping the first specific symbol combination at the effective position. I,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay result, the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, and the replay becomes possible as a benefit corresponding to the replay result,
The first means notifies, during the state, that the reception operation (bet operation) for accepting a game medium is permitted in the game following the start game, as the first aspect, when the specific result is the payout result. To start
The second means starts the notification during the state until the start operation of the start operation means is permitted in the game subsequent to the start game, as the second aspect, when the specific result is the replay result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD9, characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the first specific symbol combination is stopped if the payout result, and the second specific symbol combination is stopped if the second game result, the notification of the state is started depending on which symbol combination is stopped. The end of the timing is different. More specifically, when transitioning to the specific gaming state based on the payout result, the first specific symbol combination is stopped in the start game, and the notification during the state is permitted until the accepting operation of the game media for the next game is permitted. When it is started and it shifts to the specific gaming state based on the replay result, the second specific symbol combination is stopped in the starting game, and the notification during the state until the starting operation of the starting operation means of the next game is permitted Is started. By doing this, it is possible to diversify the final variation until the notification during the state is started. Moreover, by associating the variation of the final period with the stopping appearance, when, for example, the administrator of the gaming hall tries to confirm by which result the notification during the state is started, the first specific pattern combination is stopped, for example. In this case, when the in-state notification is started after the reception operation, etc., it is determined that the in-state notification start timing and the start game, for example, it is determined that the previous game is not the start game but the current game is the start game. It will be possible to confirm from the stopping eye.

Characteristics AD11. The start operation means is configured to allow the start operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (for example, the first credit insertion switch 56).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, it is a position visible through the display unit and different from the effective position The pattern of each of the orbiting members is given such that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position,
Means for enabling the player to play the game again by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the next game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the game reproduction result (when the operation is performed in the main control device 101 A gaming machine according to feature AD10, comprising a function of executing a process of setting a bet flag.

  According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position and the second game result winning is achieved, the first specific symbol combination is stopped at a specific position different from the effective position. Therefore, it is difficult to determine, in appearance, whether the re-game result winning combination has been established or the payout result combination has been established. Moreover, in the next game in which the re-game winning combination is established, it is possible to re-play the next game by performing the accepting operation on the predetermined accepting means, so it is possible to determine whether a new game medium is required or not. Although there is a difference, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same operation for the payout result and the re-game result. In this way, in the configuration in which the end timing of the start notification of the in-state notification differs depending on the payout result and the replay result, the player is notified by the result whether the in-state notification is started or not, from the player Can be confusing. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the thrilling feeling as to when the notification is started during the state.

  Characteristics AD12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result winning, the first stopping means for stopping the first specific symbol combination (for example, when the winning combination of the strong watermelon and the bonus is won, the main control device 101 A function to execute a process to stop the stop winning which is a bonus winning) and a second stopping means to stop the second specific pattern combination (for example, when winning combination of strong watermelon and bonus, main controller The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD11, characterized in that it has a function of stopping a stop play that is a watermelon prize at 101).

  According to the above configuration, there are cases in which the first specific pattern combination is stopped even in the case of the same specified result, and there are cases in which the second specific pattern combination is stopped. Therefore, even if the identification result is the same, the in-state notification is started in the first mode and the in-state notification is started in the second mode, and even if the lottery result is the same. As long as the lottery result is not complicated or the like, it is possible to expect an attention level improvement effect by different stopping numbers or different notification modes.

  The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature AD5.

Characteristics AD13. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD12, which is characterized by having a certain feature.

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Characteristics AD14. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD13, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by means of the specific notification means, and to expect the stage effects described in the feature AD1 and the improvement of interest.

<Feature AE group>
Feature AE1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
It is a lottery that is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the same winning probability is obtained regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, and the specific gaming state is entered. Transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition lottery;
Notification is started during the state by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) by at least a predetermined specific timing in the specific game in which the game state shifts to the specific game state, and the specific state Specific game state notification means (a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) ends the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the gaming state Function to execute)
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
When winning the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the first specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results, by the first specific timing (timing for allowing a bet operation) as the specific timing Start notification during the state,
If a second lottery result (for example, winning replay) different from the first one among the particular results is used as a trigger to win the lottery for transition to the particular gaming state, the first particular timing as the particular timing The gaming machine characterized in that the notification during the state is started by the second specific timing which is also late.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is easily performed, in-state notification by the specific informing means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, in-state informing by the specific informing means is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  Here, the notification during the state is started at least by the specific timing in the specific gaming state which shifts to the specific gaming state, and the end of the notification start is determined, but when the end is exceeded, the state during the notification There is a fear that the sense of anticipation to the user may be suddenly diminished, and the degree of attention may be reduced in the game that may be in the specific gaming state. In that respect, in the above configuration, the end of the notification during the state is made different depending on the game result that became the winning opportunity of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and even if one end of the period is exceeded, the state is It is possible to continue the game while leaving a sense of expectation for the notification. Therefore, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

Feature AE2. The lottery result by the lottery means includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without requiring a new gaming medium
The first identification result is the payout result.
The gaming machine according to Feature AE1, wherein the second specified result is the replay result.

  According to the above configuration, the start end period of the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means is different depending on the payout result or the re-game result. As described above, it is not necessary to set a special game result by making the start / end period of the notification during the state different by using the payout result and the re-game result which are conventionally used, and with a relatively simple structure, It is possible to exhibit the effect of the feature AE1.

Feature AE3. The specific game state notification means is
If the identification result is the payout result, the notification during the state is started with the timing at which the reception operation (bet operation) for accepting a game medium in the identification game is permitted as the first identification timing,
When the specified result is the re-game result, the notification during the state is started with the timing at which the start operation of the start operation means is permitted in the specified game as the second specified timing. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, the timing at which the player's operation is permitted is set as the end of each time, and if it is a payout result, it is the timing to allow the reception operation, and if it is a replay result, the start operation is permitted. It is timing. As described above, by ending the timing at which the player's operation is permitted, it is possible to actively progress the game instead of waiting until the notification is started. Also, in general, although the re-game result allows the start operation without requiring the reception operation, the final period is set in combination with the operation mode according to each game result, resulting in complication of the configuration. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without.

Feature AE4. The start operation means is configured to allow the start operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (for example, the first credit insertion switch 56).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first identification result, and the first specific symbol combination corresponding to the first identification result is stopped at the effective position, the benefit awarding means determines the predetermined effect as the advantage. It is the composition which pays out the game media of the number,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, a position visible through the display unit The design of each of the orbiting members is affixed such that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position;
Means for enabling the player to play the game again by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the specific game when the lottery result by the lottery means is the game reproduction result (the bet at the time of operation in the main control device 101 A game machine according to Feature AE3, comprising a function of executing a process of setting a flag.

  According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position and the second game result winning is achieved, the first specific symbol combination is stopped at a specific position different from the effective position. Therefore, it is difficult to determine, in appearance, whether the re-game result winning combination has been established or the payout result combination has been established. Moreover, in the next game in which the re-game winning combination is established, it is possible to re-play the next game by performing the accepting operation on the predetermined accepting means, so it is possible to determine whether a new game medium is required or not. Although there is a difference, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same operation for the payout result and the re-game result. In this way, in the configuration in which the end timing of the start notification of the in-state notification differs depending on the payout result and the replay result, the player is notified by the result whether the in-state notification is started or not, from the player Can be confusing. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the thrilling feeling as to when the notification is started during the state.

Feature AE5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the first reservation means which holds the transition result winning until the symbol combination for transition is stopped at the effective position (step S609 of the main control apparatus 101 Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the identification result, the third identification result of the replay result and the transition result is included,
When the specific gaming state notification means transitions to the specific gaming state based on the overlapping result, the second gaming state notification means reserves start of notification during the state until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the valid position. A game machine according to any one of the features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that it comprises means (a function for executing the section display first process and the section display fourth process by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, a transition result (so-called jackpot result) that is a trigger for transition to an advantageous state is included as a lottery result, and a duplicate result of a re-game result and a transition result is also included. Then, in the case of the overlapping result, the transition result winning is reserved until the transition result winning combination of the re-game result and the transition result is established. In such a configuration, when shifting to the specific gaming state based on the overlapping result, the specific game which is a game to shift to the specific gaming state is reserved until the game in which the transition result winning is established. By doing this, it is possible to intensify the impression of having won the transition lottery to the specific game based on the transition result winning among the overlapping results, and matching with the transition result winning being reserved. It is possible to secure sex.

  Feature AE6. When the specific gaming state notification means wins the transition lottery to the specific gaming state triggered by the third specific result of the specific results, the specific gaming state notification is performed by the first specific timing as the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature AE5, characterized in that it is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific game itself is also reserved as a result of the transition result winning being reserved, the start end period of the in-state notification in the specific game matches that of the payout result. In this way, in a configuration (feature AE2) in which the start end of the notification during the state differs depending on the payout result and the replay result, by defining the start end of the third specified result that will be double winning of the replay result and the transition result. Even if a replay is not awarded based on the transition result winning, it is possible to prevent a wrinkle from being generated between the different game operations and the start end depending on the game result.

Feature AE7. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The game machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE6, which is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

Feature AE8. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features AE1 to AE7, wherein the winning probability of the shifting lottery by the shifting lottery means is the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. .

  According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the probability of winning due to the setting value in relation to the specific gaming state, so even if any of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is selected, the equality for the game regarding the specific gaming state is Secured. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification unit, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

  Feature AE9. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features AE1 to AE8, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) which has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by means of the specific notification means, and to expect the stage effects described in the feature AE1 to be improved.

<Features BA group>
Feature BA1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carried over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the restriction means (the main control to limit the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means A function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101),
In the situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the special result in which the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined (for example, special replays 1 and 2) In this case, the first control means (for example, in the main control apparatus 101, for example, the black bar double alignment stop output is executed to execute the stop control of each of the orbiting members so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position). And a function to control the game so that the replay win is achieved)
In the situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (for example, special replay), the effective Second control means (for example, black BAR non-operating in the main control device 101) for performing stop control of each of the orbiting bodies so that a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the position. And a function of controlling a replay prize to be established by a stop appearance at a stop),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the symbol combination for transition does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, if the configuration is such that the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is further performed, the stop operation is performed such that the symbol combination for transition is not stopped, There is a possibility that an act of causing a transition to an advantageous state not to occur easily and an transition lottery to a specific gaming state to be generated indefinitely may be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation not stopping the pattern combination for transition and the player who can not perform the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable and it is not preferable from such a point of view as it may result in a payout rate different from the intended payout rate in design. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned intended payout rate, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, it is possible to play the game while suggesting it in an effect or the like in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally determined, to the transition to the advantageous state There are also merits such as maintaining a sense of expectation. However, since the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not performed in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, although the expectation for the advantageous state can be improved, from the viewpoint of the expectation for the specific gaming state Then, it can be said that the situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means is not preferable as a player.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the number of stops at the special result winning is different depending on whether or not the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won. There is. Specifically, if it is a specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the holding means, the stoppage at the special result winning is set to the first specific symbol combination, and it is the normal gaming state, When the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the stoppage at the special result winning is set as the second specific symbol combination. By doing in this way, even if the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, if the first specific symbol combination appears, the transition to the specific gaming state is made. It is grasped that the transition lottery has been won, and it becomes possible to play the game while maintaining the sense of expectation for the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature BA2. A special means (for example, the special means for changing the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination stops at the effective position in a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means The gaming machine according to feature BA1, characterized in that the display control device 81 has a function of executing the notification lottery process 1, and a lottery table for special RT states having different special replay winning probabilities.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific gaming state, the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination is stopped can be changed by the special means. For example, the special result winning is made and the first specific symbol combination is not stopped. Even in the specific gaming state is not completely denied, it is possible to continue the sense of expectation for the specific gaming state. That is, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, a game is added that predicts whether or not the specific gaming state is based on the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination, Interest can be suitably improved.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, “when the lottery result by the lottery unit is the special result, the first control unit executes the specific control that enables the first specific symbol combination to be stopped. Means (a function to execute the notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81) or means for changing the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result (special replay winning probability is It is considered that “at least one of lottery tables for different special RT states” is provided.

  Feature BA3. The gaming machine according to Feature BA2, wherein the special means can change the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination stops depending on the content of the specific gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, a game is added such as predicting the content of the specific gaming state by the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination. As described above, if it is possible to predict not only the specific gaming state but also the contents of the game from the stopping point, the gaming property while being reserved is significantly improved.

Feature BA4. As the first specific picture combination, a first kind specific picture combination (for example, black BAR single match) and a second kind specific picture combination different from the first kind specific picture combination (for example, black BAR balance sheet) And is set,
The special means is characterized in that it is possible to make the stop frequency different between the first type specific pattern combination and the second type specific pattern combination according to the contents of the specific gaming state. The gaming machine described in BA3.

  According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state is different depending on whether the first type specific pattern combination of the first specific pattern combination is stopped or the second type specific pattern combination is stopped. , It will be possible to increase the interest in stopping eyes.

Feature BA5. The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
When the special game state is the first predetermined state, the special means performs the special notification so that the first type specific picture combination is easy to stop, and the special game state is the first predetermined state and Is a second predetermined state different from the second type, and the second type specific symbol combination is made easy to stop.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature BA4 can be exhibited by the specific configuration.

  Feature BA6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special means changes the execution frequency of the special notification (black BAR look notification information effect) that enables stopping the first specific pattern combination. A game machine according to any one of features BA2 to BA5, characterized in that the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is changed.

  According to the above configuration, in order to adjust the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination depending on the presence or absence of notification, it is configured to perform the suggestion of the mode before transition, teaching, etc. as an effect, and the game characteristics by such suggestion, teaching etc. Can be realized with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means is capable of stopping the first specific symbol combination by stopping each of the orbiting members in the first specific stop order. Control is performed so that the second specific symbol combination can be stopped by the second control means when each surrounding member is stopped in a second specific stopping order different from the first specific stopping order I,
The gaming machine according to feature BA6, wherein the special means performs notification regarding the first specific stop order as the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, depending on the stop order at the special result winning, whether the first specific symbol combination is stopped or the second specific symbol combination is stopped is different, and the special means is used as a special notification. Since the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination is made different by notifying the first specific stop sequence corresponding to the first specific symbol combination, in the stop operation mode including the stop sequence The affinity to the specific gaming state, in which the degree of advantage changes, is enhanced, and it is easy for the player to understand that it is an indication of the specific gaming state (pre-transition mode) that the special notification is performed.

Feature BA8. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the specific orbiting body in each of the orbiting bodies is stopped at the first timing, the specific pattern constituting the first specific picture combination is stopped at the effective position It becomes possible to stop the specific pattern at the effective position if the specific orbiter is operated to stop at the second timing different from the first timing.
The gaming machine according to feature BA6 or BA7, wherein the special means is capable of performing notification of stopping the specific circulating member at the first timing as the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, since the first specific pattern combination can be stopped by eye-pressing the specific orbiter, it is possible to specify the original game characteristics of the slot machine to obtain benefits by stopping the pattern aiming at the pattern. It becomes the composition which is taken into the production such as the suggestion and the teaching etc of game state. In this way, it is possible to make the user think that the specific gaming state has been won by his own stop operation, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game (stop operation).

Feature BA9. The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, a special benefit (replay) is given as a benefit corresponding to the special result,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, the special benefit is given to any one of the features BA6 to BA8. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, although the stopping numbers may differ depending on the stopping order and the stopping timing, the benefits obtained are common to any stopping numbers (stop order, stopping timing). It becomes. By doing this, it is possible to secure consistency with the restriction of the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means in the situation where the transition result selection is reserved by the reservation means. That is, since the degree of advantage at the time of winning the specific result does not change due to the special notification, even if the transition result winning is reserved by the holding means, even if the transition result winning is intentionally delayed, the profit based on the specific result is unfair. It will not be enjoyed.

Feature BA10. First control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the mode notification means;
Second control means (display control device 81) having at least the special means;
Have
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result or the second result, the mode notification is performed by the mode notification means in the first control means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification by the special means in the second control means is performed, while the mode notification by the aspect notification means in the first control means is not performed The gaming machine according to any one of features BA6 to BA9, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, particularly in the feature BA9 that cites the feature BA7, when notifying the stopping order of the special result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first result and the second result in which the winning result is different. In other words, the lottery means and mode notification means related to the player's profit can be integrated into the first control means to make it easier to take measures to avoid fraudulent acts, and to perform mainly the effects etc. that are not related to the profit. Are integrated into the second control means, and the functions are distributed. In such a configuration, if the special notification by the special means is taken as the function of the second control means, it is clarified that the change in the stopping number based on the special result is not directly related to the benefit, For example, when a design change or the like is performed for the special means, the calculation can be performed without newly calculating the payout rate. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize excellent gameplay by the special means with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA11. A notification is started by setting a specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the notification is started based on the termination of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (function to execute the interval display first process to the interval display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by turning off the specific notification means,
As the identification result, an overlap result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, chance A overlap 1) including the transition result is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result and the winning lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific gaming state notification means is in the advantageous state by stopping the symbol combination for the transition. The game to be transferred is a start game, the notification by the specific notification means is not started at a timing before the start game, and the specification is performed at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game to the start game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA1 to BA10, wherein the notification by the notification means is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition to the specific gaming state is made, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific gaming state notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, regardless of having shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who ends the game and the player who is seated at the gaming stand which has ended the game later. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all players enjoy the game by order notification equally.

  In addition, when the transition to the specific gaming state is based on the duplicate result including the transition result, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started until the start game in which the transition pattern combination is stopped and the advantageous state is shifted. Is limited. That is, as described above, while eliminating the sense of inequality among players regarding the specific gaming state, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the notification regarding the specific gaming state is also limited, and the special result It becomes possible not to reduce the joy of appearance of the first specific pattern combination at the time of winning (the joy of knowing that a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state has been won). Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the game in the situation where the transition result winning by the reserve means is reserved while securing the equality between the players by the specific gaming state notification means.

Feature BA12. As the specific result, non-overlapping results (for example, strong cherries, strong watermelons, chance A) not including the transition results are set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the specific gaming state notification means sets the game winning the specific result as the start game, and starts the start The gaming machine according to feature BA11, characterized in that the notification by the specific notification means is started at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the game.

  According to the above configuration, when the start of the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is restricted, the game is ended despite being limited to the overlapping winning with the transition result and shifting to the specific gaming state. It is possible to reduce events such as Therefore, it is possible to further improve the function of securing the equality between the players by providing the specific gaming state notification means.

Feature BA13. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) which is a duplication result with a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) which is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first duplicate result, a benefit corresponding to the first identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the first identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first identification result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature BA12 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the game in which the first identification result in which the first identification result and the transition result are overlapped is won, and the game in which the first non-overlapping result in which the first identification result is single winning is: In any case, since it is possible to stop the pattern combination for the first specified result and establish the first specified result winning, it is stopped which one of the first overlapped result and the first non- overlapped result is won, It is difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, if the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is the first overlapping result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is the start game, and if it is the first non-overlapping result, the game in which the first identification result winning is established. Let's start the game. Therefore, even if the player has won the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state triggered by any result, an event may occur in which the presence / absence (start timing) of the notification of the specific gaming state notification means is different. That is, even when the symbol combination for the first specification result is stopped, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification unit is not started before the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specification The possibility of the pattern combination for the result being based on the first specific result in the first duplicate result can be left, and the sense of expectation is maintained even when the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not won It is possible to

  Moreover, in this case, the presence or absence of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be determined by the stopping eye at the time of special result winning, so that it is possible to make the subsequent stopping eye have great interest .

Feature BA14. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1) which is a duplication result with a second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon) which is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) of the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the second identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the second identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second identification result is stopped at the effective position. And
The gaming machine according to Feature BA13, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first identification result and the lottery based on the second identification result.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into consideration in the game characteristics of the feature BA13. That is, for example, if the first specific result is configured to be more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started If not, the possibility of winning in the specific gaming state is higher than when the symbol combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the first The expectation for the appearance of a specific pattern combination is further enhanced. On the other hand, when the symbol combination for the second specified result is stopped and the notification by the specified gaming state notifying means is not started, the effect of surprise when the first specified symbol combination appears thereafter is enhanced. . As described above, by enjoying the stop score by adding the selection probability of the shift lottery by the shift lottery means, the game property for predicting the presence or absence of the specific gaming state win from the stop score during the reservation is remarkably improved .

Feature BA15. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1) which is a duplication result with a third identification result (for example, chance A) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) which is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the third identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the third identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third identification result is stopped at the effective position. And
The ratio of the duplicate result and the non-duplicate result in the lottery by the lottery means is the ratio of the first duplicate result and the first non-duplicate result, the third duplicate result and the third non-duplicate result The gaming machine according to feature BA13 or feature BA14, characterized in that it differs in proportion.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into consideration in the game characteristics of the feature BA 13 and the feature BA 14. That is, for example, a configuration in which the ratio of the first overlapping result to the first non-overlapping result is the overlapping result with the transition result is higher than the ratio of the third overlapping result to the third non-overlapping result (same stop If the configuration is highly likely that the transition result is won even if the appearance result), the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the third specification It is more likely that the transition result winning state is reserved by the retaining means than when the symbol combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notifying means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BA14, if it is a non-overlapping result and the specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started in the game, so as described above for the first specific result If the symbol combination is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the possibility of winning in the specific gaming state is also higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by enjoying the stop score in consideration of the probability that the transition result will be won, the game property for predicting the presence or absence of the specific gaming state win from the stop score while being reserved is remarkably improved.

  Feature BA16. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA1 to BA15, wherein the special result is a result that does not become a trigger for a transition lottery to the specific gaming state by the transition lottery means.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, the result different from the result of being restricted to the transition lottery to the specific gaming state Then, the notification of whether or not the transition lottery to the specific gaming state has been won (whether or not it is the mode before the transition) is configured to be performed by the stop point. Therefore, it is possible to purely enjoy the stop without feeling the sense of loss due to the result to be limited.

  Feature BA17. In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special outcome winning is higher than the situation where the transition result winning is not reserved by the retaining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA1 to BA16, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, there is a high probability that a special result will be obtained while being reserved, so it is easy to play a game to enjoy whether the first specific symbol combination is stopped or the second specific symbol combination is stopped. Can.

  Feature BA18. The bonus awarding means re-plays as a bonus corresponding to the special result based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to Feature BA17, characterized in that the game media of the same number or less as the bet number of the game for which the special result is won is provided.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which the specific gaming state is inferred by the stopped number of eyes without excessively increasing the degree of advantage during reservation. That is, for example, if it is possible to expect an increase in gaming media by the bonus at the special result prize, it becomes possible to receive a profit by the special outcome prize, and the special result winning is desired in expectation of an increase in gaming media. It can be a fun game barrier that enjoys purely out of sight.

Feature BA19. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA1 to BA18 characterized by having a certain feature.

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Feature BA20. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA1 to BA19, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of enhancing the sense of expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BA1.

<Feature BB group>
Feature BB1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode And a pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the second result, the second aspect being different from the pattern combination of the first aspect A first operation mode result (for example, pushing order bell) in which the symbol combination can be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is the third stop operation. When operated in the fourth stop operation mode different from the mode, the pattern combination corresponding to the third result can be stopped, the pattern combination of the fourth mode different from the pattern combination of the third mode A second operation mode result (for example, special replay) to be
A first mode related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode or the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means The first mode informing means (a function for executing the process for informing the pushing order by the display control device 81) capable of executing the informing (the pushing order informing effect) by the first informing means (auxiliary display unit 65),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) which executes the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result ,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carried over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the restriction means (the main control to limit the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means A function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101),
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the first aspect notification by the first aspect notifying means is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second operation mode result Possible special notification means (function to execute notification processing for special RT by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the symbol combination for transition does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and a specific gaming state is provided in which the degree of advantage is made different depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. There is. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, if the configuration is such that the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is further performed, the stop operation is performed such that the symbol combination for transition is not stopped, There is a possibility that an act of causing a transition to an advantageous state not to occur easily and an transition lottery to a specific gaming state to be generated indefinitely may be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation not stopping the pattern combination for transition and the player who can not perform the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable and it is not preferable from such a point of view as it may result in a payout rate different from the intended payout rate in design. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned intended payout rate, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, it is possible to play the game while suggesting it in an effect or the like in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally determined, to the transition to the advantageous state There are also merits such as maintaining a sense of expectation. However, since the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not performed in the situation where the transition result selection is reserved by the reservation means, the player can be identified as having a configuration that allows the transition lottery not to be performed. Is not desirable.

  In that respect, in the above configuration, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is executed even in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the holding means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is limited. . Similar to the first operation mode result, the second operation mode result is set such that the result of winning due to the stop operation is the same although the stop time differs depending on the stop operation mode. That is, in the case of the second operation mode result, even if the first mode notification is performed, the player's advantage does not change. Therefore, in the situation where the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is performed in the situation where the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted as described above, the transition result winning state is reserved by the retaining means. It becomes possible to execute the first mode notification within the scope of restricting the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and it is difficult to understand the situation in which the transition lottery is restricted by the execution of the first mode notification. be able to. Therefore, while securing the fairness of the game, it is possible to improve the gameplay while being reserved.

  Feature BB2. The first mode informing means does not execute the first mode informing even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means. The gaming machine according to feature BB1 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the case where the first mode notification is executed in the situation where the transition result selection is held by the holding means, the second operation mode result of the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result It is limited to a certain case. As described above, the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result may differ in the winning result depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the stop operation mode. The same result is won regardless of the situation. In this way, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the first aspect in the situation being held while securing the significance of restricting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state Notification can be performed.

  Feature BB3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode, the second notification regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is the first notification means A second mode informing means (function of executing pressing order processing by the main control device 101) which can be executed by different second informing means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68) The gaming machine according to the feature BB1 or the feature BB2, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the above configuration, in the first mode informing means, the first mode informing is executed in any of the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, while in the second mode informing means, the first operation mode result is first 2 mode notification is executed. As described above, between the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, the first operation mode result may differ depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the stop operation mode. The same result is won regardless of the situation. That is, in the first mode notification and the second mode notification, the second mode notification causes a change in the player's profit, and the first mode notification also includes one in which the same profit does not change. Then, for example, in order to monitor the relationship between the stop operation mode and the winning result, for example, the administrator or the like of the gaming hall may monitor the second mode notification by the second notification means. As described above, by leaving the notification associated with the player's benefit to the second mode notification, the first mode notification can be made to be a notification for the effect, and the notification related to the benefit can be used or the benefit can be related to the benefit The degree of freedom of notification can be overwhelmingly enhanced, such as not giving notification.

Feature BB4. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second aspect notification means;
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the first aspect notification means;
The gaming machine according to feature BB3, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, since the lottery means directly linked to the player's profit and the second mode informing means and the first mode informing means for effect are mounted on different control devices, the structure related to the profit On the other hand, it is possible to take measures against fraud intensively, and it is possible to suppress local increase in processing load by decentralizing functions.

  In addition, the effect by being a separate control apparatus is more clearly exhibited by limiting "the 2nd control apparatus" to be "provided separately from the said 1st control apparatus."

Feature BB5. The notification is started by setting the predetermined notification means (the eighth display segment N8) to the lighting state based on the transition to the specific gaming state, and the predetermined notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. It is equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by setting the means to the extinguished state,
The first mode informing means can execute the first mode informing regardless of whether the informing by the specific game state informing means is started or not, while the second mode informing means can execute the specific game state The gaming machine according to the feature BB3 or the feature BB4 characterized in that the second mode notification can be executed under the condition that the notification by the notification means is started.

  According to the above configuration, regarding the specific gaming state, when transitioning to the specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification is confirmed in the predetermined notification means by the specific gaming state notification means, it can be easily determined whether or not the specific gaming state, and, for example, it has been shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who ends the game without being aware of it and the player who is seated at the game stand which finished the game later. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the special notification.

  In addition, regarding the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification, the second aspect notification can be executed under the condition that the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started as the second aspect notification. The meaning of being directly connected to the profit is further strengthened, and with the notification by the specific gaming state notification means, the importance of monitoring the second mode notification is enhanced. In addition, since the first mode notification is executable regardless of the start of the notification by the specific gaming state notification means, the degree of freedom in performing the first mode notification is improved, and the function as the effect is further enhanced. It is possible to enhance.

Feature BB6. The transition lottery means is capable of executing transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, start of notification by the specific gaming state notifying means corresponding to the result of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state executed based on the transition result winning, A feature characterized by including means capable of limiting at least the transition result winning (for example, the main control device 101 performs step S4204, step S4208, and a section display fourth process). The gaming machine described in BB5.

  According to the above configuration, the consistency between the transition lottery to the specific gaming state being restricted in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means and the second mode notification not being performed in the situation It becomes possible to secure, and in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, it is possible to maintain the expectation of winning the transition lottery to the specific gaming state.

  Feature BB7. The notification of the first aspect by the special notification means suggests specific contents corresponding to the result of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means executed triggered by the transition result reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to feature BB6, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, by performing the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result, to the specific gaming state triggered by the reserved transition result Since the contents of the transition lottery are suggested, even if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted in such a situation, it is possible not to interrupt the interest in the transition lottery.

Characteristic BB8. The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, when the result by the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is the transition winning to the first predetermined state, the special notification means Executes the first mode notification about the third stop operation mode in which the symbol combination in the third order in the second operation mode result can be stopped,
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, the transition winning to the second predetermined state where the result by the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is different from the first predetermined state And the special notification means executes the first mode notification about the fourth stop operation mode in which the fourth combination of picture combinations in the second operation mode result can be stopped. The gaming machine according to the feature BB7.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the winning contents of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state by using the second operation mode result in which the number of stop operations changes while changing the stop operation mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize new game characteristics using the aspect notification in a situation where the aspect notification directly linked to the profit may be limited.

Feature BB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, there are provided a plurality of types of replaying results in which the replaying can be awarded as a privilege by the privilege giving means,
As a result of the plurality of types of re-games, the re-game is given by the privilege giving means, and a transition re-game result (for example, promotion replay) that becomes a transition trigger of the gaming state There is provided a non-transition replaying result (for example, special replay) that is not granted and that does not become a transition timing of the gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features BB1 to BB8, wherein the second operation mode result is the non-transition replaying game result.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, even if the second operation mode result is won, the gaming state does not shift, and only re-playing is only given. By performing the mode notification using such game results, the effects of the feature BB1 can be achieved without departing from the purport that the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved. It is possible to play

Characteristic BB10. In the first operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When it becomes possible to stop and each stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second corresponding to the second result The pattern combination of the aspect is something that can be stopped,
In the second operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is When it becomes possible to stop and each stop operation means is operated in the fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth corresponding to the third result It is possible to stop the pattern combination of the aspect,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notifying means determines the first stop order and the second stop order or the third stop order. A first order notification (pressing order notification effect) relating to the stopping order including the fourth stopping order and the fourth stopping order can be executed by the first notifying means as the first aspect notifying feature BB1 To the gaming machine according to any one of BB9.

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “when the first operation mode result is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode,“ the first operation mode result is a pattern combination of the first mode. The first result winning is achieved by stopping and the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and each stop When the operation means is operated in the second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination in the second mode is stopped and the second result prize is The second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) different from the first benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means,
The second operation mode result is that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result is obtained. A winning is realized, and a third benefit (replay) is given by the benefit giving means, and each of the stop operation means operates as a fourth stop operation mode in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order. In this case, the symbol combination in the fourth aspect is stopped, and the third prize is established, and the third privilege is awarded by the privilege giving means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notifying means determines the first stop order and the second stop order or the third stop order. A first order notification (pressing order notification effect) relating to the stop order including the fourth stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. It may be expressed, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Feature BB11. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features BB1 to BB10, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of enhancing the sense of expectation to the specific gaming state described in the feature BB1.

<Feature BC group>
Feature BC1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carried over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the restriction means (the main control to limit the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means A function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101),
When execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means, a special notification regarding the transition lottery by the transition lottery means which has been executed is performed based on the specific result winning that has become the restriction target by the restriction means. And special notification means (functions for executing notification cancellation processing by the display control device 81 and special RT notification processing) that can be executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the symbol combination for transition does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, if the configuration is such that the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is further performed, the stop operation is performed such that the symbol combination for transition is not stopped, There is a possibility that an act of causing a transition to an advantageous state not to occur easily and an transition lottery to a specific gaming state to be generated indefinitely may be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation not stopping the pattern combination for transition and the player who can not perform the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable and it is not preferable from such a point of view as it may result in a payout rate different from the intended payout rate in design. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned intended payout rate, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, it is possible to play the game while suggesting it in an effect or the like in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally determined, to the transition to the advantageous state There are also merits such as maintaining a sense of expectation. However, since the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not performed in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, although the expectation for the advantageous state can be improved, from the viewpoint of the expectation for the specific gaming state Then, it can be said that the situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means is not preferable as a player.

  In particular, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, usually the player can not enjoy the benefit that the transition lottery is performed, and the player may feel lost, and the transition result is won. The more games that are reserved, the more likely such an event will occur. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is limited at the time of the specific result winning, if notification is made regarding the transition lottery performed before that time, then it is as if the specific result were elected It is possible to make it seem as if a transition lottery to a specific gaming state has been performed, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to realize that the transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, the game characteristic by an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be realized suitably.

  Feature BC2. The gaming machine according to the feature BC1, wherein the special notification means relates to a transition lottery by the transition lottery means which has been executed, and can notify an unannounced content.

  According to the above configuration, the notification content by the special notification unit becomes more limited. More specifically, since the notification content by the special notification means does not include the information on the notified transition lottery but includes the uninformed lottery, it is executed in the game similar to the game in which the transition lottery of the specific result is limited. Since the notification about the transition lottery is made and the contents of the near game are taken, the effect of making the user think that the transition lottery is performed based on the specific result can be further enhanced.

Feature BC3. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery of the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result,
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, a means capable of restricting that the notification about the lottery by the transition lottery means triggered by the transition result is executed (in the attack mode etc. in the display control device 81) A game machine according to feature BC1 or feature BC2 having a function of executing a process of setting a precursor mode when winning.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is performed based on the transition result, the execution of the notification regarding the transition lottery is restricted, so that the transition result winning is carried over by the retention means, When the specific result is won, it is possible to minimize the event that the transition lottery has not been performed before that.

  Feature BC4. In any one of the features BC1 to BC3, the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game after the game for which the identification result has been set as the restriction target by the restriction means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the game subsequent to the game in which the specific result for which the transition lottery is limited is won, notification about the executed transition lottery is performed prior to the game in which the specific result is obtained. By doing this, the game in which the special notification is performed is not limited to the game in which the specific result is won, and diversification of the special notification can be achieved, and the result of the transition lottery is temporarily undesirable for the player. Even if there is, it is possible to entertain the game after the specific result while expecting the content change of the special notification.

  Feature BC5. The special notification means is a game after the game which has become the specific result set as the restriction target by the restriction means when the lottery result by the drawing means becomes a predetermined special result. The gaming machine according to feature BC4, which is capable of executing special notification.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is taken into consideration, so even if the transition result winning is established without becoming the special result, the notification Expectations can be made to the content of the special notification that should have been done. That is, in a configuration in which the result of the transfer lottery becomes preferable to the player by performing the special notification, even if the special notification is not performed, the factor for which the special notification is not performed is the result of the transfer lottery Not only is the case undesirable for the player, but there is also a case where the special result is not won, and the sense of expectation can be sustained. In particular, since the execution timing of the special notification is a time-limited situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the holding means, there are many cases where the special result is not a special result by the transition result winning, and the above special notification is performed. There is a high possibility that there will be no cause. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of sustaining the sense of expectation as described above.

Feature BC6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a first control means (for example, in the main control device 101) for controlling each of the orbiting members so that the first special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position. A function to control that a replay win will be established when the black BAR double match is stopped),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a second special symbol combination different from the first special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position so that each of the surrounding members can be stopped. Control means (in main controller 101, for example, a function to control a replay winning to be established when a black BAR is not stopped);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to Feature BC5, wherein the special notification means executes, as the special notification, a notification that enables stopping of the first special symbol combination.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed by stopping the eyes at the time of winning the special result. In this way, in the configuration in which the special notification is made based on the special result winning, it is not necessary to change the probability that the special outcome winning will be made before and after the specific result winning. It can produce an effect.

  Feature BC7. The special notification means is a game in which the specific result is won, in which execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means in a situation where the transition result election is reserved by the reservation means. A feature game is characterized in that a game after the game before the trigger game is made easier to be notified of a transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed. The gaming machine according to any one of BC6.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific result is won in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the game for which the specific result is won is set as the trigger game, and the game after the previous game is executed. It becomes easy to be notified of the completed transfer lottery. By doing this, it is possible to make it seem as if the transition lottery has been performed based on the identification result of the trigger game, even if the transition lottery has been executed.

Feature BC8. The specific result is set in a plurality of types,
The special notification means is a game after the game before the trigger game, according to the type of the specific result for which the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to Feature BC7, characterized in that it is possible to differ in the probability that notification about the transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been performed can be easily performed.

  According to the above configuration, according to the type of reserved specific result, the probability of being easily notified of the transition lottery in the game after the specific result winning game is different, so that the special notification means is further provided. The notification by can be made an effect in line with the actual situation of the transition lottery. Specifically, for example, it is general that there are a result that is easy to win the transition lottery and a result that it is difficult to win as a specific result, and the change in notification rate during reservation is also adjusted according to the winning probability. Thus, it is possible to further intensify the impression as if the transition lottery was performed based on the specific result of the trigger game.

  Feature BC9. Means capable of executing notification on the lottery by the transition lottery means which has been executed when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition result winning is established thereafter (section display fourth process by the main control device 101 The gaming machine according to any one of the features BC1 to BC8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, even in the case where the specific result is not won during the reservation or the specific result is won, for example, as in the feature BC5, the special notification is performed based on the special result winning. Even when the transition result winning is achieved without notification, it is possible to minimize an event such as transition to an advantageous state without notification about the lottery by the executed transition lottery means. By doing this, it is possible to suitably execute notification on the lottery by the transition lottery means.

Feature BC10. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC9, which is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Feature BC11. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features BC1 to BC10, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of enhancing the sense of expectation to the specific gaming state described in the feature BC1.

<Feature BD group>
Feature BD1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carried over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the restriction means (the main control to limit the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means A function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101),
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states (in particular, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined replaying result is different from the normal gaming state are set.
Replay state transition means (in which it is possible to shift the game state to any one of the plurality of replay states if a specific condition including the winning condition in which the transition result winning is held by the hold means is satisfied. In the special RT state process of the main control apparatus 101, the function of executing the process of shifting to any of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state);
When transitioning the gaming state to the replaying state by the replaying state transitioning means, selection means capable of selecting the replaying state to be shifted based on a specific event related to the specific gaming state (special RT of the main control device 101 In the state processing, a function of executing a process of setting an RT state according to the presence or absence of a challenge mode winning flag, an attack mode winning flag, and a specialization zone winning flag);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the symbol combination for transition does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, if the configuration is such that the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is further performed, the stop operation is performed such that the symbol combination for transition is not stopped, There is a possibility that an act of causing a transition to an advantageous state not to occur easily and an transition lottery to a specific gaming state to be generated indefinitely may be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation not stopping the pattern combination for transition and the player who can not perform the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable and it is not preferable from such a point of view as it may result in a payout rate different from the intended payout rate in design. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned intended payout rate, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, it is possible to play the game while suggesting it in an effect or the like in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally determined, to the transition to the advantageous state There are also merits such as maintaining a sense of expectation. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transition pattern combination itself, the result will be a specific result, and there will be many occasions where the execution of the lottery concerning the specific state is restricted, and the player will feel lost. obtain. Therefore, based on the situation where such a situation may occur, that is, the situation where the transition result winning is reserved to the reserve means, the probability of becoming a predetermined replay result changes, so-called RT state After being configured to be shifted, the type of replay state is selected based on a specific event related to a specific gaming state. By doing this, a game is added that predicts a specific event relating to a specific gaming state from the type of re-playing state, and as a result, the execution of the lottery relating to the specific gaming state is restricted. Also, it is possible to enjoy the game regarding the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature BD2. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
The gaming machine according to Feature BD1, wherein the specific event is the content of the transition lottery performed based on the transition result winning.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which transition to the replaying state is performed based on the transition result winning, the transitioning replaying state differs depending on the contents of the transition lottery performed based on the transition result winning. By doing this, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the contents of the transition lottery are predicted from the transitioned replay state.

Feature BD3. Means for controlling each of the orbiters so that the symbol combination for specific replay can be stopped at the effective position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay) (main controller 101 Function to execute the reel control process in
The gaming machine according to the feature BD1 or the feature BD2 characterized in that the frequency of stopping the symbol combination for specific replaying varies depending on the type of the replaying state selected by the selection means.

  According to the above configuration, the stop frequency of the symbol combination for specific replay that may appear when the specific replay result is won differs depending on the type of replay state. In this way, it is possible to play a game such as predicting the type of replaying state from the stop frequency of the symbol combination for the specific replaying, and thereby predicting a specific event related to the specific gaming state. Become.

  Feature BD4. The gaming machine according to Feature BD3, wherein the probability of the specific re-playing result is different depending on the type of the re-playing state.

  According to the above configuration, since the winning probability itself of the specific replaying result is different, the appearance rate of the symbol combination for the specific replaying may also be different depending on the type of the replaying state. In this way, for example, it is not necessary to perform control such as whether or not the symbol combination for specific replay is to be stopped depending on the stop order, the stop timing, etc. when the specific replay result is won. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game of predicting the specific event about the specific gaming state from the appearance rate of the symbol combination for the specific replay, with a relatively simple configuration.

  Feature BD5. In any one of the features BD1 to BD4 characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be any of the re-playing results is the same probability or substantially the same regardless of the type of the re-playing state The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, when realizing the game of predicting a specific event about a specific gaming state in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the degree of advantage of the replaying state transitioning to the reserved is made different. There is no need. Therefore, the game characteristic about the said specific game state can be implement | achieved, without considering a payout rate etc.

  The "same probability or almost the same probability" includes not only the case where the probability is completely the same but also a difference in the probability that the player is unlikely to experience the difference in the probability.

Feature BD7. The specific condition includes a non-winning condition (for example, a winning combination in which BB is not won) which is established without the transition means being held by the holding means being held.
The lottery by the re-playing state selected by the selection means based on the establishment of the non-winning condition, and the re-playing state selected by the selection means based on the establishment of the winning condition The gaming machine according to any one of the features BD1 to BD6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means becomes any one of the replay results is the same probability or substantially the same probability.

  According to the above configuration, the probability that the re-playing result will be the same or almost the same probability between the re-playing state transitioning based on the transition result winning being held by the reserving means and the non-replaying state being not so Become. In this way, when making a transition to the re-playing state, it is not possible to predict it from the winning probability of the re-playing result also when playing a game such as predicting whether or not the transition result winning is reserved when transitioning to the re-playing state In this way, it is possible to make the prediction game heavier.

Feature BD8. A normal replay result (normal replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the normal gaming state,
A specific replay result (special replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the replay state,
Means for controlling each of the orbiting members so that the symbol combination for normal replay can be stopped at the effective position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal replay result, (reel control of main controller 101 In the processing, a function of executing a process of making a replay winning at a stop point of normal replay, and
Means for controlling each of the orbiters so that the symbol combination for specific replay can be stopped at the effective position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay) (main controller 101 In the reel control process of (1), for example, a function of executing a process of causing the player to make a replay winning at the stop of the black BAR stop),
Means for controlling each of the orbiters so that the symbol combination for the normal replay can be stopped at the effective position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay outcome (special replay) (main control device A function of executing a process of making a replay winning at a stop point of normal replay in the reel control process of 101, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features BD1 to BD7, wherein the frequency at which the symbol combination for specific replay is stopped differs depending on the type of the replay state selected by the selection means.

  According to the above configuration, in the game property of predicting the type of replay status from the appearance rate of the symbol combination for specific replay, even when the specific replay result is won, the same stop appearance as the normal replay result It can happen that By doing this, the pattern combination for the specific replay is stopped or the pattern combination for the ordinary replay is stopped at the time of the specific replay result winning without making the winning probability of the specific replay result different. It is possible to change the appearance rate of the symbol combination for specific replays only by changing the setting or the setting. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the type of replaying state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for specific replaying with a relatively simple configuration, and thereby predicting a specific event related to the specific gaming state. it can.

Feature BD9. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
As the transition result, the first transition result and the second transition result are included,
The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
When the transition lottery means executes the transition lottery based on the first transition result winning, the transition lottery to the first predetermined state in the specific gaming state performs the lottery based on the second transition result winning. When executing the transition lottery, the transition lottery to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state in the specific gaming state is performed,
The replaying state transition means causes transition to the first replaying state among the plurality of replaying states on condition that the first transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, and the reserving mode is executed by the reserve means. [1] A feature BD1 to BD8 characterized in that the transition to a second replaying state different from the first replaying state among the plurality of replaying states is performed on condition that the transition result winning is reserved. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the type of the transition result, the type of the replay state, and the content of the specific gaming state in which the transition lottery is performed are respectively linked. In other words, there occurs an event of transitioning to the first replaying state despite the second transition result winning or transitioning to the second replaying state despite the first transition result winning Absent. Therefore, the transparency of the game is secured, and the game in which the specific game state is predicted from the type of the replay state can be suitably realized.

Characteristic BD10. A notification is started by setting a predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the notification is started based on the termination of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by turning off a predetermined notification means;
In the case where the gaming state is shifted to the replaying state by the replaying state transitioning means, a means capable of restricting the start of notification by the specific gaming state notifying means (when the attack mode or the like in the display control device 81 is won, precursor mode Function to execute the process of setting
The gaming machine according to any one of the features BD1 to BD9, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, regarding the specific gaming state, when transitioning to the specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification is confirmed in the predetermined notification means by the specific gaming state notification means, it can be easily determined whether or not the specific gaming state, and, for example, it has been shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who ends the game without being aware of it and the player who is seated at the game stand which finished the game later. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the special notification.

  In addition, when transitioning to the replaying state by the replaying state transition means, the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means may be restricted. In this way, when transitioning to the replaying state based on the transition result winning being retained by the retaining means, it is preferable to predict the specific event related to the specific gaming state from the type of the replaying state. It can be done. That is, in a configuration in which the presence or absence of the transition to the specific gaming state is set as the specific event when the notification is started by the specific gaming state notification means, the specific event is predicted by the notification by the specific gaming state notification means It is because it is comprehended without notice.

Feature BD11. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The gaming machine according to any one of the features BD1 to BD10, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Characteristic BD12. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features BD1 to BD11, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of enhancing the sense of expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BD1.

Characteristic BD13. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carried over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the restriction means (the main control to limit the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means A function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101),
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states (in particular, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined replaying result is different from the normal gaming state are set.
The plurality of replaying states are set to have different probabilities of becoming a specific replaying result among the replaying results,
The transition lottery means is capable of executing transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
Replay state transition means (in which it is possible to shift the game state to any one of the plurality of replay states if a specific condition including the winning condition in which the transition result winning is held by the hold means is satisfied. In the special RT state process of the main control apparatus 101, the function of executing the process of shifting to any of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state);
When the gaming state is to be shifted to the replaying state by the replaying state transitioning means, selecting means capable of selecting the replaying state to be shifted according to the winning expectation of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (main control A function of executing a process of setting an RT state according to the presence or absence of a challenge mode winning flag, an attack mode winning flag, and a specialization zone winning flag in the special RT status process of the device 101;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the symbol combination for transition does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves.

  On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, if the configuration is such that the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is further performed, the stop operation is performed such that the symbol combination for transition is not stopped, There is a possibility that an act of causing a transition to an advantageous state not to occur easily and an transition lottery to a specific gaming state to be generated indefinitely may be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation not stopping the pattern combination for transition and the player who can not perform the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game It is not preferable and it is not preferable from such a point of view as it may result in a payout rate different from the intended payout rate in design. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is determined, by limiting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned intended payout rate, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

  In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, it is possible to play the game while suggesting it in an effect or the like in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally determined, to the transition to the advantageous state There are also merits such as maintaining a sense of expectation. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transition pattern combination itself, the result will be a specific result, and there will be many occasions where the execution of the lottery concerning the specific state is restricted, and the player will feel lost. obtain. Therefore, based on the situation where such a situation may occur, that is, the situation in which the transition result winning is reserved to the retention means, any of a plurality of replaying states each having a different probability of becoming a specific replaying result The configuration is such that the type of replaying state is selected according to the expectation of winning of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state. In this way, the type of replaying state is predicted and grasped from the winning probability of the specific replaying result, and the probability of winning of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is predicted, and a game is added, and the specific result As a result, even in a situation where the execution of the lottery concerning the specific gaming state is restricted, it is possible to enjoy the game concerning the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

  Each configuration of the features BD1 to BD12 may be individually applied to the feature BD13, or may be applied in combination.

<Features BE group>
Feature BE1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) When,
The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the notification by the specific notification means is ended based on the end of the specific gaming state Specific gaming state notification means (function of executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
Equipped with
As the identification result, the overlap result including the transition result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, chance A overlap 1) and the non-overlap result not including the transition result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, Chance A) is set,
The specific game state notification means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the game winning the non-overlapping result is set as the start game, and the operation of the next game of the start game A unit (a function of executing a section display first process in the main control device 101) that starts notification by the specific notification unit before timing allowing
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the overlapping result or the transition result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the game is shifted to the advantageous state by stopping the symbol combination for the transition. The start game is a start game, the notification by the specific notification unit is not started at a timing before the start game, and the notification by the specific notification unit is at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game to the start game. A unit to start (function to execute the section display fourth process in the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  In this case, the notification by the specific notification means is started when transitioning to the specific gaming state where the mode notification is easily performed, and the notification by the specific notification means is also ended when the specific gaming state is ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the mode notification as much as possible.

  In addition, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means, starting with a game in which the lottery result triggered by the winning lottery for at least the transition to the specific gaming state wins is the start game, and allows the operation of the game following the start game. Also, the start timing of the notification is considered to be timed notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the termination of the game despite the winning of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the notification of the transition lottery is made timely as described above, the result of the transition lottery can be clearly determined depending on whether the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started or not. It can also be viewed as a lack of fun in the production.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is a transition opportunity to the advantageous state, and the overlapping result with the transition result (so-called big hit) that the winning may be reserved until the winning is established. And the non-overlapping result which is not overlapping with the transition result, the notification start by the specific gaming state notifying means is made different between the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result.

  More specifically, if the game is won by the non-overlapping result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the game in which the non-overlapping result is won is taken as the start game and before the operation of the next game is permitted. In the case where the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started and the winning lottery for the transition to the specific gaming state is won triggered by the result (mainly the overlapping result) including the transition result, a pattern for the transition corresponding to the transition result The game in which the combination is stopped and the game is shifted to the advantageous state is set as the start game, and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started before permitting the operation of the next game.

  By doing in this way, even if the stop game corresponding to the result of triggering the transition lottery to the specific gaming state appears, even if the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started in the game, Since the possibility of being the overlapping result is left, it is possible to make a notification with a high rendering effect while making the notification by the specific gaming state notification means time-limited. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature BE2. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) which is a duplication result with a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) which is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first duplicate result, a benefit corresponding to the first identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the first identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first identification result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature BE1, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the game in which the first identification result in which the first identification result and the transition result are overlapped is won, and the game in which the first non-overlapping result in which the first identification result is single winning is: In any case, since it is possible to stop the pattern combination for the first specified result and establish the first specified result winning, it is stopped which one of the first overlapped result and the first non- overlapped result is won, It is difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, if the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is the first overlapping result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is the start game, and if it is the first non-overlapping result, the game in which the first identification result winning is established. Let's start the game. Therefore, even if the player has won the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state triggered by any result, an event may occur in which the presence / absence (start timing) of the notification of the specific gaming state notification means is different. That is, even when the symbol combination for the first specification result is stopped, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification unit is not started before the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specification The possibility of the pattern combination for the result being based on the first specific result in the first duplicate result can be left, and the sense of expectation is maintained even when the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not won It is possible to

Feature BE3. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1) which is a duplication result with a second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon) which is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) of the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the second identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the second identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second identification result is stopped at the effective position. And
The gaming machine according to Feature BE2, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specification result and the lottery based on the second specification result.

  According to the above configuration, in the game characteristics of the feature BE2, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into consideration. That is, for example, if the first specific result is configured to be more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started If not, the symbol combination for the second specific result is stopped, and the possibility of being transition-winning is higher than when the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, and the first specific pattern The expectation for the combination to appear is further enhanced. On the other hand, when the symbol combination for the second specified result is stopped and the notification by the specified gaming state notifying means is not started, the effect of surprise when the first specified symbol combination appears thereafter is enhanced. . As described above, by enjoying the stop score by adding the selection probability of the shift lottery by the shift lottery means, the game property for predicting the result of the shift lottery from the stop score during the reservation is remarkably improved.

Feature BE4. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1) which is a duplication result with a third identification result (for example, chance A) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) which is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the third identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the third identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third identification result is stopped at the effective position. And
The ratio of the duplicate result and the non-duplicate result in the lottery by the lottery means is the ratio of the first duplicate result and the first non-duplicate result, the third duplicate result and the third non-duplicate result The game machine according to the feature BE2 or the feature BE3 characterized in that the ratio is different.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into consideration in the game characteristics of the features BE2 and BE3. That is, for example, a configuration in which the ratio of the first overlapping result to the first non-overlapping result is the overlapping result with the transition result is higher than the ratio of the third overlapping result to the third non-overlapping result (same stop If the configuration is highly likely that the transition result is won even if the appearance result), the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped, and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the third specification It is more likely that the transition result winning state is reserved by the retaining means than when the symbol combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notifying means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BE3, if it is a non-overlapping result and the specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started in the game, so as described above for the first specific result If the symbol combination is stopped and the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started, the possibility of winning in the specific gaming state is also higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by entertaining the stopped player taking into consideration the probability that the transition result will be won, the game property for predicting the result of the transition lottery from the stopped one during the reservation is remarkably improved.

Feature BE5. As the overlapping result, a fourth overlapping result (for example, middle bell overlapping 1) which is a overlapping result with a fourth specifying result (for example, middle bell) among the specifying results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fourth non-overlapping result (e.g., middle bell) which is a non-overlapping result of the fourth identification result (e.g., middle bell) of the identification results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the fourth identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fourth identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the fourth identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fourth identification result is stopped at the effective position. And
The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
As a transition lottery by the transition lottery means, a first transition lottery that is a transition lottery to a first predetermined state (challenge mode) and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (attack mode) different from the first predetermined state A certain second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first identification result, the first transition lottery executed based on the fourth identification result may be won by any transition lottery. And the gaming machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE4 characterized in that in the second transition lottery, it is set so as not to win in any one transition lottery.

  According to the above configuration, among the specific gaming states, ones that do not shift depending on the type of the specific result are included in the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. That is, in the case of the first identification result, although transition may be made to any of the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state, in the case of the fourth identification result, it may not be transitioned to either one. By doing this, the case where the pattern combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first duplicate result or the first non-duplicate result is stopped, and the fourth specification corresponding to the fourth duplicate result or the fourth non-duplicate result In addition to the viewpoint as to whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, the transition lottery to any predetermined state is performed when the symbol combination for the result is stopped. Also from the viewpoint of whether or not, it is possible to play a game that enjoys the subsequent trend.

Feature BE6. As the overlapping result, a fifth overlapping result (for example, middle bell overlapping 1) which is a overlapping result with the fifth specific result (for example, middle bell) of the specifying results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fifth non-overlapping result (for example, middle bell) which is a non-overlapping result of the fifth identification result (for example, middle bell) of the identification results is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth duplicate result, a benefit corresponding to the fifth identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fifth identification result is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the fifth identification result is awarded based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fifth identification result is stopped at the effective position. And
The specific gaming state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
As a transition lottery by the transition lottery means, a first transition lottery which is a transition lottery to a first predetermined state (challenge mode), and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (super attack mode) different from the first predetermined state And the second transition lottery, which is
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first identification result, there is a case that any transition lottery may not be won, while the first executed based on the fifth identification result The gaming machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE5, wherein in the transition lottery and the second transition lottery, at least one of the transition lotterys is set to win.

  According to the above configuration, among the specific gaming states, the ones that necessarily shift to any of the predetermined states depending on the type of the specific result are included in the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. That is, in the case of the first specific result, there is a case where the transition to any of the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state may not be made, and in the case of the fifth specific result, the transition necessarily to either one. By doing this, the case where the pattern combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first duplicate result or the first non-duplicate result is stopped, and the fifth specification corresponding to the fifth duplicate result or the fifth non-duplicate result In addition to the viewpoint as to whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, to which one of the predetermined states is to be shifted, etc. From the viewpoint also, it is possible to play a game that enjoys the subsequent trend.

Feature BE7. The first result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that winning is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification The game machine according to any one of the features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

  Feature BE8. As the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in comparison with the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or The gaming machine according to any one of the features BE1 to BE7, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a transition lottery to a high probability and is before transition is set.

  According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified, and the gaming property is improved. In addition, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are all stages before the degree of advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost equal to the normal gaming state . Including such a state, when it shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game is ended without being aware of it even though it is shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event that the That is, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification if the state transitions to the high frequency state, and specifies the transition to the state of the previous stage of such high frequency state By having a configuration in which notification is made by the notification start of the notification means, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of enhancing the sense of expectation to the specific gaming state described in the feature BE1.

<Feature CA group>
Characteristics CA1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode as a lottery result by the lottery means, the symbol combination for the first aspect can be stopped, and each stop operation means is stopped by the first stop An operation mode result (for example, push order bell) in which the pattern combination for the second mode different from the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped when operated in the second stop operation mode different from the operation mode ) Is set,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Transition means for shifting to the state (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the means for retaining the transition result winning until the symbol combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position (processing of step S609 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
Equipped with
As a game state, a re-game state is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a re-game result is higher than that in the normal game state.
When specific conditions including a winning condition established by retaining the transition result winning by the retaining means and a non-winning condition established without the transition result winning being retained by the retaining means are satisfied, It is equipped with re-playing state transition means (function to execute special RT state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to the re-playing state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the operation mode result in the replay state, the mode notification means is shifted based on the fact that the win condition is satisfied as the specific condition. If there is, it is easy to execute the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode, and if the re-playing state is shifted based on the establishment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition, the second stop operation A game machine characterized by comprising special mode notification means (function to execute a special RT notification process by the display control device 81) which is easy to execute the mode notification regarding the mode.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and if the symbol combination for transition does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved.

  Furthermore, a re-game state (so-called RT state) is set in which the probability of becoming a re-game result as the game state is higher than that of the normal game state, and transition to the re-game state is made on condition that transition result winning is reserved. In some cases, the transition to the re-playing state may be made on condition that the transition result winning is not reserved. Therefore, when the game is shifted to the replaying state, the degree of advantage of the player after that largely differs depending on whether or not the transition result winning is reserved, and it is considered that the interest of the player is the presence or absence of the reserved.

  Here, the re-game result is a result that no so-called dropout occurs. Therefore, for example, in the case where the presence or absence of the above-mentioned reservation is performed by the effect etc., that the frequency at which the eye pushing in the replaying state is required is relatively low means that the effect of the presence or absence of the reservation is missed From the viewpoint of suppressing On the other hand, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in which, although the stopping appearance of the re-game result winning is generally uniform, the stopping appearance may be monotonous in general.

  In that point, in the above configuration, the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped or the pattern combination for the second mode is different by changing the mode notification when the operation mode result is won during the replay state. A game has been added that predicts the presence or absence of the above-mentioned reservation depending on whether to stop. That is, by indicating the presence or absence of the reservation to which the player is interested in the re-playing state by the stopping appearance, and making it grasp, it is possible not only to avoid the monotonization of the stopping appearance in the re-playing state Dramatic effects such as dramatically improving the attention to the stopping eye can be expected. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Characteristics CA2. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (function to execute the first specific part process by the main control device 101) which executes the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result ,
In the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carried over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the restriction means (the main control to limit the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means A function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature CA1, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result selection is reserved, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state regarding the mode notification is restricted. That is, in the replay state, if execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state regarding the mode notification is restricted, reservation of the transition result winning is decided, and execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state regarding the mode notification is restricted If not, it is determined that the transition result winning is not reserved. In other words, if the player is in a situation in which the execution of the transition lottery is restricted, it is a preferable situation for the player to reserve the transition result winning if the situation is not favorable for the player, and conversely the player such that the execution of the transition lottery is not restricted If the situation is favorable for the player, the transition result is an unfavorable situation for the player that the winning of the transition result is not reserved. Thus, it is possible to have a well-balanced gameplay.

Feature CA3. The symbol combination for the first aspect is established by stopping the first predetermined number of specific symbols set at a specific position (middle line L2) that can be viewed through the display unit in each of the orbiting members ,
The pattern combination for the second aspect is characterized by being realized by stopping a second number of the specific symbols smaller than the first number at the specific position in each of the orbiting members. Feature CA1 Or the game machine as described in feature CA2.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the difference in the number of stopped images between the pattern combination for the first aspect and the pattern combination for the second aspect by the number of stopped specific symbols. By doing this, for example, it becomes possible to make it easier to understand, such as making it possible to judge the game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted by the difference in the number of stopped pieces, by the number of stops of the specific pattern.

  Characteristics CA4. The gaming machine according to feature CA3, wherein the second number is zero.

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, the difference between the number of the stopped eye and the case where the pattern combination for the first aspect is stopped and the case where the pattern combination for the second aspect is stopped are whether or not the specific pattern stops at the specific position. It becomes a clearer difference such as Therefore, it is possible to make the game characteristic simpler in predicting the presence or absence of reservation.

  Furthermore, for example, in the case of a game where the prediction is to be made, if it is desired to stop the specific pattern at the specific position no longer, etc., the operation mode result is prevented from being won by the above configuration, for example. Even if it does not use such a complicated structure, it becomes possible to adjust the presence or absence of a stop of a specific pattern by the difference of a stop operation aspect, and the game made to said prediction can be implement | achieved by more simple structure.

Characteristics CA5. It has a specific means (black BAR stop counter) which counts the number of times the specific pattern has stopped at the specific position over a plurality of games in the replay state.
If the number counted by the specifying means reaches the specified number, the special mode notifying means is the one that has changed the re-playing state based on the establishment of the non-winning condition as the specified condition. A means for disabling the execution of the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode (in the display control device 81, a process of setting a pressing order notification effect for black BAR non-stop from the notification scenario and the value of the black BAR stop counter is executed The gaming machine according to feature CA4, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the replay state where the transition result winning is not reserved, when the number of stops of the specific symbol reaches the specific number, the aspect about the first stop operation aspect corresponding to the symbol combination for the first aspect The notification will not be executed. As a result, since the specific pattern does not stop for the first number as the pattern combination for the first aspect, the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position as the pattern combination for the second aspect. Thereby, it is predicted that the transition result winning is not reserved by the number of specific symbols stopping at a specific position not exceeding the specific number, and conversely, the number of specific symbols stopping at a specific position exceeds the specific number. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the transition result winning is reserved.

  Feature CA6. The special mode informing means is shifted based on the fact that the non-winning condition is established as the specific condition even if the number counted by the specific means is less than the specific number. And means for disabling execution of the mode notification relating to the first stop operation mode when the first number is exceeded when the first number is added to the number counted by the specifying means (display control device 81. The gaming machine according to feature CA5, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of setting a pressing order notification effect for black bar non-stop from the type of special replay and the value of the black BAR stop counter. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent in advance the event that the number of specific symbols stopping at the specific position exceeds the specific number, even though the transition result winning is not reserved by the retaining means. Therefore, in the game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the number of stops, it becomes difficult to cause a contradiction between the number of stops and the presence or absence of reservation.

Feature CA7. As the operation mode result, there are provided a plurality of operation mode results in which the number at which the specific pattern stops is different at the specific position when the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped,
In any of the plurality of operation mode results, when the symbol combination for the second embodiment is stopped, the number of stops of the specific symbol at the specific position is 0. A feature of the features CA3 to CA6 The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the above configuration, in the game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted by the number of stops of the specific pattern, the number of increases in the number of stops is made different depending on the type of operation mode result, and diversification of the increase rate is achieved. If you do not want to increase the number further from the relationship between the number of stops and the presence or absence of the reservation, it is only necessary to perform the mode notification of the second stop operation mode, and the game for predicting the presence or absence of the above reservation is suitably realized. can do.

  Characteristics CA8. A unit capable of changing the content (background color) of the specific effect in the specific informing unit (auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number counted by the specifying unit (a process for setting the effect at the time of addition by the display control device 81 The gaming machine according to any one of features CA3 to CA7, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the number of stoppages of the specific pattern at the specific position can be grasped from the content of the predetermined effect by the specific notification means, and the player does not have to count the number by himself. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to play a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the number of stops.

  Feature CA9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result and each circulating body is stopped in the first stop operation mode, the stop timing of the predetermined circulating body among the circulating bodies is the first timing If the symbol combination for the first aspect is stopped, the stop timing of the predetermined circulating member is different from the symbol combination for the first aspect if it is a second timing different from the first timing. A pattern combination according to any one of the features CA3 to CA8, characterized in that the number of combinations for stopping the specific pattern at the specific position is smaller than the first number, and the pattern combination for a low number is stopped. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, even if the stop operation mode matches the first stop operation mode (for example, even if the stop operation mode is the stop order and matches the first stop order), the first It is not limited that the number of specific symbols stop at a specific position, and the timing of the stop operation, that is, whether the symbol combination for the first mode in which the first number of specific symbols are stopped by eye pressing operation is stopped or When a small number of specific patterns stop, it is different whether the pattern combination for low numbers stops. In this way, it is possible to stop the specific pattern by its own stop operation and make it seem as if the transition result winning has been won, and it is possible to improve the playability in the replay state.

  Characteristics CA10. In the game that is to be shifted to the re-playing state when the winning condition is met, the stop point to be stopped at each of the orbiters, and the transition to the re-playing state when the non-winning condition is met A gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA9, characterized in that it has the same stopping point as that for each of the revolving members in the game.

  According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine the presence or absence of the retention of the transition result winning from the stop point of the game serving as the transition opportunity to the replay state. Therefore, there is no loss of the playability of predicting and grasping the presence or absence of the reservation from the stopping point in the replaying state.

Characteristics CA11. Grasping means (special RT counter) for grasping the number of games in the replaying state which has been shifted by the establishment of the non-winning condition;
Means for returning from the replaying state to the gaming state before shifting to the replaying state based on the fact that the number of games grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined number determined in advance (main control device 101 Function to execute processing to return to the original gaming state based on the special RT counter becoming 0 in
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA10, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the re-playing state shifted without the transition result winning being reserved. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the re-gaming state, which has a high probability of being re-selected as a result of re-gaming, continues in spite of the fact that the transition result winning is not reserved.

  In addition, regarding the "predetermined number", if it is "a number larger than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the operation mode result", it averages at least once during the replay state. The operation mode result can be expected to be won, and there is an advantage that it is possible to suitably realize the game characteristics using the stop size. On the other hand, with regard to the "predetermined number", if the configuration is "a number smaller than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the operation mode result", the operation mode result is less likely to be won during the replay state. As a result, the rarity of the stopping eye based on the operation mode result can be enhanced, and the attention to the stopping eye can be enhanced.

Characteristics CA12. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
It is a lottery that is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the same winning probability is obtained regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, and the specific gaming state is entered. The transition lottery means (function to execute the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery is provided.
According to any one of the features CA1 to CA11, a first transition result (second BB) in which the winning probability by the lottery means differs according to the setting value set by the setting means is provided as the transition result. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the transition to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is made, and the transition pattern combination must be stopped. For example, in addition to the game characteristic that the transition result winning is retained, a specific gaming state is provided in which the number of stopped pieces is made different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode when the operation mode result is won. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves. Moreover, the specific gaming state is set so that there is no difference in the selection rate of the transition lottery by the setting value that causes a change in the increase or decrease rate of the game medium, etc. The fairness of the game is enhanced. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the set value like this, the pleasure of selecting one game stand from a plurality of game stands installed in the game hall, that is, which set value is predicted is predicted There is also a possibility that the fun of playing while playing will be killed. Therefore, in the above configuration, by providing the first transition result in which the winning probability is different depending on the setting value as the transition result, the game of predicting the setting value is determined to have the presence or absence of reservation by stopping appearance during replaying state. It is possible to enjoy the playability linked to the specific gaming state while performing while predicting.

  In the "specific gaming state", "as the specific gaming state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal gaming state, a high frequency where it is easy to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state At least one of the probability state and the high frequency state or the state before transition (precursor mode) that has been won for the transition lottery to the high probability and is before transition may be set as “in this case,“ in this case, According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the gaming property is improved, and the high probability state and the state before transition are both before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification. It is a stage, and the degree of advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. With the configuration in which knowledge is started, it is possible to suitably avoid such an event that the game is ended without being aware of it even though the game is shifted to the specific gaming state. If transition to the high frequency state is performed, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the notification means for specifying the transition to the previous stage state of such high frequency state It is possible to make the transition to the specific gaming state to be more appropriately grasped by making the configuration known by the notification start of 1. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of securing equality by the specific notification means. Effect is achieved. In addition, about the variation of a "specific game state", it is the same also about each following feature.

Feature CA13. As the transition result, there is provided a second transition result (first BB) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means,
The re-playing state transition means is characterized by transitioning to the common re-playing state even when any of the first transition result winning and the second transition result winning is retained in the retaining means. The gaming machine according to feature CA12.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to complicate the game of predicting the setting value while predicting the presence or absence of reservation in the replay state. That is, even if it is determined whether or not there is a reserve in the replay state, whether the reserve is the first transition result with a difference in winning probability due to the set value or the second transition without a difference in the win probability due to the set value As in the case of the result, the number of branches in the prediction of the setting value is increased, so that the game for predicting the setting value can be made more diverse and the game property is improved.

Characteristics CA14. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
The transition lottery means is capable of executing transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
The notification is started by setting the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) to a lighting state based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the identification is performed based on the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (function to execute the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which ends the notification by setting the notification means to the extinguished state,
The specific game state notification means is
If the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is a result that does not include the transition result, the game in which the result winning is established is the start game, and operation of the game following the start game is permitted. First means (a function for executing a section display first process by the main control device 101) that starts notification by the specific notification means at a timing earlier than the above;
When the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the result including the transition result, the transition result winning is the establishment game as the start game, and the operation of the game following the start game is permitted Second means (a function for executing the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) which starts notification by the specific notification means at a previous timing;
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA13, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the transition to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is made, and the transition pattern combination must be stopped. For example, in addition to the game characteristic that the transition result winning is retained, a specific gaming state is provided in which the number of stopped pieces is made different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode when the operation mode result is won. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to a specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can be generated in each game, and the game characteristic is remarkably improves.

  In such a configuration, when transitioning to the specific gaming state, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended, the notification is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the special notification.

  In addition, the notification by the specific notification means is started at least before allowing the operation of the game following the start game in which the lottery result at the start of the specific gaming state wins, and the start timing of the notification is time-limited It is considered to be a notice. More specifically, if the lottery result serving as the start trigger is a result that does not include the transition result, and if the transition result is not a result that the winning is not reserved, the operation of the next game of the game for which the lottery result is established. The notification is started before allowing the start of the game, and if the lottery result triggered by the start is the result including the transition result and the transition result winning can be reserved, the game following the game for which the transition result prize is established The notification is started prior to allowing the game operation. In other words, although notification is basically started in the lottery result winning game triggered by the start of the specific gaming state, when the transition result winning is reserved, the specific game until the transition result winning is established The start of notification by the state notification means is restricted. Then, for example, when the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is not started in the game resulting in the game result that can be the start trigger of the specific gaming state, (1) the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won and If the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, or (2) the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is not won and the transition result winning is reserved by the retaining means, or (3) the specific gaming The state transition lottery or the transition result is not won or not. In that respect, as in the above-mentioned feature CA1, since it is possible to play a game in which the presence or absence of the transition result winning is estimated from the stop point of the operation mode result, the relationship with the presence / absence of the start of notification by the specific game state notification means When the notification is not started, it is possible to narrow down whether the case is the case (1) or (2) or the case (3) from the stop point of the operation mode result. By doing this, it is possible to make the game characteristic of estimating the presence or absence of reservation based on the number of stops more advanced, and to improve interest.

  In particular, as in the feature CA12 and the feature CA13, in the configuration having the first transition result with a difference in the winning probability depending on the set value or the second transition result without a difference as a transition result, the transition lottery to a specific gaming state is won Assuming that there is no difference in the probability depending on the set value, it is not possible to perform the transition lottery to the specific gaming state with the first transition result, and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state with the second transition result Can be performed. Then, in the above cases (1) and (2), if the first transition result is retained, it is the case of (2), and if the second transition result is retained, the case of (1) It becomes possible to narrow down which case it is from the relationship with the type of transition result.

Characteristics CA15. As the operation mode result,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination in the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped as the pattern combination for the first mode, and each stop A pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result as the pattern combination for the second mode when the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the first mode A first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) in which the pattern combination of the second aspect different from the pattern combination of 2 can be stopped;
When each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result can be stopped as the pattern combination for the first aspect, and each stop When the operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode, it is a pattern combination corresponding to the third result as the pattern combination for the second mode, which is different from the pattern combination of the third mode. The first operation mode result (for example, special replay) in which the symbol combination in the fourth mode can be stopped is set.
The special mode notifying means executes the mode notification if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, but does not execute the mode notification if the operation mode result is the first operation mode result The game machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA14, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the halted appearance at the time of winning the operation mode result, if the manipulation mode result is the second operation mode result, adjustment of the halted appearance is performed by mode notification, If the result is the first operation mode result, the mode notification is not performed and the adjustment of the stoppage is not performed. For the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, the result of winning in the first operation mode result may be different depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the same result regardless of the stop operation mode. Get a prize. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the presence or absence of the reservation is predicted from the stopping appearance at the time of winning the operation mode result, as long as the profit of the player is not changed. Therefore, when setting the game to be predicted, it is not necessary to consider the payout rate and the like, and it can be set in anticipation of a pure rendering effect.

Characteristics CA16. As a result of the operation mode, when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination for the first aspect can be stopped, and each stop operation means is When the second stop operation mode is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, an order correspondence result (for example, push order bell) in which the symbol combination for the second mode can be stopped Is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the mode notification means determines, as the mode notification, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. A game machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA15, which is executable by a predetermined notification means.

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) is determined when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is achieved. In the game, nine medals are awarded on the basis of the first small winning combination, and each of the stop operation means serves as the second stop operation mode, a second stop order different from the first stop order When the second result winning is achieved by the operation of the second prize, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means determines, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. It may be expressed as “capable of being implemented by means”, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

<Feature CB group>
Feature CB1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode And a pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the second result, the second aspect being different from the pattern combination of the first aspect A first operation mode result (for example, pushing order bell) in which the symbol combination can be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is the third stop operation mode And the symbol combination corresponding to the third result can be stopped if the symbol combination is operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the fourth pattern, which is different from the symbol combination of the third aspect. A second operation mode result (for example, special replay)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result, the first mode notification (pushing order notification) related to the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is first Notification means (first mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) executable by the notification means (first display segment N1 to seventh display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second operation mode result, the second mode notification (pushing order notification effect) related to the stop operation mode including the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode is selected. 2 second mode informing means (function of executing processing for informing of pressing order by display control device 81) that can be executed by 2 informing means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
In any of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means and the second mode notification by the second mode notification means, a first specific state (favorable section) in which execution is permitted;
While the execution of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means is restricted, the second specific state (normal section) in which the execution of the second mode notification by the second mode notification means is permitted;
Is set,
In the second specific state, based on the second aspect informing by the second aspect informing means, suggesting means for suggesting an advantage after the second specific state (performing alerting processing for special RT by the display control device 81 Game machine characterized by having the following functions.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, further, a first operation mode result in which the result of winning different according to the stop operation mode of the orbiter is set In addition, it is possible to realize a game characteristic in which the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification when the first operation mode result is won. In addition to that, since the second operation mode result in which the winning result is common is also set according to the stop operation mode of the orbiter, the second mode notification at the time of winning the second operation mode result is selected as the first specific state. By causing the notification to be generated in an interwoven manner, etc., it is possible to realize game play with suppressed euphoria without excessively changing the degree of advantage.

  In such a configuration, while the execution of the first mode notification is restricted among the first mode notification and the second mode notification, the second specific state in which the execution of the second mode notification is permitted is set. By setting such a second specific state, it is possible to realize a game feature that does not cause a change in the degree of advantage by the mode notification while performing the mode notification, and one-sided overturn to aim at simply acquiring game media by the mode notification. It is possible to contribute to the creation of new gameplay that has been removed from However, although the player may want to enjoy such new playability, he does not necessarily want to acquire game media, and the interest in the degree of advantage is still high. It can be said. Therefore, in the second specific state, if it is configured to suggest the degree of advantage after the second specific state using the aspect notification, a game that predicts the later development by the aspect notification will be added, and the aspect notification It is possible to improve the playability in the second specific state in which the degree of advantage does not change by itself. As a result of the above, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature CB2. The first specific state is a state in which at least the execution frequency of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means can be higher than that of the normal gaming state,
First transition lottery means (function of executing a first specific combination process by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery whether or not to shift the gaming state to the first specific state;
The notification by the specific notification unit (eighth display segment N8) is started based on the winning of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery unit, and the specific notification is started based on the end of the first specific state. A specific notification execution unit (a function of executing a section display first process to a section display fourth process by the main control device 101) for ending the notification by the section;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is characterized in that the notification by the specific notification means is not performed in the second specific state even when the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is won. The gaming machine according to the feature CB1.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration having the first specific state in which the execution of the first mode notification and the second mode notification is permitted, and the second specific state in which only the second mode notification is permitted to execute the first state. Since the specific state is set such that the execution frequency of the first mode notification can be higher than the normal gaming state, the player is expected to play the game while expecting to shift to the first specific state. Conceivable. In that respect, the notification by the specific informing means is started when the first transition lottery to the first specific state is won, and the informing by the specific informing means is ended when the first specific state is over, so the presence or absence of notification by the specific informing means Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first specific state is established. By doing this, for example, it is possible to suppress termination of the game without noticing it despite the fact that the first transition drawing to the first specific state has been won, so that the game It is possible to eliminate the concentration of profits between the player who ends the game and the succeeding player who plays the game thereafter.

  As described above, although the effect of securing the fairness of the game as described above can be expected if the specific notification means for specifying whether or not it is the first specific state is provided, on the other hand, the game result or the stopping appearance, Since the player may focus only on the specific notification means regardless of the occurrence of the effect, etc., the effect of the effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the notification of the specific notification means is not performed in the second specific state, the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, that is, the start of the notification of the specific notification means It is possible to urge the player who has given a limited interest in the second aspect notification generated in the second specific state to shift his interest to the second aspect notification, and the subsequent advantage based on the second aspect notification. It is possible to suitably realize the gameplay of predicting the

  Feature CB3. The suggestion means performs the second mode notification about the third stop operation mode and the second mode notification about the fourth stop operation mode after the second specific state The gaming machine according to the feature CB1 or the feature CB2 characterized in that the degree of preference of the game devices is different.

  According to the above configuration, when the stopping operation is performed in the third stopping operation mode by the suggesting means and the symbol combination in the third mode is stopped, and the stopping operation is performed in the fourth stopping operation mode. The advantage after the second specific state differs depending on when the symbol combination of the symbol stops. As described above, if the configuration is used to make a suggestion using the stop command, even if the common third result is a prize, interest in the stop operation is increased and the subsequent advantage is predicted. Playability can be suitably improved.

  Feature CB4. The suggestion means can execute the specific effect (background color change) when the second mode notification about the third stop operation mode is performed and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped, While the second mode notification about the stop operation mode of is performed and the symbol combination of the fourth mode is stopped, the specific effect can be executed, while the second mode notification about the third stop operation mode If the symbol combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the specific effect is not performed, and the second aspect notification about the fourth stop operation aspect is performed and the symbol combination of the third aspect is stopped The gaming machine according to the feature CB3 is characterized in that it is possible to indicate an advantage after the second specific state by not executing the specific effect when it is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the suggestion means executes the specific effect as a kind of suggestion if the stop operation is performed according to the second mode notification, but does not execute the specific effect when the stop operation is performed according to the second mode notification . In other words, the second mode notification and the set of the stopping point match, and the suggestion is established. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game that does not follow the second mode notification, even if all the winning results are the third results, and it is possible to suitably implement the game using the suggestion means.

Feature CB5. The second transition lottery means (function to execute the lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing the second transition lottery whether or not to shift the gaming state to the second specific state,
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a first result not to shift to the first specific state after the second specific state (for example, a specific combination winning the second BB, a bonus and an attack mode, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of the features CB1 to CB4, characterized in that it includes a second result (for example, a first BB winning) that can shift to the first specific state after the second specific state.

  According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, a pattern not transitioning to the first specific state after the second specific state and a pattern transitioning to the first specific state after the second specific state occur. It is also possible to suggest whether or not to shift to the first specific state thereafter, using the suggestion by the second aspect notification performed in the second specific state. In particular, since the first specific state is a state in which both modes of notification are permitted and the degree of advantage changes according to the mode of notification, the affinity with the suggestion performed by the mode of notification (the second mode of notification) is high. It is possible to easily associate the first specific state from the suggestion by the mode notification.

  Feature CB6. The feature CB5 described in the feature CB5 is characterized in that the suggestion means can suggest as an advantage after the second specific state whether to shift to the first specific state after the second specific state. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature CB5 can be exhibited by the specific configuration.

Feature CB7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set by which the predetermined number of gaming media is awarded as the privilege by the privilege giving means,
As the gaming state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the first result, transition to the third specific state is performed after the second specific state,
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the second result, transition to the third specific state after the second specific state, and then transition to the first specific state. Feature CB5 Or the game machine as described in characteristic CB6.

  According to the above configuration, since a predetermined number of game media are paid out when the payout result winning is realized, an increase in a large number of game media can be expected in the third specific state. Such a third specific state is generated after the second specific state in any of the first result and the second result, and the first specific state after the third specific state according to the first result and the second result Whether or not to shift to different was made. In this way, at least the third specific state will occur after the second specific state even if the state is shifted to the second specific state based on any of the results, and a sense of expectation for the second specific state It becomes possible to raise more.

Feature CB8. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the first result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting means, and the lottery result by the second transition lottery means may be the second result The gaming machine according to any one of the features CB5 to CB7, wherein the probability of becoming is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of the first result not to shift to the first specific state after the second specific state is different depending on the set value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate of the gaming media, etc. The probability of the second result of transitioning to one specific state is common regardless of the setting value. That is, in the first specific state in which the degree of advantage changes due to the first aspect notification (also the second aspect notification), the transition probability may be common regardless of the setting value. By doing this, it is possible to make the factor of luck stronger as to whether or not to shift to the first specific state, and the fairness of the game based on the first specific state is secured. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the set value like this, the pleasure of selecting one game stand from a plurality of game stands installed in the game hall, that is, which set value is predicted is predicted There is also a possibility that the fun of playing while playing will be killed. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the state does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state, a difference due to the set value is generated, so that the enjoyment of playing the game while predicting the set value is not deleted. In the range, the fairness of the game based on the first specific state can be secured.

Feature CB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set by which the predetermined number of gaming media is awarded as the privilege by the privilege giving means,
As the gaming state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
The second transition lottery means (function to execute the lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing the second transition lottery whether or not to shift the gaming state to the second specific state,
A third result (a specific winning combination in which a bonus and an attack mode or the like is not won) that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state as a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, and the second specific The gaming machine according to any one of the features CB1 to CB8, wherein a fourth result (for example, a first BB winning) that can shift to the third specific state after the state is included.

  According to the above configuration, since a predetermined number of game media are paid out when the payout result winning is realized, an increase in a large number of game media can be expected in the third specific state. By setting the third specific state as described above, a pattern that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state in the second specific state by setting it as the above configuration, and the second specific state Since there is a pattern of transitioning to the third specific state after the event, it is also suggested whether to transition to the third specific state thereafter using the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state. Is also possible.

  Feature CB10. The feature CB9 described in the feature CB9 is characterized in that the suggestion means can suggest whether or not to shift to the third specific state after the second specific state as an advantage after the second specific state. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature CB9 can be exhibited by the specific configuration.

Feature CB11. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a replay is to be awarded as the privilege is set by the privilege giving means,
The second operation mode result is a specific re-play result among the re-play results,
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states are set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined replaying result outcome is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
Means for shifting to a specific replay state in which the probability that the specific replay result is won among the plurality of replay states is higher than that in the normal game state based on the transition to the second specific state (main control device The gaming machine according to any one of the features CB1 to CB10, characterized in that it has a function of executing special RT state processing according to 101).

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the plurality of re-playing states are set, the specific re-playing state is set as the second specific state. In the specific replaying state, the probability of winning the specific replaying result as the second operation mode result is high. By utilizing the replaying state in this manner, the winning probability of the game result can be changed without using the so-called jackpot state as in the third specific state described above, and when transitioning to the second specific state It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the second operation mode result.

Feature CB12. In the first operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When it becomes possible to stop and each stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second corresponding to the second result The pattern combination of the aspect is something that can be stopped,
In the second operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is When it becomes possible to stop and each stop operation means is operated in the fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth corresponding to the third result It is possible to stop the pattern combination of the aspect,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notifying means determines the first stop order and the second stop order or the third stop order. A first order notification (pressing order notification effect) relating to the stopping order including the fourth stopping order and the fourth stopping order can be executed by the first notifying means as the first aspect notifying feature CB1 To the gaming machine according to any one of CB11.

  According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating members can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the benefit of the mode notification even to a player who is not good at the pushing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiter.

In the above configuration, “when the first operation mode result is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode,“ the first operation mode result is a pattern combination of the first mode. The first result winning is achieved by stopping and the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small winning combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and each stop When the operation means is operated in the second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination in the second mode is stopped and the second result prize is The second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small winning combination in a 3-bet game) different from the first benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means,
The second operation mode result is that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result is obtained. A winning is realized, and a third benefit (replay) is given by the benefit giving means, and each of the stop operation means operates as a fourth stop operation mode in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order. In this case, the symbol combination in the fourth aspect is stopped, and the third prize is established, and the third privilege is awarded by the privilege giving means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notifying means determines the first stop order and the second stop order or the third stop order. A first order notification (pressing order notification effect) relating to the stop order including the fourth stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. It may be expressed, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the provided benefit.

<Feature DA group>
Characteristics DA1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order Have a second result that results in winning being established when operated in the stop order of 2;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to the stopping order including the first stopping order and the second stopping order is displayed on a predetermined notifying means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68) N-first to seventh display segments N7) are provided with order notification means (function to execute pressing order combination processing by the main control device 101);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of times of execution in the specific gaming state;
Second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state (number of advantageous game remaining games ZG);
First end means to shift the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state (during the second process of section display by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the specific gaming state Second end means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function of executing processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101),
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
In the specific situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the number of remaining times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number, or when the particular condition is satisfied, or When the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition satisfaction, it is possible to cause the specific event which is different from the event based on the increase process and may be useful to the player. Specific event execution means (function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the excess flag is set by the main control device 101),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiter, and there is an order notification regarding such stop order There is provided a specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage is made different depending on the player. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed, and when the specific condition is established during the specific gaming state, the remaining process of the specific gaming state is increased. Can be generated, thereby significantly improving the playability of each game.

  However, as the so-called slot machine's inherent gameplay is to aim at and stop the pattern of the revolving unit to obtain a bonus, if the bonus that can be obtained by the game using order notification is too many, the original game If the playability can be neglected and it is possible to execute the specific gaming state using the order notification without restriction, there is a possibility that a payout exceeding the designer's intended payout rate may occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, the processing is ended when the upper limit number is reached regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to set the game property using the order notification as the game property incidental to the above-described original game property and fully enjoy both game properties.

  However, if the upper limit number of times is defined as described above, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the number of remaining times has already reached the upper limit number of times, the additional condition does not occur even if the specific condition is satisfied. The game in such a situation becomes a so-called digested game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the increase process (addition) is performed when the increase process is performed based on the specific situation in which the sum of the execution count and the remaining count has already reached the upper limit count or the specific condition is satisfied. And a specific event that may be useful to the player. By doing this, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or meaningless even if the addition is performed, and even in the above specific situation, the fun of each game is increased. It is possible to Therefore, interest can be improved.

  With regard to the “first result” and the “second result”, “the first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is It may be expressed as “a second result of winning being established when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode. In this case, “stop order” may be replaced with “stop operation mode”, “order notification” as “mode notification”, and “order notification means” as “mode notification means”.

  Feature DA2. The gaming machine according to Feature DA1, wherein the specific event is an event not related to the occurrence probability, the occurrence frequency and the occurrence frequency of the order notification.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further secure consistency with setting the upper limit number and not performing the increase processing.

  The above configuration can also be expressed as "the occurrence probability, the occurrence frequency, and the occurrence frequency of the order notification do not change depending on whether the specific event occurs or not."

Feature DA3. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The gaming machine according to the feature DA1 or the feature DA2, wherein the specific event execution unit performs a suggestion notification suggesting information of a setting value set by the setting unit as the specific event.

  According to the above configuration, since the suggestion information of the setting value is presented as the specific event, the player can use it as a judgment material for continuing the game after the specific gaming state has reached the upper limit number of times and ended. That is, it is possible to judge that the game should be ended after the end of the specific gaming state if the indication notification indicates the low setting, and the indication notification indicating the high setting should continue the game even after the specific gaming state is ended. It can be judged that the player wants to increase the number of game media, and for the player who desires that the number of game media not be reduced, it can be said that the notification of the suggestion of the set value is useful.

  Feature DA4. The gaming machine according to Feature DA3, wherein the specific condition has a common establishment probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting unit.

  According to the above configuration, the increase processing has the same occurrence probability regardless of the set value. That is, in the situation where the upper limit number of times has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with a common occurrence probability regardless of the setting value, but when it occurs, the indication notification of the setting value is performed. By doing this, it is possible that the element of luck is strongly involved in the notification of the indication of the setting value. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as that the notification notification does not substantially occur in the low setting because the higher the setting, the more likely the notification notification of the setting value occurs.

  Moreover, since the probability of establishment of the specific condition is common regardless of the setting value as described above, the possibility that the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times may be equivalent regardless of the setting value. That is, the probability itself of occurrence of a specific situation in which the indication of the setting value can be issued is also common regardless of the setting value, and in relation to the incidence rate of the indication notification of the setting value, to increase the independence not involving the setting value. Is possible.

Feature DA5. The specific condition when the increase process is performed may be established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the increase process is performed is different depending on the type of the special result.
Features DA1 to DA4 characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is higher as the type of the specific result where the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed is higher. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the probability in the case where the increase processing is performed as the special result and the probability when the specific event occurs as the special result are linked. By doing so, it can be easily understood that a specific event occurs as an alternative to the increase process based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in the specific situation, when the special result winning with the increase process is performed with high probability, it becomes possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the specific event in advance, and the player's mind By making preparations possible, it is possible to raise the level of attention to specific events.

Feature DA6. As the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that the establishment probability is different between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same kind of special result. Yes,
A characteristic is characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is easily increased as the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed increases in the specific gaming state The gaming machine described in DA5.

  According to the above configuration, even in the special result of the same type, in the configuration in which the probability that the increase process is performed changes depending on the type (predetermined state) of the specific gaming state, the type of the specific gaming state (predetermined Changes depending on the status) and links with the increase processing. By doing this, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easy to understand that a specific event occurs as an alternative to the increase processing based on the special result.

Feature DA7. As the specific game state, a special state (VB mode, specialization zone) in which the minimum number of continuing games is determined is set.
Special transition means (for example, a notification flag for VB by the main control device 101 is set) to shift the specific gaming state to the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition in the specific gaming state Function to execute processing)
The specific event execution means may cause the specific event when the special condition is achieved by the transition to the special state when the special condition is satisfied in the specific condition or when the special condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA6, which is characterized in that it is possible.

  When transitioning to the special state during the specific gaming state, the transition to the special state is the number of games in the specific gaming state, since the special state continues over the minimum continued game count. It can be considered equivalent to the process of increasing the number of times. Then, the transition to the special state in the specific situation or the transition to the special state may be meaningless to the player. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, it is possible to avoid making the user feel the meaningless by setting the target of a specific event even in such a special state.

Feature DA8. The specific condition when the increase process is performed may be established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that the probability of establishment of the special state is higher than that of the other states in the specific gaming state even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result of the same type. Is higher than
The probability that the specific condition is met when the specific event occurs is also configured to be higher in the special state than in other states in the specific gaming state,
When the specific event execution means causes the specific event when the special situation is achieved by transitioning to the special state when the special condition is met in the specific situation, or when the special condition is transitioned based on the establishment of the special condition, The gaming machine according to feature DA7, wherein transition to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is permitted.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase processing is easily performed when transitioning to the special state, the specific event is caused when transitioning to the special state in the specific situation or when transitioning to the special state results in the specific situation In this case, transition to the special state itself is permitted. Therefore, it is configured to allow the specific event to occur even during the special condition while causing the specific event at the transition of the special condition. As described above, by making the special state a state in which the increase process is easily performed and the state in which the specific event is easily generated, the specific situation or the specific situation is approaching to shift to the special state during the specific gaming state. It is possible to look forward even in the current situation.

Feature DA9. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being satisfied Storing means for storing the number information corresponding to the number of times increased in the number information storing means (the number of disappearing games EG) (function of executing the process of adding the number of added games to the number of disappearing games EG by the main control device 101) Equipped with
The specific event executor according to any one of the features DA1 to DA8, wherein the specific event executor is capable of causing the specific event based on the frequency information stored in the frequency information storage device. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the number of times when the increase process is performed. In this way, for example, it becomes possible to cause a specific event as compensation for a benefit that should have been obtained by the increase processing, such as a specific event tends to occur as the number of times information increases.

Characteristics DA10. The number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means is stored until at least the specific gaming state in which the specific event has occurred shifts to the normal gaming state, and the stored information is stored. In the existing situation, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, the specific condition is satisfied on the basis of the specific condition being satisfied. The number information corresponding to the number of times increased when the increase process is performed can be updated by adding it to the stored number information.
The specific event execution means can cause the specific event to occur based on the number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means when transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature DA9 characterized by the features.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the specific situation, the number information when the increase process is performed is integrated respectively, and the specific event occurs at the end of the specific gaming state based on the total number information. . In this way, in the configuration of the feature DA 9, even if the number of times information based on the establishment of each specific condition is small, a specific event can be generated if the specific condition is established a plurality of times, which makes it possible to I can maintain my sense of expectation.

  In particular, when a specific situation is reached relatively early after entering a specific gaming state, a game in which the number of times of execution of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number, that is, a game that can be a so-called digested game is implemented over a long period of time It will be. In that respect, as in the above-described configuration, the specific event can be generated by integration of a plurality of increase processes, so that the more the game that can be the digested game, the more likely the specific event occurs, making it feel as a digested game Can be suppressed.

  Feature DA11. The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the second ending means changes the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature DA10, characterized in that the specific event can be generated based on the number information stored in the number information storage means based on the shifting.

  According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs each time a specific condition is satisfied, and a specific event can occur according to the integrated value when the increase processing is performed at the end of the specific gaming state. In this way, each time, the occurrence of a specific event both enjoy the effect of not getting bored with a specific gaming state, and the effect of enjoying a specific gaming state for a long time by establishing a specific condition multiple times, both It is possible to

  Characteristics DA12. The specific event execution means can cause the specific event based on the establishment of the specific condition to occur during the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state where the specific condition is established. The game machine according to any one of the features DA1 to DA11, which is a feature.

  According to the above configuration, it is also possible to take over the fact that the specific condition is established during the specific gaming state as a specific event in the normal gaming state that is after the end of the specific gaming state. And since the specific event is an event different from the increase process, the event during the specific gaming state is handed over to the normal gaming state within the scope not against the meaning of forcibly terminating the specific gaming state by the upper limit number of times It becomes composition. By doing this, the interlocking property between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state is enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature DA13. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied, the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being satisfied And means for storing information corresponding to the number of times of increase in the predetermined information storage means (the number of disappearing games EG) (a function of executing a process of adding the number of added games to the number of disappearing games EG by the main control device 101) ,
When shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state by at least the second end means, an initial process capable of executing initialization processing to initialize specific information involved in the order notification used during the specific gaming state (Means of executing initialization processing by the main control device 101);
A unit for limiting the initialization of the information stored in the information storage unit when the initialization processing is performed by the initialization unit (in the main control unit 101, the number of erased games is provided in the area for a normal section) Function to execute processing to store in the specified area),
The gaming machine according to feature DA12, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the specific gaming state is ended when the number of executions in the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number, the specific information involved in the order notification is initialized, and thus the specific gaming state is forced. The effect of the feature DA11 can be obtained while preventing so-called continuous movement to shift to the specific gaming state again based on the information on the forcibly ending specific gaming state despite the termination to It is possible to expect.

  Feature DA14. The increase process can be performed even when the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition, or when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA13, characterized in that

  In the above configuration, it is clarified that the increase process itself is not limited even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation or the specific situation is reached by the increase process based on the specific condition satisfied. Ru. That is, for example, in the configuration in which the execution of the processing related to the predetermined order notification is limited including the increase processing in the normal gaming state which is not the specific gaming state, the increase processing related to the specific situation is not limited. Will be clarified. However, as described above, even if the increase processing is performed in the above situation, it may become meaningless by the upper limit number of times, and by causing the specific event in such a situation, the excellent effect of the feature DA1 can be obtained. You can expect.

Feature DA15. Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the game state transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state, and the specific game state is the normal game Specific game state notification means for ending the notification by turning off the specific notification means based on transition to the state (function to execute the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is characterized in that the notification is ended by setting the specific notification means to the extinguished state even when the specific game state is shifted to the normal game state by the second end means. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA14.

  According to the above configuration, when the transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state is made, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state is ended and the normal gaming state is changed, the notification is also ended. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it can be easily determined whether or not it is the specific gaming state, for example, the game without notice even though it has shifted to the specific gaming state It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between the player who has finished the game and the player who has later sat on the gaming stand where the game has been finished. Therefore, it becomes possible to have all the players equally enjoy the game by the special notification.

  In particular, even when the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times and transitions to the normal gaming state, the notification by the specific informing means ends, so that the player has finished the specific gaming state, that is, the specific condition in the specific situation. It can be clearly understood that the increase process has not been performed even if Then, it becomes difficult to enjoy the aftermath of the end of the specific gaming state even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, because the notification of such specific notification means ends strictly. In that respect, as in the feature DA1, if the specific event can be generated, even if the specific notification means can clearly grasp that the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated, the specific event can be obtained through the specific event. It is also possible to enjoy the afterglow based on the specific condition establishment.

Characteristics DA16. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order Have a second result that results in winning being established when operated in the stop order of 2;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to the stopping order including the first stopping order and the second stopping order is displayed on a predetermined notifying means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68) N-first to seventh display segments N7) are provided with order notification means (function to execute pressing order combination processing by the main control device 101);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal gaming state are provided.
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of times of execution in the specific gaming state;
Second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state (number of advantageous game remaining games ZG);
First end means to shift the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state (during the second process of section display by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the specific gaming state Second end means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function of executing processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101),
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
In the specific situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the number of remaining times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number, or when the particular condition is satisfied, or Specific event executing means capable of causing a specific event which is a different event from the event based on the increase process (main controller (main controller), when the specific situation is achieved by performing the increase process based on the specific condition satisfaction Function to execute each processing for special notification in a situation where the excess flag by 101 is set),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiter, and there is an order notification regarding such stop order There is provided a specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage is made different depending on the player. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed, and when the specific condition is established during the specific gaming state, the remaining process of the specific gaming state is increased. Can be generated, thereby significantly improving the playability of each game.

  However, as the so-called slot machine's inherent gameplay is to aim at and stop the pattern of the revolving unit to obtain a bonus, if the bonus that can be obtained by the game using order notification is too many, the original game If the playability can be neglected and it is possible to execute the specific gaming state using the order notification without restriction, there is a possibility that a payout exceeding the designer's intended payout rate may occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, the processing is ended when the upper limit number is reached regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to set the game property using the order notification as the game property incidental to the above-described original game property and fully enjoy both game properties.

  However, if the upper limit number of times is defined as described above, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the number of remaining times has already reached the upper limit number of times, the additional condition does not occur even if the specific condition is satisfied. The game in such a situation becomes a so-called digested game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the increase process (addition) is performed when the increase process is performed based on the specific situation in which the sum of the execution count and the remaining count has already reached the upper limit count or the specific condition is satisfied. It is designed to cause a specific event that is different from. By doing this, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or meaningless even if the addition is performed, and even in the above specific situation, the fun of each game is increased. It is possible to Therefore, interest can be improved.

  With regard to the “first result” and the “second result”, “the first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is It may be expressed as “a second result of winning being established when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode. In this case, “stop order” may be replaced with “stop operation mode”, “order notification” as “mode notification”, and “order notification means” as “mode notification means”.

<Feature DB group>
Feature DB1. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
Second grasping means for grasping the number of remaining times in the high advantageous state (the number of remaining advantageous game games ZG);
First end means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantage state (generally in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state Second end means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function of executing processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set A function of executing a process of setting a winning probability by 101)
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information grasping means for grasping specific information (total number of games) corresponding to the game situation of the day (function to execute the process for grasping the total number of games in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Suggestion notification execution means (function to execute processing for performing fourth special notification by the display control device 81) which executes suggestion notification suggesting information of the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
The suggestion notification execution means is capable of executing the indication notification based on the specific information grasped by the specific information grasping means when transitioning from the high advantage state to the low advantage state by the second end means. A game machine characterized by

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the player's degree of advantage is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the number of remaining high advantage states. Since the case where the upper limit number of times is reached may be terminated, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely enhanced. However, it is considered that the player desires the high advantage state to continue for a long time, and it is preferable that the high advantage state is forcibly terminated even if there is a remaining number based on reaching the upper limit number of times. Or, it is considered that the intention to continue the game may be extremely reduced when the forced high advantage state ends. Therefore, when such a high advantage state is forcibly ended, notification notification of a setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium is performed, for example, high setting It is possible to give motivation to continue the game by, for example, giving a suggestion notification.

  On the other hand, depending on the situation in which the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times, the notification notification of the set value as described above may be a motivation for ending the game rather than a motivation for continuing the game. That is, for example, if the situation in which the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times is a situation etc soon after the opening of the game hall, if the suggestion notification of high setting is performed as described above, the game is played It may be motivated to continue playing the game, but it is determined that the other game consoles are at a low setting due to the fact that the game consoles are at a high setting, and the motivation for the game termination is There is a possibility of being attached. Also, for example, in a situation where the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times just before closing the game hall, it is suggested notification of the setting value purely rather than adding motivation for continuing the game and motivation for ending the game. There are also cases where it is better to go. Therefore, in a situation where the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times, the high advantage state is forcibly ended by adopting a configuration in which the setting notification is suggested after adding the specific information corresponding to the game situation of the day. In this case, it is possible to preferably suppress a decline in the player's intention to continue the game.

Feature DB2. The specific execution unit (for example, a function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101) which executes a specific process regarding the continuation rate or the number of continuations of the high advantageous state
The gaming machine according to the feature DB 1, wherein the specific execution unit is configured to execute the specific processing regardless of the setting value set by the setting unit.

  According to the above configuration, while the specific process related to the continuation rate and the number of continuations is executed regardless of the set value, when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends as a result of the specific process, the set value suggestion may occur. . In this case, although the fact that the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times is strongly related to the high and low of the set value, a large amount of game media is acquired when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times. In such a situation, it is considered that the player tends to easily predict a setting value higher than the actual setting value. However, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times, even if a large amount of game media is required by that time, etc., even if a large amount of game media is acquired when the upper limit number of times is reached Depending on the game situation, the total payout rate is not necessarily high. Therefore, with regard to the above-mentioned high advantage state, the suggestion notification of the setting value is performed in consideration of the game situation at the time of forced termination, and the indication notification of the setting value of the impression the player has about the acquired game medium The game can be used as a push to continue the game at the time of forced termination.

  More specifically, for the "specific execution means", for example, it is possible to execute a transition lottery whether or not to shift from the low advantage state to the high advantage state based on the "predetermined condition is satisfied". Transition lottery means (function to execute the mode lottery process by the main control device 101) or, for example, "increase means capable of executing increase processing to increase the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition" (A function for executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) or, for example, “means capable of executing the above-mentioned high advantage state end lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition” may be used. .

  Furthermore, the term "specific execution means" may be expressed as "to execute the specific process with uniform probability regardless of the level of the setting value set by the setting means", or It may be expressed that “the specific process is executed with a common probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting unit” or “the setting value is set by the setting unit. Regardless, it may be expressed that “the result of the specific process is common”.

Feature DB3. The specific information grasping means can grasp the total number of times of execution of the game as the specific information in the gaming situation on the day,
When the suggestion notification execution means causes the second termination means to shift from the high advantage state to the low advantage state, the total number of times of execution grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined number of times (2000) When the total number of times of execution is less than the specified number of times, the probability of performing the suggested notification is lower than when the total number of times of execution exceeds the specified number of times. The feature DB 1 or the feature DB 2 is characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed such that the player is more likely to predict the set value than the suggestion notification performed when the number of times exceeds a specified number. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, comparing the case where the total number of executions is equal to or less than the specific number and the case where the specific number is exceeded, it is more difficult for the former case to perform the notification of the set value, or the set value is set In some cases, it is difficult to predict Therefore, it is difficult to narrow down the set value even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times in a situation where the number of times is equal to or less than the specific number of times. By doing this, it is possible to avoid an event that the setting value is determined at a stage soon after the game hall is opened, and the operation rate of the game stand or the other game stand is reduced.

Feature DB 4. The specific information grasping means can grasp time information as the specific information in the gaming situation on the day,
When the suggestion notification execution means causes the second termination means to shift from the high advantage state to the low advantage state, the specific information grasping means determines the time information grasped by the specific information grasping means at a predetermined time (13 o'clock) 2.) If the time information is earlier than when the time information is later than the specified time, the execution probability of the suggested notification is lower, or if the time information is before the specified time The feature DB 1 to DB 3 are characterized in that the suggestion notification is performed such that the player is more likely to predict the set value than the suggestion notification performed later than the specific time. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the above configuration, when the time at the time of forced termination is before or after the specific time and when it is after the specific time, the suggestion notification of the setting value is less likely to be executed in the former case, or the execution is performed. In such a mode, it is difficult to predict the setting value. Therefore, it is difficult to narrow down the set value even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times in a situation before the specific time. By doing this, it is possible to avoid an event that the setting value is determined at a stage soon after the game hall is opened, and the operation rate of the game stand or the other game stand is reduced.

  In particular, by adding the above configuration to the feature DB 3, it is possible to set value suggestion according to the operation start time of the day. Specifically, for example, when the operation start on the current day is delayed in the feature DB 3, it may be determined that the specified number of times is exceeded at a later stage than the case where the operation starts from morning 1 and exceeds the specified number of times. If this is done, there is a possibility that setting values may not be suggested as the designer intended. Therefore, by combining the configuration of the feature DB 4 with the configuration of the feature DB 3, it becomes possible to generate an indication notification of a setting value as intended by the designer.

Feature DB5. The specific information grasping means can grasp at least one of the total number of times of execution from power-on or time information in the gaming situation of the day as the specific information,
When the suggestion notification execution means causes the second termination means to shift from the high advantage state to the low advantage state, the total number of times of execution grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined number of times (2000) Or less) or if the time information is in a first specific situation before a predetermined time (13 o'clock), the total number of executions exceeds the specified number or the time information is later than the specific time In the second specific situation, the execution probability of the suggested notification that suggests low setting is higher, or when the first specific situation is the second specific situation, the second specific situation is the second specific situation The suggestion notification is executed so that the player can easily predict the low setting value as the prediction of the setting value rather than the suggestion notification performed in The gaming machine according to any one of the features DB1 to DB4 to.

  According to the above configuration, in the case where the high advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times relatively early from the opening of the game hall and is forcibly terminated, the suggestion notification that the narrowing of the low setting is easy to be performed is executed. A situation where the high advantage state reached the upper limit number of times relatively early is considered to be a situation where a large amount of game media is obtained and the total payout rate is high, and in such a situation, the actual setting value It is considered that there is a tendency that it is easy to predict a high set value, and it is considered that the possibility of continuing the game is high even if the suggestion notification that narrows down the low setting is easy to be performed as the suggested notification Be Therefore, if the configuration is configured to perform notification of the setting value on the low setting side in consideration of such a situation, it is possible to balance the appearance rate with the notification notification on the setting value of the high setting side without causing a decrease in operation rate. You can keep it.

Feature DB6. The suggestion notification execution means is
Information corresponding to one suggestion notification is selected from the indication notification information group using the indication notification information group in which information corresponding to a plurality of types of indication notification is stored as the indication notification of the setting value, and the selection is made. Performing the suggestion notification on the basis of information corresponding to the suggestion notification.
In the case of shifting from the high advantage state to the low advantage state by the second end means, the suggested notification information group used in the first specific situation, and the suggested notification information group used in the second specific situation , The execution probability of the suggested notification that suggests the low setting is increased, or the suggested notification is performed such that the low setting value is easily predicted. The gaming machine described in the feature DB 5 that is a feature.

  According to the above configuration, the configuration of the feature DB 5 can be realized with a simple configuration such as switching of a table used for a suggestion notification information group, that is, a suggestion notification.

Feature DB7. Transition means (by main control device 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means has become a predetermined transition result (the second BB) Function to execute bonus state processing),
The increase rate of game media in each game is likely to be higher in the special game state than in the high advantage state,
The special gaming state is set to be shiftable even during the high advantage state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features DB1 to DB6, wherein the first grasping means grasps the number of executions including the number of games executed during the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the special gaming state as a so-called jackpot state with a high increase rate of gaming media is set, and the number of games in the special gaming state is also added to the number of executions, so the high until reaching the upper limit If the special game state intervenes in the advantageous state, the final number of game media obtained may be greater than when the special game state is not intervened. That is, in the high advantage state in which the upper limit number of times is set, the final number of game media obtained when the high advantage state ends by the upper limit number of times is diversified. In this way, when the high advantage state ends with the upper limit number of times, for example, the high setting is predicted if the number is high, and the low setting is predicted if the number is low. The fun of predicting setpoints at the end is added.

  Feature DB 8. The gaming machine according to the feature DB 7 characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the transition result is different depending on the set value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DB 7, the number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination of the high advantage state can actually be different depending on the set value. This makes it possible to increase the significance of performing notification of the setting value at the time of forced termination.

Feature DB9. The specific information grasping means can grasp the total number of times of execution of the game as the specific information in the gaming situation on the day,
The total number of times of execution is initialized when the process of changing the set value set by the setting means is performed, but is not initialized based on power on or power off of the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DB1 to DB8.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of times of execution as the game situation reflected in the suggestion notification at the time of forced termination is not initialized by power on or power off but is initialized by the setting value change process. Therefore, when the power is turned ON / OFF without changing the setting value at the game hall closing time or opening time, the total number of executions on the previous day will be taken over. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the setting value is predicted not only from the notification of the setting value but also from whether the setting value is changed or not, and the game property is greatly improved.

Feature DB 10. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order Have a second result that results in winning being established when operated in the stop order of 2;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to the stopping order including the first stopping order and the second stopping order is displayed on a predetermined notifying means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68) N-first to seventh display segments N7) are provided with order notification means (function to execute pressing order combination processing by the main control device 101);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Equipped with
The low advantage state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features DB1 to DB9, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body is stopped. In so-called slot machines in which a benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means if the stoppage number corresponds to the lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiter, and the order notification regarding the stop order may be A special gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state, such as making the degree of advantage different depending on the presence or absence. If the configuration regarding the set value suggestion according to the game situation of the feature DB 1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the subsequent operation rate when the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times is preferably adjusted. Can.

  In particular, as compared with the special gaming state involving the transition of the gaming state, that is, the jackpot state, the above specific gaming state is determined by the presence or absence of notification at the time of winning the order response result, the notification frequency, etc. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, the degree of freedom for setting the continuation condition is higher than the one associated with the game result such as the transition of the game state, and the number of continuations of the specific game state is strictly determined. It is easy to realize an unplayable game feature, that is, a game feature that entertains how long a specific game state lasts. On the other hand, in such a game, when the upper limit number of times is reached and the specific gaming state is ended, it is thought that the intention to continue the game may be reduced, and there is a concern that the operating rate may be reduced. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the feature DB 1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, it is possible to play the game even after the number of continuations reaches the upper limit number. It can be a motivation to continue.

<Feature DC group>
Feature DC1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order Have a second result that results in winning being established when operated in the stop order of 2;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to the stopping order including the first stopping order and the second stopping order is displayed on a predetermined notifying means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68) N-first to seventh display segments N7) are provided with order notification means (function to execute pressing order combination processing by the main control device 101);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Specific end means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) When,
Specific storage means capable of storing specific information involved in the order notification which is information used in the specific gaming state (processing for storing information corresponding to various areas for the advantageous section in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
Normal storage means capable of storing normal information not related to the order notification, which can also be used other than the specific gaming state (stores information corresponding to various areas for a normal section in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101 Function to execute processing),
When transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state by the specific end means, the initialization means capable of executing the process of initializing the specific information stored in the specific storage means (section display by main control device 101 2) a function to execute initialization processing during processing),
Regarding a specific event (for example, an increase trigger for the number of games in a situation where the excess flag is not set) occurring during the specific gaming state, information (number of additional games) corresponding to the specific event as the specific information A first means capable of executing storage processing to be stored in (function to execute processing for adding the number of added games to the corresponding number of continuations in the processing for adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
Regarding the specific event (for example, an increase trigger for the number of games in a situation where the excess flag is set) occurring during the specific gaming state, information (number of disappearing games) corresponding to the specific event is usually stored as the normal information And second means capable of executing storage processing to be stored in the means (function to execute processing of adding the number of added games to the number of eliminated games in the number-of-games addition processing by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiter, and there is an order notification regarding such stop order A specific gaming state is provided, in which the degree of advantage is made different, and the game characteristics of each game are improved.

  However, as the so-called slot machine's inherent gameplay is to aim at and stop the pattern of the revolving unit to obtain a bonus, if the bonus that can be obtained by the game using order notification is too many, the original game If the gameplay can be neglected, and if it is possible to execute the specified game state without restriction by increasing the continuous play performance of the specified game state using order notification, then the payout rate intended by the designer is surpassed. There is also a possibility that a ball may occur. Furthermore, if the continuous play performance in the specific gaming state is enhanced, even if the specific gaming state is considered to have ended and the game is ended, a case such as the specific gaming state continuing is likely to occur in fact, The fairness between a player who has finished the game and a player who has been seated on the finished game stand later may not be secured.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, at the end of the specific gaming state, the specific game in the specific gaming state is configured to perform the initialization process of the specific storage unit stored as the specific information involved in the order notification. It is not possible to excessively enhance the continuous performance of the state, and it is possible to eliminate the sense of unfairness among players.

  However, with the above configuration, the impression that the playability of the specific play state and the playability of the normal play state are different playability becomes stronger, and the interlockingness between the both play states decreases, and the total is seen. There is also concern that the gameplay may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, regarding the specific event in the specific gaming state, the information is not stored as the specific information, but is provided with the second means for storing as the normal information not involved in the order notification, It becomes possible to take over the information on the specific event in the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state as information different from the order notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interlocking between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state while preventing the performance of the specific gaming state from being excessively enhanced, and ensuring the equality among the players. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature DC2. A specific storage area (various areas for the advantageous section in the RAM 106) corresponding to the specific storage means;
A normal storage area (various areas for a normal section in the RAM 106) corresponding to the normal storage means;
Is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature DC1, wherein the specific storage area and the normal storage area are set as non-overlapping storage areas.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DC1, the location where each piece of information is stored is physically different, so that, for example, the normal information of the normal storage means is initialized at the time of the initialization process, Such an error is less likely to occur, and an event that the specific information remains without being initialized even after the specific gaming state ends, is also less likely to occur.

  Feature DC3. Using the normal information corresponding to the specific event stored in the normal storage means by the second means, after the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific event occurred, the special notification means is performed by the specific notification means A game machine according to feature DC1 or feature DC2 characterized in that it comprises an executable special notification means (a function for executing a notification process for special replay by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, the special notification for the specific event that occurred during the specific gaming state is executed after the end of the specific gaming state, so that the interlocking relationship between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state is a game of special notification It becomes possible to plan through the production.

  Feature DC4. Selection means for selecting which storage process of the first means and the second means is to be executed when the specific event occurs (a process of determining whether the excess flag is set in the main control device 101 or not The gaming machine according to any one of the features DC1 to DC3 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the information on the specific event is stored as either the specific information or the normal information. By doing this, both information can not be stored redundantly, so the storage capacity can be reduced, and when taking over the normal information based on the specific event at the end of the specific gaming state, the specific information is related It is possible to reduce the possibility of being taken over (the possibility of not being initialized due to any inconvenience).

Feature DC5. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (specific combination), it is possible to execute an increase judgment as to whether or not to execute an increase process to increase the remaining number of the specific gaming state A function of executing a lottery process with the number of games added by the control device 101),
The increase processing means capable of executing the increase process of the remaining number based on the result that the determination result by the increase determination means is the result of executing the increase process (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101 )When,
Equipped with
The selection means is
When, as the specific event, the determination result by the increase determination means is the result of executing the increase process, it is selected to execute the storage process by the first means,
When the determination result by the increase determination unit is a result that the increase processing is not performed as the specific event, it is selected to execute the storage processing by the second unit, as described in the feature DC4. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined whether or not to increase the number of continuing games in the specific gaming state as a specific event, if it is determined to increase the number of continuing games, as specific information involved in the order notification When the storage processing by the first means is performed and it is determined that the number of continuing games is not to be increased, the storage processing by the second means is performed as normal information not involved in the order notification. It is advantageous for the player that the number of continued games in the specific gaming state increases, and the player wants the increase process to be performed, the information that the determination has an undesirable result for the player Is stored as normal information and can be taken over until after the specific gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to take over the information corresponding to the profit that could not be fully enjoyed in the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, without taking over the profit in the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, as if It is possible to enhance the interlocking between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state by, for example, making it possible to receive benefits in the normal gaming state.

Feature DC6. Limiting means capable of performing the limiting process which limits the execution of the increase process or that the determination result by the increase determination means becomes the result of performing the increase process when a predetermined condition defined in advance is satisfied (Function to execute processing of setting an excess flag by the main control device 101),
A game machine according to a feature DC5, wherein the selection means selects the storage process by the second means to be performed based on the restriction process being performed by the restriction means.

  When the predetermined condition is established, the determination result by the increase determination means results in the execution of the increase process, and the execution itself of the increase process is limited. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is established during the specific gaming state, the lottery means Even if the result of drawing by the result is a specific result, there is no merit for the player during the specific gaming state, but rather, it would be disappointing even though it would have been a specific result in a situation where the predetermined condition has not been established. It can be In that point, in the above configuration, since the memory processing is performed so that the information of the disappointing result is taken over to the normal gaming state, the termination of the specific gaming state even if the disappointing result is obtained Later, if some kind of benefit is obtained, it can be hopeful.

Feature DC7. First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of times of execution in the specific gaming state;
Second grasping means for grasping the remaining number (advantageous game remaining game number ZG);
Equipped with
The specific end means is
First end means to shift the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state (during the second process of section display by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the specific gaming state Second end means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (function of executing processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101),
Equipped with
The predetermined condition is satisfied when the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the number of remaining times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times. The game machine described in DC6.

  In the above configuration, the specific gaming state may be ended based on the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state or may be ended based on reaching the upper limit number of times, and the predetermined condition in the feature DC5 is the number of times of execution The configuration is established when the sum with the remaining number reaches the upper limit number. That is, when the increase processing is performed more than the above, when the increase in the number of remaining games can not be expected, the storage processing by the second processing is performed based on the specific result that is the trigger of the increase processing. For a player who wants to consume as many games as possible in the specific gaming state, it may be considered that increase processing is performed in each game in the specific gaming state, that is, it is desired that the game result is a specific result. If you are in a situation where you can not expect an increase in the number of remaining games even if you perform increase processing, your interest in the game outcome of the game in that situation will also decrease, and your interest in the specific gaming state itself will also decrease, the degree of attention to gaming Can be extremely low. In that respect, as in the above configuration, even if such a situation, if the specific result is won, by performing the storage process by the second means, the specific result that can be meaningless The information can be taken over after the specific gaming state, and it can be significant that the specific result is obtained in the situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay in the specific game state.

  Characteristic DC8. In the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, the second means makes a result that the determination result by the increase determination means executes the increase process. The gaming machine according to feature DC6 or feature DC7, wherein a storage process to be stored in the normal storage means is executed with the specific number of times for increasing the remaining number in the increase process in the case as the normal information.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific result is won when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific number of times that should be increased in the increase process is directly stored as the normal information. In this way, when the storage process is performed by the second means instead of the first means, special processing such as information conversion process is not required, and the effects of the feature DC6 and the like are achieved with a simple configuration. I can expect it.

Feature DC9. In the normal gaming state, a special state (special section) in which a predetermined special notification can be executed is set.
A unit capable of shifting to the special state (a function of executing a process of setting a special section flag by the main control device 101) when shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state by the specific end means;
A unit for selecting the number of times of execution of the special state based on the information of the specific number for which the storage processing by the second means has been performed (corresponding to the special section game number PG based on the special section table by the main control device 101 Function to execute the process of entering a value)
The gaming machine according to feature DC8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there may be transition to a special state where the special notification can be executed when shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the number of times of execution of the special state is stored by the second means It is determined by the specific number of times of information. Therefore, the information that the increase process in the specific gaming state is not performed will be taken over as the information that the special state is continued of the special state, and the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state are in the special state. Can be interlocked through.

Characteristic DC10. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The gaming machine according to Feature DC9, wherein the special notification is a notification notification as information of the set value set by the setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the suggestion notification can be executed after the specific gaming state as an alternative to the increase process not being performed during the specific gaming state. Assuming that the player desires the high setting, the notification of the suggestion of the setting value is useful information for the player, and by performing such useful information, an increase process is performed. It is possible to compensate for the absence.

Feature DC11. When each stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the lottery result by the lottery means, the third specific symbol combination is stopped and the third result winning can be established, and each stop operation means Is operated in a fourth stopping order different from the third stopping order, the fourth specific picture combination different from the third specific picture combination is stopped, and the third resultant winning can be established The second order correspondence result (for example, special replay) to be
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a second notification (order of notification presentation effect) concerning the stop order including the third stop order and the fourth stop order is specified as the special notice as the notification means (auxiliary display A game machine according to feature DC9 or feature DC10, comprising: second order notification means (function to execute a notification process for special replay by the display control device 81) executable by the section 65).

  According to the above configuration, the second order response result in which although the number of stops is different depending on the stop order does not change the first order corresponding result, the first order to cause the change in the advantage even if it is performed during the normal game state A specific gaming state in which notification (order notification of feature DC1, referred to as first order notification in relation to the above configuration, and order correspondence result of feature DC1 is also referred to as first order correspondence result) is defined as the upper limit number of times The special notification can be realized by the notification using the number of stopped eyes within a range not departing from the meaning of the object.

Characteristics DC12. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result, the win notification means (display control) capable of notifying the notification of the winning of the special result being won by the special notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing a bonus winning notification effect by the device 81),
The game number setting means (the lottery process of the precursor game number by the display control device 81 is executed to set the number of win notification games from the game for which the special result is won to the game for performing the win notification by the win notification means Function),
Equipped with
Any of the features DC9 to DC11 characterized in that the number of winning notification games set by the number-of-games setting means is shorter in the case where the special notification is performed than in the case where the special notification is not performed. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the above configuration, for the player who wants to know the special result winning quickly, it is preferable that the number of short winning notification games be set by performing the special notification, and from that point, the increase processing during the specific gaming state It is possible to compensate for the failure to take place.

<Feature DD group>
Feature DD1. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
Second grasping means for grasping the number of remaining times in the high advantageous state (the number of remaining advantageous game games ZG);
First transition means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantage state (in segment display second processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state Second transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function of executing processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81),
The increase process is performed when the sum of the number of times of execution grasped by the first grasping means and the number of remaining times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times Specific notification execution means capable of executing specific notification about excess exceeding the upper limit number of times by the predetermined notification means or another notification means (display of the number of special games in the third special notification setting process by the display control device 81 Function to execute the update process of
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the player's degree of advantage is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the number of remaining high advantage states. Since the case where the upper limit number of times is reached may be terminated, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely enhanced. In such a configuration, there is a so-called additional function of increasing the number of remaining times in the high advantage state when the specific condition is satisfied, and the expectation for the specific condition to be satisfied is enhanced.

  On the other hand, as long as the sum of the number of executions and the number of remaining times reaches the upper limit number, the total amount reaches the upper limit number although it is preferable for the player as described above. After that, even if the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends when the upper limit number of times is reached, and interest in the success or failure of the specific condition decreases, and the upper limit number of times is reached. The game becomes a so-called digested game, and the degree of attention to the game may be extremely reduced.

  In that respect, in the above configuration, even after the total reaches the upper limit number, the specific notification about the excess when the increase processing is performed is performed, and the upper limit number is exceeded. It is configured to let the player know the number of times the user can not receive the benefits sufficiently. That is, even if the increase process is performed, it is considered that the increase process is not normally notified from the fact that the increase process is not performed due to the upper limit number of times, but it is thought that it is In the event that the increase process is performed beyond the upper limit number of times, the benefit that would have been obtained may be taken over, or some compensation may be made for not being able to receive the benefit. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that In other words, by reversing the idea of not making it possible to enjoy the benefits of the increase processing, but making it explicit by making it explicit, it is made to recall an emotion different from the sense of loss based on not being able to receive the benefits. It becomes possible to improve the playability in the situation where the upper limit number of times is reached.

  Feature DD2. The specific notification execution means can notify the number of times corresponding to the excess as the specific notification, and can notify the number so as to be grasped as a number different from the remaining number. The game machine described in DD1.

  Although it is possible to add the excess to the remaining number and display it on the same number display, in the above configuration, it is only easy to grasp the excess by displaying them separately. Rather, since the excess is displayed separately, it is possible to give a strong impression that some compensation will be provided by the excess.

Feature DD3. When performing the increase process, the increase means selects one number of times using a number information group in which plural types of number information are stored, and increases the remaining number by the selected number. ,
The specific notification execution means selects the number of times using the information group in which the frequency information group or the frequency information of the same type as the frequency information group is stored as the frequency of the excess, and the selected frequency is selected The gaming machine according to the feature DD1 or the feature DD2, which is capable of executing the increase notification corresponding to the number as the specific notification.

  According to the above configuration, since the number of times of notification in the specific notification is determined using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, the excess amount when the increase processing is performed is clearly specified. It can be made to grasp. In addition, if the configuration is such that the number of times is determined using the same information group, it is not necessary to store the information group exclusively for it, which can also contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Feature DD4. The specific notification execution means is
Information on a predetermined number of times can be notified as notification of the number of times corresponding to the excess amount,
By performing the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times, the selected number of times is added to the predetermined number of times information, and then the predetermined number of times information can be updated and notified. The gaming machine according to the feature DD3.

  According to the above configuration, when the increase process exceeding the upper limit number of times is performed a plurality of times, the number of times corresponding to each increase process is integrated and notified. By doing in this way, even after the sum of the number of executions and the number of remaining times reaches the upper limit number, the pleasure of adding and increasing the reported excess is added and the notification is given By gradually increasing the number, it can be expected that the content of compensation that will be executed will be thick.

  Feature DD5. Special notification execution means capable of executing a predetermined special notification based on the number of excesses in the specific notification by the specific notification execution means (function to execute the third special notification setting process by the display control device 81) A game machine according to any one of the features DD1 to DD4, characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the above configuration, the special notification is executed as compensation for the excess. For example, if special information is provided to present information useful to the player, the player will be satisfied if the special notification is provided, and even if the information is not useful, Even if the notification is made, for example, a flashy effect, it is possible to compensate for the player's sense of loss with respect to the fact that the increase process has not been performed by looking at the flashy effect.

  Feature DD6. The special notification execution means can execute the special notification as a transition notification (attack mode end presentation effect) in the case of causing the second transition means to shift from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. The gaming machine according to the feature DD5.

  According to the above configuration, the transition notification at the end of the high advantage state is a special notification, and the excess is reflected. In the transition notification when the high advantage state ends, generally, the number of gaming media acquired during the high advantage state, the number of continued games, etc. are notified, and an excess for the notification If the upper limit number of times does not exist, it is easy to remind the user that the game is continued, or the number of acquired gaming media when the upper limit number of times does not exist. In addition, when photographing such a transition notice as a picture, the excess information will be reflected, and for example, the pleasure when reporting to a friend based on the photographed picture will also increase. Even in the case of reviewing later, it is possible to immerse in memories.

  Feature DD7. The special notification performing means can execute the special notification in the low advantageous state after being shifted from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state by the second transition means. The gaming machine according to the feature DD6.

  According to the above configuration, the excess in the high advantage state can be reflected in the low advantage state instead of the high advantage state. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interlocking on the stage of the high advantage state and the low advantage state by using the excess.

Feature DD8. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The special notification execution unit according to any one of the features DD5 to DD7, wherein the special notification execution unit can execute a suggestion notification that suggests information on a setting value set by the setting unit as the special notification. Gaming machine.

  Based on the premise that the player desires the high setting, the notification of the suggestion of the setting value can be useful information for the player. Therefore, as described above, when the indication notification of the setting value is performed based on the excess, it is predicted that the indication of the setting value is to be performed from the excess notified by the specific notification, and When suggestion of the setting value is performed, it is possible to realize the game characteristic of predicting the setting value, and it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification which is the start point of the game.

Feature DD9. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order Have a second result that results in winning being established when operated in the stop order of 2;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to the stopping order including the first stopping order and the second stopping order is displayed on a predetermined notifying means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68) N-first to seventh display segments N7) are provided with order notification means (function to execute pressing order combination processing by the main control device 101);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Equipped with
The low advantage state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features DD1 to DD8, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body is stopped. In so-called slot machines in which a benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means if the stoppage number corresponds to the lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiter, and the order notification regarding the stop order may be A special gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state, such as making the degree of advantage different depending on the presence or absence. By applying the configuration related to the specific notification of the feature DD1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the game performance after the sum of the number of times of execution of the specific gaming state and the remaining number reaches the upper limit number. Can.

  In particular, as compared with the special gaming state involving the transition of the gaming state, that is, the jackpot state, the above specific gaming state is determined by the presence or absence of notification at the time of winning the order response result, the notification frequency, etc. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, the degree of freedom for setting the continuation condition is higher than the one associated with the game result such as the transition of the game state, and the number of continuations of the specific game state is strictly determined. It is easy to realize an unplayable game feature, that is, a game feature that entertains how long a specific game state lasts. On the other hand, it can be said that the task described in the feature DD1 is also likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such game characteristics. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the feature DD1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, the game characteristic when the number of continuations reaches the upper limit number is determined It is possible to improve.

<Feature DE group>
Characteristics DE1. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
Second grasping means for grasping the number of remaining times in the high advantageous state (the number of remaining advantageous game games ZG);
First transition means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantage state (in segment display second processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state Second transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function of executing processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81),
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification for an increase of the special number of times which is a part or all of the number of times increased by the increase process in a game after the game on which the increase process is performed. It has a post notification execution means (function to execute post set effect setting processing by the display control device 81)
The sum of the number of times of execution grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times, and the post notification execution means relates to the increase process In the specific situation in which an unannounced part exists as the special frequency (a situation where the excess flag is set and the post-loading flag is set), when the specific condition is satisfied, within the range of the unannounced part The first special notification execution means (function to execute the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first special notification (pseudo-superimposed notification) as the increase notification by the predetermined notification means A game machine characterized by having

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the player's degree of advantage is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the number of remaining high advantage states. Since the case where the upper limit number of times is reached may be terminated, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely enhanced. In such a configuration, there is a so-called additional function of increasing the number of remaining times in the high advantage state when the specific condition is satisfied, and the expectation for the specific condition to be satisfied is enhanced. Moreover, even if the remaining number of times of increase processing is performed, notification of part or all of the number of times may not be performed immediately, so it is possible to continue the sense of expectation when the specific condition is established. .

  On the other hand, as long as the sum of the number of executions and the number of remaining times reaches the upper limit number, the total amount reaches the upper limit number although it is preferable for the player as described above. After that, even if the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends when the upper limit number of times is reached, and interest in the success or failure of the specific condition decreases, and the upper limit number of times is reached. The game becomes a so-called digested game, and the degree of attention to the game may be extremely reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, even if the total has reached the upper limit number of times, if there is an unannounced part of the increase process, the unannounced part is used and the number of unannounced minutes Since the configuration is such that the increase notification can be executed inside, it is possible to give the impression that the number of remaining times has increased without causing a mismatch between the increase notification and the number of continued games in the high advantage state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably play the game after the total reaches the upper limit number.

Feature DE2. When performing the increase process, the increase means selects one number of times using a number information group in which plural types of number information are stored, and increases the remaining number by the selected number. ,
The first special notification execution means selects one count using the information group in which the count information group or the count information of the same type as the count information group is stored as the number of unreported minutes. The gaming machine according to the feature DE1, which is capable of executing the first special notification as the increase notification corresponding to the number of times performed.

  According to the above configuration, since the number of times of notification in the first special notification is determined using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, even if the upper limit number is reached The impression of the increase process can be strengthened. In addition, if the configuration is such that the number of times is determined using the same information group, it is not necessary to store the information group exclusively for it, which can also contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

  Feature DE3. When the number of times of selection exceeds the number of unreported minutes, the first special notification execution means can notify the number of unreported minutes as the first special notification in the feature DE2 The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, while enjoying the merit of the first special notification that the increase notification is performed within the unreported range, the effect of making the configuration resemble the simplification or the actual increase processing according to the number of times selection is expected. be able to.

Feature DE4. In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second special notification (pseudo overlay notification) as the increase notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means beyond the range for the unannounced part. Special notification execution means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
Granting means capable of granting a special benefit different from the benefit based on the increase processing being performed by the second special notification being performed by the second special notification execution means (a pseudo overlay notification by the display control device 81 Function to suggest setting value),
A game machine according to any one of the features DE1 to DE3 characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the above configuration, the second special notification as the increase notification exceeding the range of the number of unreported minutes is performed, on the premise of the first special notification as the increase alert in the range of the number of unreported minutes. Since a special benefit different from the increase process is given by the game, even if a mismatch between the increase notification and the number of continued games in the high advantage state occurs, it will lead to a pleasant event for the player, and the number of executions and remaining It becomes possible to enhance the playability after the sum with the number reaches the upper limit.

  In particular, since the second special notification is executed under the condition that there is an unannounced part of the increase process, when there is no unannounced part, that is, the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit number. The second special notification is performed not after the player grasps the reaching, but before grasping it. By doing this, the second special notification becomes more than the expectation for the player who wants the increase process until the total reaches the upper limit number of times, and the second special notification is performed. It can increase your joy. That is, in a situation where the player already grasps that the total has reached the upper limit number, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase processing to the grant of the special bonus. Then, even if the special benefit is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide the pleasure more than the special benefit. Therefore, in a situation where it is desired to have a special benefit different from the special benefit (increasing processing), it is possible to provide more than the special benefit by giving the special benefit along with the increase processing.

  Feature DE5. The second special notification execution means can execute the increase notification obtained by adding a predetermined number of times (10 times, 56 times, 77 times) to the number of unannounced minutes as the second special notification The gaming machine according to the feature DE4, characterized in that

  The number of unannounced minutes is the number obtained by subtracting the number of executions and the number of informing times out of the remaining number of times from the upper limit number of high advantage states, each time a high advantage state game progresses, ie execution Each time the number of times increases, the number of unreported minutes decreases, and the number of special times also changes depending on the ratio of unreported by the post notification unit. Then, as in the above configuration, in the configuration in which the special benefit is provided by performing the increase notification of the number of times the specific number of times is added to the number of unannounced portions, the special benefit is to be provided. The number of times of notification will change depending on the progress of the game. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at a glance the increase notification that is the trigger for the grant of special benefits, and the player who is playing the game stand and grasps the game status and the game It is possible to make it easy to notice that the special benefit is given, with the others who look at etc. In other words, the player who is playing the game console can easily notice that the special benefit is given, and it is difficult for another person to notice the superiority of the player who is playing the game platform. Can be secured.

Feature DE6. The second special notification execution means can execute the increase notification obtained by adding the first specific number (10 times) as the specific number to the number of unannounced minutes, and the number of unannounced minutes On the other hand, it is possible to execute the increase notification in which a second specific number (56 times, 77 times) different from the first specific number is added as the specific number.
The content of the special benefit provided by the giving means is different between when the increase notification obtained by adding the first specific number is performed and when the increase notification obtained by adding the second specific number is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature DE5 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DE 5, the number of times of increase notification to be given special benefits is diversified, and further, which special benefits are given is complicated. The superiority of the player who is playing the game can be further secured.

Feature DE7. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set A function of executing a process of setting a winning probability by 101)
In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second special notification (pseudo overlay notification) as the increase notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means beyond the range for the unannounced part. Special notification execution means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
Granting means capable of granting a special benefit different from the benefit based on the increase processing being performed by the second special notification being performed by the second special notification execution means (a pseudo overlay notification by the display control device 81 Function to suggest setting value),
Equipped with
The device according to any one of the features DE1 to DE6 characterized in that the granting means can grant the special benefit by executing an indication notification suggesting information of the setting value set by the setting means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, the second special notification as the increase notification exceeding the range of the number of unreported minutes is performed, on the premise of the first special notification as the increase alert in the range of the number of unreported minutes. Since a special benefit different from the increase process is given by the game, even if a mismatch between the increase notification and the number of continued games in the high advantage state occurs, it will lead to a pleasant event for the player, and the number of executions and remaining It becomes possible to enhance the playability after the sum with the number reaches the upper limit.

  In particular, since the second special notification is executed under the condition that there is an unannounced part of the increase process, when there is no unannounced part, that is, the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit number. The second special notification is performed not after the player grasps the reaching, but before grasping it. By doing this, the second special notification becomes more than the expectation for the player who wants the increase process until the total reaches the upper limit number of times, and the second special notification is performed. It can increase your joy. That is, in a situation where the player already grasps that the total has reached the upper limit number, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase processing to the grant of the special bonus. Then, even if the special benefit is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide the pleasure more than the special benefit. Therefore, in a situation where it is desired to have a special benefit different from the special benefit (increasing processing), it is possible to provide more than the special benefit by giving the special benefit along with the increase processing.

  In the above configuration, in particular, the suggestion information of the setting value is presented as a special benefit. That is, since the information of the set value is presented by performing the second special notification exceeding the range for which the notification has not been made, as a player, whether or not to continue the game after the high advantage state is over It can be used as a judgment material.

  In addition, when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends, it is considered that a large amount of game media has been acquired, and even if information indicating a low setting is presented, a large amount of game media is acquired. Therefore, it is considered that the possibility of being judged to be high setting is high and it becomes easy to be judged to continue the game. Therefore, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the setting value is suggested when the upper limit number of times is not reached, an effect of making the determination criterion of the game continuation loose can be expected while performing the setting value.

  Feature DE8. The gaming machine according to the feature DE7, wherein the establishment probability of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value set by the setting unit.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific condition which is satisfied with the same establishment probability is satisfied regardless of the setting value, the setting value is suggested when the notification exceeding the upper limit number of times is performed by the second special notification. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the importance of the setting value even if there are few parts involving the setting value in the high advantage state, and it is possible to play the game from a plurality of gaming tables installed in the game hall. It is possible to provide the fun of selecting a game console to be performed.

Feature DE9. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A first result in which winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order Have a second result that results in winning being established when operated in the stop order of 2;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, an order notification (pushing order notification) related to the stopping order including the first stopping order and the second stopping order is displayed on a predetermined notifying means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68) N-first to seventh display segments N7) are provided with order notification means (function to execute pressing order combination processing by the main control device 101);
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Equipped with
The low advantage state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features DE1 to DE8, wherein the high advantage state is the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body is stopped. In so-called slot machines in which a benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means if the stoppage number corresponds to the lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiter, and the order notification regarding the stop order may be A special gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state, such as making the degree of advantage different depending on the presence or absence. If the configuration relating to the first special notification of the feature DE1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the playability after the sum of the number of executions of the specific advantageous state and the remaining number reaches the upper limit is suitably improved. It can be done.

  In particular, as compared with the special gaming state involving the transition of the gaming state, that is, the jackpot state, the above specific gaming state is determined by the presence or absence of notification at the time of winning the order response result, the notification frequency, etc. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, the degree of freedom for setting the continuation condition is higher than the one associated with the game result such as the transition of the game state, and the number of continuations of the specific game state is strictly determined. It is easy to realize an unplayable game feature, that is, a game feature that entertains how long a specific game state lasts. On the other hand, it can be said that the task described in the feature DE1 is also likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such game characteristics. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the feature DE1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, the game characteristic when the number of continuations reaches the upper limit number is determined It is possible to improve.

<Feature EA group>
Feature EA1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit. Privilege awarding means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function to execute payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
It is a lottery performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific gaming state, and specific notification corresponding to the result of the predetermined specific lottery can be notified by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) Specific notification execution means (for example, a function of executing setting processing of additional effects by the display control device 81),
The specific notification execution means is
The first informing means (in which, when the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value), the specific informing can be executed in the first mode (in the case of the additional effect, the execution timing of the immediate effect) A function of executing processing for generating an additional notification effect in the additional winning game by the display control device 81),
If the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the specific notification may be a second mode different from the first mode (if it is an additional effect Second notification means (function of causing the main control device 101 to generate an additional notification effect in a game later than the additional winning game), and a second notification means that can be executed at the execution timing of the additional effect;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won by the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving unit, or the second As a result, the result of winning a prize or the like is set, and the mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and the presence or absence of the prize is changed depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification to create the game characteristic to differ the degree of advantage. Ru.

  Here, in the configuration in which the increase / decrease rate of the game medium and the increase / decrease mode are managed by the set values set by the setting means, it is general to make the probability of lottery by the lottery means different depending on each set value. On the other hand, when creating a game like the above, if there is a difference by the setting value up to the presence or absence of the mode notification, the transition probability to the specific gaming state, the continuity etc, too many parameters with the setting difference will be As a result, there is also a possibility that the increase / decrease rate of the game medium and the range of the upper / lower fluctuation of the increase / decrease mode may be increased due to the upper or lower fluctuation of each parameter overlapping or the like. However, in the game in the specific gaming state, if there is no difference due to the set value, the fun in the specific gaming state may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, it is difficult to affect the payout rate by the setting value by configuring the mode of the result notification (specific notification) of the specific lottery executed in the specific gaming state depending on the setting value. Within the range, it is possible to cause a difference in playability depending on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the “first aspect” or the “second aspect” may be expressed as “first timing” or “second timing”. As described above, if the above-described configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it is possible to exhibit the above-described excellent effect with a simpler configuration.

Characteristics EA2. The specific notification execution means is a first specific notification that the specific lottery has been won as the specific notification (in the zone immediate addition effect, an additional notification effect in the zone, and a first afterward character BUP1 in the zone later addition effect or Display of the second after game character BUP2 and the second specific notification regarding the contents when winning in the specific lottery (in the case of immediate ride effect in the zone, notification of the number of games in the additional effect, specialization in the after game effect in the zone Notification of the number of added games at the end of the zone), and
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the first mode,
The gaming machine according to the feature EA1, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

  According to the above configuration, the first specification notification indicating that the specific lottery concerning the specific gaming state is won and the second specification notification regarding the winning content of the specific lottery are provided as the specific notification. The notification is performed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is performed in a mode different depending on the setting value. Therefore, the difference in the setting value according to the execution mode of the second specification notification while making it difficult for the occurrence of events such as ending the game to be different without depending on the setting value without noticing that the specific lottery is won It is possible to realize the game property (the game property for predicting and grasping the set value) reflecting the effect on the effect.

Feature EA3. When the first set value is set by the setting means, the increase rate of the game medium is higher than when the second set value is set,
The gaming machine according to Feature EA2, wherein the first aspect is set as a timing earlier than the second aspect.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the second identification notification is earlier as the setting value at which the increase rate of game media is higher. It is assumed that the player desires that the set value at which the increase rate is high be set, and that the game console on which such set value is set is selected in priority, the specific lottery The second specific notification as the winning content is preferably performed earlier. As described above, it is possible to predict and grasp the set value using the execution timing of the second specific notification.

  Here, in the game characteristics for predicting and grasping such a setting value, when the setting value predicted and grasped is not preferable for the player (in the above example, it is the second setting value), the player's The desire to play may fall sharply. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if it is predicted / understood that the second specific notification is a second set value undesirable for the player, the specific lottery is won by the first specific notification before that. The second specific notification after the first specific notification pleasing the player is given, and the decrease in the motivation to play the game can be alleviated.

Characteristics EA4. The specific lottery is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific result (specific combination),
At least a first identification result (watermelon) and a second identification result (cherry) are provided as the identification result,
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification unit and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification unit is a notification ratio (immediate loading / add-on ratio), and the notification when it is the first set value The notification ratio difference which is the difference between the ratio and the notification ratio in the case of the second set value is different between the identification notification based on the first identification result and the identification notification based on the second identification result A game machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA3 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the notification ratio in the case of the first set value and the notification in the case of the second set value regarding the notification ratio when the specific notification is performed in the first aspect and the case in the second aspect The notification ratio difference with the ratio is different between the case of the first specification result and the case of the second specification result. For example, when the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specification result is larger than the notification ratio difference based on the second specification result, in the game for predicting and grasping the set value, the specific notification based on the first specification result is It can be a more powerful basis for predicting and grasping information than the specific notification based on the second specified result. As described above, by making the easiness of prediction / understanding different depending on the type of the specific result, the interest on the specific result that is the trigger of the specific notification is also enhanced, and the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is It becomes possible to raise suitably.

Feature EA5. The probability that the second specific result is obtained is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means will be the first specific result,
In the feature EA4, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specification result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specification result. The gaming machine described.

  Based on the premise that the larger the notification ratio difference, the more likely the base material can be used as a material for predicting and grasping the setting value, the first specification result with low winning probability has a larger notification ratio difference than the second specification result. If so, the specific notification by the first specific result can be a more powerful basis for predicting and grasping the set value. Therefore, it becomes possible to create the merit that the first specific result having a low probability of winning is won, in addition to the merit such as the benefit of the specific lottery based on the first specific result and the specific lottery winning. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the first specific result winning.

  In the case where the benefit from the specific lottery is the benefit relating to the payout rate, such as the benefit of the continuity during the specific gaming state, the advantage of the notification as described above is provided to provide the benefit It is possible to provide merits from a viewpoint different from the rate, and it is possible to enhance the merit to be the first specific result while preventing a rise in the payout rate or the like.

Feature EA6. As the gaming state in the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (specialization zone of cherry opportunity) and a second specific gaming state (specialization zone of special special opportunity other than cherry) are set,
In the first specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result Yes,
In the second specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be smaller than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result The game machine according to feature EA4 or feature EA5 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the notification ratio difference based on the first specified result and the second specified result is reversed between the first specified game state and the second specified game state. That is, in the first specific gaming state, the effect of the feature EA5 is exhibited, and in the second specific gaming state, prediction and grasping of the set value is facilitated when the second specific result winning with a high probability of winning is made. Therefore, in the second specified gaming state, prediction / understanding of the set value is easier to perform than in the first specified gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to enjoy the game of predicting and grasping the setting value from the viewpoint of which specific gaming state is to be achieved, and the interest can be improved through diversification of the game.

Feature EA7. The probability that the second specific result is obtained is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means will be the first specific result,
The gaming machine according to Feature EA6, comprising means for shifting to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first identification result.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specified result is low in the winning probability, there may be a transition to the second specified game state where it is easy to predict and grasp the set value. In this way, the merit based on the first specific result winning can be provided not only from the viewpoint of specific notification based on the winning, but also from the viewpoint of transition of the specific gaming state, the first specific It is possible to further improve the superiority of the result.

  Characteristic EA8. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first specified result and the probability that the second specified result will be the same regardless of the game state is any one of the features EA4 to EA7 The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the game characteristic using the first identification result and the second identification result without changing the lottery probability by the lottery means. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to change the lottery table or the like, and the above-mentioned play can be realized as compared with a configuration which can be applied only in a limited state such as a jackpot state etc. The degree of freedom is greatly improved.

Feature EA9. The first notification means executes, as the first aspect, the specific notification in a game in which the specific lottery has been performed,
The game according to any one of the features EA1 to EA8, wherein the second notification means executes the specific notification in a game after the game in which the specific lottery is performed, as the second aspect. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the difference in the aspect between the specific notification by the first notification means and the specific notification by the second notification means is the difference in the aspects in different games. By doing this, it becomes a difference as to whether the result of the specific lottery is notified in the game or in a later game, and the game characteristics due to the difference in such notification modes are lengthened. It can be entertained over a period of time.

Characteristic EA10. A unit for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming state (number of advantageous game remaining games ZG);
A unit for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state (in the advantageous section based on the fact that the normal termination condition is established in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute end processing),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features EA1 to EA9, wherein the specific lottery is a lottery related to an increase process for increasing the remaining number.

  According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is a lottery relating to an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, that is, an additional lottery. From the viewpoint of playability that is advantageous for the player by performing the mode notification in the specific gaming state, it is more advantageous for the specific gaming state to continue for a long time, and the increase of the remaining number can be said to be a preferable event for the player. In particular, since the game is to be performed while wishing to continue the specific gaming state for a long time after the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific lottery regarding the increase processing can be said to be a lottery in which the player has great interest. Further, by making the execution mode of the specific notification regarding the increase process of the remaining number different according to the setting value, it is possible to make the player have a great interest in the difference in the execution mode, and the winning probability of the increase process It is possible to enjoy while associating the setting value with the increase processing without setting a setting difference in practice.

Characteristic EA11. The specific notification execution means is a first specific notification that the increase process is performed as the specific notification (in the zone immediate addition effect, the additional notification effect, in the zone the first additional character BUP1 Second specific notification (display of the second add-on character BUP2) and the increase number of the remaining number when the increase processing is performed (in-zone add-on effect notification of the number of games in add-on effect, in-zone add-on) In the production, it is possible to execute notification of the number of added games at the end of the specialization zone),
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the first mode,
The gaming machine according to the feature EA10, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

  According to the above configuration, it is premised that the first specific notification that the player has won the addition of the game number (increasing processing) in the specific gaming state and the second identification notification regarding the additional game number is provided. The specific notification is performed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is performed in a mode different depending on the setting value. Therefore, after making the player happy by performing the addition by the first identification notification, the second identification notification regarding the number of essential addition games is performed in a mode having a setting difference, and the second identification notification is This will be conducted in a situation where the interest in the notification has been raised in advance. That is, it is considered that the difference in the notification mode gives a great impression to the player who is now or is now waiting, and the advantage of providing the setting difference for the notification mode of the second specific notification is more suitably exhibited. Is possible.

Feature EA12. The first notification means executes the first specific notification in the game in which the specific lottery is performed as the specific mode, and the second specific notification in the game in which the specific lottery is performed as the first mode. Run and
The second notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and in the game after the game in which the specific lottery is performed as the second mode. The gaming machine according to the feature EA10 or the feature EA11, which is characterized by performing.

  According to the above configuration, when the first notification means performs the addition notification (specific notification), notification of the addition winning in the game in which the specific lottery is performed (first specification notification) and notification of the number of additional games (The second specific notification) is performed, which is a so-called prompt notification. On the other hand, when the additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the second notification means, a notification (first specific notification) of the addition winning in the game in which the specific lottery is performed is performed, and the additional game is performed in the subsequent games. The notification of the number (the second specific notification) is performed, which is a so-called post-loading notification. As described above, the configuration in which the immediate notification and the additional notification in the additional notification are made different depending on the setting value allows the game to be performed even if the setting value does not cause a difference in the additional winning ratio and the number of additional games at the time of winning. It becomes possible to involve the set value for the increase of the number.

Characteristic EA13. A unit for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state (advantage zone game number AG);
Means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number based on the number of executions reaching the predetermined upper limit number in the specific gaming state (main control device 101 Function of executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second process of section display by
Equipped with
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification unit and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification unit is a notification ratio, and the notification ratio when the first setting value is set, and the second setting value The gaming machine according to any one of the features EA10 to EA12, wherein a notification ratio difference which is a difference from the notification ratio in the case of being different from one another according to the number of times of execution.

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the upper limit number of times is set to the specific gaming state, the first set value regarding the notification ratio of the case where the specific notification is performed in the first mode and the case where the specific notification is performed in the second mode The notification ratio difference between the notification ratio in the case of and the notification ratio in the case of the second setting value differs depending on the number of times of execution of the specific gaming state, and the degree of difficulty in predicting / understanding the setting value changes. For example, if there is still room for the number of games up to the upper limit number of times, the player will think that he wants to add a large number of games, and if the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games is small It seems that even if the addition of a number occurs, the player does not feel so happy as a player but rather thinks that he has lost if the addition exceeding the upper limit occurs. In that respect, by making the configuration as described above, the degree of difficulty in predicting and grasping the setting value is made different in relation to the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of times, so that the joy when superimposing occurs is predicted and grasped. It becomes possible to compensate from the viewpoint of ease of operation.

Feature EA 14. The display device further comprises: a number display means capable of displaying the number display corresponding to the remaining number by the predetermined display means (a function for executing processing for performing display corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81);
Whether the specific notification is performed by the first notification unit or the second notification unit differs depending on the number of times displayed by the number display. Any one of the features EA10 to EA13 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, whether the specific notification as the additional notification is performed in the first mode or in the second mode differs depending on the number display corresponding to the remaining number of the specific gaming state. If the player wins as a specific lottery, for example, in a situation where the number display is small, the player may be relieved by the increase in the number display due to the addition, and conversely, in a situation where the number display is large, the player In some cases, it may be preferable to obtain a sense of superiority that the potential remaining number is greater than the number display, rather than the number display being rapidly increased. Therefore, as in the configuration described above, by making the mode of the superimposing notification different according to the number of times displayed from the number of times display, it is possible to create an effect that utilizes the difference in emotion due to the above-described superimposition. It becomes possible. Therefore, an effective effect that attracts a player can be realized.

Feature EA15. Grant determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a determination on whether to award a bonus to the player based on the occurrence of the determination trigger;
A bonus that enables the player to be granted a bonus corresponding to the result of the assignment based on the result of the decision on the application by the assignment judging means being the result of the assignment corresponding to awarding the player with the benefit. Giving means (function of executing the payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium based on the determination result by the application determination means are provided in a plurality of stages, one of the plurality of stages of setting values being Setting means to be set (function to execute setting process of winning probability by the main control device 101);
Specific determination means (specific determination means for executing a specific determination having a common winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means), which is a determination to be performed based on the determination result by the assignment determination means 1 specific combination processing to a function of executing a second specific combination processing),
Specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means with a predetermined specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) (performing processing for setting up additional effects by the display control device 81 Function),
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is
The first informing means (in which, when the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value), the specific informing can be executed in the first mode (in the case of the additional effect, the execution timing of the immediate effect) A function of executing processing for generating an additional notification effect in the additional winning game by the display control device 81),
If the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the specific notification may be a second mode different from the first mode (if it is an additional effect Second notification means (function of causing the main control device 101 to generate an additional notification effect in a game later than the additional winning game), and a second notification means that can be executed at the execution timing of the additional effect;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the setting value for causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium based on the determination result by the assignment determination means is set, the setting value affects the winning probability by the specific determination means Although it does not exist, it affects the execution mode of the specific notification as the result notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means, and the execution mode differs between the case of the first set value and the case of the second set value. By doing in this way, it is possible to associate the setting value with the specific determination without having to set a difference between the setting value and the specific determination to be executed based on the determination result by the addition determining means. Become.

  Here, a player who desires an increase in game media is considered to play a game by searching for a game console in which a better setting value is set, and suggestive effects such as suggesting a setting value to be set by setting means. By providing the game, it can be said that it is possible to make the game more interesting. On the other hand, if the occurrence probability is different depending on the setting value for the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect itself does not or does not occur depending on the setting value being set, and the suggestion effect prepared carefully is effective. A situation in which it is not used may also occur. For example, in order to provide an indication effect such as determining that the predetermined setting value appears when it appears, it is necessary to separately prepare an indication effect for the predetermined setting value. In that respect, in the above configuration, regarding the specific notification having a function as a suggestion effect, the winning probability itself of the specific determination to be the trigger is such that there is no difference due to the set value. Since the setting values can be common and only the execution mode of the specific notification is made different, it is not necessary to prepare separate specific notifications for each setting value. Therefore, the suggestion effect can be implemented more simply and effectively, and it becomes possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the “first aspect” or the “second aspect” may be expressed as “first timing” or “second timing”. As described above, if the above-described configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it is possible to exhibit the above-described excellent effect with a simpler configuration.

  Each configuration of the features DA1 to DA14 may be individually applied to the feature DA15, or may be applied in combination. In this case, it may be applied after appropriately matching the terms between the configurations, for example, by replacing the "given determination means" in the feature DA15 with the "lottery means".

<Feature EB group>
Feature EB1. Specific determination means capable of executing specific determination of whether or not to execute a specific event that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined determination condition (first specific combination processing by main controller 101 to third Function to execute specific role processing),
Event execution means for executing the specific event based on the result of determination by the specific determination means corresponding to the execution of the specific event (function to execute the game number addition process etc. by the main control device 101) When,
Specific notification execution means (additional effect by the display control device 81) which can execute the specific notification corresponding to the specific event being executed or the specific event being executed by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) Function to execute setting process),
Number of times grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event (function of executing processing for managing a watermelon later-loading counter or a watermelon immediate-loading counter by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is
A first notification execution unit capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an immediate placement effect in a zone in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution unit capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing that is later than the first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an add-on effect in a zone in the display control device 81);
Selection means for selecting a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means A function of executing a process of selecting an additional notification timing table according to the table counter ATK in the control device 81),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a specific event which is won in the specific determination and advantageous to the player occurs, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, when the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot by the jackpot notification and can be immersed in a sense of superiority.

  Here, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, the emotion of the player when the specific event occurs is subtle at each occurrence even though the degree of advantage of the specific event does not change at each occurrence. Changes are expected to occur. Specifically, while it is thought that in the first occurrence, the occurrence of the particular event will be greatly appreciated, after that, the number of times accustomed to the occurrence of "acquisition", the joy of the first occurrence is felt It is thought that it will be lost.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the subtle change of the player of each occurrence is realized by making the execution timing of the specific notification for the occurrence of the specific event different in each occurrence. It is possible to improve the level of attention to the game.

  Characteristics EB2. The game machine according to Feature EB2, wherein the selection means is easy to select so that the specific notification is performed by the first notification execution means as the number of times grasped by the number acquisition means is smaller.

  According to the above configuration, as the number of occurrences of the specific event advantageous to the player is smaller, the notification is performed earlier. It is considered that it is preferable for the notification to be made earlier as the player who is waiting for whether or not the advantageous specific event occurs, and after several occurrences of the advantageous event have already occurred, the advantageous. It is considered that it is possible to feel pleasure as much as expected if it is not expected that a specific event is notified at a time when it is not predicted. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a specific notification according to the player's emotion that can change at each generation time.

Feature EB3. The number of times grasping means is a first number of times of the specific event which is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notification is to be executed by the first notification execution means among the number of the specific events, or the second notification Specific number of times grasping means for grasping any one of the second specific event number of times, which is the number of specific events for which the specific notification is to be executed by the execution means (for example, immediate load for watermelon in display control device 81 Function to execute processing to manage counters,
The selection means performs a plurality of notification executions including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the first specific event frequency or the second specific event frequency grasped by the specific frequency grasping device. The gaming machine according to the feature EB1 or the feature EB2 characterized in that a notification execution means for executing the specific notification is selected from the means.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the next specific notification is selected based on the number of times the specific notification is performed at the first timing (or the second timing), not simply the number of executions of the specific event. In this case, for example, if a large number of executions are performed at the first timing, the second timing may be easily selected next, or the first timing may be easily selected next, or the like. It is possible to determine the execution timing of the new specific notification in consideration of the timing of the specific notification, and the subtle difference in the impression given to the player can be well adjusted by the execution timing of the specific notification.

  Characteristics EB4. The first identification grasped by the identification frequency grasping device based on the fact that the identification notification is executed by the notification execution device different from the identification notification by the notification execution device grasped by the identification frequency grasping device A game machine according to Feature EB3 comprising means (function to execute the process of step S10806 by the display control device 81) capable of initializing the number of events or the number of second specific events.

  According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific number of times grasping means is grasping the first specific event number, the first specific event number is incremented by one when the specific notification is executed by the first notification execution means. When the specific notification is executed by the second notification execution means, the first specific event count is initialized (reset). That is, the number of times grasped by the specific number of times grasping means is the continuous number of times that the specific notification is executed by the first notification execution means, or the continuous number of times that the specific notification is executed by the second notification execution means. Thereby, for example, if the specific notification at the first timing is continuous, the specific notification at the first timing is further facilitated to be performed, and the execution timing of the specific notification is determined according to the number of grasps. In addition, decisions can be made according to the number of consecutive runs up to that point.

Feature EB5. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The selection means can select a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means and the setting value set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB4.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification also changes according to the setting value that causes the change in the increase / decrease rate of the game medium or the increase / decrease mode. For example, a situation where a large amount of gaming media is obtained due to the setting value being a good setting value, a situation where the gaming medium can not be obtained because the setting value is a bad setting value, Then, comparing the case where an advantageous specific event occurs, it is considered that the player's pleasure for the occurrence is greater in the latter than in the former. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to realize a specific notification according to a subtle change in the player's emotion based on the advantageous specific event and the set value.

Feature EB6. The selection means is
When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the predetermined notification execution means is selected with the first probability, When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the first probability Selects the predetermined notification execution means with a different second probability,
When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is a second number of times greater than the first number of times, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the third probability When the predetermined notification execution means is selected, and the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the second number, and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the third one The predetermined notification execution means is selected at a fourth probability different from the probability.
The gaming machine according to Feature EB5, wherein a probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than a probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

  According to the above configuration, when the notification execution means is selected based on the number of specific events and the setting value, the influence of the setting value increases as the number increases, and the influence of the setting value decreases as the number decreases. By doing so, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the setting value is suggested by the execution timing of the specific notification, it becomes easier to narrow down the setting value as the number of executions of the specific event increases. In other words, it is possible to suppress that the setting value is narrowed down in a situation where the number of times of execution of the specific event is small, and not to delete the fun of the game in which the setting value is narrowed down gradually.

  More specifically, the “predetermined notification execution means” is the “first notification execution means” or the “second notification execution means”.

  Feature EB7. The game machine according to Feature EB6, wherein the first probability is equal to the second probability when the first number is one.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific event is executed, there is no difference in the execution timing of the specific notification due to the set value. By doing this, it is possible to avoid an event that the determination of the setting value occurs from the first time, and it is possible to preferably realize the game property for predicting the setting value.

Characteristic EB8. A notification in which information of notification execution means for executing the specific notification is stored from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means The execution means information group (superimposed notification timing table) is set respectively,
The selection means selects the notification execution means for executing the specific notification by switching the information execution means information group to be used according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means. Features EB1 to EB7 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the notification execution means selected by the selection means can be made different only by switching the notification execution means information group (table) according to the number of times of execution of the specific event. Therefore, the effects of the feature EB1 can be exhibited with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature EB9. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (advantage section) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features EB1 to EB8, wherein the specific event is an event capable of increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the specific event is originally executed during the specific gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous, and when the specific event occurs, the remaining number of specific gaming states increases. That is, the specific event is the addition of the specific gaming state. For example, the number of occurrences of addition is small and the number of remaining occurrences is small, by configuring the execution timing of the specific notification (additional notification) when such addition occurs, according to the number of occurrences of addition. In the case where the number of occurrences of addition is large and the number of remaining times is large, it is possible to make an addition notification using a subtle difference in the player's emotion when the addition occurs.

<Characteristics EC group>
Characteristics EC1. Specific determination means capable of performing specific determination as to whether or not a specific event advantageous to the player is to be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (the first specific combination process by the main control device 101 to 3) a function to execute a specific role process),
Event execution means for executing the specific event based on the result of determination by the specific determination means corresponding to the execution of the specific event (function to execute the game number addition process etc. by the main control device 101) When,
Specific notification execution means (additional effect by the display control device 81) which can execute the specific notification corresponding to the specific event being executed or the specific event being executed by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) Function to execute setting process),
Specific storage means capable of storing information on the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means (function of executing processing for managing a watermelon post-loading counter and a watermelon immediate-loading counter by the display control device 81) ,
Specific output means (for watermelon by display control device 81 capable of outputting specific information corresponding to information stored in the specific storage means at a timing after the timing at which the specific notification is performed by the specific notification execution means A function to execute processing for displaying the immediate loading / post loading ratio and the cherry immediate loading / post loading ratio),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a specific event which is won in the specific determination and advantageous to the player occurs, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, when the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot by the jackpot notification and can be immersed in a sense of superiority. Although the specific notification may be performed at various timings, in the above configuration, the timing at which the specific notification is executed is stored, and the output of the specific information regarding the timing is performed afterward. Here, for example, when collecting game data after the fact, a specific event such as a jackpot may be displayed on a data display of a game hall or the like, and an event advantageous to such a player is stored in memory. It is thought that it is easy to remain and to be easily recalled later. On the other hand, with regard to the execution timing of the specific notification that the specific event advantageous to the player occurs, the desire of the player will be satisfied when such a specific notification is performed, and the game is performed by the occurrence of the specific event. Because the person's exhilaration will further increase, it is thought that with regard to the specific notification performed before that, it tends to fade from the memory as the exhilaration increases. That is, regarding the specific notification, it is considered that it is difficult for the player to remember the execution timing particularly. Therefore, as in the configuration described above, it is possible to help the player to collect data by storing such information that is difficult to remain in the memory on the gaming machine side and enabling subsequent reading (outputting). It becomes possible.

Characteristics EC2. As the specific event, a plurality of specific events (additional differences in the number of games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are set,
The game according to the feature EC1 characterized in that the specific storage means can be stored as separate pieces of information when the timing at which the specific notification is executed is different even if the specific event has the same advantage as the specific event. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, even if the specific events have the same degree of advantage, if the execution timing of the specific notification is different, it is possible to separately count. That is, even if it is the same big hit, if the notification timing of the big hit differs, it can be totaled as separate information, respectively. For example, in the conventional tabulation method, although the jackpots are counted separately for the jackpot and the jackpot, it is general that the same jackpot is counted as the same information even if the notification timing is different. According to the above configuration, it is possible to further clarify the difference from the conventional technique and to more preferably realize the aggregation of the notification timings indicated in the feature EC1.

Characteristics EC3. The specific notification execution means is
A first specific notification execution unit capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an immediate effect by the display control device 81);
Second specific notification executing means (function of executing processing for performing post-addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
Equipped with
The specific output unit can output, as the specific information, ratio information between the specific notification performed by the first specific notification execution unit and the specific notification performed by the second specific notification execution unit. The game machine according to feature EC1 or feature EC2 characterized by the above.

  According to the above configuration, ratio information of the ratio executed at the first timing and the ratio executed at the second timing is output as the information related to the execution timing of the specific notification. In this way, not only can the tabulation be facilitated, but it is not preferable for the player, for example, to output only the ratio without outputting the number when the number of executions of the specific event is small. It is also possible to avoid that information is expressed accurately.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The specific notification execution means
A first specific notification execution unit capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an immediate effect by the display control device 81);
Second specific notification executing means (function of executing processing for performing post-addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
Equipped with
The specific output unit can output, as the specific information, ratio information between the specific notification performed by the first specific notification execution unit and the specific notification performed by the second specific notification execution unit. The configuration does not output the number information of the specific notification performed by the first specific notification execution unit and the specific notification performed by the second specific notification execution unit.

  Characteristics EC4. A restriction capable of restricting the output of the specific information by the output means in a specific situation (advantage interval) in which the specific event is being executed or a game is being played based on the specific event A game machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC3 comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S11206 by the display control device 81).

  According to the above configuration, the output of the specific information is limited in the specific event or in the specific situation in which the game based on the specific event is played. For example, during the jackpot, information on the execution timing of the jackpot notification is not output. By doing this, it is possible to prevent occurrence of events such as not being able to fully enjoy particular events etc. when trying to collect data in a particular situation. Further, by assuming such a configuration, the output of the specific information can be at a later timing, so the significance of storing such specific information can be enhanced.

Characteristics EC5. The specific notification execution means executes the specific notification after determining an execution timing of the specific notification using a predetermined information group (an additional notification timing table including information on setting values),
The game machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC4, wherein the information set in the predetermined information group can be information useful to a player.

  According to the above configuration, although the execution timing of the specific notification is determined using the information set in the predetermined information group, the execution timing is set to the predetermined information group by totaling the execution timings. It becomes possible to predict and grasp information. Since the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player, it can be said that tallying of the execution timing is also an action for collecting information that can be useful for the player. Therefore, the significance of the output of the specific information is further enhanced, and the output of the specific information can bring about the merit of the player.

Characteristics EC6. In the specific storage unit, the specific area for storing information on the timing at which the specific notification is executed is configured to be able to store information on the timing at which a plurality of the specific notifications are executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features EC1 to EC5, wherein the specific output unit can output cumulative information of the plurality of stored information as the specific information.

  According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of pieces of information related to the execution timing of the specific notification, such as when the specific notification is performed a plurality of times, the accumulated information is output as the specific information. Therefore, the player can more easily perform data analysis based on the specific information.

Characteristics EC7. As the determination condition, a first determination condition (cherry) and a second determination condition (watermelon) are set,
The specific information storage means separates information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the first determination condition and information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The game machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC6, which is capable of being stored in the memory.

  According to the above configuration, since information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification is stored for each type of determination condition, it is possible to perform more useful data analysis, for example, when information obtained for each type is different. Become.

Characteristics EC8. Has an operation unit (effect switch 66) that can be operated by the player,
It is characterized by comprising means capable of erasing the information stored in the specific storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (function of executing the processing of step S11203 and step S11204 by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC7.

  According to the above configuration, the player can freely select whether to delete the information stored in the specific storage unit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the successor from taking over the game data played by oneself, and it is possible to secure the superiority of collecting the specific information.

Feature EC9. The specific output unit is configured to output the specific information based on an operation of the operation unit.
The game machine according to Feature EC8, wherein the specific storage unit can store information related to the timing at which the specific notification is performed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation of the operation unit.

  According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the information on the execution timing of the specific notification is erased and output by the operation of the operation unit, and the storage of the information on the execution timing of the specific notification depends on the presence or absence of the operation on the operation unit. Thus, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to output the specific information due to a forgotten operation or the like, while entrusting collection of the specific information to the operation by the player and securing its superiority.

Characteristics EC10. As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set.
First end means (a function of executing a process of normally ending an advantageous section in the main control device 101) that ends the specific gaming state according to the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state;
Second end means (a function of executing processing for forcibly ending an advantageous section in the main control device 101), which ends the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining number of the specific gaming state;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC9, wherein the specific output means can output the specific information based on the specific gaming state being ended by the second end means. .

  The specific gaming state advantageous to the player may be ended depending on the remaining number of times that can be executed or may be ended regardless of the remaining number of times. The former is a normal end mode, and the latter corresponds to forced termination, for example, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number. In such a configuration, if the player is forced to end by the second end means, the player who still wants to enjoy the specific gaming state may receive an impression as to whether the obtained profit is exploited. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by outputting the specific information instead, it is possible to follow the forced termination of the specific gaming state.

<Feature ED group>
Feature ED1. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
First grasping means (the number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
Second grasping means for grasping the number of remaining times in the high advantageous state (the number of remaining advantageous game games ZG);
First end means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantage state (generally in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching the predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state Second end means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (function of executing processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the plurality of setting values is set A function of executing a process of setting a winning probability by 101)
A gaming machine comprising
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing setting processing of an additional effect by the display control device 81),
Equipped with
When the increase notification execution means performs the increase notification, a specific notification execution means (display control device capable of executing a specific notification suggesting information of the setting value set by the setting means according to the number of times of execution) A game machine characterized by having a function of executing an add-on effect in a zone by 81 and an in-place effect in a zone.

  According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the player's degree of advantage is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the number of remaining high advantage states. Since the case where the upper limit number of times is reached may be terminated, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely enhanced. In such a configuration, there is a so-called additional function of increasing the number of remaining times in the high advantage state when the specific condition is satisfied, and the expectation for the specific condition to be satisfied is enhanced.

  On the other hand, even if the specific condition is satisfied and the number of remaining times is increased, for example, if the number of executions reaches the upper limit number of times, such as a situation where the number of executions is close to the upper limit number, There is also a situation where can not be expected, and in the high advantage state where the upper limit number of times is set, the sense of expectation for the increase in the remaining number largely differs depending on the situation.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, when the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing is performed, the suggestion of the setting value can be performed according to the number of executions, so that the increase in the number of remaining times can not be expected temporarily. Even in situations where it is not possible to fully enjoy the benefits of condition satisfaction, it is possible to follow the benefits by suggesting set values. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the high advantageous state, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

  Feature ED2. The specific notification execution means makes it easier to grasp information of the set value set by the setting means in the specific notification, as the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means approaches the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to the feature ED1, which is characterized in that it can be suggested.

  According to the above configuration, the number of times of execution increases and approaches the upper limit number, and even if the increase process is performed, the setting value can be easily grasped by the specific notification as the merit can not be sufficiently enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the merit that can not be enjoyed by the increase processing by suggesting the set value.

Feature ED3. The specific notification execution means is
If the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the first number, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the execution mode of the specific notification with the first probability The setting value information is suggested in a specific mode, and the number of executions grasped by the first grasping unit is the first number, and the setting value set by the setting unit is the first value. If the second set value is different from the one set value, the information of the set value is suggested such that the execution mode of the specific notification is the specific mode with the second probability different from the first probability,
If the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is a second number of times greater than the first number, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, then a third probability Suggest the information of the set value so that the execution mode of the specific notification is the specific mode, and the number of times of execution grasped by the first grasping means is the second number, and the setting means When the set value to be set is the second set value, the information on the set value is suggested such that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode at a fourth probability different from the third probability. And
The gaming machine according to Feature ED2 is set such that the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

  According to the above configuration, the number of times of execution increases and approaches the upper limit number, and even if the increase process is performed, the execution mode of the specific notification becomes a specific mode and the setting value is suggested as the merit can not be sufficiently enjoyed. The difference between the set values in the probability of being performed increases. Thereby, the effects of the feature ED2 can be exhibited by a specific configuration.

  Feature ED4. The game according to any one of the features ED1 to ED3 characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of suggesting information of the set value at the execution timing of the increase notification as the specific notification. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, if the indication of the setting value using the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification is suggested, it is not necessary to prepare effects in different modes for setting values set in a plurality of stages. As a result, the specific notification can be realized with a simple configuration without causing complication of the effect configuration.

  Feature ED5. When the setting value set by the setting means is a first setting value, the specific notification execution means executes the increase notification at a first timing, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first value. When the second setting value is different from the one setting value, the specific notification can be executed by executing the increase notification at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine according to the feature ED4.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature ED 4 can be achieved by the more specific configuration.

  Feature ED6. The gaming machine according to Feature ED5, wherein the second timing is a game after the first timing.

  According to the above configuration, the first timing and the second timing are different games. In this case, the remaining number of times when the specific notification is performed at the first timing is different from the remaining number of times when the specific notification is performed at the second timing. For example, in the case where the specific notification is notified in a situation where the remaining number is low and in the case where the notification is issued in the case where the remaining number is high, it is considered that the former is more pleased with the increase in the remaining number. That is, the impression given to the player is greatly different when the increase process of the remaining number is performed by the increase notification. By using the difference in the impression received by the player to suggest the setting value, for example, by suggesting the low setting at such a timing that the player feels happy to be notified of the increase. It is possible to make up for the sadness of the low setting, and conversely, to compensate for the joy of the increase notification by suggesting the high setting at such a timing that the increase notification feels less pleasing. it can.

Feature ED7. The specific notification execution means is
If the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the increase notification is executed in the first game, and the setting value set by the setting means is the player than the first setting value. If the second set value is advantageous to the second game, the increase notification is executed in a second game which is a later game than the first game,
With the same setting value set by the setting means,
If the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a first number of executions, the specific selection rate at which the second game is selected rather than the first game is the first selection rate.
If the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a second number of executions greater than the number of first executions, the specific selectivity is set to a second selectivity higher than the first selectivity. The gaming machine according to any one of ED4 to ED6, which is capable of executing a specific notification.

  According to the above configuration, the increase notification is more likely to be executed in the later game as the high setting is made, and when compared with the same setting value, the number of execution times is smaller than the early stage where the number of execution times of the specific gaming state is small. In the early stage where the number of times of execution of the specific gaming state is small, the increase notification is executed in the first game and the setting is low, as the increase notification is easily executed in the later game as the end game of increasing Though it is easy to make a suggestion, it is possible to ease the sadness of the low setting by the joy of being notified of the increase. Also, conversely, since it is easy to make a suggestion that the high setting is set in the late stage of the specific gaming state, even in a situation where you feel that the increase notification is not so pleasant, follow by the suggestion that the high setting is. It becomes possible.

Characteristic ED8. The increase notification is
A first means for executing the increase notification in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied (a function for executing processing for performing an immediate effect in the display control device 81);
Second means for executing the increase notification in a game after the game in which the specific condition is established (a function for executing a process for performing post-addition effect in the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features ED4 to ED7, wherein the increase means executes the increase process in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the above configuration, since the increase processing itself is executed in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the difference in the effect is obtained even if the increase notification is performed in the subsequent game as in the second means. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for performing the specific notification by the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification while managing the number of executions and the upper limit number of times.

Feature ED9. It has a number notification means (function to execute processing for managing the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) that can execute notification of the number of times corresponding to the remaining number by a predetermined notification means,
When the increase notification is executed in a game after the game in which the specific condition is established by the second means, the number-of-times informing unit is a result of an increase process performed in the game in which the specific condition is established. Carrying out the notification of the number of times without reflecting the information, and reflecting the result of the increase process for the notification of the increase in the notification of the number of times based on the fact that the increase notification has been performed by the second means The game machine described in ED8.

  According to the above configuration, when the increase informing is performed after the fact that the remaining number is grasped to some extent by the number informing means, the result of the increase process is not reflected in the number informing until the increase informing occurs. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of simplifying the processing configuration like the feature ED 8 while achieving the effect of performing the increase notification in the subsequent game.

  Feature ED10. The game machine according to Feature ED9, wherein the specific notification execution means can perform the specific notification in accordance with information on the number notification notified by the number notification means.

  According to the above configuration, the indication of the set value (specific notification) is performed by performing the increase notification in consideration of the information on the notification of the number of times on the display. In this way, for example, although there are many remaining times remaining, it is treated as a case where you may feel that the increase notification is pleasing even when a small number is displayed in the display number notification etc. It becomes possible. Therefore, the scene to which especially a structure like characteristic ED6 is applied increases, and it becomes possible to exhibit the rendering effect of characteristic ED1 more suitably.

<Feature FA group>
Feature FA1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (advantage zone remaining game number ZG);
Normal transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal termination condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing setting processing of an additional effect by the display control device 81),
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution unit capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on an immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution unit capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode (a function of executing a process for performing addition effects in the display control device 81 based on an add-on selection flag); ,
Equipped with
The first notification execution means is based on the stop operation means being operated in a first specific stop operation mode and the corresponding circulating body being stopped in the specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means. And performing the increase notification when the increase process is performed in the first mode,
In the specific game, the second notification execution means operates the stop operation means in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, and the corresponding circulating member stops. A gaming machine characterized by executing, in the second mode, the increase notification when the increase process is performed.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, the aspect relating to such stop operation mode There is provided a specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, when the specific condition is established in the specific gaming state, the remaining number of the specific gaming state may be increased, and it may also be possible to obtain a large amount of gaming media by continuing the specific gaming state for a long time. The playability of each game has been significantly improved.

  On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, it is easy for the player to be a unilateral game from the gaming machine, such as the player performs a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and makes the corresponding result a prize. In view of the inherent gaming characteristics of the slot machine, such as aiming at the symbol of the orbiter and stopping it to obtain benefits, the above-mentioned gaming machine-led game is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the player is notified of the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing based on the specific condition establishment is performed by the player of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game where the mode notification is not performed It was configured to be selected. By doing this, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to cause the player to intervene in the game, and it is possible to promote the participation of the player in the game characteristics that can be led by the gaming machine.

  It should be noted that the "specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means" is configured as "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means" When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the second The special result prize may be established by the operation in the stop operation mode of "", and the game "a lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" may be a "specific game".

  Note that the “first aspect” or the “second aspect” may be expressed as “first timing” or “second timing”. As described above, if the above-described configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it is possible to exhibit the above-described excellent effect with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA2. As a lottery result by the lottery means, there is provided a re-game result which enables the next game to be played again without requiring a new game medium.
When the specific gaming state is entered, the gaming machine according to the feature FA1 may shift to a replaying state in which the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be a predetermined replaying result is higher than the normal gaming state. .

  According to the above configuration, when transitioning to the specific gaming state in which the mode notification is performed, it may transition to a so-called RT state in which the probability of becoming a predetermined re-game result is high. It is general that the winning a game is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, but in the above-mentioned RT state, the mode notification is performed and the reward is obtained in the stop operation mode according to it. In addition to the game in which the first result or the second result is won, it is conceivable that a game in which a predetermined re-game result is won with a high probability of winning occurs frequently. As described above, it is general that the re-game result is that winning is achieved regardless of the stop operation mode, and in these games, the stop operation according to the instruction from the gaming machine side is performed The game is a game in which the stop operation mode is not involved in the presence or absence of a prize, and the player may have less room to intervene in the game. In that respect, as described in the feature FA1, since the execution mode of the increase notification is determined based on the stop operation mode of the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed, for example, the re-game result winning game It is also possible to make it a specific game. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the above configuration limits that “when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay game result winning, the specific replay game result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode by each stop operation means”. By doing this, it is possible to achieve the above effects more clearly.

Feature FA3. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, the specified result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the The gaming machine according to the feature FA1 or FA2 characterized in that the specific result winning can be established by being operated in the second stop operation mode.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific result winning game that is the trigger for execution of the increase process, the specific result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. That is, a game not subject to execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means triggers the increase process, and the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is determined by the stop operation mode of the game. In the specific gaming state, assuming that the player is playing a game while wishing that the increase processing is performed, the interest in the game in which such mode notification is not performed is another game (a mode notification is Compared to the game being played). Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting the execution mode of the increase notification in the originally high interest game, it is possible to fully enjoy the game feature of selecting the increase notification by itself.

  Feature FA4. The game according to Feature FA3, wherein a game whose lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result is the specified game.

  According to the above configuration, the specific result winning game is the specific game. That is, the game in which the increase process is performed and the game in which the increase notification execution mode is selected when the increase process is performed are the same game. The pleasure of the player when the increase notification is performed is considered to be different depending not only on the execution mode but also on the progress status of the game (the status of the specific gaming state). It is possible to make the selection of the mode of execution in a situation closer to the ever-changing progress situation. That is, for example, although it is conceivable to select the execution mode of the special notification at the start of the game or at the start of the specific game state, such a configuration differs from the execution mode originally desired with the progress of the game. There is also a possibility that the increase notification may be performed in the execution mode. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to realize an increase notification according to the player's preference.

Feature FA5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning combination is established by stopping a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position,
In the specific circulating member of each of the rotating members, the specific symbols constituting the specific symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operation means is operated in the first stop mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in a second stop mode different from the first stop mode, it is characterized by being attached to the specific circulating member so that the effective position can not be stopped. The gaming machine described in FA4.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific result is a so-called dropout result, the stop operation for performing such selection in the game characteristic for selecting the execution mode of the increase notification in the stop operation mode in the specific result winning game The configuration is performed while preventing the omission of the specific result, and the degree of difficulty of the operation becomes high, and the game property is improved.

Feature FA6. The second aspect is timing after the first aspect,
The first specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the first stop operation means of each of the stop operation means is stop operation at a specific position,
The second specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the second stop operation means different from the first stop operation means of the respective stop operation means is stop operated at the specific position,
The game machine according to Feature FA5, wherein the stop operation means corresponding to the specific circulating member is the first stop operation means.

  According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification is selected depending on the stop operation means which performs the stop operation at the specific number, and in the specific result winning game, the stop operation for the circulating body with a miss When the means is stopped for the specific time, the first mode is selected. By doing this, even if a failure occurs, the increase notification is performed relatively early, and it may have been missed, or may it not have been won in the specific result in the first place, etc. It can be configured to solve questions and anxieties due to possibility more quickly.

  Feature FA7. The gaming machine according to Feature FA3, wherein a game before the game whose lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result is the specified game.

  According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is selected according to the stop operation mode of the game prior to the specific result winning game that is the trigger of the increase process. By doing this, it is possible to perform the operation to select and the operation to establish the specific result winning in different games, and it is possible to concentrate on each operation.

Feature FA8. Means capable of executing transition notification (attack mode start effect) of transitioning to the specific gaming state based on the transition to the specific gaming state by a predetermined notification means (attack mode start effect by the display control device 81 Have the ability to perform
The game machine according to any one of the features FA1 to FA7, wherein a game after the game for which the transition notification is performed is the specific game.

  According to the above configuration, it is clarified that one game in the game in the specific gaming state is the specific game, and the difference from the game characteristics to be selected before or at the start of the specific gaming state becomes clearer. That is, in the game after the specific gaming state has been started, it is possible to more clearly exhibit the effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game in which the mode notification is not performed.

  Feature FA9. The gaming machine according to any one of the features FA1 to FA8, wherein the second aspect is included in a game different from the game in which the first aspect is included.

  According to the above configuration, the game in which the increase notification is performed can be different from the game depending on the stop operation mode in the specific game. With such a configuration, it is possible to influence the effect of the player's selection on effects across a plurality of games, and it is possible to enhance the importance and significance of the selection.

  Feature FA10. In the case where the stop operation means is operated in the second specific stop operation mode in the specific game, the increase is made when a game before the target game including the second aspect is further made the specific game. A game machine according to Feature FA9, wherein the notification execution means executes the increase notification in a mode according to a stop operation mode of the stop operation means in the specific game on the rear side.

  In the configuration in which the increase notification is performed in the later game across the game as in the feature FA9, there may be a scene in which the specific game is further performed in a situation where the later game is selected. In that respect, in the above configuration, priority is given to the selection on the rear side, so it is possible to execute the increase notification in a mode in which the situation at the time of selection is further taken into consideration.

Feature FA11. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (advantage zone remaining game number ZG);
Normal transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal termination condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing setting processing of an additional effect by the display control device 81),
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution unit capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on an immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution unit capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode (a function of executing a process for performing addition effects in the display control device 81 based on an add-on selection flag); ,
Equipped with
In the specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed, the first notification execution means performs the increase process based on the stop operation means being operated in the first specific stop operation mode. Executing the increase notification in the first mode in the case of
The second notification execution means is, based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific game, the increase process is performed A game machine characterized by executing the increase notification in the second mode when it is performed.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, the aspect relating to such stop operation mode There is provided a specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, when the specific condition is established in the specific gaming state, the remaining number of the specific gaming state may be increased, and it may also be possible to obtain a large amount of gaming media by continuing the specific gaming state for a long time. The playability of each game has been significantly improved.

  On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, it is easy for the player to be a unilateral game from the gaming machine, such as the player performs a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and makes the corresponding result a prize. In view of the inherent gaming characteristics of the slot machine, such as aiming at the symbol of the orbiter and stopping it to obtain benefits, the above-mentioned gaming machine-led game is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the player is notified of the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing based on the specific condition establishment is performed by the player of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game where the mode notification is not performed It was configured to be selected. By doing this, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to cause the player to intervene in the game, and it is possible to promote the participation of the player in the game characteristics that can be led by the gaming machine.

  It should be noted that the "specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means" is configured as "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means" When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the second The special result prize may be established by the operation in the stop operation mode of "", and the game "a lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" may be a "specific game".

  Also, the "first aspect" or the "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" or "second timing". As described above, if the above-described configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it is possible to exhibit the above-described excellent effect with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA12. A plurality of orbiting bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting members;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting members when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating members when the start operating device is operated and stopping the circulation of each of the circulating members when the stop operation device is operated Function to execute processing),
Lottery means (function of executing lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing lottery of whether or not to award the player a privilege based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result of winning being established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode And a second result of winning being established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (pushing order notification) related to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed on a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68) Provision of mode notification means (function to execute pressing order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state
Transition lottery means (a first specific winning combination process by the main control device 101 to execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined identification result in the normal gaming state And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means corresponds to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means to shift to the specific gaming state (perform winning processing corresponding processing by the main control device 101 is executed Function),
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (advantage zone remaining game number ZG);
Normal transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal termination condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing setting processing of an additional effect by the display control device 81),
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution unit capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on an immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution unit capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode (a function of executing a process for performing addition effects in the display control device 81 based on an add-on selection flag); ,
Equipped with
The first notification execution means is operated in the first specific stop operation mode in a specific situation in which each of the orbiting members is in circulation in a game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means. Executing the increase notification in the first mode when the increase process is performed,
The second notification execution means is configured to execute the increase process based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific situation. A game machine characterized by executing the increase notification in the second mode when it is performed.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In so-called slot machines where benefits are awarded by the bonus awarding means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, the aspect relating to such stop operation mode There is provided a specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, when the specific condition is established in the specific gaming state, the remaining number of the specific gaming state may be increased, and it may also be possible to obtain a large amount of gaming media by continuing the specific gaming state for a long time. The playability of each game has been significantly improved.

  On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, it is easy for the player to be a unilateral game from the gaming machine, such as the player performs a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and makes the corresponding result a prize. In view of the inherent gaming characteristics of the slot machine, such as aiming at the symbol of the orbiter and stopping it to obtain benefits, the above-mentioned gaming machine-led game is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the player is notified of the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing based on the specific condition establishment is performed by the player of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game where the mode notification is not performed It was configured to be selected. By doing this, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to cause the player to intervene in the game, and it is possible to promote the participation of the player in the game characteristics that can be led by the gaming machine.

  It should be noted that “a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed” is configured as “a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means”, “the lottery When the lottery result by the means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the second The special result prize can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode, and the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is not executed. It may be a game.

  Also, the "first aspect" or the "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" or "second timing". As described above, if the above-described configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it is possible to exhibit the above-described excellent effect with a simpler configuration.

<Feature FB group>
Feature FB1. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
Grasping means for grasping the number of remaining times in the high advantageous state (the number of remaining advantageous game games ZG);
Transition means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the high advantage state (normal end condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on the fact that
An increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (function to execute the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (an auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing setting processing of an additional effect by the display control device 81),
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means is
First notification execution means capable of executing the above-mentioned increase notification triggered by a predetermined specific condition based on the first selection operation performed by the player at a first timing (immediately on the display control device 81 A function of executing a process for performing addition effect based on a selection flag),
Second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition based on the second selection operation performed by the player at a second timing after the first timing (A function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on an afterload selection flag in the display control device 81),
After the second selection operation is performed, the predetermined specific condition is determined based on the fact that the third selection operation is performed by the player in the specific situation until the second timing is reached. Third notification execution means (a function for executing a correction process in the display control device 81) for causing the increase notification to be triggered as a trigger to be executed at a third timing different from the second timing;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which there is a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, the so-called addition of increasing the number of remaining high advantage states when specific conditions are satisfied. Since it has a function and an increase notification as an additional notification is performed when the remaining number of times is increased, expectation for the specific condition to be satisfied is enhanced.

  Moreover, in this gaming machine, the player can select which of the first timing and the second timing after that as the execution timing of the increase notification, so it is possible to play the game regarding the increase notification. It is possible for the player to customize the game machine according to the needs of the player. In addition, further, in a situation where the increase notification at the second timing is selected, the increase notification is generated at a third timing different from the second timing by the player's selection in the specific situation before the second timing. It also has functions that can be changed to In this way, although the second timing is selected once, when the mind change occurs due to the subsequent game situation, etc., the execution timing of the increase notification can be changed afterward, according to various needs. A gaming machine is realized.

Feature FB2. A storage unit capable of storing the result of the increase processing triggered by the predetermined specific condition executed at the second timing by the second notification execution unit in a storage area defined in advance (display control unit 81 Individual areas),
The third notification execution means is
A unit for acquiring the result of the increase processing triggered by the predetermined specific condition stored in the storage unit (a function for executing the processing of step S12806 by the display control device 81);
A unit that executes the increase notification corresponding to the acquired result of the increase process at the third timing (a function of executing the process of step S12807 by the display control device 81);
A unit that erases the acquired result of the increase processing from the storage unit (a function of executing the processing of step S12809 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature FB1, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the content of the increase notification that should be executed at the second timing can be changed to be executed at the third timing while preventing duplication and omission. By doing this, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature FB1 while avoiding the disadvantage that the player suffers from a disadvantage or causes a disagreement in presentation.

Feature FB3. The storage means can individually store the results of the plurality of increase processes,
The third notification execution means can separately execute the increase notification on the individually stored result of the increase process at the third timing based on the third selection operation by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features FB1 and FB2.

  According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the increase notification that should have been executed at the second timing, it is possible to individually change each information to be executed at the third timing. By doing this, it is possible to realize an effect more in accordance with the player's needs.

Feature FB4. The storage means is the increase processing performed based on a first specific trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing, and the first specification The increase processing is performed based on a second specific trigger different from the trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing is separately stored. Is possible,
The increase process is performed based on the first specific opportunity based on the third selection operation by the player, and corresponds to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing. Information that can be executed at the third timing, and the increase processing has been performed based on the second specific trigger, and the increase processing selected to be performed at the second timing The game machine according to Feature FB3, wherein information corresponding to the result of is executable at the second timing.

  The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature FB3.

  Note that “the second specific trigger” is different from “the first specific trigger is different” in that the “specific condition” is not only different in the type of trigger but also the type of trigger is the same. It also includes that the timing (game) at which the “specific condition” is established is different.

Feature FB5. The storage means is the increase processing performed based on a first specific trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing, and the first specification The increase processing is performed based on a second specific trigger that occurs prior to the trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected when executed at the second timing, respectively Can be stored separately,
The increase process is performed based on the first specific opportunity based on the third selection operation by the player, and corresponds to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing. Information that can be executed at the third timing, and the increase processing has been performed based on the second specific trigger, and the increase processing selected to be performed at the second timing The gaming machine according to feature FB3 or feature FB4, wherein information corresponding to the result of can be executed at the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, while the increase notification for the second specific trigger that occurred earlier is kept at the second timing, the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurs later is the third timing that precedes the second timing. Can be implemented. That is, it is possible to perform the increase notification in an order different from the order in which the increase process was performed, using a configuration that can individually store the result of the increase process.

Feature FB6. Display control means (display control device 81) having a predetermined display screen (auxiliary display unit 65);
A unit capable of displaying corresponding information corresponding to the information on the result of the increase processing individually stored in the storage unit in the specific situation on the predetermined display screen (step S12804 by the display control device 81 Function to execute the processing of
A unit (selectable function of the step S12805 and the step S12806 by the display control device 81) which enables selection of one information of the displayed correspondence information based on a third selection operation by the player;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features FB2 to FB5, wherein the third notification execution unit is configured to execute the increase notification of the selected correspondence information at the third timing.

  According to the above configuration, the player can execute the increase notification at the third timing by selecting one piece of correspondence information from among the pieces of correspondence information displayed on the predetermined display screen. As described above, by making selection while displaying on the display screen, it is possible to easily perform selection operation even to a player who is intuitively easy to understand and who is not used to playing a game. Thus, the gaming machine can be made user friendly.

  Feature FB7. The game machine according to any one of the features FB1 to FB6, wherein the game in which the first timing exists and the game in which the second timing exist are different games.

  As in the above configuration, if the configuration of the feature FB1 is applied to a gaming machine on the premise that the increase notification is performed in a different game by the first selection operation and the second selection operation, the first timing The second timing is more distant in time, the second timing is selected, and a specific situation before it is more likely to occur, and in such a specific situation, the third selection operation is performed It becomes possible to secure a grace period.

Characteristic FB8. The first timing exists in a first game in which the specific condition is established,
The second timing is present in a second game after the first game,
The third timing is present in a third game prior to the second game,
The game machine according to Feature FB7, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification in the third game when the third selection operation is performed.

  According to the above configuration, when the first selection operation is performed, an increase notification occurs in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and when the second selection operation is performed, in the game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. An increase notification occurs. Assuming such a configuration, when the third selection operation is performed, an increase notification occurs in the game in which the selection operation is performed. In this way, since the increase notification is immediately executed when the third selection operation is performed, it is possible not only to make it easy for the player to understand, but also to execute the third selection operation. In this case, there is no need to newly store the information again, so the configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, it is also possible to individually apply the technical idea shown in each configuration of other feature AA group to feature FB group to each configuration of feature AA group to feature FB group detailed above. It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature described above can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A variable display means is provided to display symbols in the final stop mode after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, and the variation of symbols starts due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop or by the lapse of a predetermined time, the special stop game advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a status (a bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine: A variable display means is provided for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbol row at the final stop, and the variation of symbols is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means for the game or by the elapse of a predetermined time, the special gaming state (bonus advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device for generating a game, etc., and further providing a ball saucer to take in game balls from the ball saucer, and a payout device for paying out gaming balls to the ball saucer; A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is inserted.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Slot machine as a gaming machine 32 Reel as a circulating body 41 Start lever as a start operation means 42 to 44 Stop switch as a stop operation means 64 Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Segment for eighth display as section indicator 81 ... Display control device as sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as main control board 102: CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (5)

Specific determination means capable of performing specific determination of whether or not to execute a specific event that is advantageous for the player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
An event execution unit that executes the specific event based on the determination result by the specific determination unit being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event;
A specific notification execution unit capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event or the execution of the specific event by the specific notification unit;
A number grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is
First notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
Second notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing later than the first timing;
Selection means for selecting notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number acquisition means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the selection means is more easily selected so that the specific notification is performed by the first notification execution means as the number of times grasped by the number grasping means is smaller. The number of times grasping means is a first number of times of the specific event which is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notification is to be executed by the first notification execution means among the number of the specific events The specific number of times grasping means for grasping any one of the second specific event number of times, which is the number of the specific events for which the specific notification has been executed by the execution means, is provided.
The selection means performs a plurality of notification executions including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the first specific event frequency or the second specific event frequency grasped by the specific frequency grasping device. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a notification execution means for executing the specific notification is selected from the means. A plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided in a plurality of steps, and setting means is provided to set one of the plurality of setting values.
The selection means can select a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means and the setting value set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The selection means is
When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the predetermined notification execution means is selected with the first probability, When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the first probability Selects the predetermined notification execution means with a different second probability,
When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is a second number of times greater than the first number of times, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the third probability When the predetermined notification execution means is selected, and the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the second number, and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the third one The predetermined notification execution means is selected at a fourth probability different from the probability.
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability. .

Images